7SD52 V41R2 76 KM

Preface Table of Contents Introduction Hardware and Connections
i v
SIPROTEC Differential Protection 7SD52

V4.1 Manual
Getting Started SIPROTEC4 Devices Configuration Functions Control During Operation Installation and Commissioning Maintenance and Fault Tracing Technical Data Appendix Index
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A
C53000G1176C1322
Liability Statement We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware and software described. Exclusions and deviations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for lack of total agreement. The information in this manual is checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice. Release 4.10.02
Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2000; 2002. All rights reserved. Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration. Registered trademarks SIPROTEC, SIMATIC, SIMATIC NET , SINAUT , and SICAM, and DIGSI 4 are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000G1176C1322
Preface
Aim of This Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the device. In particularly, you will find: General information regarding operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices Chapter 4, Information regarding configuration of the device Chapter 5, Description of the device functions and setting facilities Chapter 6, Instruction of operation while in service Chapter 7, Instruction for mounting and commissioning Chapter 8, List of the technical data Chapter 10. As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the Appendix. Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, persons who are involved in setting, testing and service of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation personnel in electrical plants and power stations. This manual is valid for SIPROTEC 7SD52 differential protection; firmware version 4.1. Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC). This conformity has been proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 (for EMC directive) and the standards EN 60255-6 (for lowvoltage directive). This product is designed and manufactured for application in industrial environment. The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German standards DIN 57435 part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435 part 303).
Applicability of this Manual
ANSI
This product has been designed according to ANSI C37.90.* standards.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Preface
Additional support
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens representative. Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative. The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them! The following terms are used:
Training Courses
Instructions and Warnings
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and consequential damage thereof. Note indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Nonobservance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. QUALIFIED PERSONNEL For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications: Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
ii
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Preface Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices. Is trained in rendering first aid. Typographic and Symbol Conventions The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the text flow: Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are marked in bold letters of a monospace type style. Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI 4), are written in italic style, additionally. Annunciations, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks. Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously derived from the illustration. The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault
device-internal logical input signal device-internal logical output signal internal input signal of an analogue quantity external binary input signal with function number Fno external binary output signal with function number Fno
Earth fault
UL1L2
FNo 567
>Release
FNo 5432
Dev. Trip
Parameter address Parameter name
1234 FUNCTION On Off

Parameter options
example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the address 1234 and the possible settings On and Off
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
Input signal of an analogue quantity

1
OR gate
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
iii
Preface
&
signal inversion
AND gate
=1
ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the inputs is active Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are active or inactive at the same time Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below with negative edge Formation of one analogue output signal from a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)
2610 Iph>>
Iph> 2611 T Iph>> T 0
Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

Q Q
S R
Static memory (RSflipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar are used in most cases. n
iv
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................... i
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................ v
Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................ 1-2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 1-5 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-8 Scope of Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-9
Hardware and Connections ............................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting .......................................... 2-2 Housing ............................................................................................................................... 2-2 Screw Terminal Connections............................................................................................... 2-6 Connections to Plug-In Terminals ..................................................................................... 2-10 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-14 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-16 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting.................................................................. 2-17 Housing ............................................................................................................................. 2-17 Screw Terminal Connections............................................................................................. 2-20 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-20 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-23
Getting Started.................................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 Unpacking and Re-packing ................................................................................................. 3-2 Inspections upon Receipt .................................................................................................... 3-3 Inspection of Features and Ratings..................................................................................... 3-3 Electrical Check................................................................................................................... 3-3
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table of Contents
3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4
User Interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-4 Operation Using the Operator Control Panel....................................................................... 3-4 Operation Using DIGSI 4................................................................................................... 3-7 Storage .............................................................................................................................. 3-12
SIPROTEC 4 Devices....................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 General ................................................................................................................................ 4-2 Protection and Control ......................................................................................................... 4-2 Communication.................................................................................................................... 4-3 Settings................................................................................................................................ 4-4 Operations ........................................................................................................................... 4-4 Oscillographic Fault Records............................................................................................... 4-4 Operator Control Facilities ................................................................................................... 4-5 Operator Control Panel On Device ...................................................................................... 4-5 DIGSI 4 Tool...................................................................................................................... 4-7 Information Retrieval............................................................................................................ 4-8 Annunciations ...................................................................................................................... 4-9 Measurements ................................................................................................................... 4-11 Oscillographic Fault Records............................................................................................. 4-12 Control ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 Manual Overwrite / Tagging............................................................................................... 4-16 General about the Setting Procedures .............................................................................. 4-17 Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions................................................................ 4-20 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) .............................................. 4-21 Programmable Logic CFC ................................................................................................. 4-24 Power System Data ........................................................................................................... 4-26 Setting Groups................................................................................................................... 4-27 General Device Settings .................................................................................................... 4-29 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-30 Serial Interfaces................................................................................................................. 4-31 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-33
Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 5.1.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions.............................................................................. 5-2 Setting Overview.................................................................................................................. 5-5
vi
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table of Contents
5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.3 5.4 5.5
Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands....................................... 5-7 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 5-7 Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix ......................................................... 5-11 Establishing Information Properties................................................................................... 5-15 Performing Configuration................................................................................................... 5-22 Transferring Metered Values ............................................................................................. 5-28 Settings for Contact Chatter Blocking................................................................................ 5-29 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC....................................................................... 5-31 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 5-40 Date and Time Stamping................................................................................................... 5-44
Functions........................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.3 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 General................................................................................................................................ 6-2 Power System Data 1.......................................................................................................... 6-7 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-12 Setting Groups .................................................................................................................. 6-13 Setting Overview .............................................................................................................. 6-15 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-15 General Protection Data (Power System Data 2).............................................................. 6-15 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-20 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-21 Differential Protection ........................................................................................................ 6-23 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-23 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-33 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-35 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-36 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping .............................................................................. 6-38 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-38 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-40 Setting Overview .............................................................................................................. 6-40 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-41 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 6-42 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-42 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-46 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-50 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-52
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
vii
Table of Contents
6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.6 6.6.1 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 6.7.4 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.9.3 6.9.4 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.2 6.10.3 6.10.4 6.11 6.11.1 6.11.2 6.11.3 6.11.4
Direct Local Trip................................................................................................................. 6-54 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-54 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-54 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-55 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-55 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)............................................................................................................................ 6-56 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-56 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection ................................................ 6-60 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-60 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-61 Setting Overview................................................................................................................ 6-63 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-63 Time Overcurrent Protection.............................................................................................. 6-64 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-64 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-70 Setting Overview................................................................................................................ 6-76 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-78 Automatic Reclosure.......................................................................................................... 6-79 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-80 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-95 Setting Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-102 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-104 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................................... 6-108 Method of Operation ........................................................................................................ 6-108 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-119 Setting Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-122 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-123 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 6-125 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 6-125 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-126 Setting Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-128 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-128
viii
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table of Contents
6.12 6.12.1 6.12.1.1 6.12.1.2 6.12.1.3 6.12.1.4 6.12.1.5 6.12.1.6 6.12.2 6.12.3 6.12.4 6.13 6.13.1 6.13.2 6.13.3 6.13.4 6.13.5 6.13.6 6.13.7 6.13.8 6.14 6.14.1 6.14.2 6.14.3 6.15 6.15.1 6.15.2 6.15.3 6.15.4 6.15.5 6.15.6 6.16 6.16.1 6.16.2
Monitoring functions ........................................................................................................ 6-129 Function Description........................................................................................................ 6-129 Hardware Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 6-129 Software Monitoring......................................................................................................... 6-131 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits .................................................................... 6-131 Trip Circuit Supervision ................................................................................................... 6-133 Fault Reactions ............................................................................................................... 6-136 Group Alarms .................................................................................................................. 6-137 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-138 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-139 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-140 Function Control .............................................................................................................. 6-142 Switch-in Recognition ...................................................................................................... 6-142 Processing of the Circuit Breaker Position ...................................................................... 6-143 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device ...................................................................... 6-146 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device.................................................................................. 6-147 Circuit Breaker Test......................................................................................................... 6-152 Setting the function parameters....................................................................................... 6-153 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-154 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-154 Commissioning Tools ...................................................................................................... 6-155 Function Description........................................................................................................ 6-155 Setting Parameters.......................................................................................................... 6-155 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................ 6-156 Ancillary Functions .......................................................................................................... 6-157 Processing of Messages ................................................................................................. 6-157 Measurement during Operation....................................................................................... 6-158 Fault Recording ............................................................................................................... 6-161 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-161 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-162 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-163 Processing of Commands ............................................................................................... 6-168 Types of Commands ....................................................................................................... 6-168 Steps in the Command Sequence................................................................................... 6-169
6.16.3 Interlocking ...................................................................................................................... 6-170 6.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................ 6-170 6.16.4 6.16.5 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands ........................................................... 6-173 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-174
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
ix
Table of Contents
Control During Operation................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 7.1.1.3 7.1.1.4 7.1.1.5 7.1.1.6 7.1.2 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.2 7.1.3 7.1.3.1 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.4 7.1.4 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.3 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 Read-out of Information ....................................................................................................... 7-2 Messages ............................................................................................................................ 7-2 Output of Messages............................................................................................................. 7-2 Event Log (Operating Messages) ........................................................................................ 7-5 Trip Log (Fault Messages)................................................................................................... 7-7 Saving and Erasing the Messages ...................................................................................... 7-9 General Interrogation......................................................................................................... 7-10 Spontaneous Messages .................................................................................................... 7-11 Switching Statistics ............................................................................................................ 7-11 Viewing the Switching Statistics ........................................................................................ 7-12 Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics................................................................... 7-13 Measured Values............................................................................................................... 7-14 Measured Values............................................................................................................... 7-14 Illustrating Measured Values ............................................................................................. 7-19 Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points .............................................................. 7-22 Retrieval and Resetting of User Defined Pulse Metered Values (PMV) ............................ 7-24 Fault Records .................................................................................................................... 7-25 Viewing Fault Records....................................................................................................... 7-25 Saving the Fault Records .................................................................................................. 7-27 Control of Device Functions............................................................................................... 7-28 Read and Set Date and Time ............................................................................................ 7-28 Changeover of Setting Groups .......................................................................................... 7-32 Test Messages to the System (SCADA) Interface during Test Operation......................... 7-35 Changeover of Operating Mode ........................................................................................ 7-37 Circuit Breaker Test Function ............................................................................................ 7-40 Control of Switchgear ........................................................................................................ 7-44 Display Equipment Position and Control ........................................................................... 7-45 Manual Overwriting............................................................................................................ 7-48 Set Status .......................................................................................................................... 7-49 Interlocking ........................................................................................................................ 7-51 Tagging.............................................................................................................................. 7-52 Switching Authority ............................................................................................................ 7-53 Switching Mode ................................................................................................................. 7-54 Control Messages.............................................................................................................. 7-55 Other Commands .............................................................................................................. 7-55
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table of Contents
Installation and Commissioning ..................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.3.1 8.1.3.2 8.1.3.3 8.1.3.4 8.1.3.5 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 8.3.9 8.3.10 8.3.11 8.3.12 8.3.13 8.4 Mounting and Connections.................................................................................................. 8-2 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 8-2 Termination variants ............................................................................................................ 8-6 Hardware Modifications ..................................................................................................... 8-10 General.............................................................................................................................. 8-10 Disassembling the Device ................................................................................................. 8-11 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards........................................................................ 8-14 Interface Modules .............................................................................................................. 8-20 To Reassemble the Device ............................................................................................... 8-23 Checking the Connections................................................................................................. 8-24 Data Connections .............................................................................................................. 8-24 Checking the Differential Protection Communication ........................................................ 8-26 Checking Power Plant Connections .................................................................................. 8-27 Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 8-29 Testing Mode and Transmission Blocking......................................................................... 8-30 Checking Time Synchronization ........................................................................................ 8-30 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface.......................................................................... 8-30 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................... 8-32 Checking the Communication Topology............................................................................ 8-35 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................ 8-41 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of One Line End ............................... 8-43 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of Two Line Ends ............................. 8-45 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections for More than Two Ends................... 8-52 Remote Tripping, Remote Signalling etc. .......................................................................... 8-52 Testing User Defined Functions ........................................................................................ 8-53 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker ..................................................................... 8-53 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................ 8-54 Final Preparation of the Device ......................................................................................... 8-55
Maintenance and Fault Tracing ....................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 General................................................................................................................................ 9-2 Routine Checks ................................................................................................................... 9-3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 9-5 Replacing the Buffer Battery................................................................................................ 9-5 Replacing Interface Modules ............................................................................................... 9-7 Fault Tracing ....................................................................................................................... 9-8 Corrective Action/Repairs ................................................................................................. 9-10 Software Procedures ......................................................................................................... 9-10 Hardware Procedures........................................................................................................ 9-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
xi
Table of Contents
9.6
Return ................................................................................................................................ 9-14
10
Technical Data................................................................................................................................. 10-1 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.5 10.1.6 10.1.7 10.1.8 10.1.9 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13 General Device Data ......................................................................................................... 10-2 Analog Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................ 10-2 Power Supply..................................................................................................................... 10-2 Binary Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................. 10-3 Communications Interfaces ............................................................................................... 10-4 Electrical Tests .................................................................................................................. 10-7 Mechanical Stress Tests.................................................................................................... 10-8 Climatic Stress Tests ......................................................................................................... 10-9 Service Conditions........................................................................................................... 10-10 Construction..................................................................................................................... 10-10 Differential Protection ...................................................................................................... 10-11 Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping ................................................ 10-13 Transmission of Binary Information (optional) ................................................................. 10-14 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 10-15 Time Overcurrent Protection (optional)............................................................................ 10-16 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection .............................................. 10-21 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional)......................................................................... 10-21 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional).................................................................... 10-22 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 10-23 Monitoring Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-25 Supplementary Functions ................................................................................................ 10-26 Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 10-28
Appendix........................................................................................................................................... A-1 A.1 A.1.1 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 Ordering Information and Accessories ...............................................................................A-2 Accessories .........................................................................................................................A-4 General Diagrams................................................................................................................A-6 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting .........................................................................A-6 Panel Surface Mounting ....................................................................................................A-11 Connection Examples........................................................................................................A-20 Preset Configurations ........................................................................................................A-24 Protocol Dependent Functions ..........................................................................................A-28
xii
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table of Contents
A.6 A.7 A.8
List of Settings ...................................................................................................................A-29 List of Information ..............................................................................................................A-41 Measured Values ..............................................................................................................A-63
Index ............................................................................................................................................Index-i n
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
xiii
Table of Contents
xiv
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Introduction
1
The SIPROTEC 4 devices 7SD52 are introduced in this chapter. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, features, and scope of functions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overall Operation Applications Features Scope of Functions 1-2 1-5 1-8 1-9
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1-1
1 Introduction
1.1
Overall Operation
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD52 is equipped with a powerful 32 Bit microprocessor. This provides fully numerical processing of all functions in the device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers as well as the exchange of measured data with the other ends of the protected area. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device.
MI
IL1 IL2 IL3 I4
IA
AD
OA
ERROR RUN
Output Relays userprogrammable
UL1 UL2 UL3 U4
LEDs on the front panel, userprogrammable
Display on the Front Panel
C
Front Serial Operating Interface
to PC radio clock PC/ modem to SCADA remote end remote end
Operator control panel

ESC ENTER
7 4 1 .
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
Time Synchronization Serial Service Interface
Binary inputs, programmable
Serial System Interface Protection Data Interface 1
PS
Uaux
Power supply Protection Data Interface 1
Figure 1-1
Hardware structure of the numerical device 7SD52
1-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1.1 Overall Operation
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs MI transform the currents and voltages derived from the instrument transformers and match them to the internal signal levels for processing in the device. The device has 4 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are provided for measurement of the phase currents, a further measuring input (I4) may be used for the residual current (current transformer starpoint or a separate earth current transformer). A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase-earth voltage. In principle, the differential protection does not require measured voltages. However, voltages that allow to measure voltages and powers and voltages that enable the user to measure the line voltage also for automatic reclosure can be switched to the device. A further voltage input (U4) may optionally be used to measure the displacement voltage (envoltage). The analog signals are then routed to the input amplifier group IA. The input amplifier group IA ensures that there is high impedance termination for the measured signals and contains filters which are optimized in terms of band-width and speed with regard to the signal processing. The analog/digital converter group AD has a multiplexer, analog/digital converters and memory modules for the data transfer to the microcomputer system C.
Microcomputer System
Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system also executes the actual protection and control functions. In particular, the following are included: Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals, Continuous supervision of the measured signals, Supervision of pickup conditions of each protection function, Formation of the local differential protection values (phasor analysis and charge computation) and creation of the transmission protocol, Decoding of the received transmission protocol, synchronism of differential protection values and summing up of the differential currents and charges, Monitoring of the communication with the other devices part of the differential protection system, Interrogation of threshold values and time sequences, Processing of signals for the logic functions, Reaching trip and close command decisions, Storage of fault messages, fault annunciations as well as fault recording data for system fault analysis, Operating system and related function management such as e.g. data storage, real time clock, communication, interfaces etc., The information is provided via output amplifier OA.
Binary Inputs and Outputs
The microcomputer system obtains external information through binary inputs such as remote resetting or blocking commands for protective elements. The C issues information to external equipment via the output contacts. These outputs include, in particular, trip commands to circuit breakers and signals for remote annunciation of important events and conditions.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1-3
1 Introduction
Front Elements
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide information such as targets, measured values, messages related to events or faults, status, and functional status of the 7SD52. Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction with the 7SD52. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control settings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also Chapter 7). The settings can be modified as are discussed in Chapter 6. If the device incorporates switchgear control functions, the control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 7SD52 front panel.
Serial Interfaces
A serial operating interface on the front panel is provided for local communications with the 7SD52 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of the device is possible using the SIPROTEC 4 operating program DIGSI 4. A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a modem, or local communications via a substation master computer that is permanently connected to the 7SD52. DIGSI 4 is required. All 7SD52 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through the serial system (SCADA) interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements are available for this interface to suit the particular application. Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization sources. Via additional interface modules further communication protocols may be created. The operating and service interface allow the communication from one PC with the devices at all ends of the protected object during commissioning, checking and also during operation of the device, using a standard browser. There is a range of PC-tools supporting this function (e.g. IBS-tool) which have been optimized with regard to the differential protection system.
Protection Data Interface
The protection data interfaces are a particular case. Depending on the version there are one or two protection data interfaces. Via these interfaces the measured value data of each end of the protected object is transmitted to the other ends; during this procedure measured values from the other ends may also be added. Further information such as closing the local circuit breaker, pickup of the inrush restraint as well as other external trip commands couples via binary inputs or binary information can be transmitted to other ends via the protection data interfaces. The 7SD52 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages. Transient dips of the supply voltage which may occur during short-circuit in the power supply system, are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Subsection 10.1.2).
Power Supply
1-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1.2 Applications
1.2
Applications
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD52 functions as a selective short-circuit protection for overhead lines and cables with single- and multi-ended infeeds in radial, ring or any type of meshed systems of any transmission level. Dealing with the system star-point is irrelevant, as measuring data are compared separately for each phase. High sensitivity and the inrush current restraint allow for the application of the 7SD52 even when there is a power transformer within the protected range (ordering option) whose star point(s) might also be isolated, earthed or provided with a Petersen coil (option). A major advantage of the differential protection function is the instantaneous tripping in the event of a short circuit at any point in the entire protected zone. The current transformers limit the protected zone at the ends towards the line. This rigid limit is the reason why the differential protection scheme shows such an ideal selectivity. The differential protection system requires a 7SD522 or 7SD523 device as well as a set of current transformers at either end of the protected zone. Voltage transformers are not required, they can, however, be connected for the purpose of detecting and indicating measured values (voltages, power, power factor). The devices located at the ends of the protected zone exchange measuring information via protection data interfaces using dedicated communication links (usually fibre optic cables) or a communication network. Two type 7SD522 devices can be used for an object with two ends to be protected: cables, overhead line or both, with or without unit-connected power transformer (option). Employing type 7SD523, objects having 3 (three-end lines, teed lines) or more ends can be protected, also using unit-connected transformers (option) or not. Up to 6 ends can be protected, that means that smaller busbar arrangements can also be protected. For each end a 7SD523 is used. A fault-free data transfer being the prerequisite for the proper operation of the protective system, it is continuously monitored internally.
Protective Functions
Recognition of short circuits in the protection zone even of weak-current or highresistive shorting is the basic function of the device. Also complex multiphase faults are precisely detected, as the measured values are evaluated phase segregated. The protection system is stabilized against inrush currents of power transformers. When switching onto a fault on the entire line, an undelayed trip signal can be emitted. With more than two devices (= ends of the protected object) the communication can be built up as a ring. This enables a redundant operation in case one communication line fails. The devices will automatically find the remaining healthy communication lines. But even with two ends, communication lines can be doubled to create redundancies (with 7SD523). In the event of a communication failure, if there is no possible reserve, the devices can automatically be switched to emergency operation using an integrated time overcurrent protection (ordering option) until communication is restored again. This time overcurrent protection has three definite-time overcurrent stages and one inverse-time (IDMT) stage; a series of characteristics according to various standards is available for the inverse-time stage. Alternatively, the time overcurrent protection can be used as a backup time overcurrent protection, i.e. it operates independent of and parallel to the differential protection at either end.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1-5
1 Introduction
The communication link can be used for transmitting further information. Apart from measured values, binary commands or other information can be transmitted (option). Depending on the version ordered, the short-circuit protection may also trip singlepole. It may work in co-operation with an integrated automatic reclosure (available as an option) with which single-pole, three-pole or single- and three-pole rapid automatic reclosure as well as multi-shot automatic reclosure are possible on overhead lines. It is possible to connect an external auto-reclosure device as well as double protection with one or two automatic reclosure functions. Apart from the short-circuit protection functions mentioned, a thermal overload protection has been integrated which protects in particular cables and power transformers from undue heating through overload. An optional circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid backup fault clearance instruction to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails to respond. Messages and Measured Values; Storage of Data for Fault Recordings A series of operating messages provides information about conditions in the power system and the 7SD52 itself. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. Messages of the 7SD52 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and communicated via the serial interfaces (see Communication below). With the help of the CFC graphic tool (Continous Function Chart), user-defined annunciations and logical combinations of internal or external signals can also be generated. During a system fault important events and status changes are saved in fault event records. The instantaneous quantities of the fault values are also recorded in the devices themselves, synchronized in the devices and are then available for fault analysis. Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with PCs, RTUs and SCADA systems. A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local communications with a personal computer. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port. Using the DIGSI 4 software, settings and configuration can be made to the relay, Real-time operating quantities can be viewed, Waveform capture and Event Log records can be displayed, and controls can be issued. A DIGSI 4 service interface port, a system (SCADA) port and a time-sync port (IRIGB or DCF77) are optionally available on the rear of the device. A service interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fibre optics type ST. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port. A system interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fibre optics type ST for communications between the 7SD52 and a PCs, RTUs or SCADA systems Standard Protocols, IEC 60870-5-103 are available via the system port. Integration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT LSA and SICAM also take place with this profile. Alternatively, the device can be interrogated remotely or locally by means of a standard browser.
1-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1.2 Applications
A further port provides the communication between the devices at the ends of the protected object. This protection data interface has been mentioned above with the Protective Functions.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1-7
1 Introduction
1.3
Features
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of the analog input values, the processing and organization of the communication between devices up to the closing and tripping commands to the circuit breakers. Complete galvanic and reliable separation between the internal processing circuits of the 7SD52 and the external measurement, control, and DC supply circuits because of the design of the analog input transducers, binary inputs and outputs, and the DC/DC or AC/DC converters. Differential protection system for up to 6 ends. Digital transmission of protection data. Permanent supervision of the protection data transmission concerning disturbance, failure, and transfer time deviation in the transmission network, with automatic transfer time correction. Protection data synchronization via GPS receiver possible, resulting in automatic correction of transmission time differences. Independent of the method of system starpoint earthing. Suited for transformers in the protected area (order option). Detection of high-resistant, current-weak faults due to high sensitivity. Additional functions can be ordered according to requirements. Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the device. Indication of measured quantities of the remote line end(s). Integrated help tools for operation and commissioning can be visualized by means of a standard browser. Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal computer running DIGSI 4. Storage of operational data, fault data, and oscillographic fault records with SER information to be used for analysis and troubleshooting. Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial interfaces through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibres, as an option. Continuous monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as self-diagnostics covering the hardware and software.
1-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1.4 Scope of Functions
1.4
Scope of Functions
The numerical differential protection relay SIPROTEC 7SD52 has the following functions:
Differential Protection
protection for all types of short-circuits in systems with any starpoint conditioning; reliable distinction between load and short-circuit conditions, also on high-resistant, current-weak faults; high sensitivity during of a weak load condition, extreme stability against load jumps and power swings; due to phase segregated measurement the pickup sensitivity is independent of the type of fault; insensitive measurement against in-rush and charge currents also for transformers in the protected area and against higher-frequency switching transients; high stability also for different current transformer saturation; adaptive stabilization that is automatically derived from the measured values and the configured current transformer data; low dependence on frequency due to frequency tracking; communication between devices via dedicated communication connections (in general optical fibre) or a communication system; communication possible via ISDN-networks or two-wire telephone connections (up to approx 8 km or 4.8 miles); fast phase segregated tripping also on weak or zero infeed ends; steady monitoring of the communication ways and the signal propagation delay with automatic re-adjustment; automatic changeover of communication ways in case of transmission failure or transmission disturbance is provided (for ring topology with 7SD523); phase segregated tripping (in conjunction with single-pole or single- and three-pole auto-reclosure) is possible (order option).
External Direct and Remote Tripping
tripping of the local end by an external device via binary input; tripping of the remote ends by internal protection functions or an external device via binary input. transmission of measured values from all ends of the protected object; transmission of up to 4 fast commands to all remote ends; transmission of up to 24 additional binary signals to all remote ends. selectable as emergency function for communication failure or as back-up function or as both; up to a maximum of three definite time stages (DT) and one inverse time stage (IDMT), each for phase currents and residual current;
Transmission of Information (optional)
Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (optional)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1-9
1 Introduction for IDMT protection a selection from various characteristics based on several standards is possible; blocking options e.g. for reverse interlocking with any stage; non-delayed tripping with any stage when switching on to a fault is possible. Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection Automatic Reclosure (optional) fast tripping for all faults on total line length; selectable for manual closure or following each closure of the circuit breaker; with integrated line energization detection. for reclosure after single-pole, three-pole or single and three-pole tripping; single or multiple shot reclosure (up to 8 reclosure attempts); with separate action times for every reclosure attempt, optionally without action times; with separate dead times after single-pole and three-pole tripping, separate for the first four reclosure attempts; with the option of an adaptive dead time: in this case only one device controls the automatic reclosure cycles while at the other end(s) the automatic reclosure solely depends on the one controlling device; the following criteria may apply: voltage return recognition and/or close command transmission (Remote close); automatic reclosure controlled optionally by protection start with separate dead times after single, two and three-pole starting. Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) with independent current detectors for monitoring of current flow through each individual circuit breaker pole; with independent delay timers for single-pole trip and three-pole trip; initiation by each of the internal trip functions; initiation by external trip functions possible via binary inputs; single-stage or two-stage delay; short reset and overshoot times; end fault protection and pole discrepancy supervision possible. Thermal Overload Protection provides thermal replica of the current heat losses of the protected object; true r.m.s. measurement of all three conductor currents; adjustable thermal and current-dependent warning stages. User Defined Logic Functions freely programmable linkage between internal and external signals for the implementation of user defined logic functions; all common logic functions; time delays and measured value set point interrogation.
1-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1.4 Scope of Functions indication of the local and remote measured values, amplitudes and phase relation; indication of the calculated differential and restraint currents; indication of the characteristic values of the communication link, as transfer delay times and availability. Monitoring Functions monitoring of the internal measuring circuits, the auxiliary voltage supply, as well as the hard- and software, resulting in increased reliability; monitoring of the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits by means of summation and symmetry checks; monitoring of communication with statistics showing the availability of transmission telegrams; check of the consistency of protection settings at all line ends: no processor system start-up with inconsistent settings which could lead to a malfunction of the differential protection system; trip circuit supervision is possible; check of local and remote measured values and comparison of both; broken wire supervision for the secondary CT circuits with fast phase segregated blocking of the differential protection system in order to avoid malfunction. Further Functions battery buffered real time clock, which may be sychronized via a synchronization signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIG B or GPS via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface; automatic time synchronization between the devices at the ends of the protected object via the protection data transmission; fault event memory for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power system), with real time stamps (ms-resolution); fault recording memory and data transfer for analog and user configurable binary signal traces with a maximum time range of 15 s, synchronized between the devices of the differential protection system; switching statistics: counter with the trip and close commands issued by the device, as well as record of the fault current and accumulation of the interrupted fault currents; commissioning aids such as connection and direction checks as well as interface check and circuit breaker test functions; the IBS-tool (installed on a PC or a laptop) widely supports the testing and commissioning procedure: the communication topology of the differential protection and communication system, phasor diagrams of all currents and (if applicable) voltages at all ends of the differential protection system are displayed as a graph. n
Commissioning; Operation
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1-11
1 Introduction
1-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Hardware and Connections
This chapter describes the construction and connection of the 7SD52. The different housing versions and available termination techniques are described. The recommended and permitted data for the wiring is stated and suitable accessories and tools are given.
2.1 2.2
Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting
2-2 2-17
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-1
2 Hardware and Connections
2.1
Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting

The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD52 for panel and cubicle flush mounting is enclosed in a 7XP20 housing. Two housing sizes are available: 1/ and 1/ (of 19 inch). It can be used for rack mounting either. 2 1 Each device version offers different ways of connection.
2.1.1
Housing
The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a rear plate specific to the device version and a front cover. Guide rail mats are mounted at the top and bottom on the inside of the tube, to guide the modules during insertion. A visible number designates the mounting position of the modules. The connection between the modules and to the front cover is by means of flat ribbon cables and the corresponding plug connectors. The rear plate screwed to the tube contains the required connectors for the external connections to the device. The front cover can be detached after removal of the covering caps located on the 4 corners of the front cover and the 4 screws that are then revealed. Housing size 1/1 has 2 additional screw covers located at the centre of the top and bottom of the front cover frame; accordingly 6 screws must be removed in this case. The front cover has a membrane keypad containing the control and indication elements required for the user interface with the device. All terminations to the control and indication elements are combined by a converter module within the front cover, and routed to the processor module (CPU) via a plug connector. The name plate containing the principal data of the device, such as auxiliary supply voltage, the rated test voltage and the ordering code (MLFB) is located on the external top of the housing and on the inside of the front cover. The mechanical dimension drawings can be found in Section 10.13.
2-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2.1 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting
Front View (Housing Size 1/2)
11) 10)
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
11)
SIPROTEC
7SD52
MAIN MENU Annunciation Measurement
01/04 1 2
1) 2)
9)
MENU
3)
8)
LED
ESC
ENTER
4)
Annunciation
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
7)
Measuring
5) 6) 11)
11)
Figure 2-1
1/
Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 2, for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation
Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-1: 1. Display (LCD) The LCD shows process and device information as text in various lists. Commonly displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device, protection information, general reports, and alarms. 2. Navigation keys These keys serve for navigation through operating menus. 3. MENU key This key activates the main menu. 4. ESC and ENTER keys These keys serve to escape from specific menus or execute changes (such as setting changes). 5. Numerical keys These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as limit value settings. 6. Function keys Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used actions. Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in the menu tree such as the fault data in the trip log or the measured values. The function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written. 7. 9-pin female D-subminiature connector This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI 4.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-3
8. LED key This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts of output relays, as well as testing of the LEDs. 9. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of signals from which to choose. Some examples are device status, process or control information, and binary input or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front cover, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified LED functions may be written. 10. Operating condition indicators The two LEDs RUN (green) and ERROR (red) indicate the operating condition of the device. 11. Covering caps for the screws that secure the front cover.
Front View (Housing Size 1/1)
The operating and display elements are the same as explained in Figure 2-1.
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
MENU
LED
ESC
ENTER
Annunciation Measuring
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
Figure 2-2
Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/1, for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation
2-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Rear View (Housing Size 1/2)
Figure 2-3 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with screwtype terminals and optical fibre ports for the service interface at location B.
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
4 3 6 5 8 7
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17
10 9 12
14 13 16 15 18 17
2 2 1 4 3 4 3 6 1
8 6 5 10 9 8 7 12 11 7
B
Ch1
Ch2
P-Slave P-Master
RS232 RS485
UART
11
UART
Figure 2-3
Rear view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/2 (terminal arrangement example only)
Rear View (Housing Size 1/1)
Figure 2-4 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with screwtype terminals.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-5
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
4 3 6 5 8 7
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17
10 9 12
14 13 16 15 18 17
2 2 1 4 3 4 3 6 1
2 1 4 3 6 5
2 1 4 3 6 5
8 6 5 10 9 8 7 12 11 7
8 7 10 9 12 11
8 7 10 9 12 11
B
Ch1
Ch2
P-Slave P-Master
RS232 RS485
UART
11
UART
Figure 2-4Rear view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/1 (terminal arrangement example only)
2.1.2
Screw Terminal Connections

The following must be distinguished in the case of connection via screw terminals: terminal plugs for voltage connections and terminal plugs for current connections. The terminal screws have a slot head for tightening or loosening with a flat screw driver, sized 6 1 mm.
Terminal Blocks for Voltage Connections
The voltage connection terminal modules are available in 2 variants (Figure 2-5).
2-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 terminal Figure 2-5
12 terminal
Connection plug module with screw terminals for voltage connections rear view
Figure 2-6 shows an example of the allocation of an individual screw terminals to their terminal numbers.
connection terminal 1
1
connection terminal 2 Figure 2-6
Allocation of screw terminal to terminal number example
Terminal Block for Current Connections
There is one version of a terminal block for current connections to a 7SD52. The terminal block is illustrated in Figure 2-7. The correlation between the terminals and their terminal numbers is the same for the current terminals as shown in Figure 2-6.
8 terminal Figure 2-7 Terminal block of screw terminals for current connections rear view
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-7
The available poles are arranged into pole pairs, each containing two poles. In this manner, the two neighbouring terminals form one pair. Accordingly the current terminal module with 8 poles contains 4 pairs. In combination with the plug connection on the module side, these terminal pairs have an integrated short-circuiting function which short-circuits the two neighbouring current passages when the module is withdrawn. If the current transformer secondary circuits should become open circuited, large voltages can arise, which may endanger operating personnel and the insulation of the CTs. When the module is inserted, the current paths have a low impedance termination via the measuring inputs on the module. During insertion of the module, the short-circuit of the current path is automatically removed. The interruption only occurs once a reliable contact to the plug connector on the module is established. This does not reduce the care that must be taken when working on the current transformer secondary circuits! The short-circuiting contacts of the current terminals are located on the housing side, inside the terminal module connector, while the operating pins are located on the module side of the plug connector. Connections to Voltage Terminals Ring-type and fork-type lugs may be used. To ensure that the insulation paths are maintained, insulated lugs must be used. Alternatively, the crimping area must be insulated with other methods, e.g. by covering with a shrink sleeve. The following must be observed: Connections with cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 4 mm; maximum outer diameter of lugs, 10 mm; conductor with cross-section of 1 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 16 to 14). Use copper wires only! Cable lugs of series PIDG from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP are recommended, e.g. Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 3205650 Fork lug: PIDG PN 3212330. Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve; conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 20 to 14). When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw. Use copper wires only! Wire strip length: solid conductor 9 to 10 mm (0.35 to 0.39 in). Maximum tightening torque: 1.8 Nm (16 in-lb). Connections to Current Terminals Ring-type and fork-type lugs may be used. To ensure that the insulation paths are maintained, insulated lugs must be used. Alternatively, the crimping area must be insulated with other methods, e.g. by covering with a shrink sleeve. The following must be observed: Connections with cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 5 mm; maximum outer diameter of lugs, 12 mm; conductor with cross-section of 2.6 mm2 to 6.6 mm2 (AWG 14 to 10). Use copper wires only!
2-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Cable lugs of series PIDG from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP are recommended, e.g. Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 1301710 Fork lug: PIDG PN 3268650 Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve; conductor with cross-section of 2.6 mm2 to 3.3 mm2 (AWG 14 to 12). When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw. Use copper wires only! Wire strip length: solid conductor 10 to 11 mm (0.39 to 0.43 in). Maximum tightening torque: 2.7 Nm (24 in-lb). Short-Circuit Links Short-circuit links are available for convenience in making terminal connections. The short-circuit links can connect two neighbouring terminals located on the same side of the terminal module. By connecting further links, neighbouring terminals can be included in the short-circuit. On each terminal it is possible to connect two shotcircuiting links, or one short-circuit link and one lug, or one individual conductor. The links meet the safety requirements for protection against electric shock. There are two types of links, one for voltage connections and one for current connections. The links are illustrated in Figure 2-8. Ordering information for the links is provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.
Short-circuit links for voltage connections Figure 2-8
Short-circuit links for current connections
Short-circuit links for voltage connections and current connections
Covering Caps
Terminal covering caps are available for the screw terminal modules, to increase the protection of personnel against hazardous voltages (degree of protection against access to dangerous parts) on the terminal modules. The degree of protection is increased from the standard back of the hand protection (IP1x) to finger protection (IP2x). The terminal covering caps provide an enclosure which securely covers all voltage carrying components. They are simply snapped onto the terminal module. It must be noted that all screws on the terminal module must be screws in before snapping the cover on. The terminal covering cap can simply be removed with a screw driver 6x1. There are two types of covering caps, as shown in Figure 2-9. Ordering information is provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-9
:AMP
>PCGF<
C73334-A1-C31-1
:AMP
>PCGF<
SIEMENS
Covering cap for 18 terminal voltage connection terminal block Figure 2-9
Covering cap for 12 terminal voltage or 8 Terminal Current connection terminal block
Covering caps for terminal blocks with screw terminals
2.1.3
Connections to Plug-In Terminals

Plug-in terminals are only available for voltage connections. Current connections are made with screw terminals on all 7SD52.
Terminal Blocks for Voltage Connections
There are two versions of plug-in terminal blocks. They are shown in Figure 2-10.
2-10
SIEMENS
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
C73334-A1-C32-1
a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 a 11 12 a 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 c b a 1 2
18 terminal Figure 2-10
12 terminal
Terminal blocks of plug-in terminals for voltage connections rear view
The system of numbers and letters used to designate the plug-in terminals is illustrated in Figure 2-11.
a 1
Plug-in terminal 1
2 12 a
Plug-in terminal 2
Figure 2-11
Correlation between plug-in terminals and connection numbers/letters
Each plug-in terminal forms a complete set of connections that consists of three pins arranged as follows: Pin a: Pin b: Pin c: Signal connection Common connection Shielding connection
The signal pins are the only terminal pins that are directly connected to the internal printed circuit boards of the 7SD52. Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 signal connections are provided. Refer to Figure 2-12. There are two isolated groups of common pins. Within a group the pins are inter-connected as shown in Figure 2-12. The common pins b are not connected to the boards inside the 7SD52. Each common group can, for example, be used for signal multiplication or as a common point for a signal (independent of the signals on the pin a terminals). Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 common connections are available. Grouping of common connections within a terminal block is as follows:
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-11
12 terminal block: 18 terminal block:
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
Terminals 1 through 6 Terminals 7 through 12 Terminals 1 through 9 Terminals 10 through 18
All shielding pins are connected together as shown in Figure 2-12. The shielding pins are also connected to the housing. Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 shielding connections are provided.
12 terminal
Signal connection Common connection
18 terminal
Shielding connection
c c c c c c b b b b b b a 2 a 4 a 6 a 8 a a 9 10 11 12 7 a b a b a b c c c c c b b b b a a a a b a 5 a b c c b a 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 a b c 1 a b c c c c b b b a 2 a 4 a 6 7 a b a b a b a b a b a b c c c c c c 5 a b c 1 a b 3 a b c c
Common connections, group 1 looped together
Common connections, group 2 looped together
c c
Shielding connections looped together
Figure 2-12
Schematic diagram of the plug-in terminal blocks
Connections to Plug-In Terminals
Connections to plug-in terminals are made with pin connectors. There are two versions of pin connectors: Version 1: 2-pin connector Version 2: 3-pin connector
2-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
b a
a c b
Figure 2-13
2-pin connector and 3-pin connector
Ordering information for the pin connectors is provided in Section A.1 of the Appendix. The design of the pin connectors is such that only correct connections can be made. For example, the design of the 2-pin connector allows connection only to pins a and b. An erroneous connection to pins b and c is excluded. The pin connectors snap in to the plug-in terminals. The connectors can be removed without tools. Control wires are connected to contacts of the pin connectors. Wires with 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 diameter (AWG 20 to 14) can be accommodated. Use only flexible copper control wire! The following crimp connectors can be used: Tin-plated version: Diameter 0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2: e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 08270391 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Individual piece type: 08273961 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Diameter 1.0 mm2 to 2.5 mm2: e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 08270401 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Individual piece type: 08273971 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools: e.g. Hand crimping tool type: 07343721 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Stencil type: 17343871 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP The use of individual pieces is recommended. Gold-plated version (recommended): Diameter 0.75 mm2 to 1.5 mm2: e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 01630837 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Individual piece type: 01630842 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools: e.g. Hand crimping tool type: 05396351 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Stencil type: 15396682 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP The use of individual pieces is recommended. After the wires are crimped, the contacts are pressed into the terminals of the connector until they snap into place. Stress relief for individual pin connector must be provided with cable ties. Stress relief must also be provided for the entire set of cables, e.g., cable ties.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-13
The following separation tool is needed to remove the contacts from the pin connectors: Type: 7258401 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP. The separation tool contains a small tube that is subject to wear. The tube can be ordered separately: Type: 7258411 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP.
2.1.4
Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces

The three available versions of optical communication interfaces are shown in Figure 2-14. The ports are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants. The caps can be removed by turning them 90 to the left.
Optical Interfaces STConnectors
P-Master Ch2
AMO
Ch1 P-Slave
2 channel Figure 2-14
Ch1 P-Salve
1 channel
1 channel
Optical communication interfaces with protective caps
Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces with STConnectors
Optical connector type: Fibre type:
STconnector Multimode graded-index (G) optical fibre G50/125 m, G62.5/125 m, G100/140 m = 820 nm (approximately) For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)
Wavelength: Allowable bending radius:
Laser class 1 (acc. EN 608251) is achieved with fibre type G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m.
2-14
UART
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Optical Interfaces FC-Connectors
The optical communication interfaces with FC-connectors and screw connections also provide caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants.
Figure 2-15
Optical communication interfaces with caps
Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces with FC-Connectors
Optical connector type: Fibre type: Wavelength:
FCconnector Monomode 9/125 m, = 1300 nm (approximately)
Allowable bending radius:For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-15
2.1.5
Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces

9-pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for all electrical communication interfaces of the 7SD52. The connector is illustrated in Figure 2-16. The pin assignments are described in Sub-section 8.2.1.
Electrical Communication Interfaces
5 9 6 1
Service interface (front side)
RS232-LWL RS232 RS485
1 6 9 5
1 6 9 5 Time synchronization (rear side)
Serial interface (rear side) Figure 2-16 9 pin D-subminiature connector
Connections to Serial Communication Interfaces
Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MILC24308 and DIN 41652 can be used. The necessary communication cables are dependent on the type of interface: RS232/EIA232: Five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV51004. RS485/EIA485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded. Profibus: Two-wire or four-wire, twisted and shielded: Wire type A, DIN 19245, part 2 and EN 50170 vol. 2, twisted and shielded, Wire Resistance: 135 to 165 (f > 100 kHz) Capacitance: < 30 nF/km (48 nF/mile) Circuit resistance: < 110 /km (177 /mile) Conductor diameter: > 0.64 mm Conductor cross-sectional area: > 0.34 mm2 e.g., SINEC L2 Industrial twisted pair installation wire (see catalog 1K 10 SIMATIC NET, Industrial Communications Networks). Time synchronization: At least two-wire, shielded.
2-16
P-Slave AME
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2.2 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting
2.2
Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting

The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD52 for surface mounting is enclosed in a 7XP20 housing. Two housing sizes are available: 1/2 and 1/1 (of 19 inch). The device is fitted into a surface mounting housing.
2.2.1
Housing
The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a rear plate which is specific to the device version, and a front cover. Guide rail mats which aid the insertion of the modules are mounted on the inside of the rectangular tube. Connections between the modules and from the modules to the front cover are established with flat ribbon cables and corresponding plug connectors. The rectangular tube fitted into a surface mounting housing and secured with 4 screws, which are located behind covering caps at the four corners of the front cover. Housing size 1/1 has 2 additional screw covers located at the centre of the top and bottom of the front cover frame. The surface mounting housing contains the wiring from the back plate specific to the device version to the screw terminal. The front cover can be detached after removal of the covering caps located on the 4 corners of the front cover and the 4 screws that are then revealed. Housing size 1/1 has 2 additional screw covers located at the centre of the top and bottom of the front cover frame; accordingly 6 screws must be removed in this case. The front cover has a membrane keypad containing the control and indication elements required for the user interface with the device. All terminations to the control and indication elements are combined by a converter module within the front cover, and routed to the processor module (CPU) via a plug connector. The name plate containing the principal data of the device, such as auxiliary supply voltage, the rated test voltage and the ordering code (MLFB) is located on the external top of the housing and on the inside of the front cover. The mechanical dimension drawings are located in Section 10.13.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-17
Front View (Housing Size 1/2) 11) 10)
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 11 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
11)
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
1) 2)
9)
MENU
3)
8) 7)
4)
LED ESC ENTER
F1 F2 F3
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
5)
6) 11)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F4
11)
9 10 11 12 13 14 L+ L- 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Figure 2-17
Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/2, for panel surface mounting, example without optical connections
Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-17: 1. Display (LCD) The LCD shows process and device information as text in various lists. Commonly displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device, protection information, general reports, and alarms. 2. Navigation keys These keys serve for navigation through operating menus. 3. MENU key This key activates the main menu. 4. ESC and ENTER keys These keys serve to escape from specific menus or execute changes (such as setting changes). 5. Numerical keys These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as limit value settings. 6. Function keys Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used actions. Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in the menu tree such as the fault data in the trip log or the measured values. The 2-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written. 7. 9-pin female D-subminiature connector This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI 4. 8. LED key This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts of output relays, as well as testing of the LEDs. 9. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of signals from which to choose. Some examples are device status, processing or control information, and binary input or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front panel, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified LED functions may be written. 10. Operating condition indicators The two LEDs RUN (green) and ERROR (red) indicate the operating condition of the device. 11. Covering caps for the screws that secure the front panel. Front View (Housing Size 1/1) The operating and display elements are the same as explained in Figure 2-17.
101102103104105106 107 108109110111 112113 114 115116 117118119 120121122123124125126127 128129130 131 132133134 135136137138 139 140141 142143144 145146147148149 150 151152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176177 178 179180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187188 189 190191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
MENU
LED
ESC
ENTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 L+ L- 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 85 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Figure 2-18
Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/1, for panel surface mounting, example without optical connections
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-19
2.2.2
Screw Terminal Connections

All connections to the device are by means of two-tier screw terminals located at the top and bottom of the surface mounting housing. For the housing size 1/2 there are 100 such terminals and for the housing size 1/1 there are 200 such terminals. The plug connection module in the device for the current terminals automatically shortcircuits the current transformer circuits when the modules are withdrawn. This does not reduce necessary care that must be taken when working on the current transformer secondary circuits.
Terminal Blocks
Connections to Terminals
Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 5 mm2 (AWG 20 to 10). Use copper wires only! Note: For the connection of the time synchronization: At least two-wire, shielded. Wire strip length: solid conductor 7 mm to 8 mm (0.27 in to 0.31 in). Maximum tightening torque: 1.7 Nm (15 in-lb).
2.2.3
Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces

Optical communication interfaces are generally located in inclined housings. The inclined housings may be located at the top side (channels D and E) and/or at the bottom side of the device (channel B and C), see Figure 2-19. A table indicating the available channel designations B to E is printed onto the inclined housing. Standardly the device is equipped with the housing of the top side (channel D). Depending on the version there may be a second inclined housing mounted to the bottom side of the device (channel B and/or channel C). If it that is not the case, a cover plate is mounted instead. A printed table on the inclined housings indicates the actually fitted channels (e.g. channel B and C in Figure 2-20). There are two versions of optical communications interfaces: STconnectors and FCconnectors.
2-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Housing for optical communication interfaces, channel D and E
Housing for optical communication interfaces, channel B and C Figure 2-19 Side view of 7SD52, panel surface mounting with optical communication interfaces (max. complement)
Optical Interfaces (STConnector)
Fibre-optic connections with STconnectors are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants. They can be removed by turning them 90 to the left.
Kanal C Kanal E
Kanal B Kanal D
Figure 2-20
Inclined housing with fibre optic connections (example: channel B and C fitted)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-21
The ports are provided with 1 to 4 channels. A maximum of 2 fibre-optic channel is located in each inclined housing. Fibre optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs (see Figure 2-20). Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces with STConnectors Optical connector type: Fibre type: STconnector Multimode graded-index (G) optical fibre G50/125 m, G62.5/125 m, G100/140 m = 820 nm (approximately) For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)
Wavelength: Allowable bending radius:
Laser class 1 (acc. EN 608251) is achieved with fibre type G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m. Optical Interfaces (FCConnector) Optical communication interfaces with FC-connectors are provided with 1 channel or 1 to 2 channels. The ports are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants. They can be removed from the interfaces. The fibre-optic channels are located in an inclined housing. The inclined housing is at the top side (channels D and E), see Figure 2-19). Fibre-optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs.
Kanal C Kanal E
Kanal B Kanal D
Figure 2-21
Inclined housing with fibre-optic connections (channel D and E fitted)
Optical connector type: Fibre type: Wavelength:
FCconnector Monomode 9/125 m, = 1300 nm (approximately)
2-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Allowable bending radius:For indoor cable rmin For outdoor cable rmin
= 5 cm (2 in) = 20 cm (8 in)
2.2.4
Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces

9-pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for electrical communication interfaces. The connectors are located in the inclined housing at the bottom side of the device (see Figure 2-22). The pin assignments are described in Sub-section 8.2.1. Connectors that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs. The connections for the time synchronization interface are by means of the two-tier screw terminals (see also Subsection A.2.2 in the Appendix).
Kanal C Kanal E
Kanal B Kanal D
Kanal C Kanal E
Kanal B Kanal D
plastic studs Figure 2-22 9-pin D-subminiature connectors
Connections to Serial Communication Interfaces
Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MILC24308 or DIN 41652 can be used. The necessary communication cables are dependent on the type of interface: RS232/EIA232: Five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV51004. RS485/EIA485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded. n
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2-23
2-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Getting Started
This chapter describes the initial inspections that should be carried out upon recept of the SIPROTEC 4 device 7SD52. Unpacking and re-packing is explained. Visual and electrical checks that are appropriate for initial inspection are discussed. The electrical tests include navigating through the operating menus of the device using the operator control panel on the front of the device, and the operator control windows in DIGSI 4. For personnel inexperienced with the 7SD52, these checks also provide a quick and simple method for understanding the operation of the control panel and DIGSI 4. The electrical tests can be done without measuring quantities being applied. Observations relevant to long-term storage of the device are noted.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Unpacking and Re-packing Inspections upon Receipt User Interface Storage
3-2 3-3 3-4 3-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3-1
3 Getting Started
3.1
Unpacking and Re-packing

The 7SD52 is packaged at the factory to meet the requirements of IEC 6025521. Unpacking and re-packing must be done with usual care, without using force, and with appropriate tools. Visually check the device immediately upon arrival for correct mechanical condition. Please observe also the brief reference booklet and all notes and hints that are enclosed in the packaging. The transport packaging can be reused in the same manner for further transport. Storage packaging alone, for the individual devices, is not sufficient for transport. If alternative packaging is used, shock requirements according to IEC 60255211 Class 2 and IEC 60255212 Class 1 must be met. The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.
3-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3.2 Inspections upon Receipt
3.2
3.2.1
Inspections upon Receipt

Inspection of Features and Ratings
Verify that the 7SD52 has the expected features by checking the complete ordering number with the ordering number codes given in Sub-section A.1 of the Appendix. Also check that the required and expected accessories are included with the device. The ordering number of the device is on the nameplate sticker attached to the top of the housing. The nameplate also indicates the current, voltage, and power supply ratings of the device. A verification that these ratings are the expected values is especially important. The jumpers for the control voltage of the binary inputs are set at the factory for a DC control voltage equal to the DC voltage rating of the power supply. The jumpers can be changed if a different control voltage is to be used.
Ordering Number
3.2.2
Electrical Check
Operating conditions that meet VDE 0100/5.73 and VDE 0105 Part 1/7.83, or national and international standards, are to be observed. Before applying power supply voltage or any measuring quantities for the first time, be sure the device has been in the operating area for at least two hours. This time period allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring.
Warning!
The following inspection steps are done in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements and precautionary measures shall perform these steps.
Power-Up
For a first electrical inspection of the device it is sufficient to ensure safe grounding of the housing and to apply the power supply voltage:
o o o o o
Connect the ground of the device solidly to the ground of the location. The ground of a 7SD52 designed for flush mounting is on the rear panel; the ground of a device designed for surface mounting is on the terminal with the grounding symbol. Prepare the connections to the power supply. Verify that the power supply voltage has the correct magnitude. Check polarity connections to the device inputs. Follow the appropriate connection diagram in the Appendix, Section A.2. Close the protective switches to apply the power supply. The green RUN LED on the front panel must light after no more than 0.5 second, and the red ERROR LED must go out after no more than 10 seconds. After no more than 15 seconds, the start-up messages must vanish from the display (in which the complete ordering number, the version of firmware implemented, and the factory number are shown), and the default display must appear. Depending on the assignment of the LEDs, some indicators may light up during and after power-up.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3-3
3 Getting Started
3.3
3.3.1
User Interface
Operation Using the Operator Control Panel
The device has a hierarchically structured operating tree, within which movements and actions are made using the , , , keys and the MENU, ENTER , CTRL , and ESC keys on the front panel. The brief discussions below illustrate the navigation techniques using the integrated operations in the operator control panel. Some typical operations are covered. For easier understanding, the accompanying figures show the entire contents of the menus, while only a limited number of lines can be seen in the display at any time.
Operator Control Panel
Reading Ordering Number/Version
To view the complete ordering number of the device, the version of firmware implemented, and the serial number:
G G G
When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the using the key, select the menu item Settings, and move to the device settings key. The SETTINGS menu appears, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Using the key, select the menu item Setup/Extras and switch to the selection SETUP/EXTRAS using the key. See Figure 3-2.
MAIN MENU 04/05 --------------------Annunciation > 1 Measurement > 2 Control > 3 >Settings > 4 Test/Diagnose > 5
SETTINGS 10/11 --------------------Device Config. > 01 Masking (I/O) > 02 P.System Data1 > 03 Group A > 04 Group B > 05 Group C > 06 Group D > 07 Change Group > 08 Osc.Fault Rec. > 09 >Setup/Extras > 10 Device > 11
Figure 3-1
Main menu and sub-menu SETTINGS example
Using the key, select the menu MLFB/Version and view the selection MLFB/ VERSION using the key. key as necessary
The device-specific data appear in two or three lines. Press the to view all of the data:
3-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3.3 User Interface
SETUP/EXTRAS 05/06 --------------------Date/Time > 1 Clock Setup > 2 Serial Ports > 3 Device-ID > 4 >MLFB/Version > 5 Contrast > 6
MLFB/VERSION 01/03 MLFB: 7SD52... 3HA1 BFNr.: 9811049704 MLFB/VERSION Firmware: Bootsystem: 02/03 4.00.18 1.00.04
Figure 3-2
Display of device-specific data example
Viewing Measured Values
To view the measured values:

G G G
If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Measurement, and move to the measurement values using the key. The MEASUREMENT sub-menu appears. Using the key, select the menu item Operation. sec (operating measured values, secondary), and switch to the OPERATION. SEC sub-menu using the key. Using the and keys, all operating measured values can be viewed.
Since no measured AC voltages or currents are present at this time, all operating measured values show near zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant. To return to the main menu, press the or the key. Viewing Operational Messages
MENU
key once, or repeatedly press the
ESC
key
Reading the operational messages is described to serve as an additional example.

G G G
If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Annunciation, and switch to the annunciations using the key. The ANNUNCIATION sub-menu appears. Using the key, select the menu item Event Log, and move to the EVENT LOG sub-menu using the key.
The last number in the upper right corner of the display indicates the number of operational messages stored in memory. The number before the slash indicates the message presently being displayed. Upon entering the menu, the latest (newest) message is shown. The date and time of the event are shown in the display line above the message.
G G
Use the
key to read other operational messages.
Press the LED key; all LEDs should illuminate. Press the key. The newest message in the event log should be Reset LED, and the number of messages in memory should increase by one (maximum of 200).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3-5
3 Getting Started
To return to the main menu, press the or the key. Setting the Display Contrast
MENU
key once, or repeatedly press the
ESC
key
If the image in the integrated LCD does not have satisfactory contrast, adjustments can be made. A stronger contrast serves, among other purposes, to improve the readability of the image from an angle. With increasing numbers, the contrast is increased and the picture gets darker. If the contrast is too weak or too strong, there is a risk that the display will be unreadable and that no operation will be possible using the integrated operator control panel. Therefore, the preset contrast value should only be changed in small steps (1 or 2 levels).
G G G G G G G
When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Settings, and switch to the settings using the key. The SETTINGS sub-menu appears. Using the key, select the menu item Setup/Extras and switch to the selection SETUP/EXTRAS using the key. See Figure 3-3. Using the key, select the sub-menu item Contrast.
ENTER
If a change of the contrast of the integrated LCD is desired, press the existing setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor.
key. The
Overwrite the present setting with the desired setting using the numerical keys. The setting range is 11 to 22. Confirm the change with the
ENTER
key, or cancel the change with the
ESC
key.
MENU
Exit the sub-menu using the
ESC
key, or return to the main menu using the
key.
SETUP/EXTRAS 6/06 -------------------Date/Time > 1 Clock Setup > 2 Serial Ports > 3 DeviceID > 4 MLFB/Version > 5 >Contrast > 6
ENTER
SETUP/EX 06/06 18 -------------------MLFB/Ve n > 5 Contrast > 6
Figure 3-3
Operating sub-menu for adjusting the display contrast
3-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3.3 User Interface
3.3.2
Operation Using DIGSI 4

DIGSI 4 has the typical PC application Windows operating environment to guide the user. The software has a modern, intuitive, user-interface. Further details are found in Section 4, as well as in the DIGSI 4 handbook Device Configuration. Some applications of DIGSI 4 which are described below concern viewing the measurement values, reading messages, and setting the time clock. The handling of the operator control windows of DIGSI 4 can be learned quickly by following the simple examples as described below. To perform the steps in the examples, first connect the SIPROTEC 4 device to the PC and match the DIGSI 4 interface data with the equipment. To accomplish this:
G G G
DIGSI 4 User Interface
Establish a physical connection between a serial interface of the PC and the operating serial interface of the device on the front panel. Open the DIGSI 4 application in the PC. Generate a new project by clicking on File New in the DIGSI 4Manager menu bar.
Figure 3-4
Dialogue box to open a new project in DIGSI 4
G G
Enter a name for the new project in the Name entry field (e.g. test 1) and close the box with OK. Select Folder by clicking on the item in the newly opened window. Then click in the menu bar the item Device and select the option DIGSI > Device (Plug & Play), as shown in Figure 3-5. The Plug & Play dialogue box opens, as shown in Figure 3-6.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3-7
3 Getting Started
Figure 3-5
Window with selection of Plug and Play
G G
Enter the designation of the PC serial interface (COM 1,2, 3, or 4) and select in the dialogue box under Frame the transfer format, to be used in making the connection. Click on OK. DIGSI 4 automatically determines the type of device present and reads the settings needed for communication (transfer format, transfer speed) through the interface.
Figure 3-6
Plug & Play dialogue box for communication between device and PC
A direct connection is then established (on-line), the data are exchanged between the PC and the device, and the initial screen for DIGSI 4 opens, as shown on Figure 3-7.
G G
By double clicking Online in the navigation window (left window), the structure opens (directory tree). By clicking on one of the menu items offered there, the associated contents become visible in the right window.
3-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3.3 User Interface
Figure 3-7
DIGSI 4 online initial screen example
Viewing Measured Values
As an example the procedure for viewing the measured values is described.

G G G G G
Double click on Measurement in the navigation window (left). Double click on the subdirectory Secondary Values in the navigation window. Click on Operational values, secondary. The present date and time are shown in the data window (right), as illustrated in Figure 3-8. Double click on this entry in the data window.
Figure 3-8
DIGSI 4 Viewing the secondary operating measured values example
A table of the secondary operating measured values appears, as shown in Figure 3-9. Since no measured AC currents or voltages are present at this time, all operating measured values are close to zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant. The measured values are automatically updated. In the same manner, other measured and counter values can be read out.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3-9
3 Getting Started
0601 0602 0603 0610 0619 0620
IL1 IL2 IL3 3I0 (zero sequence) 3I1 (positive sequence) 3I2 (negative sequence)
0.00 A 0.00 A 0.00 A 0.00 A 0.00 A 0.00 A
Figure 3-9
DIGSI 4 Table of secondary operating measured values example
Viewing Operational Messages
The read-out of operating messages is described to serve as an additional example.

G G
Double click on Annunciation in the navigation window. Click on Event Log in the function selection.
The present date and time are shown in the data window.
G
Double click on this entry in the data window.
A table of the accumulated event messages is displayed. See Figure 3-10as an example. The number designation for an event is provided with a description of the message. The corresponding cause, value (ON or OFF), and date and time of the event are given. The events are listed chronologically; the newest message is shown first.
Figure 3-10
DIGSI 4 Operational messages window example
G G
Press the
LED
key on the device; all LEDs should light while the key is pressed.
The message Reset LED appears as the newest message as soon as the window is updated. The window can be updated by clicking on View in the menu bar, and then on Refresh. Pressing the F5 function key on the keyboard also updates the window.
The operating messages can be saved in DIGSI 4, and also deleted from the devices memory as described in Sub-section 7.1.1.
3-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3.3 User Interface
Setting Date and Time
To enter the date and time:

G G
Click on Device in the menu bar. See Figure 3-11. Select Set Clock.
Figure 3-11
DIGSI 4 Selection of the option Set Clock
The dialog field Set clock & date in device opens. The field shows the present date and the approximate present time according to the device. The day of the week is automatically derived from the date and cannot be edited. Edit the input fields Date and Time. The format depends on your regional settings of the PC. See Figure 3-12. Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyyy Time: hh.mm.ss Click OK to download the entered values to the device. The former values are changed and the dialog field is closed.
Figure 3-12
DIGSI 4 Dialog Field: Set clock & date in device
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3-11
3 Getting Started
3.4
Storage
If the device is to be stored, note: SIPROTEC 4 devices and associated assemblies should be stored in dry and clean rooms, with a maximum temperature range of 25 C to +55 C (12 F to 131 F). See Sub-section 10.1.7 under Technical Data. To avoid premature aging of the electrolyte capacitors in the power supply, a temperature range of +10 C to +35 C (50 F to 95 F), is recommended for storage. The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice buildup. After extended storage, the power supply of the device should be energized, approximately every two years, for one or two days to regenerate the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply. This procedure should also be done prior to the device being put in service. Under extreme climatic conditions (tropics), pre-warming is achieved at the same time, and condensation is prevented. After long storage, power should not be applied until the device has been in the operating area for a minimum of two hours. This time period allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring. In order to save the energy of the buffer battery inside the device the battery is switched off automatically without auxiliary supply voltage after a time period of 12 to 24 hours. n
3-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
SIPROTEC 4 Devices
This chapter provides an overview of the family of SIPROTEC 4 devices and the integration of the devices into power plants and substation control systems. Principle procedures are introduced for setting the devices, controlling primary equipment with the devices, and performing general operations with the devices. Please note the SIPROTEC 4 family of devices is described in general in this chapter, and the examples shown may differ in detail from a specific device. Also, depending on the type and version of a specific device, some of the functions discussed may not be available. Details about the extent of the functions of the devices, the individual settings, and the representation structure of the system data are found in the following chapters and the DIGSI 4 instruction book.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15
General Operator Control Facilities Information Retrieval Control Manual Overwrite / Tagging General about the Setting Procedures Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) Programmable Logic CFC Power System Data Setting Groups General Device Settings Time Synchronization Serial Interfaces Passwords
4-2 4-5 4-8 4-14 4-16 4-17 4-20 4-21 4-24 4-26 4-27 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-33
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-1
4 SIPROTEC 4 Devices
4.1
General
The SIPROTEC 4 family is an innovative product series of numerical protective and control devices with open communication interfaces for remote control and remote setting, ergonomically designed operator panels, and highly flexible functionality.
4.1.1
Protection and Control

The devices utilize numerical measuring techniques. Complete numerical signal processing offers high measurement accuracy and long-term consistency, as well as reliable handling of harmonics and transients. Digital filtering techniques and adaptive stabilization of measured values ensure the highest security in establishing the devices correct responses. Device errors are recognized and quickly annunciated by integrated self-monitoring routines. Failure of protection during a fault is therefore almost entirely prevented. You may choose devices with separate protective and process control functions, or select a solution that implements both requirements. The following solutions are available:
G G G
Protection and control in separate devices, Protective devices that provide the capability of control of a circuit breaker or primary switching device through a communication interface, Devices with combined features that, in addition to protective functions, offer on-site operation for several circuit breakers and primary switching devices and extensive substation control functions.
4-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.1 General
4.1.2
Communication
SIPROTEC 4 devices are completely suited for the requirements of modern communication technology. They have interfaces that allow for integration into higher-level control centres, and user friendly operation through an on-site PC or via a modem connection. Simple, comfortable device setup and operation are provided. SIPROTEC 4 devices support the widespread, internationally accepted communication standards, e.g.
G G G G G
EC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMS/DP, DNP 3.0, Modbus, UCA II / Ethernet (future) To Network Control Centers
IEC60870-5-101
Operation and Observation SICAM WinCC DIGSI 4
DCF, GPS
Time Synchronization
SICAM SC
IEC60870-5-103 Profibus FMS
Field Devices
Figure 4-1
Integration of field devices in the SICAM substation control system example
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-3
In the sample configuration in Figure 4-1, data transmitted from the field devices can be processed in the sub-station control device SICAM SC, displayed at the operating and observation station SICAM WinCC, and transferred by the remote terminal unit interfaces (via the network channels) to network control centres (SCADA). In the case when commands are sent to the devices, equally flexible processing is possible; that is, substation switching operations can be initiated from the network control centres, as well as from the operation and observation unit of the substation control system. Note: All SIPROTEC 4 devices also operate with the proven star coupler (e.g. 7XV5). Thus, for simple applications, you can retrieve all information from your office or while on the road. The protocol PROFIBUS DP enables the uncomplicated integration of SIPROTEC devices into PLC-based process control systems (e.g. SIMATIC S5/S7). The protocols DNP3.0 and MODBUS ASCII/RTU allow the integration into a large number of process control systems and control systems of different manufacturers.
4.1.3
Settings
The devices in the SIPROTEC 4 family are delivered with default settings. After settings are made for specific applications, the devices are suitable for direct use in power systems. The windows-based DIGSI 4 software program offers an application-oriented interface with thorough guidance for quick and simple setting of the devices. DIGSI 4 is installed on a normal personal computer. For local use, the PC is connected to the operating serial interface on the front panel of the device.
4.1.4
Operations
All on-site operations of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be done with DIGSI 4. Examples of operations are switching, retrieval of information, or changing of setting groups. These operations can also be performed using the operator control panel on the front of the SIPROTEC 4 device.
4.1.5
Oscillographic Fault Records

DIGSI 4 can also be used to retrieve oscillographic fault data captured by the SIPROTEC 4 device. The DIGRA 4 software program can then be used to provide several different graphical representations of the captured signals. DIGRA 4 also calculates additional values on the basis of the captured signals. The program presents the data in analogue curves with time base, phasor diagrams, locus diagrams, and harmonic charts.
4-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.2 Operator Control Facilities
4.2
4.2.1
Operator Control Facilities

Operator Control Panel On Device
The operating panels of SIPROTEC 4 devices are ergonomically designed and easy to read. The operating panels allow on-site control operations to be done, individual settings to be entered, and all information required for operations to be displayed. The operating panel contains either a full graphical display or a four-line display, depending on the specific device of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
Operating Panel with Four-Line Display

SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SA522
01/05 SIEMENS 1 2
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SA522
MENU
MAIN MENU 01/04 SIEMENS Annunciation 1 Measurement 2
SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR
7SJ61/62

MENU
01/05 1 2
LED
ESC
ENTER
Trip Pickup A Pickup B Pickup C Pickup GND Device faulty

ENTER
MENU
Event Log Operation. Pri
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
LED
ESC
F1
+/LED
7 4 1 Event Log
Operation. Pri Trip Log
8 5 2
9 6 3 7 +/4 1 5 2 0 6 3 +/8 9
ESC ENTER
F2 F3 F4
F1
0
F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-2
SIPROTEC 4 Device, operator control panel with four-line display examples
Note: Refer to Chapter 2 to determine the type of operating field for your specific SIPROTEC4 device.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-5
The functions of the operating and display elements on the operator control panel are described below. Display Process and device information are displayed in the LCD. Commonly displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of the device, protection information, general messages, and alarms. The light for the display is normally off. The light automatically turns on whenever a key is pressed on the operating field. If no input from the operator control panel occurs for ten minutes, then the light turns off again. The light can be controlled via a binary input that is configured (programmed) for this purpose. Keys The keys have various functions.
G G G G
Navigation through the operating menus of the device are accomplished with the , , , keys. The main menu is opened with the MENU key. Changes are cancelled or confirmed with the
ESC
and
ENTER
keys, respectively.
Numerical values are entered with the 0 to 9 keys, the . key for a decimal point, and the +/ key for a negative sign. If a value of infinity () is desired, press the decimal point key twice; appears in the display. The F1 to F4 keys are programmable. The keys are typically used to execute commonly performed actions. Labelling strips are provided. Latched LEDs and output relays are reset and the group of LEDs are tested with the LED key. RUN and ERROR LEDs indicate the condition of the device. All other LEDs are freely configured to indicate process information, status, events, etc. Labelling strips are provided.
G G
LEDs
G G
Operating Serial Interface
Local communication with the device is established through the front operating serial interface with a PC running DIGSI 4. The interface on the device is a 9-pin, female, D-subminiature port.
4-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.2 Operator Control Facilities
4.2.2
DIGSI 4 Tool
DIGSI 4 uses the familiar Windows operating environment.
User Guide
In DIGSI 4 only the settings that are available within a specific device are shown in the specific windows. If a protective feature is changed from disabled to enabled in the Device Configuration, then the settings relevant to that feature become available. Entering settings for SIPROTEC 4 devices is easy due to many types of assistance offered, such as context menus, pop-up lists for the selection of available options, and specific limits for the entry of numerical values.
Configuring Inputs and Outputs
A configuration matrix is used to assign the binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs. Information to be stored in the various buffers and transmitted via the system interface is also selected in this matrix. The setting options are presented in an easy-to-read tabular format. Parts of the matrix can be minimized or expanded as desired to simplify the displayed sections, and therefore the setting process. Filter functions can reduce the size of the matrix to display only relevant information. Password entry is required for tasks such as changing settings, executing control commands, or exercising the test and diagnostics features. The passwords protect against unauthorized access to these critical tasks. DIGSI 4 simplifies commissioning with test functions for the binary inputs, outputs and LEDs. Control of primary equipment can be done. The measured values of the device can be viewed with the program. Oscillographic fault records can be triggered with DIGSI 4. The help system clarifies the individual functions and settings, and provides additional support.
Passwords
Commissioning Aids
Help System
Note: Detailed information about DIGSI 4 can be found in the DIGSI 4 Manual, order number E50417-H1176-C097.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-7
4.3
Information Retrieval
A SIPROTEC 4 device has an abundance of information that can be used to obtain an overview of the present and past operating conditions of the device and the portion of the power system being protected or controlled by the device. The information is represented in separate groups:
G G G
Annunciations, Measurements, Oscillographic fault records.
Remote
If the device is integrated into a substation control system, then information transfer can take place, via a connection to the system interface of the SIPROTEC 4 device, to:
G G
higher level control systems, or substation control devices, e.g. SICAM SC.
Local
On site, the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device can be used to retrieve information. Information retrieval is simple and fast when DIGSI 4 is used. For local use, connect a PC to the operating serial interface at the front of the SIPROTEC 4 device. For remote retrieval of information, communication occurs via a modem connected to the service serial interface. DIGSI 4 must operate in the Online mode to obtain information from the device.
DIGSI 4
4-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.3 Information Retrieval
4.3.1
Annunciations
The scope of the indication (messages) that are given under Annunciation is determined when settings for the configuration of functions are applied to the SIPROTEC device. The messages are divided into the following categories, and displayed using DIGSI 4 or the operator control panel of the device:
G G G G G
Operating messages: Messages independent of network faults, e.g. messages about switching operations or monitoring functions; Fault messages; Ground fault messages (for devices with sensitive ground fault detection); General interrogation; display of present condition messages; Spontaneous messages; continuous display of important messages from the device; e.g., after faults, switching operations, etc.
Figure 4-3
DIGSI 4, annunciations
Display in DIGSI 4
To view the indications in DIGSI 4 Online: Select Annunciation in the navigation (left) window. All annunciation groups are shown in the data (right) window. Double click on an annunciation group in the data window, such as Event Log. The data and time appear. Double click on the entry. The list of indications appears.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-9
Display on the Device
To display messages in the operating field of the SIPROTEC 4 device: Select Main Menu Annunciation e.g. Event Log or Trip Log.
MAIN MENU 01/05 -------------------->Annunciation > 1 >Measurement > 2
ANNUNCIATION 01/05 -------------------->Event Log > 01 >Trip Log > 02
EVENT LOG 19/19 --------------------06.19.98 11:52:05,461 Reset LED ON
Figure 4-4
SIPROTEC 4, device display of operating messages in the event log example
TRIP LOG 01/08 -------------------->Last Fault > 1 >2nd Last Fault > 2
LAST FAULT 01/10 --------------------06.22.98 23:49:34.845 Network Fault 6 ON
Figure 4-5
SIPROTEC 4, device display of fault messages example
4-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.3.2
Measurements
The measured values that are registered are divided into the following categories for display in DIGSI 4 or on the operating field of the device:
G G G G G
Primary values, based on the measured secondary values and the settings entered for the current transformers and voltage transformers. Secondary values, which are the measured values or are derived from the measured values. Percentage values, relative to nominal ratings. Other values calculated by the device, e.g. thermal values or user-defined values. Statistics values.
Figure 4-6
DIGSI 4 measured value display example
Display in DIGSI 4
To display the measured values in the DIGSI 4 Online: Select Measurement in the navigation (left) window. The measured value groups appear in the data (right) window. Double click on a group, for example Primary Values. Double click on the next item in the data window, Operational values, primary in the example. The date and time appear. Double click on the date and time, and the measured values appear.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-11
Display on the Device
To display the measured values in the operating field of the SIPROTEC 4 device: Select Main Menu Measurement e.g. Operation. pri.
MAIN MENU 02/05 -------------------->Annunciation > 1 >Measurement > 2
MEASUREMENT 01/12 ------------------->Operation. pri > 01 >Operation. sec > 02
MEASUREMENT 01/12 -------------------->Operation. pri > 01 >Operation. sec > 02
OPERATION. PRI 02/24 -------------------->IL1 = 1062.8A >IL2 = 1081.5A
Figure 4-7
SIPROTEC 4, device display of measured values example
4.3.3
Oscillographic Fault Records

As an option, SIPROTEC 4 devices can have waveform capturing and event recording. Furthermore, the elements that are shown in the fault records can be selected by the user. The fault record data are retrieved from the device memory by DIGSI 4 and are stored as oscillographic records in standard COMTRADE format. The DIGRA 4 program is used to convert the oscillographic data into graphical representations that can be used to analyse the fault or the event captured by the device. DIGRA 4 calculates additional values from the waveform data, e.g. impedances and rms values, and displays the captured and calculated values in:
G G G G
analogue curves with timebase (time signals), phasor diagrams, locus diagrams, and harmonic graphs.
4-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
digra009
Figure 4-8
DIGRA 4 graphical representations of the waveform data view examples Details can be found in the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417-H1176-C097, and the DIGRA 4 manual, order number E50417-H1176-C070.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-13
4.4
Control
The multiple application possibilities for SIPROTEC 4 devices allow an equally flexible concept for command processing and control.
Remote
If the device is integrated into a master control system, then command outputs can be remotely controlled via the system interface using telegrams from
G G
Higher-level control systems, or substation control devices such as SICAM SC.
Local
On-site, the SIPROTEC 4 device offers the possibility to control a circuit breaker or primary switching equipment using the operator control panel. For devices with a four-line display, switching operations are controlled using: Main menu Control Breaker/Switch Control Equipment and intended direction ON or OFF (Figure 4-9), or The Function Keys F1 to F4. The functionality of these keys is programmable.
MAIN MENU 03/05 --------------------Measurement > 2 >Control > 3
CONTROL 01/03 ------------------->Breaker/Switch> 1 >Tagging > 2
CONTROL 01/03 ------------------->Breaker/Switch> 1 >Tagging > 2
BREAKER/SWITCH 02/04 ------------------->Display > 1 >Control > 2
Figure 4-9
On-site control using the operator control panel
The status of a primary switch can be read out on the display using BREAKER/SWITCH Display (Figure 4-10).
BREAKER/SWITCH 01/04 -------------------->Display > 1 >Control > 2
DISPLAY 01/03 ------------------->52Breaker OPEN Disc.Swit. CLOS
Figure 4-10
Determining primary switch status using the operator control panel
4-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.4 Control
DIGSI 4
Control operations can be carried out using the DIGSI 4 Tool. Connect a PC to the operating interface of the device on site, or communicate with the SIPROTEC device using a modem and the service interface. DIGSI 4 must operate in the Online mode for this function. Select Control in the Navigation window and double click on Breaker / Switches in the data window. In the dialogue window that follows, all relevant primary switching equipment is displayed in a table with the present status. Enter the intended switching direction in the Scheduled column. Answer the question with Yes. The password is requested, the interlocking conditions are checked, and the command is issued. Note: The control option of DIGSI 4 is typically used during commissioning, and for test and diagnostic purposes. Using the graphically supported design tool CFC for logic functions in DIGSI 4, information can be logically combined. Command outputs can be derived from the output of logic functions. The link of the output of the CFC functions to the respective device outputs is determined in the configuration matrix. Only authorized personnel can perform switching operations. Switching operations are protected by passwords. Command outputs may be subject to interlocking checks, which can be configured individually and graphically using the CFC logic too. Standard interlocking, such as ground switch closed status indication, may be already contained in the basic settings of certain device types when delivered from the factory. Details about the command output time, checkback indication monitoring time, etc., are entered within the framework of the settings. All switching operations are recorded in the message list with date and time.
CFC
Passwords
Interlocking
Command Processing Times Event Recording
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-15
4.5
Manual Overwrite / Tagging

If the breaker/switch position is not available from the switch-gear, the status of the switchgear device can be manually set to the actual present position using the operator control panel: Main Menu Control Breaker/Switch Man. Overwrite. The simulated switching status is used for interlocking checks, and for automatically initiated switching operations. For convenience during commissioning or at other times, decoupling of the information exchange between the switchgear and the protective device may be desired for a short period, without disconnecting the wires. This function is activated using the operator control panel: Main Menu Control Breaker/Switch Set Status. To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done. The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in interlocking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as for operating devices. The status of the tagging is displayed on the operating panel, Main Menu Control Tagging Display (Figure 4-11), or changed using Main Menu Control Tagging Set.
Manual Overwrite
Set Status
Tagging
MAIN MENU 03/05 -------------------Annunciation > 1 Measurement > 2 Control > 3
CONTROL 02/03 --------------------Breaker/Switch > 1 Tagging > 2 Interlock > 3
TAGGING 01/02 --------------------Display > 1 Set > 2
Figure 4-11
Tagging equipment from the operator control panel
Note: The Manual Overwrite function is always done using the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 devices.
4-16
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.6 General about the Setting Procedures
4.6
General about the Setting Procedures

The SIPROTEC 4 devices are delivered with standard default settings. Changes to the settings are done with DIGSI 4. The setting procedure for a SIPROTEC 4 device consists of q Overall Protection and Control Design:
G G G
determining the functions that are to be used (device configuration), assigning the binary inputs, outputs, LEDs, buffers, system port, etc. (I/O-configuration defining user-definable logic functions (CFC).
Specific Settings:
G G G
settings for all elements to be used, settings of the protective functions, settings of the process control functions.
Settings are first done Off-line. The settings are then loaded into the SIPROTEC 4 device on-site using the operating serial interface, or remotely by modem and the service interface.
Figure 4-12Setting a SIPROTEC 4 device using DIGSI 4
The transfer of data from DIGSI 4 to the SIPROTEC 4 device is indicated in the display. The progress of the transfer is displayed. See Figure 4-13.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-17
LOAD PARAMETER --------------------
--------------------Download active
Figure 4-13
Screen of Device during Settings Transfer
Setting Sequence
When setting a SIPROTEC 4 device, adhere to the following sequence:

G G G G G G G G
Specify the interfaces, the device data, and the time synchronization, Determine the device functions to be used, Design the assignment of the inputs and outputs using the configuration matrix, Set the default display (optional), Design all of the special logic that is to be employed using CFC (optional), Enter the power system data, Apply the settings to groups A to D (groups B to D optional), Set the passwords.
Setting steps partially build on the decisions from the previous steps. By following the sequence listed, unnecessary changes and rework are avoided. The sequence ensures that information required for an individual step will be available.
Note: Changes to the configuration matrix and the control display are protected by password No. 7 (Password for parameter set).
4-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.6 General about the Setting Procedures
Settings for Protective Elements
Setting changes to individual protective elements and functions can be done using the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device. Other settings such as input/output and device configuration can be viewed from the front panel, but not changed. Display the settings on the LCD using Main Menu Settings e.g. Masking (I/O). Change settings such as date and time using Main Menu Settings Setup/ Extras.
MAIN MENU 04/05 --------------------Annunciation > 1 Measurement > 2 Control > 3 Settings > 4 Test/Diagnose > 5
SETTINGS 10/11 --------------------Device Config. > 01 Masking (I/O) > 02 P.System Data1 > 03 Group A > 04 Group B > 05 Group C > 06 Group D > 07 Change Group > 08 Osc.Fault Rec. > 09 Setup/Extras > 10 Device > 11 --------------------Active Group is: A
Figure 4-14
Changing settings using the operator control panel example
Note: Changes to the individual settings are protected by Password No. 5 (Password for single settings).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-19
4.7
Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions

The individual devices within the SIPROTEC 4 family can be supplied with various protective functions. The ordering number of the device determines the available functions. The functions are specified more precisely through the process of enabling and disabling in the Device Configuration area of the settings. To specify the active functions using DIGSI 4: Double click on Device Configuration in the data window. Click on the individual fields and select the functions to be enabled.
Figure 4-15
DIGSI 4, setting the device configuration example
The device configuration can be viewed from the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device. In the main menu, select Settings Device Config.
DEVICE CONFIG. 07/16 -------------------0117 Coldload Pickup Enabled

Figure 4-16 Viewing device configuration from the operator control panel example
4-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)
4.8
Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)

A configuration matrix is used to determine processing of the binary inputs, outputs, LEDs, and indication buffers. Configuration is performed with DIGSI 4. The configuration matrix is primarily divided into the following columns: q q Device functions Information, e.g. indications or command with
G G G G
information number, identification of the information, display text, representative brief text of the information on the device display, long text, extensive description of the information, type, identification of the information, e.g. CF_D2 double command with 2 output contacts and feedback indication;
Source, that is, origin of the information with

G G G
binary inputs function keys F, freely programmable keys on the operating field, e.g. assigned switching operations, etc. as the origin of the information, CFC C (programmable logic), user-specific logic outputs as the origin of the information;
Destination of the information, with

G G G G G
binary outputs for the output of signals, LED, display of information on the device front, e.g. messages, system interface S, transmission of information, e.g. to a substation control system, CFC C (programmable logic), information as an input to a user-specified logic, buffer, in which the information should be entered, operation annunciation buffer or fault annunciation buffer, control menu CR, primary device can be controlled or tagging can be set.
The user determines the configurations by

G G
clicking on the appropriate column, or by Using the context menu: L (latched), U (unlatched), H (activate high), L (activate low), (configured), (not configured), etc.
DIGSI 4 checks the entry for plausibility and locks the input field if necessary. A locked input field is shown in gray.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-21
Figure 4-17
DIGSI 4, input/output assignment with the configuration matrix example
Filter Functions
With the use of filters, either all information can be displayed or a selection can be done according to indications, commands, or measured values. Additionally, there is a filter setting that differentiates between information configured and not configured. The filters allows for a quick overview and simple checking of the configuration settings. Also, columns and rows can be temporarily hidden from view, so that you can view only the sections of the total matrix that are relevant.
New Information
A further function of the configuration matrix is the capability to define new information. This is accomplished by inserting a new line, defining the appropriate information type, and assigning it to a source and a destination. The new information can also be displayed in the LCD of the SIPROTEC 4 device after it has been downloaded to the device. The function keys on the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device can be assigned to commonly performed operating functions, e.g. initiation of a switching operation. Select the appropriate function key F1 to F4 in the Source F column for the related information (e.g. switching command).
Function Keys
4-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)
CFC
SIPROTEC 4 device information can be connected in a user-specified manner using the programmable logic components of the DIGSI 4 CFC. For example, the user can implement interlocking checks, create grouped messages, or derive limit value violation messages. Information can be both a source and a destination in combined CFC editing. The specific logics inputs, e.g. the individual messages that are to be combined to form a grouped message, must be marked in the Destination C column. The logics output, the grouped message in this example, is derived from the Source C column.
Viewing the Configuration on the Operating Panel
The configuration can be seen on the operating panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device. In the main menu, select Settings Masking (I/O).
MASKING (I/O) 01/03 -------------------->Binary Inputs > 1 >LED > 2 In the next menu, select Masking (I/O) e.g. Binary Inputs.
BINARY INPUTS 02/20 -------------------->Binary Input 1 > >Binary Input 2 >

Figure 4-18 Reading the configuration using the operator control panel, example assignment of binary input 2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-23
4.9
Programmable Logic CFC

The CFC program in DIGSI 4 can be used to create additional logic in SIPROTEC 4 devices. For example, special interlocking conditions for controlled equipment can be designed. Limit checks for measured values can be created, and corresponding control can be designed. SIPROTEC 4 devices may have some CFC functions set at the factory, according to the type and version of the device. User-defined CFC functions are done in graphical form. Generic logic modules (AND, OR, NAND, etc.) and analog modules that are specially created for the requirements of process control engineering (e.g., MAX, MIN, etc.) are available. The CFC-modules are combined to form complete CFC-logic functions in order to
G G G
perform system-specific checks (e.g. interlocking), generate messages if measured values approach a critical value, or build group messages for transfer to a substation control systems.
Figure 4-19
DIGSI 4, CFC basic options example
4-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC
CFC Designing
Figure 4-20 shows the graphical nature of the CFC logic tool, and some of the components that can be used to build the logic.
Note: CFC settings are protected in DIGSI 4 by Password No. 7 (Password for parameter set).
Details about designing with the CFC program can be found in the instruction book, order number E50417-H1176-C098.
Figure 4-20
CFC Logic example
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-25
4.10
Power System Data

In the window for Power System Data 1, important settings are entered that relate to the power system and primary equipment connected to the device. The settings include:
G G G
Power System Data 1
system data such as frequency, voltage, etc. data for the main current transformers and voltage transformers, circuit breaker or primary switch-gear information.
Figure 4-21
DIGSI 4 window for setting the power system data 1 example
Power System Data 2
Power System Data 2 are part of the setting groups, which can be switched over during operation (see chapter 4.11). These include for example:
G G G
Primary Operating Voltage Primary Operating Current Characteristic Data of the protected object etc.
4-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.11 Setting Groups
4.11
Setting Groups
A SIPROTEC 4 device has up to four setting groups A through D. The setting options for each group are the same; however, the applied settings can be, and are typically intended to be, different in each group. The active setting group can easily be changed while the device is in-service. A major advantage of multiple setting groups is the capability of optimizing the protection and control for the existing configuration of the network being protected. In other words, the protection and control can be changed as the network changes. The setting groups are saved in the device. The setting groups can be changed during operation using DIGSI 4, from the operator control panel on the device, by triggering binary inputs, or via the system interface.
Figure 4-22
DIGSI 4, Entering Settings in Setting Group A; Other Groups are Similar
Note: Settings that are common to all protective functions, such as Power System Data 2, can be dynamically activated like the settings in Groups A through D.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-27
Settings
Double click on a protective function shown in the listbox of Figure 4-22 to obtain a dialogue box for entering the settings associated with this function (Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23
DIGSI 4, entering settings for a protective function example
Changing Setting Groups
The setting groups can be changed during operation using DIGSI 4, from the operator control panel on the device, by triggering binary inputs, or via the system interface. The active setting group is indicated.
CHANGE GROUP 02/02 --------------------0301 ACTIVE GROUP Group A 0302 CHANGE to Group A Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input IEC608705103
Figure 4-24 SIPROTEC 4 device, changing setting groups on the operator control panel
4-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.12 General Device Settings
4.12
General Device Settings

The settings of the display to show information of network faults on the LEDs and the LCD on the front of the SIPROTEC 4 device are defined in the DIGSI 4 window shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25
DIGSI 4, general device settings (targets) example
The setting can also be changed at any time using the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device: Main Menu Settings Device.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-29
4.13
Time tracking in a SIPROTEC 4 device can be implemented using:
G G G G G
DCF77 Radio Receiver (Time Signal from PTB Braunschweig), IRIG-B Radio Receiver (Time Signal from the global positioning satellite (GPS) system), signals via the system interface from, for example, a substation control system, radio clock using a system-specific synchronizer box, minute impulses on a binary input.
Setting of the time synchronization is done exclusively with DIGSI 4: Double click on Time Synchronization in the data window and enter the settings.
Figure 4-26
DIGSI 4, setting of the time synchronization example
Read-out on the Operator Control Panel
Using the SIPROTEC 4 device operator control panel, the time synchronization settings can be retrieved: Main Menu Settings Setup/Extras Clock Setup.
SETUP/EXTRAS 02/06 --------------------Date/Time > 1 Clock Setup > 2 Serial Ports > 3 Device-ID > 4 MLFB/Version > 5 5 Contrast > 6
Figure 4-27
CLOCK SETUP 01/03 --------------------Offset 0min Error Time 2min Source Internal
Read-out of time synchronization settings from the operator control panel
4-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.14 Serial Interfaces
4.14
Serial Interfaces
Devices in the SIPROTEC 4 family can be equipped with up to four serial interfaces and a time.
G
The system interface is used for connection with higher-level control centers. The following protocols are presently available:
IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMS, PROFIBUS DP, DNP3.0 Level 2, MODBUS ASCII/RTU
G G
The time control interface is used for time synchronization (e.g. IRIG B), The service interface (DIGSI 4, Modem) is for connection to remote diagnostic facilities, e.g. DIGSI 4 via modem and/or a star connection. All DIGSI 4 operations are possible via this interface, The PC-interface at front is used for on-site connection of a PC, on which DIGSI 4 is installed. All operations that are possible using DIGSI 4 can be done at this interface.
In the DIGSI 4 Interface Settings window (under Serial Ports) you can define, among other items, settings for:
G G
Transmission protocols and Transmission speeds.
Note: The service (DIGSI 4, Modem) and system interface (SCADA) can be equipped with different modules for connection to other devices via optical fibers or an RS 232/485 bus.
The following an example for the configuring of an IEC-interface. In Chapter 5 you will learn more about how to configure further protocols. To set the framing and baud rate: Double click on Serial Ports in the data window and enter the specific settings in the window that follows.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-31
Figure 4-28
DIGSI 4, interface settings window
Read-out on the Operator Control Panel
The interface settings can be checked using the SIPROTEC 4 device operator control panel. In the main menu, select Settings Setup/Extras Serial Ports following menus.
SETUP/EXTRAS 03/06 --------------------Date/Time > 1 Clock Setup > 2 Serial Ports > 3 DeviceID > 4 MLFB/Version > 5 5 Contrast > 6
Figure 4-29
SERIAL PORTS 01/03 --------------------Front Port > 1 System Port > 2 Service Port > 3
Read-out of serial interface settings from the operator control panel, example
Note: The interface for connecting a time control device is described in the Sub-section 4.14, Time Synchronization.
4-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4.15 Passwords
4.15
Passwords
Passwords are assigned to a SIPROTEC 4 device to protect against unintended changes to the device or unauthorized operations from the device, such as switching. The following access levels are defined:
G G G G G G
Switching/tagging/manual overwrite, Non-interlocked switching, Test and diagnostics, Hardware test menus, Individual settings, Setting Groups.
Figure 4-30
DIGSI 4, window indicating the active passwords example
When using DIGSI 4 or the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device, a password is requested for the specific functions.
Note: Password protection against unauthorized access is only in place during on-line operation. The passwords for setting changes are first activated when the settings are loaded into the device. The passwords are irrelevant in the DIGSI 4 off-line mode. To deactivate a password, you must know the password.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
4-33
Passwords can only be changed using DIGSI 4. To change an existing password: In the Passwords window shown in Figure 4-30, double click on the password to be changed. In the next window (Figure 4-31), enter the present password, the new password, and confirm with the new password again and OK.
Figure 4-31
DIGSI 4, changing passwords
Passwords are numbers up to 8 digits. At delivery all passwords are set to 000000.
Note: If the password for setting group switching has been forgotten, a temporary password can be received from Siemens. The temporary password can be used to define a new password for this function. The registration number of the DIGSI 4 software package will be required to receive the temporary password. n
4-34
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Configuration
Configuration is the process of customizing the relay for the intended application. To accomplish this, the following questions must be answered: Which functions do you need? Which information and measured quantities need to be retrieved via which inputs? Which information, measured data, and control actions need to be issued via which outputs? Which user-definable functions need to be performed in CFC (Continuous Function Chart)? Which information should be displayed on the front panel of the device? Which interfaces are to be used? Which time source is to be used to synchronize the internal clock? This chapter describes in details how to configure the 7SD52.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
Configuration of the Scope of Functions Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands Creating User Defined Functions with CFC Serial Interfaces Date and Time Stamping
5-2 5-7 5-31 5-40 5-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-1
5 Configuration
5.1
General
Configuration of the Scope of Functions

The 7SD52 relay contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. Furthermore, commands (control actions) can be suited to individual needs of the protected object. In addition, individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction between functions may be adjusted. Example for the configuration of the scope of functions: 7SD52 devices should be intended to be used for overhead lines and transformers. Overload protection should only be applied on transformers. If the device is used for overhead lines this function is set to Disabled and if used for transformers this function is set to Enabled. Note: Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the relay (see ordering code in the Appendix for details). Configuration settings may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI 4 and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via the serial service interface. Operation via DIGSI 4 is described in Chapter 4 as well as in the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417H1176C097. Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration settings (see Chapter 4, last section). Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device.
Determination of Functional Scope
Figure 5-1
Device Configuration dialogue box in DIGSI 4 example
5-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions
The functional scope with the available options is set in the Device Configuration dialogue box (see Figure 5-1) to match equipment requirements. To change a function, click on the corresponding line under Scope, and select the desired option in the list which appears. The drop-down list closes automatically upon selection of an item. Before closing the dialogue box, transfer the modified functional setting to the relay by clicking on the item DIGSI Device. The data is stored in the relay in a non-volatile memory buffer. The configured functional scope can be viewed at the front of the relay itself, but cannot be modified there. The settings associated with the functional scope can be found in the MAIN MENU under Settings Device Config. Special Cases Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below. If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION must be set to Enabled. In this case, it is possible to apply up to four different groups of settings for the function parameters (refer also to Subsection 6.1.2). During normal operation, a convenient and fast switch-over between these setting groups is possible. The setting Disabled implies that only one function parameter setting group can be applied and used. Address 0110 Trip mode applies only to devices with single-pole or three-pole tripping. Set 1-/3pole if single-pole is also desired, i. e. if the device is supposed to operate with single-pole or with single-pole/three-pole automatic reclosure. It must be provided that the device is equipped with an automatic reclosure function or that an external device is used to carry out the automatic reclosure. Additionally the circuit breaker must be suited for single-pole tripping. Note: When changed address 0110, then first save this alteration by clicking OK. Re-open the dialogue box, since there are other settings which are dependent on the selection in address 0110. The differential protection function DIFF.PROTECTION (address 0112) as a main function of the device should always be Enabled. This also implies the supplementary functions of the differential protection such as breaker intertrip. For the transmission of the protection signals each device is equipped with one or two protection data interfaces. The assignment of the protection data interfaces is essential for the differential protection system, i.e. the interaction of the devices at the ends of the protected object. Activate the protection data interface no. 1 in address 0115 P. INTERFACE 1, to activate the protection data interface no. 2 refer to address 0116 P. INTERFACE 2. At least one protection data interface has to be set to Enabled, so that the differential protection makes sense. A protected object with two ends requires at least one protection data interface. If there are more ends, it must be guaranteed that all devices that belong together are interconnected directly or in-directly (via other devices). For more information about options see Section 6.4.1 referring to Communication Topology. The Direct Local Trip (address 0122 DTT Direct Trip) is a command that is initiated from an external device for tripping the local circuit breaker. A preselection of the tripping characteristic of the time overcurrent protection can be made in address 0126 Back-Up O/C. In addition to the definite-time overcurrent pro-
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-3
5 Configuration
tection (definite time) an inverse-time overcurrent protection can be configured that either operates according to an IEC characteristic (TOC IEC) or to an ANSI characteristic (TOC ANSI). The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data (Section 10.6). The time overcurrent protection may naturally also be set to Disabled. If the device provides an automatic reclosure function (AR), the addresses 0133 and 0134 are relevant. If no automatic reclosure is desired for the feeder the device 7SD52 is connected to, or if an external device carries out the automatic reclosure, address 0133 AUTO RECLOSE is set to Disabled. Automatic reclosure is only permitted for overhead lines. It must not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a combination of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in a block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), reclosure is only permissible if it can be ensured that it can only take place in the event of a fault on the overhead line. In the address mentioned the number of desired reclosure cycles is set. Choose the desired number of AR-cycles from a total scope of 8 AR cycles. You can also set ADT (adaptive dead time): in this case the behaviour of the automatic reclosure depends on the cycles of the remote end. However, at one end of the line the number of cycles must be configured. This end must provide an infeed. The other end (or ends in case of more than 2 ends) may operate with adaptive dead time. See Subsection 6.9.1 for detailed information. The AR control mode under address 0134 allows a total of four options. You can determine whether the sequence of automatic reclosure cycles is defined by the fault situation of the pickup of the starting protection function(s) or by the type of trip command. The automatic reclosure can also operate with or without action time. The Trip w/ Tact or Trip w/o Tact command setting is preferred when singlepole or single/three-pole automatic reclosure cycles are desired and are possible. In this case different dead times (for every AR-cycle) are possible after single-pole tripping and after three-pole tripping. The tripping protection function determines the type of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. The dead time is controlled dependent on this. Using the Pickup w/ Tact or Pickup w/o Tact setting, different dead times can be set for the auto-reclosure cycles after single, two- and three-phase pickup on faults. The fault detection (pickup) image of the protection functions at the instant the trip command disappears is decisive. This operating mode also enables the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault for three-pole AR-cycles; but tripping is always three-pole. The Trip w/ Tact or Pickup w/ Tact (with action time) setting provides an action time for every AR-cycle. This is started by the general pickup signal (i. e. logic OR combination of all internal and external pickup signals of all protection functions which are configured to start the automatic reclosure function). If there is yet no trip command when the action time has expired, the corresponding automatic reclosure cycle cannot be executed. See Subsection 6.9.1 for more information. For the time graded protection this setting is recommended. If the protection function to operate with reclosure does not have a general fault detection signal for starting the action times, select the setting Trip w/o Tact or Pickup w/out Tact (without action time). For the trip circuit supervision the number of trip circuits that shall be monitored is set in address 0140 TripCirc.Superv with the following settings: 1 trip circuit, 2 trip circuits or 3 trip circuits. The number of relays (address 0143 NUMBER OF RELAY must be equal to the number of ends of the protected object. Take into consideration that each set of current transformer that limits the protected object. The line shown in Figure 5-2 provides
5-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions
four ends and therefore four devices, as the line is limited by four sets of current transformers. Two devices would normally be sufficient if current transformers 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 are connected in parallel at the secondary side and if connecting each pair of transformer sets to only one device. But, if an external fault occurred, causing a high short-circuit current passing the current transformers 1 and 2, the devices would be understabilized.
7SD52
Device 1
7SD52
Device 3
7SD52
Device 2
7SD52
Device 4
Figure 5-2
Protected object with 4 ends and 4 devices
If the device is connected to voltage transformers, set this condition in address 0144 V-TRANSFORMER. Only if set connected, the voltage dependent functions (measured values of voltages, power and power factor) can be registered by the device. If a power transformer is located within the protected zone, set this condition in address 0145 TRANSFORMER. The data of the transformer are registered by the device during the configuration of the general protection data (see Topological Data for Transformers (optional) in Subsection 6.1.3).
5.1.1
Setting Overview Note: Depending on the type and version of the device it is possible that addresses are missing or have different default settings.
Addr. 103 104 110 112 115
Setting Title Grp Chge OPTION OSC. FAULT REC. Trip 1pole
Setting Options Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 3pole only 1-/3pole
Default Setting Disabled Enabled 3pole only Enabled Enabled
Comments Setting Group Change Option Oscillographic Fault Records 1pole trip permitted Differential protection Protection Interface 1 (Port D)
DIFF.PROTECTION Enabled Disabled P. INTERFACE 1 Enabled Disabled
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-5
5 Configuration
Addr. 116 118 122 124 126
Setting Title P. INTERFACE 2 GPS-SYNC. DTT Direct Trip HS/SOTF-O/C Back-Up O/C
Setting Options Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Default Setting Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Comments Protection Interface 2 (Port E) GPS synchronization DTT Direct Transfer Trip Instantaneous HighSpeed/SOTF Overcurrent Backup overcurrent
Disabled Time Overcurrent Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) Disabled with Pickup and Action time with Pickup but without Action time withTrip and Action time with Trip but without Action time Disabled Enabled Disabled 1 trip circuit 2 trip circuits 3 trip circuits Disabled Enabled 2 relays 3 relays 4 relays 5 relays 6 relays not connected connected NO YES Disabled
133
Auto Reclose
Auto-Reclose Function
134
AR control mode
with Trip but without Action time
AR control mode
139 140
BREAKER FAILURE Trip Cir. Sup.
Disabled Disabled
Breaker Failure Protection Trip Circuit Supervision
142 143
Therm.Overload NUMBER OF RELAY
Disabled 2 relays
Thermal Overload Protection Number of relays
144 145
V-TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER
connected NO
Voltage transformers Transformer inside protection zone
5-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5.2 Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands
5.2
General
Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Upon delivery, the display on the front panel of the relay, some of the function keys, the binary inputs and outputs (output contacts) are assigned to certain information. These assignments may be modified, for most information, allowing adaptation to the local requirements. During configuration, certain information within the relay is assigned to certain physical interfaces (e.g., binary inputs and output contacts) or logical interfaces (e.g. userdefined logic, CFC). It must be determined which information should be linked with which device interface. It may also be determined which properties the information should have. Messages and statistical values from earlier events can be lost during configuration; therefore, operational and fault data and statistic counters which are memorized in the relay should be read and saved if desired, prior to changing the configuration.
5.2.1
Preparation
Before configuration is started, the overall interfacing requirements must be assessed. The required inputs and outputs must be coordinated with the number of physical inputs and outputs present on the relay. The types of indications and commands, and their requirements, must be taken into account.
Indications
Indications may be information of the device regarding events and conditions that can be transmitted via output contacts (e.g. start-up of the processor system or a trip signal of a protective function). These are defined as output indications. Indications also include information from the plant to the relay regarding plant events and conditions (e.g. position of a circuit breaker). These are defined as input indications. Depending on the type, indications may be further classified. Figures 5-3 and 5-4 show typical indication types schematically. Two binary inputs whose normal conditions are opposite, and which are monitored by the relay, are required for a double point indication.
(Internal logic information)
Restart
(Plant)
L+
(7SD52) Figure 5-3
Output indication via relay contact
Output indication (OUT)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-7
5 Configuration
e.g. mcb
(7SD52)
Binary input (e.g. BI1)
e.g. Isoloator
(7SD52)
Binary input (e.g. BI 2) Binary input (.e.g. BI 3)
L+ L
L+
(Plant)
L Single point indication (SP)
(Plant)
Double point indication (DP)
Figure 5-4
Input indications (SP & DP)
Control Commands
Control commands are output indications which are specially configured for the transmission of control signals to power plant switching devices (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.).
G
For each device to be controlled, determine if switching is to be done with 1 contact, 11/2 contacts (single contact and common), or 2 contacts; with a single or double command; and with or without feedback signals. See Table 5-1 and Figures 5-5 to 5-9. The information to be processed and the command type are determined with these decisions. Assign the necessary binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC device to the specific function. Important to note are: Messages and commands associated with a switching device must always occupy sequential binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC device; The TRIP (OFF)command is always configured prior to the associated CLOSE (ON)command; Limitations may arise because of the commoning of some binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC device.
Once the type of a command has been established, DIGSI 4 reserves a corresponding number of output relay contacts. For this, the corresponding output relays are numbered consecutively. This must be observed when wiring the relays to the corresponding power plant devices to be controlled. Table 5-1 shows the most important command types. They are made available as options in the configuration matrix for the SIPROTEC device (see also Binary Outputs for Switching Devices in Subsection 5.2.4). All double commands, with and without feedback indications, are also available as transformer step commands. The following Figures 5-5 through 5-9 show time diagrams, control settings, and the sequence of relay positioning in the configuration matrix for frequently used command types.
Table 5-1
Most important command types
Single Command with Single Output Double Command with Single Outputs
With 1 relay With 2 relays
without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback
C_S CF_S C_D2 CF_D2
5-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 5-1
Most important command types
Double Command with Single Outputs plus Common Output Double Command with Double Outputs Double Command with Double (Close) and Single (Trip) Outputs
With 3 relays With 4 relays With 3 relays
without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback
C_D3 CF_D3 C_D4 CF_D4 C_D12 CF_D12
For double commands, the first output relay is selected using DIGSI 4. The other output relays will be automatically selected by DIGSI 4. In the sequence of output relays, each TRIP command is placed before the associated CLOSE command. For commands with feedback indications, DIGSI 4 reserves another line in the configuration matrix for the switching device feedback indications. Here, the OPEN position feedback is placed before the CLOSED position feedback as well. For Figures 5-5 through 5-9, the following abbreviations apply: C+ Relay contact for closing C Relay contact for tripping CC Relay contact is common CCC Relay contact is common to a bus L+; L Control voltage
CLOSE command C+ C+
CLOSE
L+
t
1
Switching device L
Matrix configuration:
X
C+
Figure 5-5
Single command with single contact
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-9
5 Configuration
CLOSE command C+
TRIP command C+
CLOSE
L+ C Switching TRIP device L
C
1 2
XX
C C+
Figure 5-6
Double command with single contact each
CLOSE command C+
TRIP command
L+ C+
CLOSE
C Switching TRIP device
C CC
CC
1 2 3
XXX
C C+ CC
Figure 5-7
Double command with single contact each plus a common contact
CLOSE command C+1 C+2 C1
TRIP command C+1

CLOSE
L+ C1 Switching TRIP device C2 L t
C+2 C2
1 2
XXXX
C1 C+1 C2 C+2
Figure 5-8
Double command with double contacts (with 4 relays)
5-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
CLOSE command C+1
TRIP command
L+ C+1
CLOSE
C Switching TRIP device
C+2 C t
1 2 3
C+2 L
XXX
C C+1 C+2
Figure 5-9
Double command with double and single contacts (with 3 relays)
5.2.2
General
Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix

This section deals with the structure and operation of the configuration matrix. The configuration matrix can be viewed without making any configuration changes. Information characteristics and configuration steps are described in Subsection 5.2.3, and configuration is demonstrated in Subsection 5.2.4. Configuration of information is performed, using a PC and the DIGSI 4 software program, via the operator or service interface. The configuration is represented in DIGSI 4 as a matrix (Figure 5-10). Each row is assigned to an information of the device. It is identified by a function number No, LCD text (display text D), an explanation (long text L, minimized in Figure 5-10), and an information type T. The columns give the interfaces which should be the sources and/or destinations of the information. In addition to physical device inputs and outputs, there may be internal interfaces for user definable logic (CFC), message buffers, or the device display.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-11
5 Configuration
Filters
Information Catalog
Standard View
Short view
Figure 5-10
Extract from the configuration matrix in the DIGSI 4 user interface example
Information in the rows is assigned to appropriate interfaces in the columns via an entry in the intersecting cell. This establishes which information controls which destination, or from which source which information is received. In the configuration matrix, not only the configuration is shown, but also the property of configuration. For example, information regarding an event which is configured for display on a LED may be latched or unlatched. The possible combinations of information and interfaces is dependent on the information type. Impossible combinations are filtered out by DIGSI 4 plausibility checks. The matrix columns are divided into three categories: Information, Source, and Destination. To the left of the matrix, information is divided into information groups. Reducing the Matrix The matrix may become very extensive because of the amount of information contained within. Therefore, it is useful to limit the display via filtering to certain information, thus reducing the number of rows.
5-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
The tool-bar below the menu bar contains two pull-down menus by which information may be filtered. Using the first menu, the rows can be limited to indications, commands, indications and commands, or measured and metered values. The second menu allows to display only configured information, information configured to physical inputs and outputs, or non-configured information. A further reduction in the number of rows is possible, by compressing an information group to one row. This is done by double-clicking on the group label area (located to the far left). If this is done, the number of rows is reduced, allowing the user to focus on the information groups of interest. A second double-click restores all rows in the information group. To limit the width of the matrix, two possibilities exist: The tool bar allows to switch between standard view and short view, or individual columns can be hidden. In the latter case you double-click on the field with the column heading thus hiding the contents of the associated column. In the example of Figure 5-10, the long text (L) under Information is not shown. By double-clicking on long text field (L), the long text becomes visible again, and vice versa. With two options on the tool bar you may switch between standard view and short view, thus modifying the all columns under the Source and Destination title blocks. The columns associated with the Information block remain unchanged. In standard view, all binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs are accessible, as shown in Figure 5-10 for the binary outputs and LEDs. In short view (not illustrated in the figure), a common column is displayed for each of the sources and destinations. Within the individual cells of a common column, information regarding the configuration type is available in an abbreviated form. For example, the abbreviation H1 in a cell of the common binary input (BI) column means that the corresponding information is configured with active voltage (High) to binary input 1. If an information is assigned to several sources or destinations, the abbreviations of all destinations are shown, separated by commas. If there is not enough space in the cell for the simultaneous display of all abbreviations, a double-click on the cell and movement of the text cursor within the cell allows to scroll through the entire contents of the cell. To switch between standard view and short view, the menu item View can also be used. Information Groups All information is organized into information groups. In addition to general relay information, information regarding individual device functions is also included. By clicking on an information group title area with the right mouse button, a context menu can be viewed, which contains information regarding the properties of that information group. This is particularly useful if the information group is associated with a function that contains parameter settings. If the information group belongs to a protective function for the relay, a dialogue window can be accessed in which the settings of the protective function may be read out and modified. The procedure for entering settings of a protective function is described in general in Chapter 4. Details regarding the settings for various functions are found in Chapter 6. The settings group to be processed may be selected via the menu item View Setting Group.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-13
5 Configuration
Information
The column header Information contains the function number, the LCD text (display text), an explanation (long text), and the information type. The following abbreviations are used for the information types: Annunciations: SP Single Point indication (binary input, e.g. LED reset, refer also to Subsection 5.2.1), DP Double Point indication (binary input, refer also to Subsection 5.2.1), OUT OUTput indication (protection output signals e.g. pickup, trip ...), IntSP Internal Single Point indication, IntDP Internal Double Point indication, TxTap Transformer Tap Changer. Control Commands for switching devices: C_S Single Command with Single output without feedback, CF_S Single Command with Single output with Feedback, C_SN Single Command with Single output Negated without feedback, C_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs without feedback, CF_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs with Feedback, C_D12 Double Command with 1 trip output and 2 close outputs without feedback, CF_D12 Double Command with 1 trip output and 2 close outputs with Feedback, C_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with single outputs and common output without feedback, CF_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with single outputs and common output with Feedback, C_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with double outputs without feedback, CF_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with double outputs with Feedback, C_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs Negated without Feedback, CF_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs Negated with Feedback. Measured Values: MV Measured Value, MVU Measured Value, User defined, LVU Limit Value, User defined.
Metered Values: PMV Pulse Metered Value. The information contains various properties depending on the information type, which are partially fixed and may be partially influenced. Source The source denotes the origin of the information which the matrix receives for further processing. Possible sources are: BI Binary Input, F Function key, which may serve to introduce a switching action, C CFC, i.e., message comes from user-definable logic.
5-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Destination
The destination indicates to which interface the information is forwarded. Possible destinations are: BO Binary Output, LED LED display on the device front panel, Buffer Annunciation Buffers with Operation messages (event log) and fault messages (Trip log) in the device, S System Interface, C CFC, Information is processed by CFC program of the user-definable logic, CM Control of switchgear if a switch plant is indicated in the Control Menu of the device.
5.2.3
General
Establishing Information Properties

Different types of information contain different types of properties. To view the properties associated with a specific information unit (indication, command, etc.), position the mouse on the specific row under Information, and then use the right mouse button to access a context menu where Properties can be selected. For example, if the cursor is positioned on a specific output indication, the right mouse button is pressed, and the menu item Properties is selected, then a choice of whether the indication should appear in the oscillographic fault records (Figures 5-11, 5-12, and 5-13) is presented. For internal single point indications, the default status of the indication (on, off, or undefined) after device reset can be selected as well (Figure 5-12). Note that the possible properties of information for the system interface depend on the facilities of transmission protocol. See also Section Protocol Dependent Functions in the Appendix.
Output Indication (OUT)
Figure 5-11
Information properties example for the information type Output Indication (OUT)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-15
5 Configuration
Internal Single Point Indication (IntSP)
Figure 5-12
Information properties example for the information type Internal Single Point Indication (IntSP)
Singe Point Indication (SP)
Figure 5-13
Information properties example for information type Single Point Indication (SP)
Double Point Indication (DP)
In addition to the properties entered for single point indications, a Suppress intermediate position check box is available, which may be checked to suppress the intermediate indication during operations. If this field is marked, then the filter time, which can also be set (see margin heading Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression below), is only effective for the intermediate (= undefined position) indication. Hence, briefly un-
5-16
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
defined conditions or contact chattering will not lead to an alarm; however, defined changes in the condition (final positions) are immediately reported.
Figure 5-14
Information properties example for information type Double Point Indication (DP)
Transformer Tap Changer (TxTap)
The transformer tap changer position is communicated, via binary inputs, in a specified encoding format (maximum of 62 positions). Only binary inputs that are in direct order with regard to numbering can be used. For the encoding formats available (binary code, BCD code, 1-of-n code), four settings (number of taps, number of bits, display offset, and tap interval) may be programmed. Their bit pattern corresponds to an individual transformer tap changer position which is represented in the device display and in the indication buffers (Figure 5-15). If Moving contact is activated, the tap position is valid and accepted only when the moving contact of the tap changer has signalled its final position.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-17
5 Configuration
Figure 5-15
Information Properties Example for Information Type Transformer Tap Changer (TxTap)
If none of the available encoding formats is selected, each individual tap changer position may be set in a table. The table is accessed after the pull-down menu Table for encoding is opened, by selecting the button at the side. The encoded transformer tap changer position bit pattern is transformed into digital values between 1 and 62. An unrecognized pattern is interpreted as position 63. The number of bits coincides with the number of the binary inputs to be configured, and limits the number of positions to be represented. Using the display offset, the beginning of the evaluated bits may have an offset of a programmed number. The stepping of the transfomer taps may be modified, using the tap interval feature (see example). Example: Four transformer position settings are to be represented by three binary inputs, using the designators 3 through 6. The encoding is binary.
Orientation BI2 Desired representation BI3
BI1
X X X
X X -
X X
63.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 63.00
5-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Using three binary inputs (= 3 bits), a maximum of 23 = 8 position settings may be represented in binary code. In order to begin the representation of transformer tap changer positions with the value 3, the display offset is chosen accordingly. The following must be set on the information property window: Encoding Number of taps Number of bits Display offset Tap interval Binary 4 3 2 1
The three binary inputs used for this must have sequential numbers, such as BI 1, BI 2, and BI 3. Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression For input indications (single point indications SP, double point indications DP, transformer tap changer TxTAP), filter times may be entered (pick-up and drop-out delays) to suppress momentary changes in potential at the binary input (e.g. contact chatter), refer also to Figure 5-13 to 5-15. Filtering occurs during an input change of state, with the same setting values whether coming or going. Information is only distributed when the new state continues to exist after a preset time interval (in milliseconds). The setting range is from 0 to 86,400,000 ms, or 24 hours. Whether or not the filter interval is restarted for each change of state during the filtering (filter re-triggering) is selectable. It is also possible to set chatter suppression for each indication (Figure 5-13 and 5-14). The contact chatter settings, themselves, are set the same for all input indications (see Subsection 5.2.6). User Defined Measured Values (MVU) and Limit Values (LVU) For the information type Measured Values User Defined (MVU), the units, the conversion factor, and the number of significant digits following the decimal point may be specified. For the information type Limit Values User Defined (LVU), a limit value may be programmed (Figure 5-16).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-19
5 Configuration
Figure 5-16
Information properties example for information type Limit Value User Defined (LVU)
If, for example, a low current reporter should be established using the CFC logic, and the percentage of the measured current should be matched to a certain amp value, the following values are entered in window according to Figure 5-16: The Dimension is A (amps). The Conversion Factor is 150: 150 A corresponds to 100 % input current. The limit value upon start-up is set for 120 A.
Entering Your Own Information
The available information in the configuration matrix is determined by the device type and the configured functional scope. If necessary, you may extend the configuration matrix to information groups or individual information defined and entered by yourself. Such user defined groups and information may be deleted at any time, in contrast to predefined groups and information. In order to insert a new information group, click on a cell within a group that is next to the location where the new group should be located. After pressing the right mouse button, a context menu appears (Figure 5-17).
Figure 5-17
Dialogue box to insert a new information group example
If one of the first two alternatives is selected, a second dialogue box opens, in which the name of the new information group is entered, in short text (display text) and in long text (Figure 5-18). After clicking OK, the new group is positioned.
5-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Figure 5-18
Entry of the name of a user defined information group example
Information may be entered into the new information group using the information catalog (Figure 5-19). The information catalog is found in the menu bar under the View option, or via an icon in the toolbar. User information may be entered into both the user defined groups and any other available information group.
Figure 5-19
Information catalog window example
The information catalog is basically structured the same way as the DIGSI 4 Manager with folders and sub-folders. To proceed to information of sub-folders in the catalog, click on a plus symbol or double-click on an folder icon. The designation of the initial levels of the catalog correspond to the information groups Annunciations, Commands, Measured Values and Counter Values. To insert a specific information unit into an information group, first select it in the catalog, and using the left mouse button, it should then be dragged from the information catalog window to a group area on the left of the matrix. After the mouse button is released, the new information unit is inserted into the proper group. In order to change the user defined information, double-click on the field containing the new information and edit the text. Note: When inserting information of the type Control with FeedBack, two new rows will be created within the group: one line for the actual command, and one for the associated feedback message.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-21
5 Configuration
Deleting Groups and Information
Only user defined groups and information can be deleted. To delete an entire group, click on the field containing the group designator, then press the right mouse button to open the context menu, and select Delete Group. A confirmation window will appear (Figure 5-20).
Figure 5-20
Confirmation window before deleting a user defined group
Click Yes if you actually want to delete the group. Note: When deleting a group, all information definitions within this group will be deleted. To delete individual entries, click under Information in the line with the entry to be deleted. Then press the right mouse button to open the context menu, and select Delete Information. The remaining steps are the same as those for deleting a group.
5.2.4
Performing Configuration
The actual assignment between the information (rows) and the sources and destinations (columns) of the information is made in the cell of intersection. You click into the cell and press the right mouse button. A pull down menu appears where you may determine the properties of the assignment. In certain cases, the pull down menu will offer X (allocated) or _ (not allocated) as the configuration choices. In other cases, three options will be offered (e.g. L = latched, U = unlatched, and _ = not allocated). Entries resulting in an implausible configuration are blocked and inaccessible to the user.
Configuring Binary Inputs as Sources
Single point indications, double point indications, and pulse metered values can all be configured as binary inputs. In addition, whether or not binary inputs are activated by the presence of control voltage can be established. That is, H (High with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals activates the indication; L (Low with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals deactivates the indication.
5-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Note: A single logical indication shall not be configured to two binary inputs, since an ORcombination of both signals is not ensured. The operating program allows only one combination, and deletes the first combination when a second is established. In addition, a single point indication cannot be configured to a binary input and to CFC as a source at the same time. In this case, an error message would be displayed. Click on OK, and select another configuration.
Figure 5-21
Error message resulting from double configuration
If a double point indication (DP) is configured to one binary input (e.g. feedback indications from switching devices), the next binary input is also set in the matrix. If this configuration is undone, the second binary input is automatically de-configured. The order of the feedback inputs is always defined: TRIP before CLOSE. Configuring a Function Key as a Source The four function keys on the front of the relay may also be configured as sources in order to establish a link using CFC. In this situation, each function key may be linked with one single internal indication. A function key may be occupied because it has already been set as an operating function for the relay. As delivered from the factory, the devices function keys F1, F2, and F3 are pre-configured:
F1 F2 F3 operating messages primary measured values overview of the last eight fault messages
Note: When an indication is configured to a function key, its factory-assigned function is deleted. Re-establishment of the factory default function of the F-keys is only possible by initializing the relay with a new factory parameter set created within DIGSI 4. All device settings have to be re-entered. In order to configure a new indication, select one of the options (OPEN/CLOSE, ON/ OFF, etc.) from the indication group in the information catalog and drag it to the left side of the matrix. Upon release, a new row appears in the matrix. If the mouse is positioned at the intersection of this row with column F, and the right mouse button is pressed, a context menu opens (Figure 5-22) in which the function key may be set as a source by clicking the proper choice.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-23
5 Configuration
Figure 5-22
Selecting a function key as an information source example
Configuring CFC as a Source
If certain information should be created as a result of the implementation of a user defined logic function (CFC), this information must appear in the matrix as a source from CFC. Otherwise, this information will not be available to the user when editing the CFC logic. You must not configure information to CFC as a source if it is already configured to a binary input.
Configuring Binary Outputs as a Destination
Up to 30 information units (commands and indications) may be configured to one binary output (output relay). One indication may be configured to up to 30 binary outputs (LEDs and output relays). During configuration of binary outputs, you may select, for each output relay (besides of the logic function itself), whether it should be latched (L) or unlatched (U). If you select latched, the output relay remains energized, even after the indication is no longer present. It must be manually reset by pressing the LED Reset button on the front panel of the device, or via a binary input with the indication function >LED Reset, or via the serial system interface. If unlatched is selected, the output relay disengages as soon as the indication disappears.
Accelerated Binary Outputs
The binary outputs BA1 up to BA7 of device 7SD52 have a response time which is approx. 2 ms shorter. Therefore they are very suited for sending trip and close commands of the protection functions as well as for remote commands. Depending on the version (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T***) there are five solid-state highspeed binary outputs: BA16, BA20, BA21, BA22 and BA23. They have a response time of less than 1 ms. Concerning these device versions these outputs should be given preference for the issuing of trip commands. A special case is the configuring binary outputs for switching devices. For switching devices, the type of command (e.g., single or double commands, with or without feedback) is defined and configured to the output relay. If the preset command types are not desired, then appropriate command types can be selected from the Information catalog (see also Entering Your Own Information in the previous subsection) and inserted into the configuration matrix.
High-Speed Binary Outputs
Binary Outputs for Switching Devices
5-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Example: Double Command with 2 relays (acc. Table 5-1)
Figure 5-23
Window information catalog (example for different command types)
If a command with multiple outputs is configured, all binary outputs required in the matrix for the configuration are automatically defined. If one of these outputs is de-configured, all other binary outputs associated with the command will be automatically deconfigured. Please pay attention to the comments and switching examples in Section 5.2.1, particularly the fixed defined sequence of relay assignments (TRIP before CLOSE). When configuring commands, the context menu is dependent on the type of command. In some cases, the selection latched/unlatched is not available. Instead, the alternatives are X (configured), _ (not configured), and F (busy flag). The latter means, independent of the switching direction, an indication is issued during each operation of the switching device. For double commands with a common output, a fourth alternative C (Common contact) appears. Using this, one binary output may be defined as the common output (common contact). When this is the case, several double commands with common contacts may be assigned to the same common output (common contact), thus saving binary outputs. This assumes the signals at the common outputs have the same potential. Using the Object Properties dialogue window, additional properties for commands issued to the switching device may be defined. Thus, the operating mode (pulse or latched output of a switching command), the seal-in time for pulse commands, the output delay of the command, and feedback monitoring may be set (see Figure 5-24). The output delay is relevant for equipment which removes an indication before the switching is completed.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-25
5 Configuration
Figure 5-24
Dialogue box: Object properties for a command with feedback example
The conditional checks that should be conducted before execution of a switching command can also be defined: Device position (scheduled/actual): The switching command is ignored and a corresponding indication is issued if the switching device is already in the intended position. If this check is activated, switching direction control occurs not only for interlocked, but also for non-interlocked switching. Zone controlled (Bay Specific Interlocking): Logic functions created with CFC in the relay are processed for interlocked switching. Blocked by protection: CLOSE commands to the switchgear are blocked as soon as one of the protective functions or elements in the relay picks up. TRIP commands, in contrast, can always be executed. Double operation: Parallel switching operations are blocked with respect to each other: while one switching operation is being conducted, a second one cannot be performed with the same switching object. Switching Authority Local Commands: A local control switching command is only allowed if local control is enabled on the relay (via lock-switch or setting). Switching Authority Remote Commands: A remote control switching command is only allowed if remote control is enabled on the relay (via lock-switch or setting). Configuring a LED Display as a Destination Single point indications (SP), output indications (OUT), and internal single point indications (IntSP) may be assigned to LEDs. When this is done, you may select whether the indications are to be latched (L) or unlatched (U). Up to 10 indications may be assigned to a LED display. One indication may be assigned to a maximum of 10 outputs (LEDs and output relays).
5-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Configuring an Indication Buffer as a Destination
Dependent on the type and version of a relay, a maximum of three indication buffers may be available for messages: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (O), Fault (Trip Log) Buffer (T) and Earth Fault Message Buffer (E). The indications from protective functions are firmly assigned to these indication buffers. For the others, Table 5-2 provides an overview of which indication type may be configured to which buffer.
Table 5-2
Overview of Indication Buffers O X X X X X X X E T X
Information Type \Message Buffer Single Point Indications (SP) Double Point Indications (DP) Output Indications (OUT) Internal Single Point Indications (IntSP) Internal Double Point Indications (DP)
Select one of the following options for the named indication types: O (on or coming) the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival, OO (on/off or coming/going) the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival and departure, _ (not configured) the indication is not stored in a buffer. Configuring CFC as a Destination Single point, double point, and output indications, as well as limit and measured values, may be configured to CFC as the destination. This is a precondition for this information being processed by CFC. In addition to the measured values available in the relay, user defined measured and limit values may be configured into the measured value window. These values also become available in the device display in the assigned measurement window.
Configuring the Measured Value Window as a Destination Configuring the Metered Value Window as a Destination Retrieving Device Configurations from the Device Front
User defined pulse values derived from the measured values may be configured into the metered value window so that they may be displayed at the front relay panel.
Retrieving the configurations is also possible from the device front. You may access configuration information under Main Menu: Settings Masking (I/O). The menu title MASKING (I/O) appears in the title bar. Configuration information regarding each (physical) input and output is indicated in the display. Any new user defined information is also shown in the display once loaded into the relay from DIGSI 4. When selecting the MASKING (I/O) menu, either binary inputs, LEDs, or binary outputs may be selected. Selection of binary inputs is illustrated in Figure 5-25.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-27
5 Configuration
MASKING (I/O) 01/03 -------------------->Binary Inputs > 1 >LED > 2 Binary Outputs > 3
Figure 5-25
BINARY INPUTS 02/11 -------------------->Binary Input 1> >Binary Input 2>
Reading the configuration in the front display of the device example
Information regarding a binary input may be displayed by using the navigation keys to select the binary input. See Figure 5-26.
BINARY INPUT 2 -------------------->>Reset LED SP H --------------------Status at Terminal 0

Figure 5-26 Selection of binary input 2 example
In the example of Figure 5-26, information is displayed regarding binary input 2. The display for binary input 2 indicates that it is configured as reset of the latched LEDs using a single point indication with voltage active (High). The present conditions of binary input 2 is also given as 0 (not active). If a binary input is active, a 1 is displayed. Assignment of LEDs may be indicated at the relay, itself, using a replaceable labelling strip with plain text on the front panel located, directly next to the LEDs. Presettings The LED indication presettings, those of the binary inputs and outputs are summarized in Appendix A, Section A.4.
5.2.5
Transferring Metered Values

The transferring of metered values from the buffer of a SIPROTEC device to a substation controller may be performed both cyclically and/or by external polling. In the configuration matrix, click on Options and then on Restore Metered Values. A dialogue box, which contains a register for editing the individual values for cyclical transferring will open.
Cyclical Restoration
Here, you may specify the source of the cyclical trigger for the transfer. Also, you may set the time interval and determine whether the metered value buffer should be deleted after transfer from the SIPROTEC device has taken place. Triggering occurs based on the absolute time set according to the set time interval.
5-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Figure 5-27
Dialogue box to restore metered values and program cyclical restoration
5.2.6
Settings for Contact Chatter Blocking

The contact chatter filter checks whether the number of condition changes at a binary input exceeds a preset value during a predetermined time interval. If this occurs, the binary input will be blocked for a certain time, so the event list does not contain a large number of unnecessary entries. The setting values necessary for this feature may be entered in a dialogue box, as shown in Figure 5-28. This dialogue box can be found from the open configuration matrix by clicking Options in the menu bar and then selecting Chatter Blocking.
Contact Chatter Suppression
Figure 5-28
DIGSI 4: Setting the chatter blocking feature
Defining the Monitoring Criteria
The operating mode of the chatter blocking feature is determined by five settings: Number of permissible state changes This setting establishes how often the state of a binary input within the Initial Test Time may change. If this number is exceeded, the binary input is or remains blocked. If the setting is 0 the chatter blocking is disabled. Initial test time Within this time interval (in seconds), the number of state changes of a binary input is checked. The time interval begins with the first activation of a signal to the binary input.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-29
5 Configuration Number of chatter tests This number represents how many check cycles should be conducted before the binary input is finally blocked. Please consider that even a high set value can be reached over the normal life span of the device and could lead to blocking of the binary input. Therefore this value can also be set to infinity. For this, enter the character sequence of oo. Chatter Idle Time If the Number of permissible state changes at a binary input is exceeded during the Initial test time or the Subsequent test time, the Chatter idle time interval is initiated. The affected binary input is blocked for this time interval. The Chatter idle time setting is entered in minutes. This settings can only be programmed if the Number of chatter tests is not set to zero. Subsequent test time Within this time interval, the number of state changes at a binary input is checked again. This interval begins after the Chatter idle time interval has expired. If the number of state changes is within allowable limits, the binary input is released. Otherwise, the idle interval is restarted, until the maximum Number chatter tests is reached again. The Subsequent test time setting is entered in seconds. This settings can only be programmed if the Number of chatter tests is not set to zero. The settings for the monitoring criteria of the chatter blocking feature are set only once for all binary inputs; however, the status of the chatter suppression can be set individually for each binary input. See Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression in Subsection 5.2.3. Note: Chatter blocking cannot be activated for any of the standard protective indications.
The following should be noted: If there is contact chatter at a binary input and the input is blocked, the corresponding indication will be displayed with CCF (example: >Door open CCF ON). Also, the indication Contact chatter filter reports this condition. Both messages are shown in the operating buffer (event log). Chattering of a single point indication is set as ON (coming) if the binary input is activated by energization (configured High-active). Chattering of a single point indication is set as OFF (going) if the binary input is deactivated by energization (configured Low-active). If this behaviour causes undesired results in individual situations, an interlocking may be configured in CFC. Chattering of a double point indication will be considered as an intermediate condition.
5-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC
5.3
General
Creating User Defined Functions with CFC

The 7SD52 relay is capable of implementing user defined logic functions which may be processed by the relay. This CFC feature (Continuous Function Chart) is needed to process user defined supervision functions and logic conditions (e.g. interlocking conditions for switching devices) or to process measured values. Interlocking conditions and command sequences, for example, may be programmed, using pre-defined function modules, by persons without any specialized software programming abilities. A total of 21 types of functional modules (FM), with which the desired functions may be composed, are saved in a library. Detailed explanations are in the CFC manual, order number E50417H1176C098, or in the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417H1176C097. The creation of a logical PLC function is performed by means of a personal computer using application DIGSI 4 and transferred via the operator or service interface. In order to create user defined logic functions, the indications and measured values required by these functions must first be configured in the matrix with CFC as the source or destination (see Section 5.2). CFC can be started by double-clicking on CFC. The names of all available CFC charts will appear. The desired CFC chart for processing can be selected via a double-click of the mouse. The CFC program will start, and the chart will be displayed. If no chart is available yet, you can create a new chart via the menu Create CFCChart.
Run-Time Properties
The functions to be implemented in CFC may be divided into four task levels: Measured values: This task is processed cyclically every 600 milliseconds (MV_BEARB = measurement value processing) and might become slower if the device is in pick-up state. System logic: Operation is triggered by events (i.e. these functions are processed for each change of state at one of its inputs). System logic has lower priority than a protection function and will be suppressed as soon as the relay picks up (PLC1_BEARB = slow PLC processing). Protective functions: These functions have the highest priority, and, like the system logic functions, are event-controlled and processed immediately after a change of state (PLC_BEARB = fast PLC processing). Switchgear Interlocking: This task is triggered by commands. In addition it is processed cyclically approximately every second. It might becomes slower if device is in pick-up state (SFS_BEARB = interlocking). The function to be implemented must be associated to one of these four task levels. To implement a function from the Settings CFC menu, activate the menu by selecting Edit, then Run Sequence, and then the desired task level (See Figure 5-29).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-31
5 Configuration
Figure 5-29
Establishing the task level
Within the Run Sequence menu, select Edit, and then Predecessor for Installation, to ensure that the function modules selected from the library will be implemented into the desired task level (Figure 5-30).
Figure 5-30
Assignment of function modules to the selected task level example
The proper assignment is important for several reasons. For example, if interlocking logic were to be set up in the measured values task level, indications would constantly be created by the cyclical processing, filling the buffer unnecessarily. On the other hand, the interlocking condition at the moment of a switching operation may not be processed at the right time, since measured value processing is done only every 600 ms.
Table 5-3
Selection guide for function modules and task levels Run-Time Level Description Absolute value AND-gate Boolean to control (conversion)
Function Modules ABSVALUE AND BOOL_TO_CO
MW_BEARB Meter process.
PLC1_BEARB Slow PLC
PLC_BEARB Fast PLC
SFS_BEARB Interlocking
X X
X X
5-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 5-3
Selection guide for function modules and task levels Run-Time Level Description Boolean to double point (conversion) Boolean to internal annunciation (conversion) Create double point annunciation Command information Connection D-flipflop Double point to boolean Live-zero, non linear curve X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Function Modules BOOL_TO_DI BOOL_TO_IC BUILD_DI CMD_INF CONNECT D_FF DI_TO_BOOL LIVE_ZERO
MW_BEARB Meter process.
PLC1_BEARB Slow PLC
PLC_BEARB Fast PLC
SFS_BEARB Interlocking
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit NAND NEG NOR OR RS_FF SR_FF TIMER LONG_TIMER NAND-gate Negator NOR-gate OR-gate RS-flipflop SR-flipflop Timer Long timer (max. 1193 h)
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X_OR ZERO_POINT XOR-gate Zero suppression
Configuration Sheet
The configuration is performed within the configuration sheets (see Figure 5-31).
Configuration sheet 1
IS1
1
FM1
3 1
Input signals
FM2
3 1
FM3
2
IS2 IS3
2 2
OS4
Output signals
Function modules
Figure 5-31
Principal representation of function modules in a CFC working page
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-33
5 Configuration
The left border column of the configuration sheet shows the inputs; the right border column shows the outputs of a function. In the above diagram the inputs are connected with input signals IS1 to IS3. These may be indications from the breaker (via binary inputs), from device function keys, or from a protective function. The output signal (OS4 in the diagram) may control an output relay, for example, and can create entries in the message buffers, depending on the preset configuration. Configuring and Connecting Function Modules The default run-time sequence is determined by the sequence of the insertion of the logic modules. You may redefine the run-time sequence by pressing <CTRL> <F11> on the PC keyboard. Please refer to the CFC manual. The necessary function modules (FM) are contained in a library located to the right of the configuration chart. The module also indicates to which of the four run-time levels it is assigned. The modules possess at least one input and one output. In addition to these inputs and outputs, which are displayed on the configuration sheet, a module may have additional inputs. The additional inputs can be made visible by selecting the module title block, pressing the right mouse button, selecting the menu option Number Of I/Os... (see Figure 5-32), and then increasing the number.
Figure 5-32
Example of an OR gate: module menu
Under the Object Properties menu, you may edit the name of the module, insert a comment, or edit run-time properties and connection parameters. Connecting modules with each other, and linking them with system input and output signals, is performed by selection of the desired modules input or output and subsequently pressing the right mouse button, and selecting the menu option Insert Connection to Operand (see Figure 5-33).
Figure 5-33
Example of module input menu
5-34
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A window with a list of input signals will appear. By selecting one of these signals and activating with OK, the selected signal is entered into the left border panel and, from there, a connection is created to the module input. Selection of an output is done in the same manner. A connection between two modules is established by a simple sequential clicking on the two connections. If the link line display becomes unwieldy or impossible because of space limitations, the CFC editor creates a pair of connectors (target icons) instead. The link is recognizable via correlated numbering (see Figure 5-34).
Connector
Figure 5-34
Example of a connector
Consistency check
In addition to the sample configuration chart 1, other configuration sheets may exist. The contents of any particular configuration sheet is compiled by DIGSI 4 into a program and processed by the protective device. For CFC charts developed by the user, syntactic correctness can be verified by clicking the menu command Chart, and then Check Consistency. The consistency check will determine if the modules violate conventions of various task levels, or any of the space limitations described below. Check of functional correctness must be performed manually. The completed CFC chart can be saved via menu item Chart, and Close. Likewise, the CFC chart may be reopened and edited by clicking on Chart, selecting the appropriate chart, and clicking on Open. Please note that certain limits and restrictions exist due to the available memory and processing time required. For each of the four PLC task levels there is only a finite processing time available within the processor system. Each module, each input to a module (whether connected or not), each link generated from the border columns demands a specific amount of processing time. The sum total of the individual processing times in a task level may not exceed the defined maximum processing time for this level. The processing time is measured in so called TICKS. In the 7SD52 the following maximum TICKS are permitted in the various task levels:
Table 5-4
Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels of 7SD52 Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS 10000 1900 200 10000
MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) SFS_BEARB (Interlocking)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-35
5 Configuration
In the following table, the amount of TICKS required by the individual elements of a CFC chart is shown. A generic module refers to a module for which the number of inputs can be changed. Typical examples are the logic modules AND, NAND, OR, NOR.
Table 5-5
Processing times in TICKS required by the individual elements Individual Element Amount of TICKS 5 1 6 7 1
Module, basic requirement each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules Connection to an input Connection to an output signal Additional for each configuration sheet
The utilized processor capacity which is available for the CFC can be checked under Option Reports in the register Check consistency. By scrolling, an area is reached, where information regarding the cumulated memory consumption of the memory reserved for CFC can be read in percent. Figure 5-35 is an example showing an over-utilization by 56 % in the task level PLC_BEARB (marked in the Figure), while the other task levels are within the permissible range.
Figure 5-35
Read-out of the CFC configuration degree of utilization
If the limits are exceeded during configuration of the CFC, DIGSI 4 issues a warning (refer to Figure 5-36). After acknowledgement of this alarm, the system utilisation can be viewed as described above.
5-36
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Figure 5-36
Warning message on reaching the limits
A few examples are given below. Example 1 (MW): Low Current Monitor A configuration for low-current monitoring alarm (see Figure 5-37) which can be produced using CFC, should be a first example. This element may be used to detect operation without load, or to recognize open circuited conditions. By connecting measured current values with a limit function via an OR function, an indication may be generated which can be used to cause switching operations. The configuration sheet is assigned to task level MW_BEARB. Four function modules (3 lower-value limit modules and an OR gate), are taken from the function module library and copied into the configuration sheet. In the left panel, the measurement values to be monitored (IL1, IL2, IL3 in % of the nominal current) are each selected and connected with the measured value inputs of each limit module function. A lower limit setpoint value (IL<) is linked with the limit inputs of each of three limit sensor functions. The limit value function outputs are passed on to the OR gate. The output of the OR gate is connected to the right border column at annunciation I< alarm. The limit value message is triggered when the preset limit value is below the setpoint (low current) in at least one of the three phases. The hysteresis of the limit values is fixed and need not be entered (5 % of set point plus 0.5 % of nominal value).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-37
5 Configuration
Lower Setpoint Set points IL<

Limit
Measurement IL2
Vol
FM: Lower Setpoint

Annunciation BO
Annunciation BO
Measurement IL1
Vol
FM:
FM:
>1
I< alarm OUT
Set points IL<
Limit
Lower Setpoint
Set points IL<
Figure 5-37
Under-current monitoring as an example of user defined measurement value processing
Example 2: Isolation Switch Interlocking
Interlocking logic (see Figure 5-38) is to be implemented for the operation of an isolating switch using function key 4. The user must take the switch position indications of the corresponding isolation switch and the grounding switch into account. The CLOSE and TRIP indications from the auxiliary contacts of each switch are used. Function modules NOR (2 required), XOR, and AND are taken from the library and copied into the working page. The number of inputs of the AND gate is increased to 7. The CLOSE indications from the circuit breaker (CB) and from the grounding switch (GS) are supplied to the inputs of the NOR functions. The OPEN indications from the circuit breaker (CB) and from the grounding switch (GS) are supplied to the inputs of the AND function. The switch position indications from the disconnect switch (IS) are linked to the inputs of the XOR function. The outputs of the NOR and XOR gates are connected to the inputs of the AND function. Function key 4 is linked with an input of the AND function. The output of the AND gate is linked to the right border column at the switching command Disconnector Close.
5-38
Limit
Annunciation BO
Measurement IL3
FM:
Vol
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Function Key 4
CB is CLOSED CB is OPEN GS is CLOSED GS is OPEN IS is CLOSED IS is OPEN Door is CLOSED
&
Disconnector Close
=1
Figure 5-38
Interlocking an disconnect switch as an example of a user defined interlock protective function
Example 3 (PLC1): Additional Logic
By using slow PLC processing, an additional, event-driven logic condition may be constructed which delivers indications regarding switch-gear operating status. These indications may be passed externally via LEDs or relay contacts, or used as input signals for further logical links. In the example (see Figure 5-39), the output information indication from the circuit breaker interlocking logic (CB TRIP) and a joint indication from all protective element trip signals (Protection TRIP) are linked to a new Circuit Breaker Operation message. Furthermore, the single point indication (SP) Test Oper, which may be coupled via a binary input, is linked with an internal reusable Test oper. message.
CB TRIP
Protection TRIP
Circuit Breaker Operation
>Test Oper.
Test Oper.
Figure 5-39
Additional logic as an example for a PLC_1 event-driven logic condition
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-39
5 Configuration
5.4
Serial Interfaces
The device contains one or more serial interfaces: an operator interface integrated into the front panel, and depending on the model ordered a service interface and a system interface for connection of a central control system. Certain standards are necessary for communication via these interfaces, which contain device identification, transfer protocol, and transfer speed. Configuration of these interfaces is performed using the DIGSI 4 software program. Click on Setting in the navigation window and double-click in the data window on Interfaces. Next, select the specific data in the resulting dialogue box (Figure 540). The dialogue box contains a varying number of tabs (depending on the capabilities of the PC and the relay) with setting options for the interfaces.
Figure 5-40
DIGSI 4, Settings of the PC interface example
Serial port on PC
In the first tab, you enter the communication interface of the PC which is connected to the 7SD52 relay (COM1, COM2, etc.). Manual entry of settings for data format and baud-rate need not be made if these values were taken from the Operator Interface tab or the Service interface tab (if present). In fact, many settings are read from DIGSI 4 directly via the interface, and the corresponding setting fields are then inaccessible (see Figure 5-40). Alternatively, the option Independent of device may be selected. Data exchange is monitored by the PC for the reaction times of the device. You may, within preset limits, configure maximum relay reaction times. The displayed values RQ 1 and RQ 2 correspond to the preset reaction times in milliseconds. In general, these values should not be modified. Modification is only necessary if a time-out often occurs during communication with the device. In order to modify these values, enter an integer value for RQ 1, between 200 and 9999, and for RQ 2, from 0 to 9999.
5-40
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Service and Operator Interface
Settings for the interfaces at the device can performed in these tabs. The link addresses and maximum message gap appear in the Service Interface and Operator Interface tab besides the settings for data format and transfer speed (example Figure 5-41).
Figure 5-41
DIGSI 4, Settings for the service interface example
For the IEC communication, each SIPROTEC device must have a unique IEC address assigned to it. Only the addresses which are within the current address range and have not yet been occupied are displayed. The setting for the maximum message gap is only applicable when the device is to communicate using a modem via one of the interfaces. A gap is the maximum allowable time duration of interrupted transmission within one telegram transmission. Transfer gaps are created when using modems as a result of data compression, error correction, and baud-rate differences. For good data transmission between modems, a setting of 1.0 sec is recommended. For poor connections, this value should be increased. Large values slow down communications in case of errors. When using a direct PC connection, Max. message gaps may be set to 0.0 sec. Note: Do not use operator interface for modem communication!.
Other Interfaces
Enter specific settings and addresses to identify devices in the other tabs, if necessary, or check the preset values.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-41
5 Configuration
Device addresses are used by the system to identify each device and must be unique throughout the substation. Detailed instructions for setting the interfaces are available in the DIGSI 4 Communications manual. If you desire to expand or modify interfaces later, refer to the modification instructions for the interfaces, and if necessary for the hardware, see also instructions in Sub-section 8.1.3 of this manual. Profibus FMS on the PC For a Profibus connection if available between a SIPROTEC device and the SICAM SAS or DIGSI 4, a minimum transfer rate of 500 kBaud is recommended for disturbance-free communication. For optical connections, the signal idle state is preset for light off. Modification of the signal idle state is accomplished in the tab for the interface settings (see Figure 5-42).
Signal Idle State
Figure 5-42
Settings for an optical interface example
Reading and Modifying Interface Settings at the Device
Reading and partial modification of the most important interface settings is possible, using the key-pad and display on the device panel. You may access the setting page for the interface via MAIN MENU through Settings Setup/Extras Serial Ports. Under the sub-menu title SERIAL PORTS, you will find Front, System, and Service Port, and selections may be made using the navigation button. By pressing the button, the sub-menu for a particular interface can be accessed. The display and the ability to change settings directly at the device are the same at both the front and service interfaces. Figure 5-43 shows the data of the front (operator) interface, as an example.
5-42
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
FRONT PORT 01/04 -------------------->Phys.Addr. >>>>>1 >Baudrate 38400 Baud Parity 8E1 (DIGSI) Gaps 0.0sec
Figure 5-43 Reading and setting the front interface at the device panel example
The type and number of system interface(s) is dependent on the device type and version and might be completely missing. The system interface data may be read at the device, but cannot be modified there, whereas the data for the operator and service interface can be modified. In addition to the settings already mentioned for the operator and service interfaces, the signal idle state for an optical link may also be read at the device. For an electrical interface, the response OFFSig. Inactive appears as shown in Figure 5-44.
SYSTEM PORT -------------------->IEC608705103 > 1 >Profibus > 2
IEC608705103 ------------------->Phys.Address > 1 >Baudrate 38400 Baud Parity 8E1 (DIGSI) Gaps 0.0sec OFFSig. Inactive
Figure 5-44
Read-out of system interface setting values in the device display example
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-43
5 Configuration
5.5
Date and Time Stamping

Integrated date and time stamping allows for the exact evaluation of sequence of events, e.g. operational or fault messages (event log or trip log), or limit violations. The following clock settings are available: Internal RTC clock (Real Time Clock), External synchronization sources (DCF, IRIG B, SyncBox, IEC 60870-5-103), External minute impulses via binary input. Note: The device is delivered from the factory with the internal RTC clock selected as the time source. For the differential protection with 7SD52 devices the time usually is synchronized in only one device, the so-called Timing Master device; generally it is the device with index 1. It synchronizes the other device (or other devices for more than two ends) via the protection communication. Thus it can be assured that all devices of the protection system operate on the same time basis. Note that this time synchronization is different from synchronization of the measured values of the differential protection system. The operation of the differential protection system including the synchronous exchange of measured values works automatically and independent on this time synchronization.
Settings for time synchronization may be found in DIGSI 4 under Settings Time synchronization (Figure 5-45).
Figure 5-45
Setting Window in DIGSI 4 example
5-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5.5 Date and Time Stamping
To open the Time Synchronization & Format window, double-click on Time Synchronization. See Figure 5-46.
Figure 5-46
Dialogue box for time synchronization and format in DIGSI 4 example
You may select the time standard for internal time stamping from the following modes:
Table 5-6 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Operating modes for time synchronization Operating Mode Explanations Internal synchronization using RTC External synchronization using the system interface and the IEC 608705103 protocol External synchronization using IRIG B External synchronization using DCF 77 External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box External synchronization with pulse via binary input
Internal Clock IEC 608705103 IRIG B Time signal DCF77 Time signal SIMEAS time signal Sync. Box Pulse via binary input Internal or Timing Master IEC 60870 or Timing Master IRIG B or Timing Master DCF77 or Timing Master Sync. Box or Timing Master Binary input or Timing Master
as Item 1 to 6 but the time is normally synchronized by the timing master; only in case if transmission failure the time is synchronized by the selected source
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-45
5 Configuration
The RTC runs, even when the auxiliary voltage is absent, by means of an internal battery. During the device powering up, or if the auxiliary voltage has failed, this RTC is the first synchronization source for the internal clock, independent of operating mode selected. In Internal mode, the system time is controlled using only the RTC as the synchronization source. It may be set manually. The procedure for manual date/time setting is given in Section 7.2.1. If an external source is selected, only the selected synchronization source is used. If the source fails, the internal clock continues unsynchronized. If time synchronization is to take place via a central control system, the option IEC 608705103 must be selected (Figure 5-46). When using radio clock signals, you must take into account that it can take up to three minutes after device start-up or restored reception for the received time signal to be decoded. The internal clock is not re-synchronized until then. With IRIG B, the year must be set manually, because this standard does not include a year value. Note: If in IRIG B the year date is erroneously set to a year date before 1991, the year is set to 1991 during the first synchronization. For synchronization using pulses via a binary input, the present device time will advance to 00 seconds of the next minute for values greater than or equal 30 seconds when the positive slope of the pulse arrives. For second values less than 30, the device time will be set to 00 seconds of the current minute. Because this signal is not monitored, each pulse has a direct effect on the internal clock. For the device or devices wherein the time is normally synchronized by the Timing Master, set one of the options adding ...or timing master (Item 7 to 12 in Table 5-6). The indicated time is then only applied by the device if it does not receive a time from the Timing master. Synchronization Offset The Synchronization Offset (Time correction) setting allows correlation of the time signal received from the radio clock to local time (time zone). The maximum settable offset is 23 h 59 min = 1439 min. The tolerance time (Monitoring / Fault indication after) for time synchronization fault indicates how long cyclical synchronization may be absent until an alarm is given. External or internal synchronization normally occurs every minute. The setting for the tolerance time must, therefore, always be at least two minutes. Under poor radio clock reception conditions, you may delay the trigger of the error status condition even longer. Changing the Synchronization Mode When changing synchronization mode, the hardware will change over to the new source within one second. This causes breakdown of cyclical synchronization, and the internal clock will be disrupted as at start-up until the new synchronization source takes over. After modification to the synchronization offset in the time signal/operating mode, or when changing year in IRIG B, the cyclical synchronization is not lost, but there is a jump. To call attention to this, the time value causing a jump is reported with Time
Error Message Based on Tolerance Time
5-46
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5.5 Date and Time Stamping
interruption ON without the synchronization offset, and subsequently with Time interruption OFF with the synchronization offset. Operating Messages from the Timing System After the Time interruption ON message, the you must take into account that the clock will jump. This message is issued under the following circumstances: if a synchronization interruption lasts longer than the tolerance time interval mentioned above, or as mentioned above, if the synchronization mode is changed; if a time jump is anticipated. The message itself is stamped with the old time. The message Time interruption OFF is triggered: when the synchronization is re-established (e.g., after a break in reception by the radio clock); immediately after a time jump. This message is stamped with the new time after the jump, thus allowing determination of the jump interval. Time Format The time display may be set using either the European format (DD.MM.YYYY) or the US format (MM/DD/YYYY). n
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
5-47
5 Configuration
5-48
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Functions
6
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 7SD52 relay. The setting options for each function are explained, including instructions to determine setting values and formulae where required. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 General Differential Protection Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology Direct Local Trip 6-2 6-23 6-38 6-42 6-54
Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional) 6-56 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection Time Overcurrent Protection Automatic Reclosure Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Thermal Overload Protection Monitoring functions Function Control Commissioning Tools Ancillary Functions Processing of Commands 6-60 6-64 6-79 6-108 6-125 6-129 6-142 6-155 6-157 6-168
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-1
6 Functions
6.1
General
A few seconds after the device is switched on, the initial display appears in the LCD. In the 7SD52 the measured values are displayed. The setting parameters can be entered via the keypad and display on the front of the device, or by means of a personal computer connected to the front or service interface of the device utilising the DIGSI 4 software package. The level 5 password (individual parameters) is required.
From the DeviceFront
Select the MAIN MENU by pressing the MENU key. Using the key, select Settings, and then press the key to navigate to the SETTINGS display (see Figure 6-1). In the SETTINGS display, use the key to select the desired function, and then use the key to navigate to that function (e.g. use the key to select the P.System Data1 function, and then use the key to navigate to the P.SYSTEM DATA1 display, as shown in Figure 6-2). In general, an item number appears in the menu list to the right of each selection. Navigation can be accomplished using the item number in place of the and keys. This feature is particularly helpful in large menus (e.g. setting lists). Based on the example above, from the MAIN MENU, the SETTINGS display can be reached by pressing 4 on the keypad, and then the P.SYSTEM DATA1 display can be reached by pressing 0 3 on the keypad.
MAIN MENU 04/05 --------------------Annunciation > 1 Measurement > 2 Control > 3 Settings > 4 Test/Diagnosis> 5
SETTINGS 03/11 --------------------Device Config.> 01 Masking (I/O) > 02 P.System Data1> 03 Active Group is A
Figure 6-1
Example of navigation from the front control panel
Each setting contains a four-digit address number followed by the setting title as shown in Figure 6-2. The value of the current setting is displayed in the line just below the setting address number and title. The value may be text (Figure 6-2, setting 0201) or numerical (Figure 6-2, setting 0202).
P.SYSTEM DATA1 01/16 --------------------0201 CT Starpoint towards Line 0202 Unom PRIMARY 12.00kV
Figure 6-2 Example of power system data display
6-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
Settings are selected using the and keys. When the ENTER key is pressed, the user is prompted for a password. The user should enter Password No. 5 and then press the ENTER key. The current value of the setting appears in a text box, with a blinking text insertion cursor. Text Values A text setting may be modified using the options. and keys to select one of two or more
Numerical Values (including )
A numerical setting may be modified by overwriting the current value using the numerical keypad (see Figure 6-3). A value of infinity may be entered by pressing the decimal key twice . . . The symbol will appear in the display. If the number entered is not within allowable limits, the maximum or minimum allowable value will appear in the lower portion of the display. To enter a new, allowable value, the ENTER key should be pressed again. Note that measured values and limit values must be entered in secondary quantities when using the front control panel of the device.
Confirmation
Any modification to a setting value must be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key. A blinking asterisk is an indication that setting modification mode is still open. Other modifications can be made to settings, even in sub-menus (if present), as long as setting modification mode is still open. The actual modification of settings occurs once setting modification mode is closed (see below, Exiting the Setting Mode).
P.SYSTEM DATA1 02/16 --------------------0202>Unom PRIMARY > >12.00kV PW Settings? =------0202 Unom PRIMARY
Example for numerical setting:

ENTER
Enter password No. 5 and confirm with

ENTER
15.00
Enter the new value and confirm with
ENTER
P.SYSTEM DATA [02/16 --------------------0202 Unom PRIMARY > > > 15.00kV
Figure 6-3
The modified setting value appears in the list; a blinking asterisk in the title bar indicates setting modification mode is still open.
Example of setting modification using the front control panel
If a setting modification is not confirmed with the ENTER key, the original value reappears after one minute, and a message window appears after three minutes notifying the user that the setting modification period has expired. When the ENTER key is pressed, a further message window appears, notifying the user that the setting modifications were discarded. Further modification of settings is possible by pressing the ENTER key and re-entering the password.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-3
6 Functions
Exiting the Setting Mode
If an attempt is made to exit setting modification mode using the key or the MENU key, the message Are you sure? will be displayed followed by the responses Yes, No, and Escape (see Figure 6-4). If the response Yes is selected, modification of settings can be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key. To cancel pending modifications to settings and exit setting modification mode, the response No must be selected. Press the key until the response No is highlighted. Press the ENTER key to confirm and exit. Incorrect entries may be retracted in this manner. To remain in the setting modification mode, press the key until the response Escape is highlighted. Press the ENTER key to confirm, and the user can remain in setting modification mode without down-loading modifications.
Are you sure? >Yes No Escape Settings are ok >Continue

Figure 6-4
ENTER
ENTER
Ending the setting mode using the front control panel
From PC with DIGSI 4
When using DIGSI 4, the settings can be carried out Offline. Double-click on Parameters to display the relevant selection. Select the desired option, e.g. Power System Data 1, in the right-hand panel of the window and double-click it (Figure 6-5).
Figure 6-5
Parameterizing with DIGSI 4 an example
The dialogue box for defining the individual parameters of the selected function is displayed. In our example we selected Power System data 1 (Figure 6-6). For extensive functions, the parameters may be span several pages that can be accessed by clicking on the tabs at the top border (in example Figure 6-6 Power system data and Breaker).
6-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
Figure 6-6
Power system data with DIGSI 4 an example
Each parameter has a 4-digit address number (under No.) followed by the designation of the parameter (under Settings). Column Value can contain a figure or text. If you position the cursor in the column Value on a field with a numerical value, the admissible input range will be indicated. Click on the value which you want to alter. Text Values A drop-down list with the possible statuses is displayed for text parameters. Click on the desired option. The drop-down list closes and the new value appears in the text field. Numerical values are entered by direct input, if necessary with decimal comma (not dot!). For infinite you enter two small letters oo one after the other. Confirm the input with the button Accept or proceed to a different value which you want to alter. If the value entered is not within the admissible range of values or if a symbol has been entered which is not admissible, a corresponding message will appear on the display. After acknowledging with OK, the unaltered value is displayed. You can now make a new input or alter a different parameter. Primary or Secondary Values Numerical values derived from measured quantities can be entered as either primary or secondary values. DIGSI 4 converts them automatically provided that the CT data and the transformation ratios have been entered correctly. To toggle between the input of secondary and primary values, proceed as follows:
G G
Numerical Values (incl. )
Click on Options in the menu bar (see Figure 6-7). Select the desired alternative by clicking on it.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-5
6 Functions
Figure 6-7
Selecting the input of primary or secondary values example
Additional Settings
Some parameters which are only used in exceptional cases or for special applications may be hidden initially. They can be viewed if you click on Display Additional Settings. Each entry may be confirmed by clicking Apply. Valid values are accepted automatically when another field is selected. The final acceptance of a modified setting takes place once the setting mode is exited (see below Exiting the Setting Mode). The dialogue box may be closed by clicking OK. Once closed, another function may be selected for setting modification, or you can exit the setting mode.
Confirmation
Exiting the Setting Mode
In order to transfer the modified setting values to the relay, the user should click on DIGSI Device. The user will be prompted for Password No. 5. After entering the password and confirming with OK, data is transferred to the relay where modifications become effective.
6-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
6.1.1
Power System Data 1

The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its functions accordingly. The data required include for instance rated data of the station and the measuring transformer, polarity and connection of the measured quantities, if necessary features of the circuit breakers, and others. These data are grouped under Power System Data 1. Press MENU to open the main menu. Select the option SETTINGS with key and with key the menu Settings. Select Power System Data 1 in the menu SETTINGS to retrieve the power system data. With DIGSI 4 double-click on Settings to display the relevant selection. The Power system data 1 can only be changed using DIGSI 4.
Polarity of the Current Transformers
Address 201 CT Starpoint asks for the polarity of the current transformers, i.e. the position of the transformer starpoint (Figure 6-8). The setting defines the measuring direction of the device (current in line direction is defined as positive at all line ends). The reversal of this parameter also reverses the polarity of the residual current input IE.
Busbar
IL1 IL2 IL3 IE
IE IL1 IL2 IL3
Line 201 CT Starpoint = towards Line
Line 201 CT Starpoint = towards Busbar
Figure 6-8
Polarity of the current transformers
Rated Quantities of the Instrument Transformers
In principle, the differential protection is designed such that it can operate without measured voltages. However, voltages can be connected. These voltages allow to display and log voltages, and to calculate various components of power. If necessary, they can also serve for determining the line voltage in case of automatic reclosure. During configuration of the device functions (Section 5.1), it has been determined whether the device is to work with or without measured voltages. In the addresses 203 Unom PRIMARY and 204 Unom SECONDARY you inform the device of the primary and secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the voltage transformers. These settings are not relevant if no voltage transformers are connected and configured when determining the functional scope according to Section 5.1. In the addresses 205 CT PRIMARY and 206 CT SECONDARY you inform the device of the primary and secondary rated currents of the voltage transformers (phases). Address 206 CT SECONDARY must correspond to the nominal current of the device, otherwise the processor system cannot be started. Also make sure that the secondary
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-7
6 Functions
rated CT currents are in accordance with the rated current of the device, because otherwise the device will calculate wrong primary data (refer also to Subsection 8.1.3.3 under margin header Input/Output Board I/O2). The correct primary data are required for the calculation of the proper primary information of the operational measured values. If the settings of the device are performed with primary values using DIGSI 4, these primary data are an indispensable requirement for the fault-free operation of the device. Connection of the Voltages Four inputs for measured voltages are available if the device is connected to the voltage transformers. This subtitle is not relevant if no voltages are connected. Three voltage inputs are connected to the voltage transformer set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth voltage input U4: Connect the input U4 to the open delta winding en of the voltage transformer set, see also Appendix A, Figure A-18: Address 210 is set in that case to: U4 transformer = Udelta transf.. With U4 connected to the enwindings (open delta) of the voltage transformer set, the voltage transformation of the transformer is normally U Nprim ---------------3
Nsec Nsec --------------- --------------3 3
The factor Uph/Uen (secondary voltage, address 211 Uph / Udelta) must be set to 3/3 = 3 1.73. For other transformation ratios, e.g. for the calculation of the residual voltage via interposed transformer set, the factor must be adapted accordingly. This factor is important for the monitoring of measured quantities and the scaling of the measured values and fault values. If the input U4 is not required, set: Address 210 U4 transformer = Not connected. In this case as well, the factor Uph / Udelta (address 211, see above) is important, since it is used for the scaling of the measured values and the fault values. Connection of the Currents The device has four measured current inputs, three of which are connected to the current transformer set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth current input I4: Connect the input I4 to the residual current of the CT star-point of the protected line (standard circuit arrangement, see also Appendix A, Figure A-15): Address 220 is set in that case to: I4 transformer = Neutral current and Address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1. Connect the input I4 to a separate ground current transformer of the protected line (e.g. a summation current transformer, see also Appendix A, Figure A-16). Address 220 is set in that case to: I4 transformer = Neutral current and Address 221 I4/Iph CT is set to: Transformation of ground current transformer I 4 I ph CT = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Transformation of phase current transformers
6-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
Example: Phase-current transformers Ground current transformer 60 1 I 4 I ph CT = ---------------- = 0.600 500 5 If the input I4 is not required, set: Address 220 I4 transformer = Not connected, Address 221 I4/Iph CT is not relevant. In this case, the neutral current is calculated from the sum of the phase currents. Rated Frequency The rated frequency of the network is set under address 230 Rated Frequency. The default setting is made in the factory in accordance with the design variant and needs to be changed only if the device is to be used for a different purpose than ordered for. It can be set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set in address 240A. This duration is valid for all protection and control functions which can issue a trip command. It also determines the duration of a tripping pulse during the circuit breaker test via the device. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The maximum duration of a closing command TMax CLOSE CMD is set in address 241A. This setting is valid for all closing commands of the device. It also determines the duration of a closing pulse during the circuit breaker test via the device. This duration must be long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has closed. There is no risk in setting it too long, because the closing command is interrupted in any case as soon as a protective function trips the circuit breaker again. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Circuit Breaker Test 7SD52 allows a circuit breaker test during operation by means of a tripping and a closing command entered on the front panel or via DIGSI 4. The duration of the trip commands is set as explained above. Address 242 T-CBtest-dead determines the time from the end of the tripping command until the beginning of the closing command during the test. It should not be less than 0.1 s. The basic principle of the differential protection assumes that all currents flowing into a healthy protected section add up to zero. If the current transformer sets at the line ends have different transformation errors in the overcurrent range, the sum of the secondary currents can reach considerable peaks due to the saturation of the transformers when a short-circuit current flows through the line. These peaks may feign an internal fault. The features included in the 7SD52 to prevent errors in case of current transformer saturation work completely satisfying if the protection knows the response characteristic of the current transformers. For this, the characteristic data of the current transformers and of their secondary circuits are set (see also Figure 6-17 in Subsection 6.2.1, page 6-27). The preset values are adequate in most cases; they correspond to usual current transformers for protection purposes. 500 A/5 A 60 A/1 A
Trip Command Duration
Current Transformer Characteristics
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-9
6 Functions
The rated accuracy limit factor n of the current transformers and the rated power PN are usually stated on the rating plate of the current transformers. The information stated refers to reference conditions (rated current, rated burden). For example (according to IEC 60185) Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA n = 10; PN = 30 VA Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA n = 20; PN = 20 VA The operational accuracy limit factor n' is derived from this rated data and the actual secondary burden P': PN + Pi n' --- = -----------------n P' + P i with n' = n = PN= Pi = P' = operational accuracy limit factor (effective accuracy limit factor) rated accuracy limit factor of CTs (distinctive number behind P) rated burden of current transformers [VA] for rated current internal burden of the current transformers [VA] at rated current actually connected burden (devices + secondary lines) [VA] at rated current
Usually, the internal burden of current transformers is stated in the test report. If unknown, it can be calculated roughly from the DC resistance Ri of the secondary winding. P i Ri I N 2 The ratio between the operational accuracy limit factor and the rated accuracy limit factor n'/n is parameterized under address 251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N. The CT error at rated current is set under address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N. It is equal to the current measuring deviation for primary rated current intensity F1 according to IEC 60185. It is 1 % for a 5P transformer, 3 % for a 10P transformer. The CT error for rated accuracy limit factors is set under address 254 E% K_ALF_N. It is derived from the number preceding the P of the transformer data. With this data the device establishes an approximate CT error characteristic and calculates the restraint quantity (see also Subsection 6.2.1). Exemplary calculation: Current transformer 5P10; 20 VA transformation 600 A/5 A internal burden 2 VA Secondary lines 4 mm2 Cu length 20 m Device 7SD52 burden at 5 A IN = 5 A 0.3 VA
The resistance of secondary lines is (with the resistivity for copper Cu = 0.0175 mm2/m) 20 m mm R i = 2 0.0175 ----------------- ----------------- = 0.175 2 m 4 mm
2
6-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
Here, the most unfavourable case is assumed, i.e. the current (as it is the case with single-phase faults) flows back and forth via the secondary lines (factor 2). From that the power for rated current IN = 5 A is calculated Pi = 0.175 (5 A)2 = 4.375 VA The entire connected burden consists of the burden of the incoming lines and the burden of the device: P' = 4.375 VA + 0.3 VA = 4.675 VA Thus the ratio of the accuracy limit factors is as follows PN + Pi n' 20 VA + 2 VA --- = ------------------ = ------------------------------------------- = 3.30 n 4.375 VA + 2 VA P' + P i This leads to the following setting values: Address 251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N = 3.30 Address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N = 1.0 Address 254 E% K_ALF_N = 5.0 (from the calculation above) (from the accuracy for rated current) (from 5P10)
The presettings correspond to current transformers 10P with rated burden. Naturally only those settings are sensible where address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N is set lower than address 254 E% K_ALF_N. Power Transformer with Voltage Regulation If the protected object covers a power transformer with voltage regulation, a differential current may occur even during normal healthy operation under steady-state conditions. This differential current depends on the current intensity as well as on the position of the tap changer of the transformer. Since this differential current is currentproportional it is meaningful to consider it like a current transformer error. You may calculate the maximum differential current at the limits of the tap changer under nominal conditions (referred to the mean current) and add it to the current transformer error as discussed above (addresses 253 and 254). This correction is performed only at that relay facing the regulated winding of the power transformer. Exemplary calculation: Transformer YNd5 35 MVA 110 kV/25 kV Yside regulated
10 %
From this resulting: rated current at nominal voltage IN = 184 A rated current at UN + 10 % Imin = 167 A rated current at UN 10 % Imax = 202 A I min + I max 167 A + 202 A mean current value I mean = -------------------------- = ------------------------------------ = 184.5 A 2 2 The maximum deviation from this mean current is I max I mean 202 A 184.5 A max. deviation max = ------------------------------ = ----------------------------------------- = 0.095 = 9.5 % 184.5 A I mean This maximum deviation max [in %] has to be added to the current transformer errors as determined above, addresses 253 E% ALF/ALF_N and 254 E% K_ALF_N.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-11
6 Functions
It must be considered that this deviation is referred to the mean current value between the extrema of the tap changer position at rated apparent power, not to the current value at rated voltage and rated power. This demands a further correction of the data of the protected object as discussed in Subsection 6.1.3 under subtitle Topological Data for Transformers (optional) (page 6-16).
6.1.1.1
Setting Overview Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers also must be taken into consideration. The presetting of the nominal frequency corresponds to the nominal frequency according to the device version. Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.
Addr. 201 203 204 205 206 210 211 220
Setting Title CT Starpoint Unom PRIMARY
Setting Options towards Line towards Busbar 1.0..1200.0 kV
Default Setting towards Line 400.0 kV 100 V 1000 A 1A not connected 1.73 CT Starpoint
Comments
Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L) CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current U4 voltage transformer is Matching ratio Phase-VT To OpenDelta-VT
Unom SECONDARY 80..125 V CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY U4 transformer Uph / Udelta I4 transformer 10..5000 A 1A 5A not connected Udelta transformer 0.10..9.99 not connected Neutral Current (of the protected line) 0.010..5.000 50 Hz 60 Hz 0.02..30.00 sec 0.01..30.00 sec 0.00..30.00 sec 1.00..10.00 0.5..50.0 % 0.5..50.0 %
Neutral Current (of I4 current transformer is the protected line) 1.000 50 Hz 0.10 sec 1.00 sec 0.10 sec 1.00 5.0 % 10.0 % Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's Rated Frequency Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Dead Time for CB test-autoreclosure k_alf/k_alf nominal CT Error in % at k_alf/k_alf nominal CT Error in % at k_alf nominal
221 230 240A 241A 242 251 253 254
I4/Iph CT Rated Frequency TMin TRIP CMD TMax CLOSE CMD T-CBtest-dead K_ALF/K_ALF_N E% ALF/ALF_N E% K_ALF_N
6-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
6.1.2
Setting Groups
A setting group is a collection of setting values to be used for a particular application. In the 7SD52 relay, four independent setting groups (A to D) are possible. The user can switch between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during configuration (see Chapter 5). Whilst setting values may vary among the four setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same. Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application. While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group is active at a given time. If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the rest of this sub-section is of no importance. If multiple setting groups are desired, address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION must have been set to Enabled in the relay configuration. Refer to Chapter 5. Each of these sets (A to D) is adjusted one after the other.
Purpose of Setting Groups
Copying Setting Groups
In most cases, only a few settings will vary from setting group to setting group. For this reason, an option exists to copy stored setting values from one setting group to another setting group using DIGSI 4: To copy the setting values from setting group to another setting group, you should highlight the setting group in the list whose setting values are to be copied. Next, go to the menu bar, click on Edit and select Copy (see Figure 6-9).
Figure 6-9
Copying a setting group in DIGSI 4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-13
6 Functions
The next step is to highlight the name of setting group in the list into which the setting values should be copied. Go to the menu bar, click on Edit and select Paste. A confirmation box will appear (see Figure 6-10). Select Yes to copy the setting values. Note: All existing setting values in the setting group that has been copied to will be overwritten. An inadvertent copy operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the DIGSI 4 session without saving changes.
Figure 6-10
DIGSI 4: Confirmation before copying a setting group
Setting groups may be copied more easily using the Drag & Drop feature. To use the Drag & Drop feature, the name of the setting group in the list whose setting values are to be copied should be highlighted. Holding down the left mouse button, the cursor can then be dragged to the name of the setting group into which the setting values are to be copied. After copying setting groups, it is only necessary to modify those setting values that are to be set differently. Restoring Factory Settings The factory settings may be restored for a modified setting group. To restore factory settings to a setting group, the name of the setting group whose settings are to be restored is highlighted. Next, select the menu option Edit and then click on Reset. A confirmation box appears, click on Yes to confirm restoration of factory settings. Note: All setting values in the setting group being restored to factory settings will be overwritten. An inadvertent reset operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the DIGSI 4 session without saving changes.
Switching between Setting Groups
The procedure to switch from one setting group to another during operations is described in Sub-section 7.2.2. The option of switching between several setting groups externally via binary inputs is described in Subsection 8.1.2.
6-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
6.1.2.1
Addr. 301
Setting Overview
Setting Title ACTIVE GROUP Setting Options Group A Group B Group C Group D Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Default Setting Group A Comments Active Setting Group is
302
CHANGE
Group A
Change to Another Setting Group
6.1.2.2
F.No. 7 8
Information Overview
Alarm >Set Group Bit0 >Set Group Bit1 Group A Group B Group C Group D >Setting Group Select Bit 0 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 Group A Group B Group C Group D Comments
6.1.3
General Protection Data (Power System Data 2)

General protection data (P.SYSTEM DATA2) includes settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the P.SYSTEM DATA1 as discussed in Sub-section 6.1.1, these settings can be changed over with the setting groups. To modify these settings, select the SETTINGS menu option Group A (setting group A), and then P.System Data2. The other setting groups are Group B, Group C, and Group D, as described in Subsection 6.1.2. The nominal operating data under Power System Data 2 should be set to the same values at all ends of the protected object. This ensures uniform measured values displayed during commissioning and operation and sent to a central computer station.
Rated Values of Protected Lines
The statements under this subtitle refer to protected lines (cables or overhead lines) if no power transformer is situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models without transformer option or if the transformer option is disabled during configuration of the
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-15
6 Functions
scope of function (address 145 TRANSFORMER = NO, see Section 5.1). If a transformer is part of the protected zone, proceed with the next subtitle Topological Data for Transformers (optional). With address 1103 FullScaleVolt. you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the equipment to be protected (if voltages are applied). This setting influences the displays of the operational measured values in %. The primary rated current (address 1104 FullScaleCurr.) is that of the protected object. For cables the thermal continuous current-loading capacity can be selected. For overhead lines the rated current is usually not defined; set the rated current of the current transformers (as set in address 205, Subsection 6.1.1). If the current transformers have different rated currents at the ends of the protected object, set the highest rated current value for all ends. This setting will not only have an impact on the indication of the operational measured values in per cent, but must also be exactly the same for all ends of the protected object, since it is the base for the current comparison at all ends. Topological Data for Transformers (optional) The statements under this subtitle apply to protected objects which cover a power transformer being situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models with transformer option and if the transformer option is enabled during configuration of the scope of function (address 145 TRANSFORMER = YES, see Section 5.1). If no transformer is part of the protected zone, this subtitle can be passed over. The topological data make it possible to relate all measured quantities to the rated data of the power transformer. With address 1103 FullScaleVolt. you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the transformer to be protected. This setting is also needed for computing the current reference value of the differential protection. Therefore, it is important to set the correct rated voltage for each end of the protected object even if no measured voltages are applied to the relay. In general, select the rated voltage of the transformer winding facing the device. But, if the protected transformer is equipped with a voltage tap changer at one winding, then do not use the rated voltage of that winding but the voltage that corresponds to the mean value of the currents at the ends of the control range of the tap changer. In this way the fault currents caused by voltage regulation are minimized. Exemplary calculation: Transformer YNd5 35 MVA 110 kV/25 kV Yside regulated 10 %
Thus resulting for the regulated winding (110 kV): maximum voltage Umax = 121 kV minimum voltage Umin = 99 kV Setting value for the rated voltage at this side (address 1103) 2 2 FullScaleVolt. = ------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------- = 108.9 kV 1 1 1 1 ------------ + --------------------------- + -------------121 kV 99 kV U max U min
6-16
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
The OPERATION POWER (address 1106) is the direct primary rated apparent power for transformers and other machines. The same operation power value must be set for all ends of the protected object since it is the basis for the current comparison at all ends. The power must always be entered as a primary value, even if the device is generally configured in secondary values. The device calculates the rated current of the protected object from this power. The VECTOR GROUP I (address 1162) is the vector group of the power transformer, always from the devices perspective. The device which is used for the reference end of the transformer, normally the one at the high voltage side, must keep the numerical index 0 (default setting). The relevant vector group index must be stated for the other winding(s). Example: Transformer Yy6d5 For the Yend is set: for the yend is set: for the dend is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 0, VECTOR GROUP I = 6, VECTOR GROUP I = 5.
If a different winding is chosen as reference winding, e.g. the d-winding, this has to be taken into consideration: For the Yend is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 7 (12 5), for the yend is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 1 (6 5), for the dend is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 0 (5 5 = 0 = reference side). Address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U is normally set in the same way as address 1162 VECTOR GROUP I. If the vector group of the transformer is adapted with external means, e.g. because there are matching transformers in the measuring circuit that are still used, set VECTOR GROUP I = 0, at all ends. In this case the differential protection operates without proper matching computation. But, the measuring voltages transmitted via the transformer would not be adapted in the 7SD52 and therefore not correctly calculated and displayed. Address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U serves to remove this disadvantage. Set the correct vector group of the transformer according to the abovementioned considerations. Address 1162 VECTOR GROUP I is therefore relevant for the differential protection, whereas address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U serves as a basis for the computation of measured voltages beyond the transformer. Address 1163 TRANS STP IS is used to set whether the power transformer starpoint facing the device is grounded or not. If the starpoint is grounded, the device will eliminate the zero sequence current of the relevant side, since this zero sequence current may cause a spurious tripping in case of a ground fault outside of the protected zone. Circuit Breaker Status Various protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the circuit breaker for faultless operation. The device has a circuit breaker status recognition which processes the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and it also contains a metrological opening and closing recognition (see also Section 6.13). The open-pole current PoleOpenCurrent, which is safely undershot when the circuit breaker pole is open, is set in address 1130A. High sensitivity may be set if parasitic currents (e.g. from induction) can be excluded when the line is de-energized. Otherwise the value must be increased correspondingly.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-17
6 Functions
The seal-in time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132A) determines how long the protection functions that are effective when the line is energized (e.g. the increased pickup threshold for the differential protection) are enabled when the internal status recognition has recognized the closing of the breaker or when the device receives a signal via a binary input and the CB auxiliary contact that the circuit breaker has been closed. Therefore, this seal-in time should be longer than the CB operating time during the closing plus the command time of the relevant protective function plus the CB operating time during opening. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Address 1134 Line status determines the criteria for the functioning of the integrated status recognition. With CurrentOpenPole the rise of the open-pole current above the threshold set in address 1130A (PoleOpenCurrent, see above) is interpreted as the closing of the circuit breaker. Current AND CB, on the other hand, means that both the currents and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are processed for the status recognition. This means, that Current AND CB should be set if the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker exist and are connected and allocated to corresponding binary inputs, and CurrentOpenPole in all other cases. Note that the I>>>stage of the instantaneous high-speed trip (see Section 6.7) can only work if the auxiliary contacts for all devices at the ends of the protected object are connected. Whilst the SI Time all Cl. (address 1132A, see above) becomes effective with each energization of the line, SI Time Man.Cl (address 1150A) determines the time during which a possible influence on the protection functions becomes effective after the manual closing (e.g. the switch-on pickup threshold for differential protection or overcurrent protection, see loc cit). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Three-Pole Coupling Three-pole coupling is only relevant if single-pole auto-reclosures are carried out. If not, tripping is always three-pole. The rest of this subtitle is then irrelevant. Address 1155 3pole coupling determines whether any multi-phase pickup leads to a three-pole tripping command or whether only multi-pole tripping decision results in a three-pole tripping command. This setting is only relevant for versions with singlepole and three-pole tripping and is only available there. It does not have an impact on the differential protection since pickup and tripping are equivalent. The time overcurrent protection function, however, can also pick up in the event of a fault occurred outside the protected object, without tripping. More information on the functions is also contained in Subsection 6.13.3, Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device. With the setting with PICKUP, each multi-phase pickup causes a three-pole tripping, even if only a single-phase ground fault has occurred in the protected area and a further external fault, e.g. through overcurrent, is recognized. Even if a single-pole tripping command is already present, each further pick-up will lead to a three-pole coupling. If, on the other hand, the address is set on with TRIP (normal setting for differential protection), only multi-pole tripping commands will lead to a three-pole tripping. Therefore, if a single-phase fault occurs within the protected zone and a further fault outside of it, single-pole tripping is possible. A further fault during the single-pole tripping will only lead to a three-pole coupling, if it occurs within the protected zone. This parameter is valid for all protection functions of 7SD52 which are capable of single-pole tripping. Standard setting: with TRIP.
6-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
Applying the time overcurrent protection function the difference is noticeable when multiple faults occur, which means faults that nearly occur at the same time at different places in the system. If, for example, two single-phase ground faults occur on different lines these may also be parallel lines (Figure 6-11), the protective relays of all four line ends detect a fault L1L2E, i.e. the pickup image is consistent with a two-phase ground fault. But since each of the two lines has only a single-phase fault, a single-phase auto-reclosure on each of the two lines is desirable. This is possible with setting 1155 3pole coupling to with TRIP. Each of the four devices recognizes a single-pole internal fault and is therefore able to perform a single-pole trip.
L1E
L2E
Figure 6-11
Multiple fault on a double-circuit line
In some cases, however, a three-pole trip would be preferable in this fault scenario, e.g. if the double-circuit line is located close to a large generator unit (Figure 6-12). This is because the generator considers the two single-phase ground faults as one double ground fault, with correspondingly high dynamic stress of the turbine shaft. With 1155 3pole coupling set to with PICKUP, the two lines are switched off, since each device picks up as with L1L2E, i.e. as with a multi-phase fault.
L1E
~
L2E
Figure 6-12
Multiple fault on a double-circuit line close to a generator
Address 1156A Trip2phFlt determines that the short-circuit protection functions perform only a single-pole trip in case of isolated two-phase faults (clear of ground), provided that single-pole tripping is possible and permitted. This allows a single-pole reclosure cycle for this kind of fault. The trip type can be set to 1pole leading or 1pole lagging . The parameter is only available in versions with single-pole and three-pole tripping. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If this possibility is to be used, you have to bear in mind that the phase selection should be the same throughout the entire network and that it must be the same at all ends of one line. More information on the functions is also contained in Subsection 6.13.3 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device. The usual default setting is 3pole.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-19
6 Functions
6.1.3.1
Setting Overview Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values, the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration. Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.
Addr. 1106 1161 1162 1163 1103 1104 1130A 1132A 1134
Setting Title OPERATION POWER
Setting Options 10.0..5000.0 MVA
Default Setting 692.8 MVA 0 0 Solid Earthed 400.0 kV 1000 A 0.10 A 0.10 sec
Comments Operational power of protection zone Vector group numeral for voltage Vector group numeral for current Transformer starpoint is Measurement: Full Scale Voltage (100%) Measurement: Full Scale Current (100%) Pole Open Current Threshold Seal-in Time after ALL closures
VECTOR GROUP U 0..11 VECTOR GROUP I TRANS STP IS FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. PoleOpenCurrent SI Time all Cl. Line status 0..11 Solid Earthed Not Earthed 1.0..1200.0 kV 10..5000 A 0.05..1.00 A 0.01..30.00 sec with Pole Open Current Threshold only with CBaux AND Pole Open Current 0.01..30.00 sec with Pickup with Trip 3pole 1pole, leading phase 1pole, lagging phase
with Pole Open Cur- Line status rent Threshold only
1150A 1155 1156A
SI Time Man.Cl 3pole coupling Trip2phFlt
0.30 sec with Trip 3pole
Seal-in Time after MANUAL closures 3 pole coupling Trip type with 2phase faults
6-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.1 General
6.1.3.2
F.No. 301 302 351 352 353 356 357 361 366 367 368 371 378 379 380 381 382 383 385 386 410 411 501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512
Alarm Pow.Sys.Flt. Fault Event >CB Aux. L1 >CB Aux. L2 >CB Aux. L3 >Manual Close >CloseCmd.Blo >FAIL:Feeder VT >CB1 Pole L1 >CB1 Pole L2 >CB1 Pole L3 >CB1 Ready >CB faulty >CB 3p Closed >CB 3p Open >1p Trip Perm >Only 1ph AR >Enable ARzones >Lockout SET >Lockout RESET >CB1 3p Closed >CB1 3p Open Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP L1 Relay PICKUP L2 Relay PICKUP L3 Relay PICKUP E Relay TRIP L1 Relay TRIP L2 Relay TRIP L3 Relay CLOSE Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1pL1 Power System fault Fault Event >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Phase L3 >Manual close signal >Block all close commands from external >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) >CB1 Pole L1 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) >CB1 Pole L2 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) >CB1 Pole L3 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for reclosing >CB faulty >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed >CB aux. contact 3pole Open >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR >External AR programmed for 1phase only >Enable all AR Zones / Stages >Lockout SET >Lockout RESET >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test) >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test) Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP Phase L1 Relay PICKUP Phase L2 Relay PICKUP Phase L3 Relay PICKUP Earth Relay TRIP command Phase L1 Relay TRIP command Phase L2 Relay TRIP command Phase L3 General CLOSE of relay Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L1 Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-21
6 Functions
F.No. 513 514 515 530 533 534 535 536 545 546 560 561 563
Alarm Relay TRIP 1pL2 Relay TRIP 1pL3 Relay TRIP 3ph. LOCKOUT IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = Final Trip PU Time TRIP Time Trip Coupled 3p Man.Clos.Detect CB Alarm Supp
Comments Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L2 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L3 Relay TRIP command Phases L123 LOCKOUT is active Primary fault current IL1 Primary fault current IL2 Primary fault current IL3 Final Trip Time from Pickup to drop out Time from Pickup to TRIP Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase Manual close signal detected CB alarm suppressed
6-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.2 Differential Protection
6.2
The differential protection is the main feature of the device. It is based on current comparison. For this, one device must be installed at each end of the zone to be protected. The devices exchange their measured quantities via communications links and compare the received currents with their own. In case of an internal fault the allocated circuit breaker is tripped. 7SD52 is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. A version which covers power transformers or machines in unit connection is available as an option. The protected zone is limited selectively at its ends by the current transformer sets.
6.2.1
Function Description
Differential protection is based on current comparison. It makes use of the fact that e.g. a line section L (Figure 6-13) carries always the same current i (dashed line) at its two ends in healthy operation. This current flows into one side of the considered zone and leaves it again on the other side. A difference in current is a clear indication of a fault within this line section. If the actual current transformation ratios are the same, the secondary windings of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 at the line ends can be connected to form a closed electric circuit with a secondary current I; a measuring element M which is connected to the electrical balance point remains at zero current in healthy operation. When a fault occurs in the zone limited by the transformers, a current I1 + I2 which is proportional to the fault currents i1 + i2 flowing in from both sides is fed to the measuring element. As a result, the simple circuit shown in Figure 6-13 ensures a reliable tripping of the protection if the fault current flowing into the protected zone during a fault is high enough for the measuring element M to respond.
Basic Principle with Two Ends
i Station 1
CT1
i1
i2
i Station 2
CT2
I I1 M
i1 + i2
I I2
I1 + I2 Figure 6-13 Basic principle of differential protection for a line with two ends
Basic Principle with Multiple Ends
For lines with three or more ends or for busbars, the principle of differential protection is extended in that the total sum of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation, whereas in case of a fault the total sum is equal to the fault current (see Figure 6-14 as an example for four ends).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-23
6 Functions
Protected object CT1 I1 i1 Figure 6-14 i2 CT2 I2 i3 CT3 I3 i4 CT4 I4 M I1 + I2 + I3 + I4
Basic principle of differential protection for four ends
Transmission of Measured Values
If the entire protected object is located in one place as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars , the measured quantities can be processed immediately. This is different for lines where the protected zone spans a certain distance from one substation to the other. To be able to process the measured quantities of all line ends at each line end, these have to be transmitted in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping condition at each line end can be checked and the respective local circuit breaker can be operated if necessary. 7SD52 transmits the measured quantities as digital telegrams via communication channels. For this, each device is equipped with at least one protection data interface. Figure 6-15 shows this for a line with two ends. Each device measures the local current and sends the information on its intensity and phase relation to the opposite end. The interface for this communication between protection devices is called the protection data interface. As a result, the currents can be added up an processed in each device.
1
i1
I2 I1 I2 I1 I2 I1 + I2
2
i2
I1 I1 + I2
7SD52
7SD52
Figure 6-15
Differential protection for a line with two ends
In case of more than two ends, a communication chain is built up by which each device is informed about the total sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure 6-16 shows an example for four ends. Ends 1 and 2 are derived from the arrangements of the current transformers shown on the left. Although this is actually only one line end, it should be treated in terms of differential protection as two ends because the current is measured in two places. Line end 3 is situated on the opposite side. The line is also equipped with a branch feeder leading to end 4. Each device receives its local currents from the current transformers. Device 1 measures the current i1 and transmits its data as complex phasor I1 to device 2. Device 2 adds the share I2 to its own measured current i2 and sends this partial sum to device 4. Device 4 proceeds in the same way so that I4 is added. The partial sum I1 + I2 + I4 finally reaches device 3 which then adds I3. Vice versa, a corresponding chain leads
6-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
from device 3 via device 4 and device 2 to device 1. In this way, the total sum of the four currents measured at the measuring points is available to all four devices. The sequence of the devices in the communication chain need not correspond to the indexation, as shown in Figure 6-16. The allocation is carried out during the parameterization of the topology, as explained in Section 6.4.
i1
I1
7SD52
I1 I2 +I3 +I4 I2 +I3 +I4 I2 +I3 +I4 I1 I1 I3
i3
I2
i2
7SD52
I1 +I2 I3 +I4
7SD52
I1 +I2 +I4 I3 I1 + I2 I1 +I2 +I4 I4 I1 +I2 +I4 I3 I3
I3 +I4
i4
7SD52
I1 +I2 I3 +I4
Figure 6-16
Differential protection for a line with four ends
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown in dashed lines in Figure 6-16. This provides for redundancy of transmission: even if one communication link fails, the entire differential protection system will be fully operational. The devices recognize a disturbance in communication and switch over automatically to a different way of communication. It is also possible to switch off one line end, e.g. for a check or a revision, and put the local protection out of operation. With a communication ring, the rest of the operation can proceed without disturbances. You will find detailed information on the topology of device communication in Section 6.4. Measured Value Synchronization The devices measure the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device measures, digitizes and pre-processes the associated currents of the current transformers with its own, random processor pulse. If the currents of two or more line ends are to be compared, it is necessary, however, to process all currents with the same time base. All devices which belong together exchange their time with each telegram. The device with index 1 functions as a timing master thus determining the time base. The other devices then calculate the time delay from the transmission and processing times re-
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-25
6 Functions
lated on the timing master. With this rough synchronization the equality of the time bases with a precision of 0.5 ms is provided. To reach a sufficiently precise synchronization all current values are marked with a time stamp before they are transmitted from one device to the other as digital telegrams. This time stamp indicates at which point in time the transmitted current data were valid. Therefore, the receiving devices can carry out an optimized synchronization of the current comparisons based on the received time stamp and their own time management, i.e. they can compare the currents which were actually measured at exactly the same time (<5 s tolerance). The transmission periods are permanently monitored by the devices using the time stamps and considered at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measured quantities, which is decisive for the comparison of complex phasors, is also continuously measured and, if necessary, corrected to achieve a synchronous comparison of the phasors. If the device is connected to voltage transformers and at least one voltage of a sufficient level is available, the frequency is derived from this voltage. If not, the measured currents are used for the determination of the frequency. The measured frequencies are interchanged between the devices via the communication link. Under these conditions all devices work with the currently valid frequency. Restraint The precondition for the basic principle of differential protection is that the total sum of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation. This precondition is only valid for the primary system and even there only if shunt currents of a kind produced by line capacitances or magnetizing currents of transformers and reactors can be neglected. The secondary currents which are applied to the devices via the current transformers, are subject to measuring errors caused by the response characteristic of the current transformers and the input circuits of the devices. Transmission errors such as signal jitters can also cause deviations of the measured quantities. As a result of all these influences, the total sum of all currents processed in the devices in healthy operation is not zero. Therefore, the differential protection is stabilized against these influences. Charging Currents Due to the capacitances of the three phases against ground and against one another, charging currents are flowing even in healthy operation and cause a difference of currents at the ends of the protected zone. Especially when cables are used, the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable magnitude. Charging currents do not depend on the intensity of the measured currents. In healthy operation they can be considered as being almost constant under steady-state conditions, since they are only determined by the voltage and the capacitances of the lines. They can therefore be taken into account during the setting of the sensitivity of the differential protection (see also Subsection 6.2.2 under Pickup Value of Differential Current). The same is true for the steady-state magnetizing currents across shunt reactances. For transient inrush currents 7SD52 has a separate inrush restraint feature (see below under the subtitle Inrush Restraint). Current Transformer Errors To consider the influences of current transformer errors, each device calculates a selfrestraining quantity I. This is calculated by estimating the possible local transformer errors from the data of the local current transformers and the intensity of the measured currents. The transformer data have been parameterized under the power system
6-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
data (cf. Subsection 6.1.1 under Current Transformer Characteristics, page 6-9) and apply to each individual device.
Ifault IN
Approximation
Current Tansformer Error
n'/n
Itransformer/IN
Figure 6-17
Approximation of the current transformer errors
Further Influences
Further measuring errors which may arise in the device itself by hardware tolerances, calculation tolerances, deviations in time or which are due to the quality of the measured quantities such as harmonics and deviations in frequency, are also estimated by the device and increase the local self-restraining quantity automatically. Here, the permissible variations in the data transmission and processing periods are also considered. Deviations in time are caused by residual errors during the synchronization of measured quantities, data transmission and operating time variations, and similar events. When GPSsynchronization is used, these influences are eliminated and do not increase the self-restraining quantity. If an influencing parameter cannot be determined e.g. the frequency if no sufficient measured quantities are available the measuring error will be set by definition to the maximum permissible deviation. For the frequency this means that if the frequency cannot be determined, because no sufficient measured quantities are available, the device will assume rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from the rated frequency within the permissible range (20 % of the rated frequency), the restraint will be increased automatically. As soon as the frequency has been determined (max. 100 ms), the restraint will be decreased correspondingly. This is important during operation if no measured quantities are existing in the protected area before a fault occurs, e.g. if a line with the voltage transformers on the line side is switched onto a fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at this point of time, an increased restraint will be active until the actual frequency is determined. This may delay the tripping somewhat, but only close to the pickup threshold, i.e. in case of very low-current faults. These self-restraining quantities are calculated by each device from the total sum of the possible deviations and transmitted to the other devices. In the same way as the total currents (differential currents) are calculated (see above, Transmission of Measured Values), each device calculates thus the total sum of the restraining quantities and thereby stabilizes the differential currents. It is due to the self-restraint that the differential protection works with a maximum of sensitivity at all times, since the restraining quantities adapt themselves automatically in a dynamic way to possible errors. In this way, even high-resistance faults, with high load currents at the same time, can be detected effectively.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-27
6 Functions
Inrush Restraint
If the protected area includes a power transformer, a high inrush current can be expected when connecting the transformer. This inrush current flows into the protected zone but does not leave it again. The inrush current can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content in second harmonics (double rated frequency) which is almost absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the content in second harmonics exceeds an adjustable threshold in differential current, the tripping will be prevented. The inrush restraint has an upper limit: if a certain (adjustable) current value is exceeded, it will not be effective any more, since there must be an internal current-intensive short-circuit. Figure 6-18 shows a simplified logic diagram. The conditions for the inrush restraint are examined in each device in which this function has been activated. The blocking condition is transmitted to all devices so that it is effective at all ends of the protected object.
2301 INRUSH REST. OFF 1 ON 2302 fN
2nd HARMONIC
ILx
&
2fN
Inrush detect. Lx
MAX INR. PEAK 2305
Lx = L1, L2, L3 depending on phase
Figure 6-18
Logic diagram of the inrush restraint for one phase
Since the inrush restraint works individually for each phase, the protection is fully effective even with the transformer switched onto a single-phase fault, whereas it is possible that an inrush current may be flowing in a different, healthy phase. It is, however, possible to set the protection in a way that when the permissible harmonic content in the current of only one single phase is exceeded, not only the phase with the inrush current but also the remaining phases of the differential stage are blocked. This socalled crossblock function can be limited in time. Figure 6-19 shows the logic diagram. The crossblock function affects all devices as well, since it extends the inrush restraint to all three phases.
6-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Opposite end(s) Inrush detect. L1
Inrush block. L1
Inrush detect. L2
Inrush block. L2
Inrush detect. L3
2310 2303 CROSSBLOCK NO 1 YES CROSSB 2HM
Inrush block. L3
&
Figure 6-19
Logic diagram of the crossblock function for one end
Evaluation of Measured Values
The evaluation of measured values is performed separately for each phase. Additionally, the residual current is evaluated. Each device calculates a differential current from the total of the current phasors that were formed at each end of the protected zone and transmitted to the other ends. The differential current value is equal to the value of the fault current that is registered by the differential protection system. In the ideal case it is equal to the fault current value. In a healthy system the differential current value is low and similar to the charging current. The restraining current counteracts the differential current. It is the total of the maximum measured errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated from the actual measured values and power system parameters that were set. Therefore the highest possible error value of current transformers within the nominal range and/or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the current flowing through each end of the protected object. The total value, including the measured internal errors, is then transmitted to the other ends. This is the reason why the restraining current is an image of the greatest possible measurement error of the entire differential protection system. The pickup characteristic of the differential protection (Figure 6-20) derives from the restraining characteristic Idiff = Irest (45curve) that is cut below the setting value IDIFF>. It complies with the formula
Irest = I-DIFF> + (current errors)
If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup limit and the greatest possible measurement error, the fault must be internal (shaded area in Figure 6-20).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-29
6 Functions
Idiff
Tripping
I-DIFF>
Irest
Figure 6-20
Pickup characteristic of the differential protection Idiff>stage
High-Speed Charge Comparison
The charge comparison protection function is a differential stage which is superimposed on the current comparison (the actual differential protection). If a high-current fault occurs, high-speed tripping decision is then possible. The charge comparison protection function does not sum up the complex current phasors at the ends of the protected object, but the integral of currents calculated according to the following formula:
t2
Q =
i(t) dt
t1
It includes the integration interval from t1 to t2, for the 7SD52 device determined as a quarter AC cycle. The calculated charge Q is a scalar value which is faster to determine and to transmit than a complex phasor. The charges of all ends of the protected object are added in the same way as done with the current phasors of the differential protection. Thus the total of the charges is available at all ends of the protected zone. Right after a fault occurrence within the protected zone a charge difference emerges. For high fault currents which can lead to saturation of current transformers, a decision is taken before the saturation begins. The charge difference of external faults is theoretically equal to zero at the beginning. The charge comparison protection function immediately detects the external fault and blocks its own function. If saturation begins in one or more current transformers which limit the protected zone, the before-mentioned function remains blocked. Thus possible differences resulting from the saturation are excluded. Generally it is assumed that
6-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
an initial saturation of current transformers only takes place after the expiration of at least one integration interval (1/4 cycle) that commenced with the occurrence of a fault. Each phase is subject to the charge comparison. Therefore an internal fault (evolving fault) in a different phase after the external fault occurred is registered immediately. The functional limitation of the charge comparison is reached in the less probable case that an internal fault (evolving fault) appears after occurrence of an external fault with considerable current transformer saturation in the same phase; this must then be detected by the actual differential protection. Furthermore the charge comparison is influenced by charge currents from lines and shunt currents from transformers (steady-state and transient) that also cause a charge difference. Therefore the charge comparison is, as aforesaid, a function suited to complete the differential protection ensuring a fast tripping for high-current short-circuits. Blocking/Interblocking The differential protection can be blocked via a binary input. The blocking at one end of a protected object affects all ends via the communications link (interblocking). If the overcurrent protection is configured as an emergency function, all devices will automatically switch over to this emergency operation mode.
FNo 3525 > Diff block Qrest L1 Qrest L2 Qrest L3
see Figure 6-22
+
Q> 1233 I-DIFF>>
& 1
FNo 3137 I-Diff>> Flt.
Qdiff L1 Qdiff L2 Qdiff L3 Irest L1 Irest L2 Irest L3
Q>
Diff>> L1 Diff>> L2 Diff>> L3

FNo 3133 ... 3135
+
I> 1210 I-DIFF>
Diff. Flt. L1 Diff. Flt. L2 Diff. Flt. L3 FNo 3139 I-Diff> Flt.
Idiff L1 Idiff L2 Idiff L3
I> 1213 I-DIF>SWITCH ON
&
I>
&
Diff> L3 Diff> L2 Diff> L1
Rushblock. L1 Rushblock. L2 Rushblock. L3
see Figure 6-22
L1 L2 L3
Switch-on recognition
Figure 6-21
Logic diagram of the differential protection
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-31
6 Functions
Pickup of the Differential Protection
Figure 6-21 shows the logic diagram of the differential protection. The phase-segregated stages are totalled to phase information. Additionally the device provides information of which stage picked up. As soon as the differential protection function registers a fault within its tripping zone, the signal Diff. Gen. Flt. (general fault detection of the differential protection) is issued. For the differential protection function itself, this pickup signal is of no concern since the tripping conditions are available at the same time. This signal, however, is necessary for the initiation of internal or external supplementary functions (e.g. fault recording, automatic reclosure).
Tripping Logic of the Differential Protection
The tripping logic of the differential protection combines all decisions of the differential stages and forms output signals which are also influenced by the central tripping logic of the entire device (Figure 6-22). The pickup signals that identify the concerned stages of the differential protection can be delayed via the time stage T-DELAY I-DIFF>. Independently from this condition, a single-phase pickup can be blocked for a short time in order to bridge the transient oscillations on occurrence of a single earth fault in a resonant-earthed system. The output signals generated by the stages are combined to the output signals Diff. Gen. TRIP, Diff TRIP 1p L1, Diff TRIP 1p L2, Diff TRIP 1p L3, Diff TRIP L123 in the tripping logic. Here, the single-pole information indicates that only single-pole tripping is to be carried out. The actual generation of the commands for the tripping (output) relay is executed within the tripping logic of the entire device (see Subsection 6.13.4).
from Figure 6-21
Diff>> L1 Diff>> L2 Diff>> L3

1218 T3I0 1PHAS
L1 L2 L3
FNo 3141 Diff. Gen. TRIP
FNo 3142
=1
Diff TRIP 1p L1 FNo 3143
1217 T-DELAY I-DIFF>

L1 L2 L3
Diff TRIP 1p L2 Tripping logic of the unit FNo 3144 Diff TRIP 1p L3 FNo 3145 Diff TRIP L123
1 &
Diff> L1
from Figure 6-21
L1 L1
& Diff> L2
L2 L2
FNo 3146 Diff TRIP 1pole FNo 3147 Diff TRIP 3pole
& Diff> L3
L3 L3
Figure 6-22
Tripping logic of the differential protection
6-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.2.2
General
Setting the Function Parameters

The differential protection can be switched ON or OFF with address 1201 STATE OF DIFF.. If a single device is switched off at any end of a protective object, the calculation of measured values becomes impossible. The entire differential protection system of all ends then is blocked. The current sensitivity is set with address 1210 I-DIFF>. It is determined by the entire current flowing into a protected zone in case of a fault. This is the total fault current regardless of how it is distributed between the ends of the protected object. This pickup value must be set to a value that is higher than the total steady-state shunt current of the protected object. For cables and long overhead lines, the charging current is to be considered in particular. It is calculated from the operational capacitance: IC = 3.63 106 UN fN CB' s With IC UN fN CB' s Charging current to be calculated in A primary Rated voltage of the network in kV primary Rated frequency of the network in Hz Per unit line length service capacitance of the line in nF/km or nF/mile Length of the line in km or miles
Pickup Value of Differential Current
For lines with multiple ends, the total sum of all line sections is taken as the length. Considering the variations of voltage and frequency, the value set should be at least 2 to 3 times higher than the calculated charging current. Moreover, the pickup value should not be less than 15 % of the operating rated current. The operating rated current either derives from the rated apparent power of a transformer in the protected area (see Topological Data for Transformers (optional) in Subsection 6.1.3, page 616) or from the addresses 1104 FullScaleCurr. according to Subsection 6.1.3, Rated Values of Protected Lines (page 6-15). It must be equal at all ends of the protected object. If setting is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI 4, the parameters can be set either as primary or as secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are set, all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV single-conductor oil-filled cable 240 mm2 in a 50-Hz-network with the data: s (length) = CB ' = 16 km 310 nF/km
Current transformers 600 A/5 A From that the steady-state charging current is calculated: IC = 3.63 106 UN fN CB' s = 3.63 106 110 50 310 16 = 99 A For the setting with primary values approximately the double value is to be set, i.e.: Setting value I-DIFF> = 198 A
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-33
6 Functions
For the setting with secondary values this value has to be converted to secondary quantity: 198 A Setting value I-DIFF> = -------------- 5 A = 1.65 A 600 A Pickup Value during Switch-on When switching on long, unloaded cables, overhead lines and arc-compensated lines, pronounced higher-frequency transient reactions may take place. Although these are damped considerably by means of digital filters in the differential protection, a pickup value I-DIF>SWITCH ON (address 1213) can be set to reliably prevent single-sided pickup of the protection. This pickup value is always active when a device has recognized the connection of a dead line at its end. For the duration of the seal-in time SI Time all Cl. which was set with the general protection data under address 1132A (Subsection 6.1.3 under margin Circuit Breaker Status, page 6-17), all devices are then switched over to this particular pickup value. A setting to three to four times the steady-state charging current ensures usually the stability of the protection during switch-on of the line. For switch-on of a transformer or shunt reactor, an inrush restraint is incorporated (see below under Subtitle Inrush Restraint, page 6-35). Final checks will be carried out during commissioning (see Subsection 8.3.13). Delays In special cases of application it may be useful to delay the tripping of the differential protection with an additional timer, e.g. in case of reverse interlocking. The delay time T-DELAY I-DIFF> (address 1217A) is only started upon detection of an internal fault. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If the differential protection is applied to an isolated or resonant-earthed network, it must be ensured that tripping is avoided during the transient oscillations of a single earth fault. With address 1218A T3I0 1PHAS the pickup to a single earth fault is therefore delayed for 0.04 s. In extended resonant-earthed networks this time should be increased. Setting the address to the single-phase tripping is totally suppressed. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Pickup Value of Charge Comparison Stage The pickup threshold of the charge comparison stage is set in address 1233 IDIFF>>. The RMS value of the current is decisive. The conversion into charge value is carried out by the device itself. Setting near the operational nominal current is adequate in most cases. Please also remember that the setting is related to the operational rated values that must be equal (primary) at all ends of the protected object. Since this stage reacts very fast, a pickup of capacitive charging currents (for lines) and inductive magnetizing currents (for transformers or reactors) also for switch-on condition must be excluded. For overhead lines and cables the setting value should not be lower than 4 times the steady-state charging current value (as already calculated in the above calculation example). In resonant-earthed systems also the value of the non-compensated system earth fault current may not be undershot. It derives from the total capacitive earth fault current without considering the Petersen coil. As the Petersen coil serves to compensate nearly the total earth fault current, its rated current can be taken as a base. For transformers set the value INTrafo/ukTrafo. The pickup thresholds are finally checked during commissioning (Subsection 8.3.13). 6-34
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Inrush Restraint
The inrush restraint of the differential protection is only necessary when the devices are operated on a transformer or on lines which end on transformers. It can be switched ON and OFF with address 2301 INRUSH REST.. It is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic which exists in the inrush current. Ex-works a ratio of 15 % of the 2nd HARMONIC I2fN/IfN is set under address 2302, which can normally be taken over. The fraction necessary for the restraint can however be changed. In order to be able to achieve a higher degree of restraint in case of exceptionally unfavourable inrush conditions, you may also set a smaller value. However, if the local measured current exceeds a value set in address 2305 MAX INRUSH PEAK, there will be no inrush restraint. The peak value is decisive. The set value should be higher than the maximum inrush current peak value that can be expected. For transformers a value of above 2INTrafo/ukTrafo can be set. If a line ends on a transformer, a smaller value may be selected, considering the damping of the current by the line. The crossblock function can be activated (YES) or deactivated (NO) with address 2303 CROSS BLOCK. The time after exceeding of the current threshold for which this crossblock is to be activated is set under address 2310 CROSSB 2HM. With setting the crossblock function is always active until the second harmonic content in all phases has dropped below the set value.
6.2.3
Setting Overview
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration. Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.
Addr. 1201 1210 1213 1217A 1218A 1233 2301 2302
Setting Title STATE OF DIFF. I-DIFF> I-DIF>SWITCH ON T-DELAY I-DIFF> T3I0 1PHAS I-DIFF>> INRUSH REST. 2nd HARMONIC OFF ON
Setting Options
Default Setting ON 0.30 A 0.30 A 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 1.2 A OFF 15 %
Comments State of differential protection I-DIFF>: Pickup value I-DIFF>: Value under switch on condition I-DIFF>: Trip time delay Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol. star-point) I-DIFF>>: Pickup value Inrush Restraint 2nd. harmonic in % of fundamental
0.10..20.00 A 0.10..20.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.8..100.0 A; OFF ON 10..45 %
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-35
6 Functions
Addr. 2303 2305 2310
Setting Title CROSS BLOCK MAX INRUSH PEAK CROSSB 2HM NO YES
Setting Options
Default Setting NO 15.0 A 0.00 sec
Comments Cross Block Maximum inrush-peak value Time for Crossblock with 2nd harmonic
1.1..25.0 A 0.00..60.00 sec;
6.2.4
F.No. 3102 3103 3104 3120 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3139 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3176 3177 3178
Alarm 2nd Harmonic L1 2nd Harmonic L2 2nd Harmonic L3 Diff active Diff. Gen. Flt. Diff. Flt. L1 Diff. Flt. L2 Diff. Flt. L3 Diff. Flt. E I-Diff>> Flt. I-Diff> Flt. Diff. Gen. TRIP Diff TRIP 1p L1 Diff TRIP 1p L2 Diff TRIP 1p L3 Diff TRIP L123 Diff TRIP 1pole Diff TRIP 3pole Diff block Diff OFF Diff Flt. 1p.L1 Diff Flt. L1E Diff Flt. 1p.L2
Comments Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L1 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L2 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L3 Diff: Active Diff: Fault detection Diff: Fault detection in phase L1 Diff: Fault detection in phase L2 Diff: Fault detection in phase L3 Diff: Earth fault detection Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>> Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff> Diff: General TRIP Diff: TRIP - Only L1 Diff: TRIP - Only L2 Diff: TRIP - Only L3 Diff: TRIP L123 Diff: TRIP 1pole Diff: TRIP 3pole Diff: Differential protection is blocked Diff: Diff. protection is switched off Diff: Fault detection L1 (only) Diff: Fault detection L1E Diff: Fault detection L2 (only)
6-36
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
F.No. 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 Diff Flt. L2E Diff Flt. L12 Diff Flt. L12E Diff Flt. 1p.L3 Diff Flt. L3E Diff Flt. L31 Diff Flt. L31E Diff Flt. L23 Diff Flt. L23E Diff Flt. L123 Diff Flt. L123E Test Diff. Comm. Diff TestDiff.remote Comm.Diff act. >Test Diff. >Comm. Diff > Diff block Diffblk.rec PI1 Diffblk.rec PI2 Diffblk.sen PI1 Diffblk.sen PI2
Alarm Diff: Fault detection L2E Diff: Fault detection L12 Diff: Fault detection L12E
Comments
Diff: Fault detection L3 (only) Diff: Fault detection L3E Diff: Fault detection L31 Diff: Fault detection L31E Diff: Fault detection L23 Diff: Fault detection L23E Diff: Fault detection L123 Diff: Fault detection L123E Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection Diff: Set Commissioning state of Diff. Diff: Remote relay in Teststate Diff: Commissioning state is active Diff: >Test Diff. Diff: >Comm. Diff >Differential protection blocking signal Differential blocking received at PI1 Differential blocking received at PI2 Differential blocking sending via PI1 Differential blocking sending via PI2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-37
6 Functions
6.3
Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping

7SD52 allows to transmit a tripping command created by the local differential protection to the other end or ends of the protected object (intertripping). Likewise, any desired command of another internal protection function or of an external protection, monitoring or control equipment can be transmitted for remote tripping. The reaction when such a command is received can be set individually for each device. Commands are transmitted separately for each phase, so that a simultaneous singlepole auto-reclosure is always possible, provided that devices and circuit breakers are designed for single-pole tripping.
6.3.1
The transmission signal can originate from two different sources (Figure 6-23). If the parameter I-TRIP SEND is set to YES, each tripping command of the differential protection is routed immediately to the transmission function ITrp.sen. L1 to ... L3 (intertrip) and transmitted via the protection data interfaces and communications links. Furthermore, it is possible to trigger the transmission function via binary inputs (remote tripping). This can be done either separately for each phase via the input functions >Intertrip L1, >Intertrip L2 and >Intertrip L3, or for all phases together (three-pole) via the binary input function >Intertrip 3pol. The transmission signal can be delayed with T-ITRIP BI and prolonged with T-ITRIP PROL BI.
Transmission Circuit
1303 T-ITRIP BI I-TRIP SEND 1301 NO 1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI
Diff TRIP L1 Diff TRIP L2 Diff TRIP L3

FNo 3501 ... 3503
YES
1 1
T T
>Intertrip L1 >Intertrip L2 >Intertrip L3
ITrp.sen. L1 ITrp.sen. L2 ITrp.sen. L3
FNo 3504
L1 L2 L3
>Intertrip 3pol
Figure 6-23
Logic diagram of the intertrip transmission circuit
6-38
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping
In order to ensure that the transmission signal reaches all devices in objects with more than two ends, it is also looped through the protection data interface. Receiving Circuit On the receiving end the signal can lead to a trip. Alternatively it can also cause an alarm only. In this way it is possible to determine for each end of the protected object whether the received signal is to trip at this particular end or not. Figure 6-24 shows the logic diagram. If the received signal is supposed to cause a trip, it will be forwarded to the tripping logic. The tripping logic of the entire device (see also Subsection 6.13.4) ensures, if necessary, that the conditions for single-pole tripping are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, auto-reclosure function ready).
1302 I-TRIP REC
FNo 3518
ITrp.TRIP 1p L1
FNo 3519
ITrp.TRIP 1p L2
Trip Protection Data Interface Alarm FNo 3520
Tripping logic
ITrp.TRIP 1p L3
FNo 3521
ITrp.TRIP L123
FNo 3522
Diff TRIP 1pole

FNo 3523
Diff TRIP 3pole

FNo 3517
ITrp. Gen. TRIP

FNo 3505 ... 3510
L1 L2 L3 Figure 6-24 Logic diagram of the intertrip receiving circuit
I-TRIP REC PIx L1 I-TRIP REC PIx L2 I-TRIP REC PIx L3

x = 1, 2
Further Options
Since the signals for remote tripping can be set to cause only an alarm, any other desired signals can be transmitted in this way as well. After the binary input(s) have been activated, the signals which are set to cause an alarm at the receiving end are transmitted. These alarms can in turn execute any desired actions at the receiving end. It should be noted that for the transmission of remote alarms and remote commands a further 24 transmission channels and, in addition, 4 fast transmission channels are optionally available (see also Section 6.6).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-39
6 Functions
6.3.2
General

The intertrip function for tripping caused by the differential protection can be activated (YES) or deactivated (NO) with address 1301 I-TRIP SEND. Since the differential protection devices theoretically operate with the same measured values at all ends of the protected object, a tripping in the event of an internal fault normally is also carried out at all ends, regardless of the infeed conditions at the ends. In special cases, i.e. if fault currents are to be expected near to the pickup threshold, it may occur that one or more ends do not issue a tripping command due to inevitable device tolerances. For these cases I-TRIP SEND = YES ensures the tripping at all ends of the protected object. If the intertrip function is activated, it will automatically start when the differential protection trips. If the relevant binary inputs are allocated and activated by an external source, the intertrip signal is transmitted as well. In this case, the signal to be transmitted can be delayed with address 1303 T-ITRIP BI. This delay stabilizes the originating signal against dynamic interferences which may possibly occur on the control cabling. Address 1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI is used to extend a signal after it has been effectively injected from an external source. The reaction of a device to receiving an intertrip/remote tripping signal is set in address 1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE. If it is supposed to cause tripping, Trip must be set. If the received signal, however, is supposed to cause an alarm only, Alarm only must be set even if this annunciation is to be further processed externally. The setting times depend on the individual case of application. A delay is necessary if the external control signal originates from a disturbed source and a stabilization seems appropriate. Of course, the control signal has to be longer than the delay for the signal to be effective. If the signal is processed externally at the receiving end, a prolongation time might become necessary for the transmitting end so that the reaction desired at the receiving end can be executed reliably.
Intertrip/Remote Tripping
6.3.3
Addr. 1301 1302 1303 1304
Setting Overview
Setting Title I-TRIP SEND I-TRIP RECEIVE T-ITRIP BI T-ITRIP PROL BI Setting Options YES NO Alarm only Trip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00..30.00 sec Default Setting NO Alarm only 0.02 sec 0.00 sec Comments State of transmit. the intertrip command Reaction if intertrip command is receiv. Delay for intertrip via binary input Prolongation for intertrip via bin.input
6-40
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping
6.3.4
F.No. 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523
Alarm >Intertrip L1 >Intertrip L2 >Intertrip L3 >Intertrip 3pol ITrp.rec.PI1.L1 ITrp.rec.PI1.L2 ITrp.rec.PI1.L3 ITrp.rec.PI2.L1 ITrp.rec.PI2.L2 ITrp.rec.PI2.L3 ITrp.sen.PI1.L1 ITrp.sen.PI1.L2 ITrp.sen.PI1.L3 ITrp.sen.PI2.L1 ITrp.sen.PI2.L2 ITrp.sen.PI2.L3 ITrp. Gen. TRIP ITrp.TRIP 1p L1 ITrp.TRIP 1p L2 ITrp.TRIP 1p L3 ITrp.TRIP L123 Diff TRIP 1pole Diff TRIP 3pole Comments I.Trip: >Intertrip L1 signal input I.Trip: >Intertrip L2 signal input I.Trip: >Intertrip L3 signal input I.Trip: >Intertrip 3 pole signal input I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L1 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L2 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L3 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 2 L1 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 2 L2 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 2 L3 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L1 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L2 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L3 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 2 L1 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 2 L2 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 2 L3 I.Trip: General TRIP I.Trip: TRIP - Only L1 I.Trip: TRIP - Only L2 I.Trip: TRIP - Only L3 I.Trip: TRIP L123 I.Trip: TRIP 1pole I.Trip: TRIP 3pole
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-41
6 Functions
6.4
Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology

As described in the explanation of the function principle of differential protection (Subsection 6.2.1), the devices which belong to the protected object limited by the current transformer sets, have to exchange the data of the ends of the protected object. This does not only apply for the measured quantities relevant for the differential protection itself, but also for all data which are to be available at the ends. This includes the synchronization and topological data as well as the intertripping, transfer trip, remote annunciation signals and measured values. The topology of the protected object, the allocation of the devices to the ends of the protected object and the allocation of the ways of communication to the devices protection data interfaces form the topology of the differential protection system and its communication.
6.4.1
For a standard layout of lines with two ends, you require one protection data interface for each device. This is the protection data interface PI 1 (see also Figure 6-25). The corresponding protection data interface must be configured as Enabled during configuring the scope of functions (Section 5.1).
Communication Topology
PI1 Index 1
PI1 Index 2
7SD522
7SD522
Figure 6-25
Differential protection with two 7SD52 devices, each of them having one protection data interface (transmitter/receiver)
PI1 Index 1
PI1 Index 2
7SD523
PI2
PI2
7SD523
Figure 6-26
Differential protection for two ends with two 7SD523 devices, each of them having two protection data interfaces (transmitter/receiver)
With 7SD523 it is also possible to connect both protection data interfaces with each other provided the two devices have two protection data interfaces each and the rele-
6-42
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology
vant means for transmission are available. This provides for 100 % redundancy as far as the transmission is concerned (Figure 6-26). The devices autonomously search for the fastest communication link. If this link is faulty, the devices automatically switch over to the other link which is then used until the faster one is healthy again. For more than two ends each end requires a 7SD523 device. Thus a communication chain or a communication ring can be formed. A setup with a maximum of six devices is possible. Figure 6-27 shows a communication chain with four devices. Ends 1 and 2 originate from the arrangement of the current transformers shown on the left-hand side. Although this is actually only one line end, it should be treated in terms of differential protection as two ends because the current is measured in two places. This is to make sure that the transformation errors of both transformer sets are considered by the restraint, especially for a fault current flowing from end 1 to end 2 (external fault). The communication chain begins at the protection data interface PI1 of device with index 1, continues in the device with index 2 at PI1, extents from device with index 2 at PI2 to the device with index 4, etc. until it reaches the device with index 3 at PI1. The example shows that the indexing of the devices must not necessarily have to correspond to the sequence of the communication chain. It is also irrelevant which protection data interfaces are connected to which protection data interfaces.
1
7SD523
PI1 Index 1
7SD523 PI1
Index 2 PI2
7SD523
Index 3 PI1
PI1
7SD523
4
PI2
Index 4
Figure 6-27
Differential protection four ends with four 7SD523 in a chain topology
Figure 6-28 shows the same line arrangement as Figure 6-27. The communication links, however, have been complemented to form a closed ring. This communication ring has the advantage, as compared to the chain shown in Figure 6-27, that the entire communication system works even if one communications link fails. The devices detect the failure and switch automatically over to the remaining paths of communication. In this example PI1 is always connected to PI2 of the following device.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-43
6 Functions
By the way, the two above possibilities for two devices can be regarded as special cases of chains and rings: The connection as shown in Figure 6-25 forms a communication chain with only one chain element, and Figure 6-26 shows a ring which is compressed into one two-way connection.
1
PI2
7SD523
PI1 Index 1
7SD523 PI2
Index 2 PI1 PI 1 7SD523 Index 3 PI2
PI1
7SD523
4
PI2
Index 4
Figure 6-28
Differential protection four ends with four 7SD523 in a chain topology
Communication Media
The communication is achieved by direct optical fibre connections or via communication networks. Which kind of media is used, depends on the distance and on the communication media available. For shorter distances a direct connection via optical fibres having a transmission rate of 512 kBit/s is possible. Otherwise we recommend communication converters. A transmission via modem and communication networks can also be realized. Please take into consideration that the tripping times of the differential protection devices depend on the transmission quality and that they are prolonged in case of a reduced transmission quality and /or an increased transmission time. Figure 6-29 shows some examples for communication connections. In case of a direct connection the distance depends on the type of the optical fibre. Table 6-1 lists the available options. Different types of communication modules can be installed in the devices. For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.
Table 6-1 Module type FO5 FO6
Communication via direct connection Connector type ST ST Fibre type Multimode 62.5/125 m Multimode 62.5/125 m Optical Permissible path wavelength attenuation 820 nm 820 nm 8 dB 16 dB Distance, typical 1.5 km 0.95 miles 3.5 km 2.2 miles
6-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 6-1 Module type FO7 FO8
Communication via direct connection Connector type ST FC Fibre type Monomode 9/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Optical Permissible path wavelength attenuation Distance, typical 10 km 6.25 miles 35 km 22 miles
1300 nm 1300 nm
7 dB 18 dB
If communication converters are used, the device and the communication converter are always linked with a FO5 module via optical fibres. The converter itself is equipped with different interfaces for the connection to the communication network. For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.
typical 1,5 km with 62,5/125 m Multimode fibre
typical 3,5 km with 62,5/125 m Multimode fibre
7SD52
FO5 with ST-connector at both ends
7SD52
7SD52
7SD52
typical 10 km with 9/125 m Monomode fibre
typical 35 km with 9/125 m Monomode fibre
7SD52
7SD52
7SD52
FO8 with FC-connector at both ends
7SD52
typical 1.5 km with 62.5/125 m Multimode fibre
Communication Converter
7SD52
e
X.21 or G703.1
Communication Network
X.21 or G703.1
e o
7SD52
7SD52
e
2-wire telephone cable
e o
typical 1.5 km with 62./125 m Multimode fibre
7SD52
Figure 6-29
Examples for communication connections
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-45
6 Functions
Note: The redundancy of communication connections (ring topology) requires a consequent separation of all devices participating in the communication. For example, different communication routes should not be conducted via the same multiplexer, as there is no alternative which could be used if the multiplexer should fail.
Transmission Fault and Transmission Failure
The communication is continuously monitored by the devices. Single faulty data telegrams are not a direct risk if they occur only occasionally. They are recognized and counted in the device which detects the disturbance and can be read out as statistical information. If several faulty telegrams or no data telegrams at all are received, this is regarded as a data fault as soon as a time delay for data disturbance alarm (default setting 100 ms, can be altered) is exceeded. A corresponding alarm is output. If the system offers no alternative way of communication (as ring topologies would do), the differential protection will stop operating. All devices are affected by the disturbance, since the formation of differential currents and restraint currents is no longer possible at any of the ends. If the backup overcurrent protection is configured, it will be the only shortcircuit protection still active. As soon as the data communication works fault-free again, the devices will automatically switch back to differential protection operation. Transmission time jumps that, for example, can occur in case of switchover in the communication network are recognized and corrected by the devices. The differential protection system continues to operate without interruption. The transmission times are measured again and actualized within less than 2 seconds. If GPSsynchronization (with satellite receiver) is used, full sensitivity will be achieved also in this case since asymmetric transmission times are recognized and corrected immediately. If the communication is interrupted for a permanent period (which is longer than a settable time period), this is regarded as a transmission failure. A corresponding alarm is output. The same reactions apply as for the data fault. GPS-failure is annunciated, too.
6.4.2

The protection data interfaces connect the devices with the communication media. The communication is permanently monitored by the devices. Address 1509 T-DATA DISTURB defines after which delay time the user is informed about faulty or missing data telegrams. Address 1510 T-DATAFAIL is used to set the time after which a transmission failure alarm is output. The protection data interface 1 can be switched ON or OFF with address 1501 STATE PROT I 1. If it is switched OFF, this corresponds to a transmission failure. In case of
General about Protection Data Interfaces
Protection Data Interface 1
6-46
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
a ring topology, the differential protection and all functions which require the transmission of data, can continue their operation, but not in case of a chain topology. In address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER, set the transmission media that you want to connect to protection data interface PI 1. The following media are possible F.optic direct, i.e. communication directly by fibre-optic cable with 512 kBit/s; Com conv 64 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 64 kBit/s (G703.1 or X.21); Com conv 128 kB, i.e. via communication converters 128 kBit/s (X.21) or 2-wire copper bidirectional; Com conv 512 kB, i.e. via communication converters 512 kBit/s (X.21). The possibilities may vary for the different device versions. The data must be identical at both ends of a communication route. The setting depends on the features of the communication media. As a general rule, it can be stated that the higher the transmission rate the shorter the response time of the differential protection system. The devices measure and monitor the transmission times. Deviations are corrected, as long as they are within the permissible range. These permissible ranges are set under addresses 1505A and 1506A and can normally be left at their default values. The maximum permissible transmission time (address 1505A PROT 1 T-DELAY) is preset to a value that does not exceed the usual delay of communication networks. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If it is exceeded during operation (e.g. because of switchover to a different way of transmission), the message PI1 TD alarm will be issued. Increased transmission times only have an impact on the tripping time of the differential protection system. The maximum transmission time difference (outgoing telegram vs. return telegram) can be altered in address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. With a direct fibre-optic connection, this value can be set to 0. For transmission via communication networks a higher value may be needed. The standard value is 100 s (presetting). If GPSsynchronization is used this value is relevant only in case the GPSsignal is missing. As soon as the GPSsynchronization is restored the transmission time differences are compensated again. The permissible transmission time difference has a direct influence on the sensitivity of the differential protection. The automatic self-restraint of the protection adapts the restraint quantities to these differences so that a spurious operation of the differential protection due to these influences is prevented. Thus, higher difference values reduce the sensitivity of the protection, which may be noticeable in case of very low-current faults. With GPSsynchronization, transmission time differences do not affect the sensitivity of the protection as long as GPSsynchronization is intact. When the GPSsynchronization detects that the permissible time difference is exceeded during operation, the message PI 1 PD unsym. will be issued. Address 1511 PI1 SYNCMODE is only relevant if GPSsynchronization is used. It determines the conditions for differential protection operation when the protection communication has been established (initially or after transmission failure): PI1 SYNCMODE = TEL or GPS means that the differential protection will become active as soon as the protection communication has been established (data telegrams are received). Until the GPSsynchronization is effective, the differential protection operates with increased self-restraint determined by the maximum transmission time difference without GPS (address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-47
6 Functions PI1 SYNCMODE = TEL and GPS means that the differential protection is active, after reception of proper protection data telegrams, first when GPSsynchronization has taken place. The operator can determine by manual acknowledgement (via a binary input) that the differential protection starts operation with increased selfrestraint determined by the maximum transmission time difference without GPS (address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.). When the GPSsynchronization is re-established, full sensitivity is regained since transmission time differences are compensated by the GPSsynchronization. PI1 SYNCMODE = GPS SYNC OFF means that no GPSsynchronization takes place for this protection data interface. This is meaningful if no transmission time differences are expected (e.g. for fibre-optic direct data link). This setting option can also be used to remove this protection data interface from the GPS synchronization. Protection Data Interface 2 If protection data interface 2 exists and is used, the same possibilities apply as for protection data interface 1. The corresponding parameters are set with addresses 1601 STATE PROT I 2 (ON or OFF), 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER, 1605A PROT 2 T-DELAY, and 1606A PROT 2 UNSYM.. Here again, the last two settings can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If GPSsynchronization is used, address 1611 PI2 SYNCMODE applies, too. If GPS synchronization (order option) is used, this synchronization mode can be switched ON or OFF in address 1801 GPS-SYNC.. Address 1803A TD GPS FAILD is used to set the delay time after which an alarm is output GPS loss after a GPS failure is detected. Further parameters concerning GPSsynchronization are set for the individual protection data interfaces (see above). Communication Topology First of all, define your communication topology: number the devices consecutively. This number is a consecutive device index that serves for your own overview. It starts for each differential protection system (i.e. for each protected object) with 1. For the differential protection system the device with index 1 is always the timing master, i.e. the absolute time management of all devices which belong together depends on the absolute time management of this device. As a result the time information of all devices is comparable at all times. The device index serves for unique definition of the devices within the differential protection system (i.e. for one protected object). Allocate also an identification number (deviceID) for each device. The deviceID is used by the communication system to identify each individual device. It must be between 1 and 65534 and must be unique within the communication system. The ID number identifies the devices in the communication system since the exchange of information between several differential protection systems (thus also for several protected objects) can be performed via the same communication system. Please make sure that the possible communications links and the existing interfaces are in accordance with each other. If not all devices are equipped with two protection data interfaces, those with only one protection data interface must be located at the ends of the communication chain. In Figure 6-27 these are the devices with index 1 and 3. A ring topology is only possible, if all devices of a differential protection system provide two protection data interfaces. For a protected object with two ends (e.g. a line) the addresses 1701 ID OF RELAY 1 and 1702 ID OF RELAY 2 are set, e.g. for device 1 the device-ID 16 and for device
GPS Satellite Synchronization
6-48
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2 the device-ID 17 (Figure 6-30, compare also with Figures 6-25 and 6-26). The indices of the devices and the device-IDs do not have to match here, as mentioned above.
Figure 6-30
Differential protection topology for 2 ends with 2 devices example
Figure 6-31
Differential protection topology for 4 ends with 4 devices example
For a protected object with more than two ends (and corresponding number of devices), the further ends are allocated to their device IDs with the parameter addresses 1703 ID OF RELAY 3, 1704 ID OF RELAY 4, 1705 ID OF RELAY 5, and 1706 ID OF RELAY 6. A maximum of 6 ends with 6 devices is possible for a protected
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-49
6 Functions
object. Figure 6-31 gives an example with 4 relays (compare also Figure 6-27 and 628). During the configuration of the protection functions (Section 5.1) the number of devices required for the relevant case of application was set in address 143 Num. of relays. Device IDs can be entered for as many devices as were configured under that address, no further IDs are offered during setting. Finally, you enter in address 1710 LOCAL RELAY the index of the actual local device. Enter the index of each device (according the consecutive numbering used). Each index from 1 to the entire number of devices must be used only once, none must be used twice. Make sure that the settings of the differential protection topology for the differential protection system are consistent: Each device index must only be used once; Each device index must be allocated unambiguously to one device ID; Each device index must be the index of a local device once; The device with index 1 is the source for the absolute time management (timing master). During the start-up of the protection system, the above listed conditions are checked. If one out of these conditions is not fulfilled, no differential protection operation is possible. The device signals DT inconsistent (Device table inconsistent).
6.4.3
Setting Overview
Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.
Protection Data Interfaces

Addr. 1509 1510 1512 1501 Setting Title T-DATA DISTURB T-DATAFAIL Td ResetRemote STATE PROT I 1 Setting Options 0.05..2.00 sec 0.0..60.0 sec 0.00..300.00 sec; ON OFF Default Setting 0.10 sec 6.0 sec 0.00 sec ON Comments Time delay for data disturbance alarm Time del for transmission failure alarm Remote signal RESET DELAY for comm.fail State of protection interface 1
6-50
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr. 1502
Setting Title CONNEC. 1 OVER
Setting Options Direct connection with fibre optic cabel Communication converter with 64 kBit/s Communication converter with 128 kBit/s Communication converter with 512 kBit/s 0.1..30.0 ms 0.000..3.000 ms Telegram and GPS Telegram or GPS GPS synchronization OFF ON OFF Direct connection with fibre optic cabel Communication converter with 64 kBit/s Communication converter with 128 kBit/s Communication converter with 512 kBit/s 0.1..30.0 ms 0.000..3.000 ms Telegram and GPS Telegram or GPS GPS synchronization OFF ON OFF 0.5..60.0 sec
Default Setting Direct connection with fibre optic cabel
Comments Connection 1 over
1505A 1506A 1511
PROT 1 T-DELAY PROT 1 UNSYM. PI1 SYNCMODE
30.0 ms 0.100 ms Telegram and GPS ON Direct connection with fibre optic cabel
Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay time Prot 1: Diff. in send and receive time PI1 Synchronizationmode
1601 1602
STATE PROT I 2 CONNEC. 2 OVER
State of protection interface 2 Connection 2 over
1605A 1606A 1611
30.0 ms 0.100 ms Telegram and GPS OFF 2.1 sec
1801 1803A
GPS-SYNC. TD GPS FAILD
GPS synchronization Delay time for local GPS-pulse loss
Topological Data
Addr. 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 Setting Title ID OF RELAY 1 ID OF RELAY 2 ID OF RELAY 3 ID OF RELAY 4 ID OF RELAY 5 ID OF RELAY 6 Setting Options 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1 2 3 4 5 6 Default Setting Comments Identification number of relay 1 Identification number of relay 2 Identification number of relay 3 Identification number of relay 4 Identification number of relay 5 Identification number of relay 6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-51
6 Functions
Addr. 1710
Setting Title LOCAL RELAY
Setting Options relay 1 relay 2 relay 3 relay 4 relay 5 relay 6
Default Setting relay 1
Comments Local relay is
6.4.4

F.No. 3215 3217 3227 3229 3230 3233 3234 3235 3236 3239 3243 3252 3218 3228 3231 3232 3240 3244 3253 3245 3247 3248 3249 Alarm Wrong Firmware PI1 Data reflec >PI1 light off PI1 Data fault PI1 Datafailure DT inconsistent DT unequal Par. different PI1<->PI2 error PI1 TD alarm PI1 with >SYNC PI1 RESET PI2 Data reflec >PI2 light off PI2 Data fault PI2 Datafailure PI2 TD alarm PI2 with >SYNC PI2 RESET >GPS failure GPS loss PI 1 GPS sync. PI 2 GPS sync. Comments Incompatible Firmware Versions Prot Int 1: Own Datas received >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is switched off Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure Device table has inconsistent numbers Device tables are unequal Differences between common parameters Different PI for transmit and receive Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID > PI1 Synchronization RESET Prot Int 2: Own Datas received >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too high Prot Int 2: Connected with relay ID > PI2 Synchronization RESET > GPS failure from external GPS: local pulse loss GPS: Prot Int 1 is GPS sychronized GPS: Prot Int 2 is GPS sychronized
6-52
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
F.No. 3250 3251 PI 1 PD unsym. PI 2 PD unsym.
Alarm
Comments GPS:PI1 unsym.propagation delay too high GPS:PI2 unsym.propagation delay too high
Topological Data
F.No. 3451 3457 3458 3464 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3484 3487 >Logout Ringtopology Chaintopology Topol complete Rel1Logout Rel2Logout Rel3Logout Rel4Logout Rel5Logout Rel6Logout Logout Equal IDs Alarm > Logout input signal System operates in a closed Ringtopology System operates in a open Chaintopology Communication topology is complete Relay 1 in Logout state Relay 2 in Logout state Relay 3 in Logout state Relay 4 in Logout state Relay 5 in Logout state Relay 6 in Logout state Local activation of Logout state Equal IDs in constellation Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-53
6 Functions
6.5
6.5.1
Direct Local Trip

Any signal from an external protection, monitoring or control device can be injected into the processing of 7SD52 via binary inputs. It can be delayed, output as an alarm and be routed to one or more output relays. Figure 6-32 shows the logic diagram. If the devices and circuit breakers are designed for single-pole control, single-pole tripping is possible. The tripping logic of the device ensures that the conditions for singlepole tripping are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, reclosure function ready). The direct local trip can be switched on and off by parameters, and blocked via a binary input.
Direct Trip of the Local Circuit Breaker
FNo 4417
2202 Trip Time DELAY
>DTT Trip L123

FNo 4412
1 T 1 T 1 T
FNo 4432
>DTT Trip L1
FNo 4413 0
&
DTT TRIP 1p. L1

FNo 4433
DTT TRIP 1p. L2 & Tripping logic

FNo 4434
>DTT Trip L2
FNo 4414 0
DTT TRIP 1p. L3 &

FNo 4435
>DTT Trip L3
DTT TRIP L123
2201 FCT Direct Trip 1 ON OFF
FNo 4421
DTT OFF 1 &
FNo 4403
FNo 4422
>BLOCK DTT
DTT BLOCK
Figure 6-32
Logic diagram of the direct local trip (DTT)
6.5.2

A precondition for the direct local trip is that during the configuration of the functions (Section 5.1) FCT Direct Trip = Enabled has been configured in address 122. It can also be switched ON and OFF with address 2201 FCT Direct Trip. For direct local trip a trip time delay can be set in address 2202 Trip Time DELAY. This delay can be used as a grading margin. A tripping command which has been issued is maintained for at least the minimum tripping command duration TMin TRIP CMD which was configured for the device in address 240A (Subsection 6.1.1). This ensures that the circuit breaker can be operated reliably even if the control pulse is very short.
6-54
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.5 Direct Local Trip
6.5.3
Addr. 2201 2202
Setting Overview
Setting Title FCT Direct Trip Trip Time DELAY ON OFF 0.00..30.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting OFF 0.01 sec Comments Direct Local Trip Trip Time Delay
6.5.4
F.No. 4403 4412 4413 4414 4417 4421 4422 4432 4433 4434 4435
Alarm >BLOCK DTT >DTT Trip L1 >DTT Trip L2 >DTT Trip L3 >DTT Trip L123 DTT OFF DTT BLOCK DTT TRIP 1p. L1 DTT TRIP 1p. L2 DTT TRIP 1p. L3 DTT TRIP L123 Comments >BLOCK Direct Local Trip function >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L1 >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L2 >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L3 >Direct Local Trip INPUT 3ph L123 Direct Local Trip is switched OFF Direct Local Trip is BLOCKED Direct Local TRIP command - Only L1 Direct Local TRIP command - Only L2 Direct Local TRIP command - Only L3 Direct Local TRIP command L123
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-55
6 Functions
6.6
Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)

7SD52 allows the transmission of up to 28 items of binary information of any type from one device to the others via the communications links provided for protection tasks. Four of them are transmitted like protection signals with high priority, i.e. very fast, and are therefore especially suitable for the transmission of external protection and trip signals which are generated outside of 7SD52. The other 24 are transmitted in the background and are therefore suitable for any information that does not depend on highspeed transmission, such as information on the events taking place in a substation which may also be useful in other substations as well. See also for Technical Data in Section 10.4. The information is injected into the device via binary inputs and can be output at the other ends again via binary outputs. The integrated user-defined CFC logic allows to perform on both the transmitting and the receiving side logical operations on the signals and on other information from the devices protection and monitoring functions. Also an internal indication can be assigned via CFC to a transmission input and transmitted to the remote end(s). The binary outputs and the binary inputs to be used must be allocated appropriately during the configuration of the input and output functions (see Section 5.2). The 4 high-priority signals are injected into the device via the binary inputs >Remote Trip1 to >Remote Trip4, are transmitted to the devices at the other ends and can be processed at each receiving side with the output functions RemoteTrip1 rec to RemoteTrip4 rec. The other 24 items of information are injected into the device via the binary inputs >Rem. Signal 1 to >Rem.Signal24 and are available under Rem.Sig 1recv to Rem.Sig24recv at each receiving end. No settings are required for the transmission of binary information. Each device sends the injected information to all other devices at the ends of the protected object. Where a selection is necessary, it will have to be carried out via appropriate routing and, if necessary, a logical operation at the receiving side.
6.6.1
F.No. 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547
Alarm >Remote Trip1 >Remote Trip2 >Remote Trip3 >Remote Trip4 RemoteTrip1 rec RemoteTrip2 rec RemoteTrip3 rec >Remote Trip 1 signal input >Remote Trip 2 signal input >Remote Trip 3 signal input >Remote Trip 4 signal input Remote Trip 1 received Remote Trip 2 received Remote Trip 3 received Comments
6-56
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
F.No. 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581
Alarm RemoteTrip4 rec >Rem. Signal 1 >Rem.Signal 2 >Rem.Signal 3 >Rem.Signal 4 >Rem.Signal 5 >Rem.Signal 6 >Rem.Signal 7 >Rem.Signal 8 >Rem.Signal 9 >Rem.Signal10 >Rem.Signal11 >Rem.Signal12 >Rem.Signal13 >Rem.Signal14 >Rem.Signal15 >Rem.Signal16 >Rem.Signal17 >Rem.Signal18 >Rem.Signal19 >Rem.Signal20 >Rem.Signal21 >Rem.Signal22 >Rem.Signal23 >Rem.Signal24 Rem.Sig 1recv Rem.Sig 2recv Rem.Sig 3recv Rem.Sig 4recv Rem.Sig 5recv Rem.Sig 6recv Rem.Sig 7recv Rem.Sig 8recv Rem.Sig 9recv Remote Trip 4 received >Remote Signal 1 input >Remote Signal 2 input >Remote Signal 3 input >Remote Signal 4 input >Remote Signal 5 input >Remote Signal 6 input >Remote Signal 7 input >Remote Signal 8 input >Remote Signal 9 input >Remote Signal 10 input >Remote Signal 11 input >Remote Signal 12 input >Remote Signal 13 input >Remote Signal 14 input >Remote Signal 15 input >Remote Signal 16 input >Remote Signal 17 input >Remote Signal 18 input >Remote Signal 19 input >Remote Signal 20 input >Remote Signal 21 input >Remote Signal 22 input >Remote Signal 23 input >Remote Signal 24 input Remote signal 1 received Remote signal 2 received Remote signal 3 received Remote signal 4 received Remote signal 5 received Remote signal 6 received Remote signal 7 received Remote signal 8 received Remote signal 9 received
Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-57
6 Functions
F.No. 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581
Alarm RemoteTrip4 rec >Rem. Signal 1 >Rem.Signal 2 >Rem.Signal 3 >Rem.Signal 4 >Rem.Signal 5 >Rem.Signal 6 >Rem.Signal 7 >Rem.Signal 8 >Rem.Signal 9 >Rem.Signal10 >Rem.Signal11 >Rem.Signal12 >Rem.Signal13 >Rem.Signal14 >Rem.Signal15 >Rem.Signal16 >Rem.Signal17 >Rem.Signal18 >Rem.Signal19 >Rem.Signal20 >Rem.Signal21 >Rem.Signal22 >Rem.Signal23 >Rem.Signal24 Rem.Sig 1recv Rem.Sig 2recv Rem.Sig 3recv Rem.Sig 4recv Rem.Sig 5recv Rem.Sig 6recv Rem.Sig 7recv Rem.Sig 8recv Rem.Sig 9recv Remote Trip 4 received >Remote Signal 1 input >Remote Signal 2 input >Remote Signal 3 input >Remote Signal 4 input >Remote Signal 5 input >Remote Signal 6 input >Remote Signal 7 input >Remote Signal 8 input >Remote Signal 9 input >Remote Signal 10 input >Remote Signal 11 input >Remote Signal 12 input >Remote Signal 13 input >Remote Signal 14 input >Remote Signal 15 input >Remote Signal 16 input >Remote Signal 17 input >Remote Signal 18 input >Remote Signal 19 input >Remote Signal 20 input >Remote Signal 21 input >Remote Signal 22 input >Remote Signal 23 input >Remote Signal 24 input Remote signal 1 received Remote signal 2 received Remote signal 3 received Remote signal 4 received Remote signal 5 received Remote signal 6 received Remote signal 7 received Remote signal 8 received Remote signal 9 received
Comments
6-58
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
F.No. 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 Rem.Sig10recv Rem.Sig11recv Rem.Sig12recv Rem.Sig13recv Rem.Sig14recv Rem.Sig15recv Rem.Sig16recv Rem.Sig17recv Rem.Sig18recv Rem.Sig19recv Rem.Sig20recv Rem.Sig21recv Rem.Sig22recv Rem.Sig23recv Rem.Sig24recv
Alarm Remote signal 10 received Remote signal 11 received Remote signal 12 received Remote signal 13 received Remote signal 14 received Remote signal 15 received Remote signal 16 received Remote signal 17 received Remote signal 18 received Remote signal 19 received Remote signal 20 received Remote signal 21 received Remote signal 22 received Remote signal 23 received Remote signal 24 received
Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-59
6 Functions
6.7
6.7.1
Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection

The instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection function is provided to disconnect immediately and without delay feeders that are switched onto a high-current fault. It serves e.g. as a rapid protection for connecting a feeder with closed grounding disconnector. In order to function properly, the devices at all ends of the protected object must know the circuit breaker positions (breaker auxiliary contacts). A second stage works fast and without delay, regardless of the circuit breaker position.
General Information
I>>> Stage
The pickup of the I>>> stage measures each phase current and compares it to the setting value I>>>. The currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental component is evaluated. This high-current pickup is practically unaffected by DC components in the fault current as well as in the secondary current after switching off high currents. If the setting value is exceeded by more than twice its value, the stage will automatically use the peak value of the unfiltered measured quantity so that extremely short command times are possible. This stage is only enabled when the local circuit breaker is closed while all remaining line ends of the protected object are open. The devices exchange the status of their respective circuit breakers continuously via the communication link. If the protected object is already live (from a different end) the stage is not effective. An indispensable precondition for the functioning of the I>>> stage is that the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breakers are connected at all ends of the protected object and allocated to the relevant binary inputs. If this is not the case, this stage is not effective. The central function control communicates the information of the circuit breaker position to the high-current instantaneous tripping (see also Subsection 6.13.2). Figure 6-33 shows the logic diagram. The I>>> stage at the bottom of the diagram operates separately for each phase. During the manual closing of the circuit breaker all three phases are enabled via the signal HS/SOF TRIPL123 which is issued by the central functional control of the protection, provided that the manual closing can be recognized there (see Subsection 6.13). Tripping can also be enabled separately for each phase by the signals SOF TRIP 1pLx. This applies also to e.g. automatic reclosure after single-pole tripping. Then, single-pole tripping with this stage is possible, but only if the device is designed for single-pole tripping.
I>>>> Stage
The I>>>> stage trips regardless of the position of the circuit breakers. Here, the currents are also numerically filtered and the peak-value of the currents is measured from the double setting value onwards. Figure 6-33 shows the logic diagram in the upper part. Therefore, this stage is used when current grading is possible. This is possible with a small source impedance and at the same time a high impedance of the protected object (example can be found with the advice on setting, Subsection 6.7.2). The I>>>> stage is enabled automatically by the current-step monitoring dI/dt of the device for a duration of 50 ms. This stage operates separately for each phase.
6-60
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection
2405 I>>>>
d dt
I>>>>
50 ms
FNo 4285...4287
22I>>>>
2404 I>>>
I>>>>O/C p.upL1 I>>>>O/C p.upL2 I>>>>O/C p.upL3

FNo 4289
SOTF TRIP 1pL1

FNo 4290
SOTF TRIP 1pL2

IL1 IL2 IL3
I>>>
FNo 4291
1 Tripping logic
SOTF TRIP 1pL3

FNo 4295
22I>>> SOTF enab. L1 SOTF enab. L2 SOTF enab. L3 SOTF enab. L123
SOTF TRIP L123

FNo 4292
SOTF TRIP 1p
FNo 4294 (all ends open)
SOTF TRIP 3p 1 &

FNo 4282...4284
L1 L2 L3 Figure 6-33
SOF O/CpickupL1 SOF O/CpickupL2 SOF O/CpickupL3
Logic diagram of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function
6.7.2

A precondition for the use of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function is that during the configuration of the device functions (Section 5.1) SOTF Func. = Enabled has been configured in address 124. It can also be switched ON and OFF with address 2401 FCT HS/SOTF-O/C.
I>>> Stage
The magnitude of fault current which leads to the pickup of the I>>>-stage is set as I>>> in address 2404. This stage is active only during the connecting of local end while the circuit breakers at all other ends of the protected object are open. Choose a value which is high enough for the protection not to pickup on the RMS value of the inrush current produced during the connection of the protected object. On the other hand, fault currents flowing through the protected object need not be considered. During setting with a personal computer and DIGSI 4 the values can be entered in primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
I>>>> Stage
The I>>>> stage (address 2405A) works regardless of the circuit breaker position. Since it trips extremely fast it must be set high enough not to pickup on a fault current flowing through the protected object. This means that it can be used only if the protected object allows current grading, as is the case with transformers, series reactors or long lines with small source impedance. In other cases it is set to (default setting). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-61
6 Functions
During setting with a personal computer and DIGSI 4 the values can be entered in primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data: s (length) = 60 km R1/s = 0.19 /km X1/s = 0.42 /km Short-circuit power at the feeding end: Sk" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, since the I>>>> stage can respond to the first peak value) Current transformers 600 A/5 A From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated: Z1/s = 0.192 + 0.422 /km = 0.46 /km ZL = 0.46 /km 60 km = 27.66
S
110 kV = ----------------------------- = 3.46 3500 MVA
The three-phase short-circuit current at the line end is I"k end (with source voltage 1.1UN): 1.1 U N 1.1 110 kV I" k end = ------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------------------------------- = 2245 A 3 (3.46 + 27.66 ) 3 ( ZV + ZL ) With a safety factor of 10 % the following primary setting value results: Setting value I>>>> = 1.1 2245 A = 2470 A Or the secondary setting value: 2245 A Settingvalue I>>>> = 1.1 ------------------ 5 A = 20.6 A 600 A i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2470 A (primary) or 20.6 A (secondary) you can be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. This line can be disconnected immediately. Note: The calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.
6-62
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.7.3
Setting Overview
Addr. 2401 2404 2405A
Setting Title FCT HS/SOTF-O/C I>>> I>>>> ON OFF
Setting Options
Default Setting ON 1.50 A A
Comments Inst. High Speed/SOTF-O/C is I>>> Pickup I>>>> Pickup
0.10..15.00 A; 1.00..25.00 A;
6.7.4
F.No. 4253 4271 4272 4273 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295
Alarm >BLOCK SOTF-O/C SOTF-O/C OFF SOTF-O/C BLOCK SOTF-O/C ACTIVE SOTF-O/C PICKUP SOF O/CpickupL1 SOF O/CpickupL2 SOF O/CpickupL3 I>>>>O/C p.upL1 I>>>>O/C p.upL2 I>>>>O/C p.upL3 HS/SOF TRIP1pL1 HS/SOF TRIP1pL2 HS/SOF TRIP1pL3 HS/SOF TRIP 1p HS/SOF Gen.TRIP HS/SOF TRIP 3p HS/SOF TRIPL123 Comments >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF Overcurrent SOTF-O/C is switched OFF SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE SOTF-O/C PICKED UP SOTF-O/C Pickup L1 SOTF-O/C Pickup L2 SOTF-O/C Pickup L3 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L1 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L2 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L3 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L1 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L2 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L3 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 1pole High Speed/SOTF-O/C General TRIP High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 3pole High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP command L123
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-63
6 Functions
6.8
Time Overcurrent Protection

The 7SD52 has a time overcurrent protection function which can be used as either a back-up or an emergency overcurrent protection. Whereas the differential protection can only operate correctly if each device receives the data of the other devices properly, the emergency overcurrent protection requires only the local currents. The emergency overcurrent protection is automatically activated when the data communication of the differential protection is disturbed (emergency operation) and the differential protection is blocked as a result. This means that emergency operation will replace the differential protection for shortcircuit protection if the data communication fails and cannot be re-established by a data bypass (e.g. in a ring topology). If the overcurrent protection is set as a back-up overcurrent protection, it will work independently of other protection and monitoring functions, i.e. also independently of the differential protection. The back-up overcurrent protection can also be used as sole short-circuit protection if no suitable channels for the communication between the protection devices are available during the initial commissioning. The overcurrent protection has a total of four stages for each phase current and for the ground current; these are: Two overcurrent stages with independent trip time (definite time overcurrent protection), One overcurrent stage with current-dependent trip time (inverse time overcurrent protection), A further overcurrent stage which has an additional enable input and can therefore be used as an emergency stage e.g. if the remaining stages are used as back-up stages, or as a stub protection. These four stages do not depend on one another and can be combined as desired. Blocking from external criteria is possible via binary inputs just like instantaneous tripping. It is also possible to switch to any one or more of the stages if the protected object is switched onto a fault. The stages not required can be deactived by setting the pickup value to .
General Information
6.8.1
The phase currents are fed to the device via the input transformers of the measurement input. The ground current 3I0 is either measured directly or calculated, depending on the version ordered and the use of the devices fourth current input I4. If I4 is connected to the starpoint of the current transformer set, the ground current will be available directly as measured quantity. If I4 is connected to a separate ground current transformer, this will be used, while considering the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, see Subsection 6.1.1) of the Power System Data 1.
Measured Quantities
6-64
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
If the ground current is not connected to the fourth current input I4 (address 220 I4 transformer = Not connected, see Subsection 6.1.1), the device will calculate the ground current from the phase currents. Of course, all three phase currents of three star-connected current transformers must be available and connected in this case. Definite Time Highcurrent Stage I>> Each phase current is compared with the setting value Iph>> after numerical filtering; the ground current is compared with 3I0>> PICKUP. Currents above the associated pickup value are detected and annunciated. When the relevant delay time T Iph>> or T 3I0>> has expired, a tripping command is issued. The reset value is approximately 5 % less than the pickup value, but at least 1.5 % of the rated current below it. Figure 6-34 shows the logic diagram of the I>> stages. They can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK O/C I>>. In addition, the ground current stage can be blocked separately via the binary input >BLOCK O/C Ie>>, e.g. during a single-pole dead time before reclosure in order to avoid a spurious tripping with the zero phase-sequence system which is present then.
Iph>>
2610
2611 T Iph>>
IL1 IL2 IL3
Iph>>
&
I>> PU L1 I>> PU L2 I>> PU L3 1 I>> TRIP L1 I>> TRIP L2 I>> TRIP L3
&
L1 L2 L3
3I0>> PICKUP 2612 2613 T 3I0>>
I>> PU E
IE
3I0>>
&
1 &
I>> TRIP E
FNo 7107 FNo 7104
>BLOCK O/C Ie>> >BLOCK O/C I>>

2614 I>> Telep/BI FNo 7110 YES NO 0 YES NO 2615 I>> SOTF SOTF Time DELAY 2680 further stages
>O/C InstTRIP
Switching onto a fault T
Figure 6-34
Logic diagram of the I>> stage
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-65
6 Functions
The binary input >O/C InstTRIP and the function block Switch onto fault are the same for all stages and explained in detail below. They can, however, affect the phase and/ or ground stages separately. This can be achieved with two parameters: I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether an instantaneous tripping without delay of this stage is possible (YES) via the binary input >O/C InstTRIP or impossible (NO). This parameter is also used for instantaneous tripping before automatic reclosure. I>> SOTF (address 2615) defines whether an instantaneous tripping is to be performed by this stage (YES) or not (NO) if the line is switched onto a fault. Definite Time Overcurrent Stage I> Inverse Time Overcurrent Stage Ip The logic of the overcurrent stages I> is designed like the I>> stages, except that in all designations Iph>> is replaced by Iph> and 3I0>> PICKUP by 3I0>. The logic of the current-dependent (inverse time) stage operates basically like the other stages. However, the time delay is calculated here based on the type of the set characteristic (parameter IEC Curve), the intensity of the current and a time multiplier (Figure 6-35). A preselection of the possible characteristics has been made during the configuration of the protection functions. Moreover, a constant additional time T Ip Add or T 3I0p Add can be selected which is added to the current-dependent time. The possible characteristics are shown in Section 10.6 in the Technical Data. Figure 6-35 shows the logic diagram. Here, exemplary setting addresses for the IEC characteristics are shown. The setting notes (Subsection 6.8.2) explain the various setting addresses in detail.
6-66
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2660 IEC Curve 2640 IP> 2642 T Ip TimeDial
IL1 IL2 IL3
Ip PU L1 Ip PU L2 Ip PU L3 IP &
T 0
t I
2646 T IP Add T 3I0P
Ip TRIP L1 Ip TRIP L2 Ip TRIP L3
&
L1 L2 L3
3I0p PICKUP
2650
2652
T 3I0p TimeDial
Ip PU E
IE
3I0P
t I
&
2656 T 3I0P Add
Ip TRIP E
&
FNo 7109
>BLOCK O/C Iep

FNo 7106
>BLOCK O/C Ip
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI FNo 7110 YES NO 0 YES NO 2671 I(3I0)p SOTF SOTF Time DELAY 2680 further stages
>O/C InstTRIP
Figure 6-35
Logic diagram of the Ip stage (inverse-time overcurrent protection) example for IEC characteristics
Additional Overcurrent Stage ISTUB
The additional definite time or instantaneous overcurrent stage ISTUB has an extra enable input (Figure 6-36) and is therefore also suitable e.g. as a stub protection or as an emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as backup stages. The enable input >I-STUB ENABLE can be assigned to the output signal Emer. mode (either via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions). The stage is then automatically active when the differential protection is not effective, e.g. due to a data disturbance.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-67
6 Functions
The ISTUB stage can, however, also be used as a standard additional and independent overcurrent stage, since it works independent of the other stages. In this case, the release input >I-STUB ENABLE must be permanently activated (via a binary input or CFC).
Iph> STUB 2630
2631 T Iph STUB
IL1 IL2 IL3
Iph
&
I-STUB PU L1 I-STUB PU L2 I-STUB PU L3 1 I-STUB TRIP L1 I-STUB TRIP L2 I-STUB TRIP L3
&
L1 L2 L3
3I0> STUB 2632 2633 T 3I0 STUB
I-STUB PU E
IE
3I0
&
1 &
I-STUB TRIP E
FNo 7132 FNo 7130
>BLOCK O/CIe>>> >BLOCK I-STUB

FNo 7131
1
2634 I-STUB Telep/BI
>I-STUB ENABLE
FNo 7110
YES NO 0 YES NO
>O/C InstTRIP.
2635 I-STUB SOTF SOTF Time DELAY 2680 further stages
Figure 6-36
Logic diagram of the ISTUB stage
Instantaneous Tripping before Automatic Reclosure
If automatic reclosure is to be carried out, a rapid clearing of the fault is usually desirable before reclosure. A ready for reclosure signal from an external automatic reclosure device can be injected via binary input >O/C InstTRIP. The internal automatic reclosure function if existent acts on this input as well. Any stage of the overcurrent protection can thus perform an instantaneous trip before reclosure via the parameters I...Telep/BI.
6-68
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Switching onto a Fault
To perform an instantaneous trip when the circuit breaker is manually closed onto a dead fault, the manual closing command of the control discrepancy switch can be fed to the device via a binary input. The overcurrent protection then performs a three-pole trip with no or almost no delay. The stage(s) for which the instantaneous trip after manual closing is valid are determined by parameters (see also logic diagrams Figure 634, 6-35 and 6-36). The pickup signals of the individual phases (or the ground) and of the stages are linked in such a way that both the phase information and the stage which has picked up are output (Table 6-2). For the tripping signals, the stage which caused the tripping is output as well. For single-pole tripping, the pole is identified (see also Subsection 6.13.4 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device).
Pickup and Tripping Logic
Table 6-2
Pickup signals of the time overcurrent protection

Figure 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-34 O/C Pickup E 7165 O/C Pickup L3 7164 O/C Pickup L2 7163 O/C Pickup L1 7162 Output message FNo
Internal message I>> PU L1 I> PU L1 Ip PU L1 I-STUB PU L1 I>> PU L2 I> PU L2 Ip PU L2 I-STUB PU L2 I>> PU L3 I> PU L3 Ip PU L3 I-STUB PU L3 I>> PU E I> PU E Ip PU E I-STUB PU E I>> PU L1 I>> PU L2 I>> PU L3 I>> PU E I> PU L1 I> PU L2 I> PU L3 I> PU E Ip PU L1 Ip PU L2 Ip PU L3 Ip PU E I-STUB PU L1 I-STUB PU L2 I-STUB PU L3 I-STUB PU E (all pick-ups)
O/C PICKUP I>>
7191
O/C PICKUP I>
7192
6-35 6-35 6-35 6-35 6-36 6-36 6-36 6-36
O/C PICKUP Ip
7193
I-STUB PICKUP
7201
O/C PICKUP
7161
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-69
6 Functions
6.8.2

During the configuration of the device functions (see Section 5.1, address 126) the available characteristics have been defined. Depending on the configuration and depending on the version ordered, only those parameters are accessible which are valid for the available characteristics. Address 2601 is set according to the desired mode of operation of the overcurrent protection: Operating Mode = ON means that the overcurrent protection works independently of other protection functions, i.e. as a backup overcurrent protection. If it is to work only as an emergency function in case of a transmission failure, Only Emer. prot must be set. Finally, it can also be set to OFF. If some stages are not needed, those not needed can be deactivated by setting the pickup value to . But if you set only an associated time delay to this does not suppress the pickup signals but prevents the timers from running. The ISTUB stage is even effective if Only Emer. prot has been set for the operating mode of the overcurrent protection. One or several stages can be set as instantaneous tripping stages when switching onto a fault. This is chosen during the setting of the individual stages (see below). To avoid a spurious tripping due to transient overcurrents a delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680) can be set. Normally the default setting 0.00 is correct. A short delay can be useful in case of long cables for which high inrush currents can be expected, or for transformers. This delay depends on the intensity and duration the of the transient phenomena and on the stages used for the instantaneous tripping.
General Information
High-Current Stages Iph>>, 3I0>> Definite Time
The I>> stages Iph>> (address 2610) and 3I0>> PICKUP (address 2612) together with the I> stages or the Ip stages result in a two-stage characteristic. Of course, all three stages can be combined as well. If a stage is not required, the pickup value is set to . The I>> stages always operate with a defined delay. If the I>> stages are used for instantaneous tripping before the automatic reclosure, the current-setting corresponds to the I> or Ip stages. In this case only the different delay times are of interest. The times T Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address 2613) can than be set to 0.00 or a very low value, as the fast clearance of the fault takes priority over the selectivity before the automatic reclosure is initiated. These stages have to be blocked before final trip in order to achieve the selectivity. For very long lines with a small source impedance or on applications with large reactances (e.g. transformers, series reactors), the I>> stages can also be used for current grading. In this case they must be set in such a way that they do not pick up in case of a fault at the end of the line. The times can then be set to 0.00 or to a small value. During the parameterization from a personal computer using DIGSI 4, the parameters can be set as primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data: s (length) = 60 km R1/s = 0.19 /km X1/s = 0.42 /km
6-70
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line: = 2.5 GVA Ssc' Current transformers 600 A/5 A From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated: Z1/s = 0.192 + 0.422 /km = 0.46 /km ZL = 0.46 /km 60 km = 27.66 110 kV Z S = ----------------------------- = 4.84 2500 MVA The three-phase fault current at the line end is Isc End: 1.1 U N 1, 1 110 kV I scEnd = ------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- = 2150 A 3 ( 4.84 + 27.66 ) 3 ( ZS + ZL ) With a safety factor of 10 %, the following primary setting value is calculated: Setting value I>> = 1.1 2150 A = 2365 A Or the secondary setting value: 2150 A Settingvalue I>> = 1.1 ------------------ 5 A = 19.7 A 600 A i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary) you can be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. It can be disconnected by the overcurrent protection immediately. Note: the calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out. A similar calculation can be carried out for ground faults, with the maximum earth current occurring at the line end during a short-circuit being decisive. The set times are pure additional delays which do not include the inherent operating time of the protection. The parameter I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether the time delays T Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address 2613) can be bypassed by the binary input >O/C InstTRIP (FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I>> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I>> stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I>> Telep/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without autoreclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a nonselective trip, even before auto-reclosure. If the I>> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched onto a fault) or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to General Information above), set the parameter I>> SOTF (address 2615) to YES. Any other stage can be selected as well for this instantaneous tripping.
2 2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-71
6 Functions
Overcurrent Stages Iph>, 3I0> Definite Time
For the setting of the current pickup value, Iph> (address 2620), the maximum operating current is most decisive. Pickup through overload must be excluded, since the device works in this operating mode as a short-circuit protection, not as an overload protection, and the command times are relatively short. The pickup value should therefore be set to a higher value than the maximum (over-)load to be expected, i.e. approx. 10 % for lines and approximately 20 % for transformers and motors. During configuration from a personal computer using DIGSI 4 the parameters can be set either to primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 as above: Maximum transmitted power Pmax = 120 MVA corresponding to Imax = 630 A Current transformer 600 A/5 A Safety factor 1.1
With settings in primary quantities the following setting value is calculated: Setting value I> = 1.1 630 A = 693 A With settings in secondary quantities the following setting value is calculated: 630 A Setting value I> = 1.1 --------------- 5 A = 5.8 A 600 A The ground current stage 3I0> (address 2622) should be set to detect the smallest ground fault current to be expected. The time delay T Iph> (address 2621) results from the time grading schedule designed for the network. For use as an emergency overcurrent protection, shorter delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this function is to work only in case of an interruption of the data communication of the differential protection. The time T 3I0> (address 2623) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. The set times are mere additional delays for the independent stages, which do not include the inherent operating time of the protection. If only the phase currents are to be monitored for a stage, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to . The parameter I> Telep/BI (address 2624) defines whether the time delays T Iph> (address 2621) and T 3I0> (address 2623) can be bypassed by the binary input >O/C InstTRIP (FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I> stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I> Telep/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without autoreclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a nonselective trip, even before auto-reclosure.
6-72
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
If the I> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched onto a fault, or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to General Information above), set the parameter I> SOTF (address 2625) to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided. Overcurrent Stages IP, 3I0P Inverse Time with IEC Characteristics Various characteristics can be chosen for the inverse time stages, depending on the version ordered and the configuration (Section 5.1, address 126). For Back-Up O/C = TOC IEC, the following IEC-characteristics are available under address 2660 IEC Curve: Inverse (Type A in accordance with IEC 602553), Very Inverse (Type B in accordance with IEC 602553), Extremely Inv. (Type C in accordance with IEC 602553), and LongTimeInverse (Type B in accordance with IEC 602553). The characteristics and the formulae on which they are based, are shown in the Technical Data (Section 10.6). The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protection (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values Ip> (address 2640) and 3I0p PICKUP (address 2650). It should be noted that a safety margin has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the protection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %. Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can be set here: Primary: Setting value Ip> = 630 A, Secondary: Setting value Ip> = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) 5 A. The time multiplier T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) derives from the time grading schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this function is to work only in case of an interruption of the data communication of the differential protection. The time multiplier T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to . In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if necessary. The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p Add (address 2656 for ground current) are added to the times of the set characteristics. The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) including the additional time T Ip Add (address 2646) and T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) including the additional time T 3I0p Add (address 2656) can be bypassed by the binary input >O/C InstTRIP (FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/BI = YES you define that the IPstages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-73
6 Functions
guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a backup protection may not perform a non-selective trip, even before auto-reclosure. If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched onto a fault, or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to General Information above), set the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671) to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided. Overcurrent Stages IP, 3I0P Inverse Time with ANSI Characteristics Various characteristics can be chosen for the inverse time stages, depending on the version ordered and the configuration (Section 5.1, address 126). For Back-Up O/C = TOC ANSI, the following ANSI-characteristics are available under address 2661 ANSI Curve: Inverse, Short Inverse, Long Inverse, Moderately Inv., Very Inverse, Extremely Inv. and Definite Inv. The characteristics and the formulae on which they are based, are shown in the Technical Data (Section 10.6). The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protection (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values Ip> (address 2640) and 3I0p PICKUP (address 2650). It should be noted that a safety margin has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the protection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %. Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can be set here: Primary: setting value Ip> = 630 A, Secondary: setting value Ip> = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) 5 A. The time multiplier Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) derives from the time grading schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this function is to work only in the case of an interruption of the data communication of the differential protection. The time multiplier TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to . In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if necessary. The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p Add (address 2656 for ground current) are added to the times of the set characteristics. The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) including the additional time T Ip Add (address 2646) and TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) including the additional time T
6-74
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
3I0p Add (address 2656) can be bypassed by the binary input >O/C InstTRIP (FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/ BI = YES you define that the IP stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-selective trip, even before auto-reclosure. If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched onto a fault) or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to General Information above), set the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671) to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided. Additional Stage ISTUB The ISTUB stage can be used as an additional definite time overcurrent stage, since it works independently of the other stages. In this case, the enable input >I-STUB ENABLE (FNo 7131) must be activated permanently (via a binary input or CFC). Alternatively, it can be used as a stub bus protection. In this case, the enable input >ISTUB ENABLE is activated by the indication of the open line disconnector. Since the ISTUB stage has an additional enable input, it is also suitable e.g. as an emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as backup stages. The release input >I-STUB ENABLE (FNo 7131) can be assigned the output signal Emer. mode (either via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions). The considerations for the use of the ISTUB stage as an emergency function are the same as for the I> stages. The setting value Iph> STUB (address 2630) must here too be higher than the maximum operational current to be expected, in order to avoid pickup without fault. The delay T Iph STUB (address 2631), however, can be shorter than defined in the time grading schedule, since this stage works only in emergency operation, i.e. in case of a communication failure of the differential protection. Normally, one time step above the base time of the differential protection is sufficient. The ground current stage 3I0> STUB (address 2632) should correspondingly pick up on the smallest ground current to be expected during a ground fault and the delay T 3I0 STUB (address 2633) should exceed the base time of the differential protection by a grading time. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground fault stage to . The ISTUB stages can also be accelerated by the enable signal >O/C InstTRIP (FNo 7110), e.g. before an auto-reclosure. This is defined with parameter I-STUB Telep/BI (address 2634). Set it on YES if the ISTUB stages are to trip without delay as long as the binary input >O/C InstTRIP is activated or the internal auto-reclosure function is ready to operate. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure should only be chosen if the ISTUB stage is set as an emergency function. If the differential protection is out of operation, this emergency stage guarantees instantaneous tripping before auto-reclosure. Instantaneous tripping when the line is switched onto a fault is also possible with the ISTUB stage. Set parameter I-STUB SOTF (address 2635) to YES, if instantaneous tripping is desired.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-75
6 Functions
6.8.3
Setting Overview
Addr. 2601
Setting Title Operating Mode
Setting Options ON Only Emergency protection OFF 0.00..30.00 sec 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.00 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.00..30.00 sec 0.05..4.00 A; 0.05..3.00 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.00..30.00 sec
Default Setting ON
Comments Operating mode
2680 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2640 2642 2643 2646 2650 2652 2653 2656
SOTF Time DELAY Iph>> T Iph>> 3I0>> PICKUP T 3I0>> I>> Telep/BI I>> SOTF Iph> T Iph> 3I0> T 3I0> I> Telep/BI I> SOTF Ip> T Ip Time Dial Time Dial TD Ip T Ip Add 3I0p PICKUP T 3I0p TimeDial TimeDial TD3I0p T 3I0p Add
0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec 0.50 A 2.00 sec YES NO 1.50 A 0.50 sec 0.20 A 2.00 sec NO NO A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec
Trip time delay after SOTF Iph>> Pickup T Iph>> Time delay 3I0>> Pickup T 3I0>> Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Iph> Pickup T Iph> Time delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Ip> Pickup T Ip Time Dial Time Dial TD Ip T Ip Additional Time Delay 3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial Time Dial TD 3I0p T 3I0p Additional Time Delay
6-76
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr. 2660
Setting Title IEC Curve
Setting Options Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long time inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse NO YES NO YES 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES
Default Setting Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Comments
2661
ANSI Curve
Inverse
ANSI Curve
2670 2671 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635
I(3I0)p Tele/BI I(3I0)p SOTF Iph> STUB T Iph STUB 3I0> STUB T 3I0 STUB I-STUB Telep/BI I-STUB SOTF
NO NO 1.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 2.00 sec NO NO
Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Iph> STUB Pickup T Iph STUB Time delay 3I0> STUB Pickup T 3I0 STUB Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-77
6 Functions
6.8.4
F.No. 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7130 7131 7132 7151 7152 7153 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7191 7192 7193 7201 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7221 7222 7223 7235
Alarm >BLOCK O/C I>> >BLOCK O/C I> >BLOCK O/C Ip >BLOCK O/C Ie>> >BLOCK O/C Ie> >BLOCK O/C Iep >O/C InstTRIP >BLOCK I-STUB >I-STUB ENABLE >BLOCK O/CIe>>> O/C OFF O/C BLOCK O/C ACTIVE O/C PICKUP O/C Pickup L1 O/C Pickup L2 O/C Pickup L3 O/C Pickup E O/C PICKUP I>> O/C PICKUP I> O/C PICKUP Ip I-STUB PICKUP O/C TRIP O/C TRIP 1p.L1 O/C TRIP 1p.L2 O/C TRIP 1p.L3 O/C TRIP L123 O/C TRIP I>> O/C TRIP I> O/C TRIP Ip I-STUB TRIP Comments >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Iep >Backup OverCurrent InstantaneousTrip >BLOCK I-STUB >Enable I-STUB-Bus function >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>>> Backup O/C is switched OFF Backup O/C is BLOCKED Backup O/C is ACTIVE Backup O/C PICKED UP Backup O/C PICKUP L1 Backup O/C PICKUP L2 Backup O/C PICKUP L3 Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH Backup O/C Pickup I>> Backup O/C Pickup I> Backup O/C Pickup Ip O/C I-STUB Pickup Backup O/C General TRIP command Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L2 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L3 Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123 Backup O/C TRIP I>> Backup O/C TRIP I> Backup O/C TRIP Ip O/C I-STUB TRIP
6-78
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.9 Automatic Reclosure
6.9
Automatic Reclosure
Experience shows that about 85 % of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished automatically after being tripped by the protection. The line can therefore be reclosed. Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclosure function (AR). An example of the normal time sequence of a double-shot reclosure is shown in Figure 6-37. If the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, a single-pole trip followed by an auto-reclosure is often initiated in the case of single-phase faults and a three-pole trip with auto-reclosure in the case of multi-phase faults in the network with earthed system starpoint. If the fault still exists after reclosure (arc not extinguished or metallic short-circuit), the protection issues a final trip. Repeated reclosure attempts are made in some networks. Automatic reclosure is only permitted on overhead lines because the possibility of automatic extinguishing of a fault arc only exists there. It must not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), it must be ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the overhead line. In the version with single-pole tripping, 7SD52 allows phase-segregated, single-pole tripping. A single- and three-pole, single and multiple shot automatic reclosure function is integrated, depending on the order version. 7SD52 can also operate together with an external automatic reclosure device. In this case the signal exchange between 7SD52 and the external reclosure device must take place via the binary inputs and outputs. It is also possible to have the integrated automatic reclosure function controlled by an external protection (e.g. alternate protection). The use of two 7SD52 with auto-reclosure or the use of one 7SD52 with auto-reclosure and a second protection with its own auto-reclosure are equally possible.
Pickup
aborted aborted
Action time Trip command Close command Reclaim time

1st reclosure unsuccessful; further tripping during reclaim time
dead time 1st reclosure
dead time 2nd reclosure
aborted
reclaim time
2nd reclosure successful, no further tripping during reclaim time
AR in progress Figure 6-37
start with 1st trip command
Timing diagram of a double-shot reclosure with action time (2nd reclosure successful)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-79
6 Functions
6.9.1
The integrated automatic reclosure function allows up to 8 reclosure attempts. The first four reclosure cycles may operate with different parameters (action and dead times, single/three-pole). The parameters of the fourth cycle apply from the fifth cycle onwards.
Selectivity before Reclosure
In order for the automatic reclosure to be successful, all faults on the whole overhead line must be cleared at all line ends at the same as short as possible time. This is the usual case in differential protection schemes because the strict selective zone definition of the protected object by the current transformer sets always allows undelayed tripping. However, fast tripping of the protection may also be desired before reclosure after tripping by other short-circuit protection functions. For this purpose, every short-circuit protection which can start the automatic reclosure function has the possibility of initiating undelayed tripping in at least one stage when the automatic reclosure function is ready for the first reclosure cycle. Fast tripping before reclosure is also possible for multiple reclosures. Appropriate links between the output messages (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: AR 2.CycZoneRel) and the inputs for undelayed tripping of the protective functions can be established via the binary inputs and outputs or the integrated user-definable logic functions (CFC).
Start
Starting the automatic reclosure function means storing the first trip signal of a network fault generated by a protection function operating with automatic reclosure. In the case of multiple reclosure, starting therefore only takes place once which is with the first trip command. Storing this signal is the prerequisite for all subsequent activities of the automatic reclosure function. The starting is important when the first trip command has not appeared before expiry of an action time (see below under Action Times). Automatic reclosure is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be achieved by setting parameters. See also subtitle Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready (page 6-82). Setting parameters can be used for every short-circuit protection function to determine whether or not this is to operate with reclosure, i.e. whether or not it is to start the automatic reclosure function. The same applies accordingly for trip commands which are applied externally via binary inputs and/or generated by transfer trip signals/remote tripping. The protection and monitoring functions of the device which do not react to shortcircuit-like phenomena do not start the automatic reclosure because reclosure is of no use here. In 7SD52, for example, this is the overload protection.
Action Times
It is often desirable to suppress the readiness for reclosure if the short-circuit has existed for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned in to such an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic extinguishing during the dead time. For reasons of selectivity also (see above), frequently faults with delayed trip should not lead to reclosure.
6-80
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
The automatic reclosure function of 7SD52 can be operated with or without action times (configuration parameter AR control mode, address 134, see Section 5.1). Provision of a pickup signal is not necessary from the protective functions or external protection equipment if the auto-reclosure function is operated without action time. Starting of the auto-reclosure takes place then as soon as the first trip command appears. In operation with action time, an action time is available for each reclosure cycle. The action times are always started by the pickup signals linked with OR of all protective functions which can start the automatic reclosure function. If there is still no trip command available at the end of an action time, the corresponding reclosure cycle cannot be performed. For each reclosure cycle, it can be set whether or not it allows a start. With the first general fault detection, only those action times the cycles of which allow a start have a meaning because the other cycles may not start. Using the action times and the start permission you can control which cycles can be run under different command time conditions. Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the first cycle. It is assumed that the action times are set as follows: 1.AR: T-ACTION = 0.2 s; 2.AR: T-ACTION = 0.8 s; 3.AR: T-ACTION = 1.2 s; Since reclosure is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip of a time overcurrent protection following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. The automatic reclosure function is started as a result. After unsuccessful reclosure the 2nd cycle would then become active; but the time overcurrent protection would not trip in this example until after 1 s according to its grading time. Since the action time for the second cycle was exceeded here, it is blocked. The 3rd cycle with its parameters is therefore performed now. If the trip command after the 1st reclosure had not appeared within 1.2 s after the 1st reclosure, there would be no further reclosure. Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is only allowed for the first. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the automatic reclosure function. However, the 2nd and 3rd cycles cannot take place because they are not set to start. There is therefore no reclosure, because no starting at all can take place. Example 3: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the first two cycles. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosure function but the 2nd cycle, for which starting is allowed, is activated immediately. This starts the automatic reclosure function, the 1st cycle is practically skipped. Control Modes of the Automatic Reclosure The dead times these are the times from elimination of the fault (drop off of the trip command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the initiation of the automatic close command may vary, depending on the automatic reclosure control mode selected when determining the function scope (Section 5.1) and the resulting signals of the starting protective functions. In the Trip... control mode single-pole or single/three-pole reclosure cycles are possible if the device and the circuit breaker are suitable for single-pole trip. In this case different dead times after single-pole tripping on the one hand and after three-pole trip-
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-81
6 Functions
ping on the other hand are possible (for every reclosure cycle). The tripping protective function determines the type of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. Control of the dead time depends on this. In the Pickup... control mode, different dead times can be set for every reclosure cycle after single-, two- and three-phase faults. Decisive here is the pickup situation of the protective functions at the instant the trip command disappears. This control mode enables the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault in the case of three-pole reclosure cycles. Blocking Reclosure Different events lead to blocking of automatic reclosure. No reclosure is possible for example if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosure has not yet been started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclosure cycle is already in progress, dynamic lock-out takes place (see below). Every cycle can also be blocked individually by a binary input. In this case the cycle concerned is invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible cycles. If blocking takes place while the cycle concerned is in progress, this leads to aborting of the reclosure, i.e. no reclosure takes place even if other valid cycles have been parameterized. Internal blockings restricted with certain time periods are processed during the course of reclosure cycles: The reclaim time T-RECLAIM begins with every automatic reclosure command. If the reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic reclosure return to the idle state at the end of the reclaim time; a fault after expiry of the reclaim time is treated as a new fault in the network. Re-tripping of a protective function within the reclaim time initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful in the case of re-tripping within the reclaim time. The automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically. The dynamic lock-out locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic lock-out time (0.5 s). This occurs for example after a final tripping or other events which block the automatic reclosure after it has been started. Restarting is blocked for this time. When this time has elapsed, the automatic reclosure returns to its idle position and is ready to process a new fault in the network. If the circuit breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch connected to a binary input, see also Subsection 6.13.1), the automatic reclosure is blocked for a manual-close-blocking time T-BLOCK MC. When a trip command is given during this time, it can be assumed that a metallic short-circuit be present (e.g. closed earthing isolator). Every trip command within this time is therefore final. With the user definable logic functions (CFC) further control functions can be processed in the same way as a manualclose command. Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready Precondition for a reclose attempt after trip is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant the automatic reclosure function is started (i.e. before the first trip command). The ready status of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input >CB1 Ready (FNo 371). If no such signal is available, the circuit breaker interrogation can be suppressed (presetting) because otherwise automatic reclosure would not be possible at all. This interrogation usually suffices for a single reclosure scheme. Since, for example, the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker mechanism drops after the trip, no further interrogation should take place.
6-82
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
It is of advantage, particularly in the case of multiple reclosure, to check the ready status of the circuit breaker not only at the instant of the first trip command but also before every reclosure. The reclosure is blocked as long as the CB does not indicate its ready status for another CLOSETRIPcycle. The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 7SD52. This monitoring time CB TIME OUT begins as soon as the CB ready signal becomes inactive. The dead time may be extended if no readiness is signalled at the end of it. However, if the circuit breaker does not indicate its ready status for a longer period than the monitoring time, reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure page 6-82). Processing the Auxiliary Contact Position of the Circuit Breaker If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the circuit breaker is also checked for plausibility. In the case of individual control of the individual breaker poles this concerns each individual breaker pole. This assumes that the auxiliary contacts are connected to the appropriate binary inputs for each pole (>CB1 Pole L1, FNo 366); >CB1 Pole L2, FNo 367); and >CB1 Pole L3, (FNo 368). If the series connections of the make and break auxiliary contacts are connected instead of the individual pole auxiliary contacts, the CB is assumed to have all poles open when the series connection of the break contacts is closed (binary input >CB1 3p Open, FNo 411). It is assumed to have all poles closed when the series connection of the make contacts is closed (binary input >CB1 3p Closed, (FNo 410). If none of these input messages is active, it is assumed that the breaker is open at one pole (even if this condition also exists theoretically when two poles are open). The device checks the position of the circuit breaker continuously: As long as the auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB is not closed (three-pole), the automatic reclosure function cannot be started. This guarantees that a close command can only be given when the CB was previously tripped (out of the closed state). The valid dead time begins when the trip command disappears or signals taken from the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB (pole) has opened. If the CB opens three-pole after a single-pole trip command, this is considered as a three-pole tripping. If three-pole reclosure cycles are allowed, the dead time for threepole tripping becomes active in the control mode with trip command (see above under subtitle Control Modes of the Automatic Reclosure, page 6-81); in control by pickup, the pickup configuration of the starting protective function(s) is still decisive. If threepole cycles are not allowed, the reclosure is locked out dynamically. The trip command then was final. The latter also applies if the CB is tripped at two poles after a single-pole trip command. The device only detects this if the auxiliary contacts for each pole are connected individually. The device couples the poles immediately resulting in a three-pole trip command. If the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that at least one further pole has opened during the dead time after single-pole tripping, a three-pole reclosure cycle is initiated with the dead time for three-pole reclosure provided this is permitted. If the auxiliary contacts are connected for each pole individually, the device can detect a two-pole open CB. In this case the device immediately sends a three-pole trip command providing the forced three-pole trip is activated (see Subsection 6.9.2 under subtitle Forced Three-pole Trip, page 6-97).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-83
6 Functions
Sequence of a Three-pole Auto-reclose Cycle
If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips all three poles for all faults within the stages parameterized for auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure function is started. When the trip command drops off or the circuit breaker opens (auxiliary contact criterion) an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If AR control mode = Pickup ... was set under address 134 during configuration of the protective functions, different dead times can be parameterized depending on the type of fault detected by the protection. If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final tripping. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-82). The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD52 multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Sequence of a Single-pole Auto-reclose Cycle
Single-pole auto-reclosure cycles are only possible if the device includes the option for single-pole tripping and this had been enabled in the protective function configuration (address 110, see also Section 5.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for single-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-pole for all single-phase faults within the stages parameterized for reclosure. It can also be determined, by setting (address 1156A Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 6.1.3), that single-pole tripping should take place for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole tripping is of course only possible by short-circuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. In the case of multi-phase faults, the short-circuit protection performs a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Every three-pole tripping is final. The automatic reclosure is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-82). The automatic reclosure is started in the case of single-pole tripping. The (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle starts with drop-off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). At the end of this dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (Forced Three-pole Trip, see below, page 6-97). If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final tripping. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-82).
6-84
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD52 multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). Sequence of a Single and Threepole Autoreclosure This operating mode is only possible if the device is includes the option for single-pole tripping and this had been enabled in the protective functions configuration (address 110, see also Section 5.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for single-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-pole for single-phase faults within the stage(s) configured for automatic reclosure and threepole for multi-phase faults. It can also be determined, by setting (address 1156A Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 6.1.3), that single-pole tripping should take place for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole tripping is of course only possible for short-circuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. The stages parameterized for reclosure apply for all fault types. The automatic reclosure is started at the moment of tripping. Depending on the type of fault the (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle or the (separately adjustable) dead time for the three-pole auto-reclosure cycle starts with the drop off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole). At the end of the dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (Forced Three-pole Trip, see below, page 6-97). If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without autoreclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final three-pole tripping. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-82). The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In 7SD52 multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). Multiple Autoreclosure If a fault still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be made. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function integrated in 7SD52. The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate action and dead times, can operate with single- or three-pole trip and can be blocked separately via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth cycle also apply for the fifth cycle and further cycles. The sequence is in principle the same as in the different reclosure programs described above. However, in this case, if the first reclosure attempt was unsuccessful, the reclosure is not blocked but the next reclosure cycle begins. The respective dead time starts with drop-off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (auxiliary contact criterion). The circuit breaker receives a further close command after this. At the same time the reclaim time is started. Until the set maximum number of permissible auto-reclose cycles has been reached, the reclaim time is reset with every new trip command after reclosure and started again with the next close command.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-85
6 Functions
If one of the cycles is successful, i.e. the fault has been eliminated after reclosure, the reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent states. The fault is cleared. If none of the cycles is successful, the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole trip after the last permissible reclosure, following a protection stage active without auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-82). Handling Evolving Faults If single-pole or single- and three-pole reclosure cycles are executed in the network, particular attention must be paid to evolving faults. Evolving faults are faults which occur during the dead time after clearance of the first fault. There are various ways of handling evolving faults in the 7SD52 depending on the requirements of the network: For detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of a protective function during the dead time or every further fault detection (pickup) is the criterion for an evolving fault. There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal autoreclose function to a detected evolving fault. a) EV. FLT. MODE Stops AutoRecl: The reclosure is blocked as soon as a evolving fault is detected. Tripping caused by the evolving fault is three-pole. This applies irrespective of whether three-pole cycles have been permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the auto-reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-82). b) EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR: As soon as an evolving fault is detected the auto-reclosure function is switched over to a cycle for three-pole auto-reclosure. Every trip command is three-pole. The separately settable dead time for evolving faults begins with elimination of the evolving fault; after this the circuit breaker receives a close command. The further procedure is the same as for single- and three-pole cycles. The complete dead time in this case consists of the part of the dead time for the single-pole reclosure up to the elimination of the evolving fault plus the dead time for the evolving fault. This is useful because the duration of the dead time after the three-pole tripping is essential for the stability of the network. If auto-reclosure is blocked due to an evolving fault without the protection issuing a three-pole trip command (e.g. for evolving fault detection with pickup), the device can send a three-pole trip command so that the circuit breaker does not remain open with one pole (Forced Three-pole Trip, see below, page 6-97). Dead Line Check (DLC) If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear after tripping on a fault, auto-reclosure can be prevented. This presupposes that the voltage transformers are installed on the line side and connected to the device. This has to be in accordance with the configuration described in Section 5.1. The dead line check must be switched active. The automatic reclosure function then checks the disconnected line for no-voltage. This requires an adequate measuring time within the dead time. If the voltage has not disappeared the reclosure is blocked dynamically.
6-86
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
This dead-line check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind generator) is connected along the line. Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) In all the previous possibilities it has been assumed that defined and equal dead times have been set at all line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or auto-reclosure cycles. It is also possible to set the dead times at one line end only and to configure the adaptive dead time at the other end (or ends). This presumes that voltage transformers are arranged on the line side and connected to the device. Figure 6-38 shows an example. It is assumed that the device I is operating with defined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is configured at position II. It is important that the line is fed at least from busbar A, i.e. the side with the defined dead times. With the adaptive dead time the automatic reclosure function at the line end II decides independently whether and when reclosure is useful and permissible and when it is not. The criterion is the line voltage at end II, which was re-applied from end I following reclosure there. Reclosure therefore takes place at end II as soon as it is detected that voltage has been re-applied to the line from end I. In the illustrated example, the line is disconnected at positions I and II. In I reclosure takes place after the parameterized dead time. If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line AB is re-connected to the voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is ended. If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), the line is re-connected at I but no healthy voltage appears at II. The device there detects this and does not reclose. In the case of multiple reclosure the process may be repeated at I several times until one of the reclosure attempts is successful or a final trip takes place.
A I
(defined dead times) Diffzone
B II
(ADT)
overreaching time-graded protection
A, B busbars I, II relais locations
Figure 6-38
Example of adaptive dead time (ADT)
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages: The circuit breaker at position II is not reclosed at all if the fault persists and is not unnecessarily stressed as a result. With non-selective tripping on an external fault due to an overreaching time-graded protection at position I no further auto-reclosure attempts occur at position II because the fault current path via busbar B and position II remains interrupted even after several reclosure attempts at I. At position I overreaching is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in the case of final tripping because the open breaker at position II forms the limit of any overreaching zone at I.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-87
6 Functions
Close Command Transmission (Remote Close)
With close command transmission the dead times are only set at one line end. The other is set to adaptive dead time. The latter only reacts to the received close commands from the transmitting end. The transmission of the close command at the transmitting line end is delayed until it is sure that the local reclosure was successful. This means a further possible local fault detection is checked after reclosure. This prevents unnecessary closing at the remote end on the one hand but also extends the time until reclosure takes place there. This is not critical for a single-pole auto-reclosure or in radial or meshed networks because no stability problems are to be expected. In the 7SD52 relay the existing protection data interfaces are used to transmit the close command.
Connecting an External AutoReclosure Device
If 7SD52 is to work with an external reclosure device, specific binary inputs and outputs must be taken into consideration. The following inputs and outputs are recommended to be used: Binary inputs: 383 >Enable ARzonesThrough this binary input the external reclosure device controls stages of the individual protective functions being active before reclosure (e.g. accelerated stages). The input can be omitted if no accelerated stage is required (e.g. differential protection, see also above under subtitle Selectivity before Reclosure, page 6-80). >Only 1ph AR The external reclosure device is programmed only as 1pole; the stages of the individual protective functions being active before reclosure are activated via FNo 383 only in the case of single-phase faults; in the case of multiplephase faults the corresponding stages are not enabled. The input can be omitted if no overreaching stage is required (e.g. differential protection, see also above under subtitle Selectivity before Reclosure, page 6-80). The external reclosure device allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion or 3-pole coupling). If the input is not activated or not allocated, 3-pole tripping takes place by the protective functions for every fault type. If the external reclosure device cannot supply this signal but supplies a 3-pole coupling signal instead, this must be taken into account in the allocation of the binary inputs (see Section 5.2): The signal must be inverted there (Lactive = active without voltage).
382
381
>1p Trip Perm
Binary outputs: 501 515 512 515 513 Relay PICKUP Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1pL1 Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1pL2 General pickup of the device (if required by the external auto-reclosure device). General trip of the device 3-pole, Trip of the device 1-pole L1. General trip of the device 3-pole, Trip of the device 1-pole L2.
6-88
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
515 514
Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1pL3
General trip of the device 3-pole, Trip of the device 1-pole L3.
In order to obtain a phase-segregated trip indication, the respective single-pole trip commands must be combined with the three-pole trip commands as one output. Figure 6-39 shows the interconnection between 7SD52 and an external reclosure device with a program selector switch, as a connection example. Depending on the requirement of the external reclosure device, the three single-pole outputs (FNo 512, 513, 514) can be combined into one single-pole trippingoutput, the FNo 515 sends the three-pole tripping signal to the external AR device. For exclusively three-pole auto-reclosure cycles, the general pickup (FNo 501, if required by the external reclosure device) and general trip signal (FNo 511) from 7SD52 (see Figure 6-40) usually suffice.
7SD52
Relay PICKUP Relay TRIP 3ph Relay TRIP 1pL1 Relay TRIP 3ph Relay TRIP 1pL2 Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1pL3
external AR device
L+
>Enable ARzones
>1p Trip Perm
L+
>Only 1ph AR
L
1-pole
3-pole 1-/3-pole
Selector
L+ switch
Figure 6-39 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 1-/3-pole AR with mode selector switch
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-89
6 Functions
7SD52
Relay PICKUP
external AR device
Relay TRIP
L+
>Enable ARzones
L
Figure 6-40 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 3-pole AR
L+
Control of the Internal Auto-Reclosure by an External Protection Device
If 7SD52 is equipped with the internal automatic reclosure function, this can also be controlled by an external protection device. This is useful for example for line ends with redundant protection or backup protection when the second protection is used for the same line end and is to work with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the 7SD52. Specific binary inputs and outputs must be considered in this case. It must be decided whether the internal auto-reclosure is to be controlled by the starting (pickup) or by the trip command of the external protection (see also above under Control Modes of the Automatic Reclosure, page 6-81). If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and outputs are recommended to be used: The auto-reclosure is started via the binary inputs: 2711 >AR Start 2712 >Trip L1 AR 2713 >Trip L2 AR 2714 >Trip L3 AR general fault detection (pickup) for the automatic reclosure (only required for action time), trip command L1 for automatic reclosure, trip command L2 for automatic reclosure, trip command L3 for automatic reclosure.
The general fault detection is decisive for starting the action times. It is also necessary if the automatic reclosure is to detect evolving faults by fault detection. In other cases this input information is superfluous. The trip commands decide whether the dead time for single-pole or three-pole autoreclosure cycles is activated or whether the reclosure is blocked in three-pole tripping (depending on the parameterization of dead times). Figure 6-41 shows the interconnection between the internal automatic reclosure of 7SD52 and an external protection device, as a connection example for single- and three-pole auto-reclosure. To couple the external protection three-pole and to release its accelerated stages before reclosure if necessary, the following output functions are suitable:
6-90
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
2864 AR 1p Trip Perm internal automatic reclosure ready for 1-pole reclose cycle, i.e. allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion of the 3pole coupling). 2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel internal automatic reclosure ready for the first reclose cycle, i.e. enables the stage of the external protection decisive for reclosure, the corresponding outputs can be used for other cycles. The output can be omitted if the external protection does not require an overreach stage (e.g. differential protection). 2820 AR Program1polei internal automatic reclosure is programmed for singlepole AR, i.e. only reclosures after single-pole tripping. The output can be omitted if no overreach stage is used (e.g. differential protection). Instead of the individual phase-dedicated trip commands, the single-pole and threepole tripping can be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure provided the external protection device supports it , i.e. you can assign the following binary inputs of the 7SD52: 2711 >AR Start general fault detection for the internal automatic reclosure (only required for action time),
2715 >Trip 1p for AR trip command 1-pole for the internal automatic reclosure, 2716 >Trip 3p for AR trip command 3-pole for the internal automatic reclosure. If only three-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the binary input >Trip 3p for AR (FNo 2716) for the trip signal. Figure 6-42 shows an example. Any overreaching stages of the external protection are enabled again by AR 1.CycZoneRel (FNo 2889) and of further cycles if applicable.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-91
6 Functions
external protection device

Pickup >AR Start >Trip L1 AR >Trip L2 AR >Trip L3 AR
7SD52
Tripping L1
Tripping L2
Tripping L3
L+
Relase AR-stages AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for further AR) 3-phase coupling AR 1p Trip Perm AR Program1pole
only 1-pole
L
Figure 6-41
L
Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = Trip

Pickup >AR Start >Trip 3p for AR
7SD52
Tripping
L+
Relase AR-stages AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for further AR)
L
Figure 6-42
L+
Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = Trip
If the internal automatic reclosure function is controlled by the pickup, the phase-dedicated pickup signals of the external protection must be connected if distinction shall be made between different types of fault. The general trip command is sufficient to indicate tripping (FNo 2746). Figures 6-43 and 6-44 show connection examples.
6-92
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Pickup L1 >Pickup L1 AR >Pickup L2 AR >Pickup L3 AR >Trip for AR
7SD52
Pickup L2
Pickup L3
Tripping
L+
Release AR-stage AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for other AR)
L+
Figure 6-43
Connection example with external protection device for fault detection dependent dead time dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device for each phase; AR control mode = Pickup

Pickup 1-phase >Pickup 1ph AR >Pickup 2ph AR >Pickup 3ph AR >Trip for AR
7SD52
Pickup 2-phase
Pickup 3-phase
Tripping
L+
Release AR Stage AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for other AR)
L
Figure 6-44
L+
Connection example with external protection device for fault detection dependent dead time dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase; AR control mode = Pickup
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-93
6 Functions
2 Protection Systems with 2 Automatic Reclosure Functions
If redundant protection is provided for a feeder and each protection operates with its own automatic reclosure function, certain signal exchanges are necessary between the two protection systems. The connection example in Figure 6-45 shows the necessary cross-connections.
7SD52
internal AR function BI >AR Start >Trip L1 AR >Trip L2 AR >Trip L3 AR
2nd Protection
2nd AR device
AR start
BI
BI
Trip L1
BI
BI
Trip L2
BI
BI
Trip L3
BI
L
Prot. function
L
2nd prot. device Pickup*) Trip L1*) Trip L2*) Trip L3*) Pickup SO
L+
SO
L+
SO
Trip L1
SO
SO
Trip L2
SO
SO
Trip L3
SO
L+
K
Relay TRIP 1pL1 Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1pL2 Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP 1pL3 Relay TRIP 3ph.
L+
Trip L1 C
Trip L2
Trip L3
BI SO C *)
Binary input Signal output Commands for all protective functions operating with AR
L1 L2 L3 to circuit breaker
Figure 6-45
Connection example for 2 protection devices with 2 auto-reclosure functions
If the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are connected phase segregated, a three-phase coupling is guaranteed when more than one CB pole is tripped by the 7SD52. This requires that the three-pole intertrip is activated (see Subsection 6.9.2
6-94
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
under subtitle Forced Three-pole Trip, page 6-97). An external automatic three-pole coupling is therefore unnecessary if the above conditions are satisfied. This prevents two-pole tripping under all circumstances.
6.9.2
General

If no reclosure is required on the feeder for which the differential protection 7SD52 is used (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure function must be disabled during configuration (see Section 5.1, address 133). The automatic reclosure is then totally removed, i.e. the automatic reclosure is not processed in the 7SD52. No signals are generated, binary inputs for the automatic reclosure are ignored. All parameters for setting the automatic reclosure are inaccessible and insignificant. If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure is to be used, the type of reclosure must be set in the configuration of the device scope (see Section 5.1) under address 133 Auto Reclose and the AR control mode under address 134. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the integrated automatic reclosure function of 7SD52. Whereas the settings in the addresses 3401 to 3441 are common to all reclosure cycles, the individual settings of the cycles are made from address 3450 onwards. You can set different individual parameters for the first four reclosure cycles. The same parameters of the fourth cycle apply to the fifth cycle and further. Under address 3401 AUTO RECLOSE the automatic reclosure function can be switched ON or OFF. Prerequisite for an automatic reclosure being possible after trip on a fault is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant the auto-reclosure is started (i.e. at the initiation of the first trip command). The ready status of the circuit breaker is indicated to the device through the binary input >CB1 Ready (FNo 371). If no such signal is available, leave the setting under address 3402 CB? 1.TRIP = NO because otherwise no auto-reclosure would be possible at all. If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set CB? 1.TRIP = YES. Furthermore, the ready status of the circuit breaker can be interrogated before every reclosure. This is stated when setting the individual reclosure cycles (see below). To check the ready status of the circuit breaker is regained during the dead times, you can set a circuit breaker ready monitor time under address 3409 CB TIME OUT. The time is set slightly longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIP CLOSETRIPcycle. If the circuit breaker has not been ready again within this time, there is no reclosure, the auto-reclosure is blocked dynamically. Waiting for the circuit breaker charge mechanism can lead to a lengthening of the dead times. Interrogation of a synchronism check (if used) can also delay reclosure. To avoid uncontrolled prolongation you can set a maximum extension of the dead time in this case under address 3411A T-DEAD EXT.. This extension is unlimited if you set . This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after three-pole tripping when no stability problems occur or a synchronism check takes place before reclosure.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-95
6 Functions
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM (address 3403) is the time after which the network fault is considered to be cleared after a successful reclosure. Re-tripping of a protective function within this time initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclosures; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful. The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest command time of a protective function which can start the automatic reclosure function. A few seconds are generally sufficient. In regions with frequent thunderstorms or storms a shorter reclaim time is advisable to reduce the danger of final tripping as a result of repeated lightning strikes or conductor flashovers (conductor vibration). A long reclaim time must be selected in the case of multiple reclosure (see above) if there is no circuit breaker monitoring possibility (e.g. due to missing auxiliary contacts and CBreadyinformation). Then the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker. The blocking duration in manual-close detection T-BLOCK MC (address 3404) must guarantee safe closing and tripping of the circuit breaker (0.5 s to 1 s). If a fault has been detected by a protective function within this time after detected closing of the circuit breaker, a final three-pole trip is carried out and no reclosure will take place. If this is undesirable, address 3404 is set to 0. The options for handling evolving faults are described in Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle Handling Evolving Faults, page 6-86. The handling of evolving faults is not relevant on line ends where the adaptive dead time is applied (address 133 Auto Reclose = ADT, Section 5.1). Addresses 3406 and 3407 are then insignificant and inaccessible. You can define recognition of an evolving fault under address 3406. EV. FLT. RECOG. with PICKUP means that, during a dead time, every fault detection (pickup) of a protective function will be interpreted as an evolving fault. With EV. FLT. RECOG. with TRIP a fault during a dead time is only interpreted as an evolving fault if it has led to a trip command of a protective function. This may also include trip commands which are coupled in externally via a binary input or which have been transmitted from any other end of the protected object. If an external protection device operates together with the auto-reclosure, evolving fault detection with pickup presupposes that a pickup signal of the external device is also connected to the 7SD52; otherwise an evolving fault can only be detected with the external trip command even if with PICKUP was set here. Select the reaction to evolving faults under address 3407. EV. FLT. MODE = Stops AutoRecl means that no reclosure takes place after detection of an evolving fault. This is always useful when only single-pole reclosure is to take place or when stability problems are to be expected due to closing after a subsequent three-pole dead time. If a three-pole reclose cycle is to be initiated by tripping of the evolving fault, set EV. FLT. MODE = starts 3p AR. In this case a three-pole reclose cycle with separately adjustable dead time is started with the three-pole trip command on the evolving fault. This is only useful if three-pole reclosure is also permitted. Address 3408 T-Start MONITOR monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker after a trip command. If the CB has not opened after this time (from the beginning of the trip command), the automatic reclosure is locked dynamically. The criterion for opening is the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) or the disappearance of the trip command. If a circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used on the same feeder, this time should be shorter than the delay time of the circuit breaker failure protection so that no reclosure takes place if the circuit breaker fails.
6-96
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
If the reclosure command is transmitted to the other end(s), you can delay this transmission with address 3410 T RemoteClose. This transmission requires that the device(s) at the remote end(s) operates with adaptive dead time (address 133 Auto Reclose = Adaptive Dead Time at the remote end(s), see also Section 5.1). This parameter is otherwise irrelevant. If no transmission of the close command is desired, although ADT is set at one of the other ends, set T RemoteClose = . On the one hand, this delay serves to prevent the remote end device(s) from reclosing unnecessarily the when local reclosure is unsuccessful. The setting of T RemoteClose should therefore be a total of the closing time of the circuit breaker, the maximum response time and command duration of the protection function, the tripping time of the circuit breaker, the drop-off time of the protection function and a safety margin. On the other hand, it should be noted that the line is not available for energy transport until the remote end has also reclosed. It must therefore be added to the dead time in the consideration of the network stability. Configuration of the Automatic Reclosure This configuration concerns the interaction between the protective and supplementary functions of the device and the automatic reclosure function. Here you can determine which functions of the device are to start the automatic reclosure and which not. In 7SD52 this concerns: Address 3420 AR WITH DIFF, i.e. with differential protection, Address 3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C, i.e. with instantaneous high-speed overcurrent tripping, Address 3423 AR WITH I.TRIP, i.e. with intertrip and remote trip, Address 3424 AR w/ DTT, i.e. with externally coupled direct trip command, Address 3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C, i.e. with time overcurrent protection. For the functions which are to start the auto-reclosure function, the corresponding address is set to YES, for the others to NO. The remaining functions (overload protection, breaker failure protection) cannot start the auto-reclosure because reclosure is of no use here. Forced Three-pole Trip If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole trip command having been initiated, the breaker remains open at one pole. With address 3430 AR TRIP 3pole you determine that the tripping logic of the device sends a three-pole trip command in this case (pole discrepancy prevention). Set this address to YES if the breaker can be controlled single-pole and has no pole discrepancy supervision itself. Nevertheless, the device pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of the CB because the forced three-pole trip of the device is immediately initiated as soon as the reclosure is blocked following a single-pole trip or if the CB auxiliary contacts report an implausible breaker state (see also Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle Processing the Auxiliary Contact Position of the Circuit Breaker, page 6-83). The forced three-pole trip is also initiated when only three-pole cycles are allowed but a single-pole open position is indicated externally through the binary inputs. The forced three-pole trip is unnecessary if only a common three-pole control of the circuit breaker is possible. Dead Line Check (DLC) Under address 3431 the dead line check can be switched active. It presupposes that voltage transformers are installed on the line side of the feeder and connected to the device. If this is not the case or the function is not used, set DLC / RDT = WITHOUT. DLC / RDT = DLC means that the dead line check is used. An automatic reclosure is only possible if it was determined that the line had been dead. In this case, the phase-
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-97
6 Functions
earth voltage limit is set in address 3441 U-dead< below which the line is considered voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is made in secondary Volts. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI 4. Address 3438 T U-stable determines the minimum measuring time for determining the voltage-free condition. Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) When operating with adaptive dead time, it must be ensured in advance that one end per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other (or others in multi-branch lines) may operate with adaptive dead time. You will find details about the procedure in Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) on page 6-87 and Close Command Transmission (Remote Close), page 6-88. For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclosure cycles must be set in the configuration of the protective functions (Section 5.1) under address 133 Auto Reclose. Additionally the intertrip command of the differential protection should be activated (see Subsection 6.4.2, address 1301 I-TRIP SEND = YES). For the devices operating with adaptive dead time, Auto Reclose = ADT must be set in the configuration of the protective functions (Section 5.1) under address 133. Only the parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. Then no settings are made for the individual reclosure cycles. The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or RemoteCLOSEcontrolled. Both is even possible at the same time. In the first case, reclosure after tripping takes place as soon as the voltage from the re-energized remote end is detected. This requires that the voltage transformers are installed on the line side of the feeder and connected to the device. With RemoteCLOSEcontrolled adaptive dead time, the autoreclosure function waits for the reception of the remote close command from the remote end. The action time T-ACTION ADT (address 3433) is the time after pickup of any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure within which the trip command must appear. If the trip command has not appeared before expiry of the action time, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see Section 5.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a starting protective function does not provide a pickup indication. The dead times are controlled by the reclosure command of the device at the line end with defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command is missing, e.g. because reclosure has been blocked there during the dead time, the auto-reclosure function of the device with adaptive dead time must return to the quiescent state after some time. This takes place after the maximum wait time T-MAX ADT (address 3434). This must be long enough to include the last possible reclosure of the initiating end. In the case of single-shot reclosure, the total sum of maximum dead time plus reclaim time of the device of the initiating end is sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the worst case is that all reclosures of the initiating end except the last one are unsuccessful. The time of all these cycles must be taken into account. To save having to make exact calculations, you may use the total sum of all dead times and all command times of the trippings plus a reclaim time. Under address 3435 ADT 1p allowed you determine whether single-pole tripping is to be allowed (on condition that single-pole tripping is possible at all). If NO, the protection trips three-pole for all fault types. If YES the possible tripping situations of the starting protective functions are decisive. Under address 3436 ADT CB? CLOSE you determine whether circuit breaker ready is to be interrogated before reclosure after adaptive dead time. If you set YES the dead
6-98
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
time may be extended if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSETRIPcycle. The dead time is extended by the circuit breaker monitoring time at the most; this was set for all reclosure cycles under address 3409 (see above). You will find details about the circuit breaker monitoring in the function description, Subsection 6.9.1, under subtitle Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready, page 6-82. If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure cycle, you should set address 3437 ADT SynRequest to YES. In this case a check is made before reclosure following a three-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This requires that an external synchro-check device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no stability problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to a high degree of interconnection within the network or in radial networks), set address 3437 to NO. Addresses 3438 and 3440 are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead time is used. Set under address 3440 U-live> the limit for the phase-earth voltage above which the line is to be considered fault-free. The setting must be lower than the smallest operating voltage to be expected. The setting is made in secondary Volts. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI 4. Address 3438 T U-stable determines the measuring time available for determining the voltage. It should be longer than any transient voltage oscillations resulting from line energization. 1st Reclosure Cycle If working on a line with adaptive dead time, no other parameters are needed for the individual reclosure cycles here. All following parameters assigned to the individual cycles are then superfluous and inaccessible. Address 3450 1.AR: START is only available, if the automatic reclosure is configured with action time, i.e. if the address 134 AR control mode = Pickup w/ Tact or Trip w/ Tact (the first only for three-pole tripping) was set during the configuration of the protective functions (refer to Section 5.1). It determines whether an automatic reclosure start is to take place at all with the first cycle. This address is included mainly for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every reclosure attempt and is set to YES for the first cycle. If several cycles are to be executed you can control the effect of the individual cycles with this parameter together with different action times. Notes and examples can be found in Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle Action Times (page 6-80). The action time 1.AR: T-ACTION (address 3451) is the time after pickup of any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure within which the trip command must appear. If the trip command has not appeared before expiry of the action time, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see Section 5.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a starting protective function does not provide a pickup indication. Depending on the configured control mode of the automatic reclosure (see Section 5.1 under address 134 AR control mode) only addresses 3456 and 3457 (if control mode Trip...) or the addresses 3453 to 3455 (if control mode Pickup...) are available. In the control mode Trip... you can set different dead times for single-pole and threepole reclose cycles. Whether single-pole or three-pole tripping takes place depends solely on the protective functions which start the auto-reclosure function. Single-pole tripping is only possible of course if the device and the corresponding protective function are also capable of single-pole tripping.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-99
6 Functions
Address 3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip is the dead time after 1-pole tripping, Address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip is the dead time after 3-pole tripping. If you only want to allow a single-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for three-pole tripping to . If you only want to allow a three-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for single-pole tripping to ; the protection then trips three-pole for every fault type. The dead time after single-pole tripping (if set) 1.AR Tdead1Trip (address 3456) should be long enough to allow for the fault arc to be extinguished and the surrounding air be de-ionized so that the reclosure is likely to be successful. The longer the line, the longer is this time due to the charging of the conductor capacitances. The typical values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s. For three-pole tripping (address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip) the stability of the network is the main concern. Since the disconnected line cannot transfer any synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is often permitted. The usual values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s. If the device is operating with a synchronism check device, a longer dead time may be tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer three-pole dead times are also possible in networks with a high degree of interconnection or in radial networks. In the control mode with Pickup... you can make the dead times dependent on the type of fault detected by pickup of the starting protective function(s): Address 3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt is the dead time after 1-phase pickup, Address 3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt is the dead time after 2-phase pickup, Address 3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt is the dead time after 3-phase pickup. If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters to the same value. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different pickups. The tripping can only be three-pole. If you have set starts 3p AR when setting the reaction to evolving faults (see above under General, page 6-96) address 3407 EV. FLT. MODE, you can set a separate value 1.AR: Tdead EV. (address 3458) for the three-pole dead time after clearance of the evolving fault. Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally it can be set equal to address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip. Under address 3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE you determine whether circuit breaker ready is to be interrogated before this first reclosure. If you set YES the dead time may be extended if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSETRIP cycle. The dead time is extended by the circuit breaker monitoring time at the most; this was set for all reclosure cycles under address 3409 (see above). You will find details about the circuit breaker monitoring in the function description, Subsection 6.9.1, under subtitle Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready, page 6-82. If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure cycle, you should set address 3460 1.AR SynRequest to YES. In this case a check is made before reclosure following a three-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This requires that an external synchro-check device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no stability problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to close meshing of the network or in radial networks), set address 3460 to NO. 2nd to 4th Reclosure Cycle If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Section 5.1), you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The possibilities are the same as for the 1st cycle. Only some of the following parameters may be available here depending on the configuration of the protective function (Section 5.1).
6-100
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
For the 2nd cycle: Address 3461 2.AR: START; start in 2nd cycle allowed at all Address 3462 2.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 2nd cycle Address 3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting Address 3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt; dead time after 2-phase starting Address 3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt; dead time after 3-phase starting Address 3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping Address 3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip; dead time after 3-pole tripping Address 3469 2.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault Address 3470 2.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure Address 3471 2.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping For the 3rd cycle: Address 3472 3.AR: START; start in 3rd cycle allowed at all Address 3473 3.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 3rd cycle Address 3475 3.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting Address 3476 3.AR Tdead 2Flt; dead time after 2-phase starting Address 3477 3.AR Tdead 3Flt; dead time after 3-phase starting Address 3478 3.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping Address 3479 3.AR Tdead3Trip; dead time after 3-pole tripping Address 3480 3.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault Address 3481 3.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure Address 3482 3.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping For the 4th cycle: Address 3483 4.AR: START; start in the 4th cycle allowed at all Address 3484 4.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 4th cycle Address 3486 4.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting Address 3487 4.AR Tdead 2Flt; dead time after 2-phase starting Address 3488 4.AR Tdead 3Flt; dead time after 3-phase starting Address 3489 4.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping Address 3490 4.AR Tdead3Trip; dead time after 3-pole tripping Address 3491 4.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault Address 3492 4.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure Address 3493 4.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping 5th to 8th Reclosure Cycles If more than 4 cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Section 5.1), the cycles following the fourth cycle operate with the same settings as the fourth cycle.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-101
6 Functions
6.9.3
Setting Overview
Addr. 3401 3402 3403 3404 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411A 3450 3451 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3464 3465 3466 3467
Setting Title AUTO RECLOSE CB? 1.TRIP T-RECLAIM T-BLOCK MC EV. FLT. RECOG. EV. FLT. MODE T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT T RemoteClose T-DEAD EXT. 1.AR: START 1.AR: T-ACTION 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 1.AR Tdead 2Flt 1.AR Tdead 3Flt 1.AR Tdead1Trip 1.AR Tdead3Trip 1.AR: Tdead EV. 1.AR: CB? CLOSE 1.AR SynRequest 2.AR: START 2.AR: T-ACTION 2.AR Tdead 1Flt 2.AR Tdead 2Flt 2.AR Tdead 3Flt 2.AR Tdead1Trip OFF ON YES NO
Setting Options
Default Setting ON NO 3.00 sec 1.00 sec with Trip starts 3pole ARcycle 0.50 sec 3.00 sec 0.20 sec sec YES 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec
Comments Auto-Reclose Function CB ready interrogation at 1st trip Reclaim time after successful AR cycle AR blocking duration after manual close Evolving fault recognition Evolving fault (during the dead time) AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Send delay for remote close command Maximum dead time extension Start of AR allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip
0.50..300.00 sec 0.50..300.00 sec; 0 with Pickup with Trip Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR-cycle 0.01..300.00 sec 0.01..300.00 sec 0.00..300.00 sec; 0.50..300.00 sec; YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec;
6-102
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr. 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3420 3421 3423
Setting Title 2.AR Tdead3Trip 2.AR: Tdead EV. 2.AR: CB? CLOSE 2.AR SynRequest 3.AR: START 3.AR: T-ACTION 3.AR Tdead 1Flt 3.AR Tdead 2Flt 3.AR Tdead 3Flt 3.AR Tdead1Trip 3.AR Tdead3Trip 3.AR: Tdead EV. 3.AR: CB? CLOSE 3.AR SynRequest 4.AR: START 4.AR: T-ACTION 4.AR Tdead 1Flt 4.AR Tdead 2Flt 4.AR Tdead 3Flt 4.AR Tdead1Trip 4.AR Tdead3Trip 4.AR: Tdead EV. 4.AR: CB? CLOSE 4.AR SynRequest AR WITH DIFF AR w/ SOTF-O/C AR WITH I.TRIP
Setting Options 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
Default Setting 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO YES YES YES
Comments Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR with differential protection ? AR with switch-onto-fault overcurrent AR with intertrip ?
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-103
6 Functions
Addr. 3424 3425 3430 3431 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3440 3441
Setting Title AR w/ DTT AR w/ BackUpO/C AR TRIP 3pole DLC / RDT T-ACTION ADT T-MAX ADT ADT 1p allowed ADT CB? CLOSE ADT SynRequest T U-stable U-live> U-dead< YES NO YES NO YES NO
Setting Options
Default Setting YES YES YES Without 0.20 sec 5.00 sec NO NO NO 0.10 sec 48 V 30 V
Comments AR with direct transfer trip AR with back-up overcurrent 3pole TRIP by AR Dead Line Check Action time Maximum dead time 1pole TRIP allowed CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR Supervision time for dead/live voltage Voltage threshold for live line or bus Voltage threshold for dead line or bus
Without Dead Line Check (DLC) 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.50..3000.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.10..30.00 sec 30..90 V 2..70 V
6.9.4
The following paragraphs explain some important device information signals in brief insofar as they are not explained in the following lists or covered in detail in the preceding subsections. >BLK 1.AR-cycle (FNo 2742) to >BLK 4.-n. AR (FNo 2745) The respective auto-reclose cycle is blocked. If the blocking signal is already active when the auto-reclosure is started, the concerned cycle is not executed and may be skipped (if further cycles are allowed). The same applies accordingly if auto-reclosure was already started ignoring a possibly blocked cycle. If a cycle is blocked during its execution, automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically; there are then no further automatic reclosures. AR 1.CycZoneRel (FNo 2889) to AR 4.CycZoneRel (FNo 2892) The automatic reclosure is ready for the respective reclosure cycle. The information indicates which cycle will be executed next. For example, external protective functions can be set to enable accelerated or overreaching stages before the respective reclosure.
6-104
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
AR is blocked (FNo 2783) The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). The information indicates to the system management that there will be a final tripping, i.e. without reclosure for a coming network fault. If the automatic reclosure has been started, this information does not appear. AR is NOT ready (FNo 2784) The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the AR is blocked (FNo 2783) mentioned above there are also obstructions during the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as action time run out or last reclaim time running. The information is particularly helpful during relay testing because no reclosure can be initiated while this indication is active. AR in progress (FNo 2801) This information appears with starting of the automatic reclosure, i.e. with the first trip command which is to start the automatic reclosure. If the reclosure attempt was successful (or all in the case of several), this information disappears at the end of the last reclaim time. If no reclosure attempt was successful or reclosure was blocked, it resets with the last the final trip command. AR Sync.Request (FNo 2865) Measuring request to an external synchronism check device. The information appears at the end of a dead time subsequent to three-pole tripping if a synchronism request was parameterized for the corresponding cycle. Reclosure only takes place when the synchronism check device has provided release signal >Sync.release (FNo 2731). >Sync.release (FNo 2731) Release of reclosure by an external synchronism check device if this was requested by the output information AR Sync.Request (FNo 2865).
F.No. 127 2701 2702 2703 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2727 2731 2737 2738 2739 AR ON/OFF >AR ON >AR OFF >BLOCK AR >AR Start >Trip L1 AR >Trip L2 AR >Trip L3 AR >Trip 1p for AR >Trip 3p for AR >AR RemoteClose >Sync.release >BLOCK 1pole AR >BLOCK 3pole AR >BLK 1phase AR Alarm Comments Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port) >Auto reclose ON >Auto reclose OFF >BLOCK Auto reclose >External start of internal Auto reclose >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR >AR: Ext. Trip L2 for internal AR >AR: Ext. Trip L3 for internal AR >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. >AR: Remote Close signal >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-105
6 Functions
F.No. 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2781 2782 2783 2784 2787 2788 2801 2809 2810 2818 2820 2821 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2846 2845 2847
Alarm >BLK 2phase AR >BLK 3phase AR >BLK 1.AR-cycle >BLK 2.AR-cycle >BLK 3.AR-cycle >BLK 4.-n. AR >Trip for AR >Pickup L1 AR >Pickup L2 AR >Pickup L3 AR >Pickup 1ph AR >Pickup 2ph AR >Pickup 3ph AR Auto recl. OFF Auto recl. ON AR is blocked AR is NOT ready CB not ready AR T-CBreadyExp AR in progress AR T-Start Exp AR TdeadMax Exp AR evolving Flt AR Program1pole AR Td. evol.Flt AR Tdead 1pTrip AR Tdead 3pTrip AR Tdead 1pFlt AR Tdead 2pFlt AR Tdead 3pFlt AR 1stCyc. run. AR 3rdCyc. run. AR 2ndCyc. run. AR 4thCyc. run.
Comments >AR: Block 2phase-fault AR-cycle >AR: Block 3phase-fault AR-cycle >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles >AR: External Trip for AR start >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start >AR: External pickup L2 for AR start >AR: External pickup L3 for AR start >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start >AR: External pickup 2phase for AR start >AR: External pickup 3phase for AR start Auto recloser is switched OFF Auto recloser is switched ON AR: Auto-reclose is blocked Auto recloser is NOT ready AR: Circuit breaker not ready AR: CB ready monitoring window expired Auto-reclose in progress AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired AR: Maximum dead time expired AR: Evolving fault recognition AR is set to operate after 1p trip only AR dead time after evolving fault AR dead time after 1pole trip running AR dead time after 3pole trip running AR dead time after 1phase fault running AR dead time after 2phase fault running AR dead time after 3phase fault running AR 1st cycle running AR 3rd cycle running AR 2nd cycle running AR 4th or higher cycle running
6-106
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
F.No. 2848 2851 2852 2853 2854 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2871 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2796 AR ADT run. AR Close
Alarm
Comments AR cycle is running in ADT mode Auto-reclose Close command AR: Close command after 1pole 1st cycle AR: Close command after 3pole 1st cycle AR: Close command after 2nd cycle AR: Reclaim time is running Auto reclose cycle successful Auto reclose Lockout AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR AR: Synchro-check request AR: TRIP command 3pole AR 1st cycle zone extension release AR 2nd cycle zone extension release AR 3rd cycle zone extension release AR 4th cycle zone extension release AR zone extension (general) AR Remote close signal send AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI
AR Close1.Cyc1p AR Close1.Cyc3p AR Close 2.Cyc AR T-Recl. run. AR Successful AR Lockout AR 1p Trip Perm AR Sync.Request AR TRIP 3pole AR 1.CycZoneRel AR 2.CycZoneRel AR 3.CycZoneRel AR 4.CycZoneRel AR Zone Release AR Remote Close AR on/off BI
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-107
6 Functions
6.10
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
6.10.1 Method of Operation

General The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid backup fault clearance, in the event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a feeder protection. Whenever e.g. a short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 6-46). A timer TBF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip command is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.
Busbar
Protection trip
Circuit breaker failure protection
Feeder protection (internal or external)
Feeder
I> BF
&
TBF
0 Trip busbar
Figure 6-46
Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow monitoring
Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring stage I> BF quickly resets (typical 10 ms) and stops the timer TBF. If the trip command is not executed (breaker failure case), current continues to flow and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a command to trip the backup breakers which interrupt the fault current. The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure protection itself detects the interruption of the current. For protection functions where the tripping criteria is not dependent on current (e.g. Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion to determine the correct response of the breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the condition of the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 6-47). For this purpose, the outputs from the auxiliary contacts must be connected to binary inputs on the relay (refer also to Subsection 6.13.2).
6-108
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
Busbar
L+
Protection trip
Circuit breaker failure protection

TBF 0 Trip busbar
Feeder protection (internal or external)
Feeder
&
Figure 6-47
Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection controlled by the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s)
Current Flow Monitoring
Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are filtered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental frequency is used for further evaluation. Special features detect the instant of current interruption. With sinusoidal currents, current interruption is detected after approx. 10 ms. With aperiodic DC current components in the fault current and/or in the current transformer secondary circuit after interruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core), or saturation of the current transformers caused by the DC component in the fault current, it can take one AC cycle before the interruption of the primary current is reliably detected. The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. In addition to the three phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a plausibility check (see Figure 6-48): As plausibility current, the earth current (residual current IE = 3I0) is preferably used. If the residual current from the starpoint of the current transformer set is connected to the device this is used for 3I0. If the residual current is not available the device calculates it according to the formula: 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3. Additionally, the value of three times the negative sequence current 3I2 is used for plausibility check. This is calculated by the 7SD52 according to the formula: 3I2 = IL1 + a2 IL2 + a IL3 where a = ej120. These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality of the breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the breaker failure delay times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-109
6 Functions
3902 I> BF Current criterion I>
IL1
&
>1
L1>
&
IL2
I>
&
>1
L2>
&
IL3
I>
&
>1
L3>
&
3I2
I>
>1
plausibility
3I0
I>
Figure 6-48
Current flow monitoring with the plausibility currents 3I0 and 3I2
Processing of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts
The position of the circuit breaker is derived from the central function control of the device (refer also to Subsection 6.13.2). Evaluation of the breaker auxiliary contacts is carried out in the breaker failure protection function only when the current flow monitoring has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the trip signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contact does not (yet) indicate that the circuit breaker has opened (Figure 6-49). This gives preference to the more reliable current criterion and avoids false operation due to a defect e.g. in the auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature is provided for each individual phase as well as for three-pole trip. It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch Chk BRK CONTACT (Figure 6-50 top) to NO, the breaker failure protection can only be started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then not evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the circuit breaker for faults which do not necessarily cause detectable current flow (e.g.
6-110
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Buchholz protection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts is required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker. For this purpose, the binary input >BF Start w/o I is provided (Figure 6-50 left). This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow is detected.
L1>
&
S Q R
Start only L1
FNo 351
1) 1 2
&
>1
CBaux L1 closed
>CB Aux. L1
FNo 380
2)
>CB 3p Open
) if phase segregated auxiliary contacts available ) if series connection of NC contacts available
Figure 6-49
Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion example for phase L1
Common Phase Initiation
Common phase initiation is used, for example, for lines without automatic reclosure, for lines with only three-pole automatic reclosure, for transformer feeders, or if the busbar protection trips. This is the only available initiation mode if the applied 7SD52 model is able to trip three-pole only. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the 7SD52 device: the trip command to the input >BF Start 3pole and an additional release signal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) to the input >BF release. For Buchholz protection it is recommended that the trip command is connected to the 7SD52 by two separate wire pairs in order to achieve dual-channel initiation of the breaker failure protection. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >BF release must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 6-50. When the trip signal is given from any internal or external feeder protection and at least one current flow criterion (according to Figure 6-48) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the corresponding delay time(s) is (are) started. If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) is interrogated provided that this is available. If the circuit breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series connection of the three normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used. The circuit breaker has operated correctly after a three-pole trip command only when none of the phases carries current and when all three NC auxiliary contacts have closed. If an internal protection function or an external protection device trips without current flow, the internal input Start internal w/o I or the external input >BF Start w/o I is used to initiate the breaker failure protection. In these cases the breaker auxiliary contact position is the only criterion for the response of the circuit breaker.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-111
6 Functions
Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK BkrFail (e.g. during testing of the feeder protection relay). Additionally, an internal blocking option is provided.
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT

(similar to Fig 6-49) CBaux1pole closed (from Fig 6-48) YES
L1> L2> L3>
NO
>1
>1
&
>1 >1
Start internal w/o l

FNo 1439
>BF Start w/o I

Start internal 3pole FNo 1415
&
&
Start L123
FNo 1461
>1
Configuration
1 not allocated allocated
FNo 1461
BF Start
>BF Start 3pole

FNo 1432
>BF release
FNo 1403
>BLOCK BkrFail Internal blocking
&
Figure 6-50
Breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
Phase Segregated Initiation
Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, e.g. if single-pole automatic reclosure is used. This is possible if the device is able to trip single-pole. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect an additional release signal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) at the input >BF release, in addition to the trip commands at the inputs >BF Start L1, >BF Start L2, and >BF Start L3. Figure 6-51 shows the connections of this dual-channel initiation. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >BF release must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a separate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 6-52. The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 6-53. In principle, it is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each of the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each individual phase. In case of single-pole trip before an automatic reclose cycle, current interruption is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only.
6-112
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Initiation of a single-phase, e.g. Start L1 only is active when the starting input (= trip command of any feeder protection) appears for only this phase and current flow is detected in at least this phase. If current flow is not detected, the auxiliary contact position can be interrogated according to Figure 6-49, dependent on the setting (Chk BRK CONTACT = YES).
external prot. device

Trip L1 >BF Start L1
7SD52
Trip L2
>BF Start L2
Trip L3
>BF Start L3
Pick-up
>BF release
L+
Figure 6-51
L
Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal
external prot. device

Trip L1 Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip L3 >BF Start L1
7SD52
>BF Start L2
>BF Start L3
L+
>BF release
L
Figure 6-52 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip contacts
The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual breaker pole. If however the breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual breaker pole, then a single-pole trip command is assumed to be correctly executed only when the series connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This information is given to the breaker failure protection by the central function control of the device (refer to Subsection 6.13.2).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-113
6 Functions
3909
CBaux L1 closed YES
Chk BRK CONTACT
NO L1>
Start internal L1 FNo 1435
>1
>1
>BF Start L1
&
YES
&
Start only L1
CBaux L2 closed
NO L2>
>1
>1
>BF Start L2
&
YES NO
&
Start only L2
CBaux L3 closed
>1
L3>
>1
>BF Start L3
&
>2
YES NO
&
Start only L3
CBaux 1p closed
L1> L2> L3>
>1
>1
&
>1 >1
Start internal w/o I FNo 1439
>BF Start w/o I

Start internal 3pole FNo 1415
&
&
Start L123
>1
Configuration
1 not allocated allocated FNo 1461
>BF START 3pole

FNo 1432
>1
BF Start
>BF release
FNo 1403
>BLOCK BkrFail
Internal blocking
&
Figure 6-53
Initiation conditions with phase segregated initiation
6-114
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
The three-phase starting signal Start L123 is generated if trip signals appear in more than one pole (regardless from which protection function). Phase segregated initiation is then blocked. The input >BF Start w/o I (e.g. from Buchholz protection) operates in three-phase mode as well. The function is the same as with common phase initiation. The additional release-signal >BF release (if assigned to a binary input) affects all starting conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK BkrFail (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay). Additionally, an internal blocking option is provided. Delay Timers When the starting conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers of the breaker failure protection are started. The circuit breaker pole(s) must open before the respective time has elapsed. Different delay timers are provided for operation after common phase initiation and phase segregated initiation. A further time stage can be used for two-stage breaker failure protection. With single-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 6-46 or 6-47). The adjacent circuit breakers are all those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault current, i.e. the breakers which feed the busbar or the busbar section to which the feeder under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the breaker failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of the feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may occur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always three-pole. The simplest solution is to start the delay timer T2 (Figure 6-54). The phase-segregated initiation signals are ignored if the feeder protection always trips three-pole or if the circuit breaker is not capable of single-pole tripping. If different delay times are required after a single-pole trip or three-pole trip it is possible to use the timer stages T1-1pole and T1-3pole according to Figure 6-55.
3906 T2
Start only L1 Start only L2 Start only L3
(Trip busbar) 0
FNo 1494
>1
BF T2-TRIP(bus)
Start L123
Figure 6-54
Single-stage breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
With two-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command of the feeder protection is usually repeated, after a first time stage, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a second trip coil or set of trip coils. That is if the breaker has not responded to the original trip command. A second time stage monitors the response to this repeated trip command and is used to trip the breakers of the relevant busbar section, if the fault has not yet been cleared after the second trip command.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-115
6 Functions
3904 T1-1pole
Start only L1 Start only L2 Start only L3
>1
(Trip busbar)
3905 T1-3pole T 0
>1
FNo 1476
BF T1-TRIP L123
Start L123
Figure 6-55
Single-stage breaker failure protection with different delay timers
For the first time stage, different time delays can be selected for a single-pole trip and three-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select (parameter 1pRETRIP (T1)) whether this repeated trip should be single-pole or three-pole.
3904 T1-1pole Start only L1 Start only L2 Start only L3 3905 T1-3pole T 0 T 0
3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) YES NO

Start only L1
(accordingly for other phases)

FNo 1472
>1
&
BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 (Trip repetition feeder breaker)
>1
FNo 1476
Start L123
BF T1-TRIP L123
3906 T2 T 0
(Trip busbar)
FNo 1494
>1
Figure 6-56
BF T2-TRIP (bus)
Two-stage breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation one phase
Circuit Breaker not Operational
There may be cases when it is already obvious that the circuit breaker associated with a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the tripping energy is not available. In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the correct response of the feeder circuit breaker. If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control voltage monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the binary input >CB faulty (FNo 378) of the 7SD52. On occurrence of this alarm and a trip command by the feeder protection, a separate timer T3-BkrDefective, which is normally set to 0, is started (Figure 6-57). In this case, the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar) are tripped immediately.
6-116
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
(all initiation FNo 1461 conditions BF Start Fig 6-50/6-53)

FNo 378 >CB faulty
3907 T3-BkrDefective
&
FNo 1493
BF TRIP CBdefec
Figure 6-57
Circuit breaker not operational
Transfer Trip to the Remote End Circuit Breaker
The 7SD52 has the facility to provide an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this, the transmission of the trip command is used. To perform this intertrip, the desired command usually the trip command which is intended to trip the adjacent breakers is assigned to the input function for intertrip of the devices. This can be achieved by external wiring: the command output is connected to the binary input >Intertrip 3pol. Refer also to Section 6.3. An easier procedure is to combine the command output with the intertrip input via the user definable logic functions (CFC, see Section 5.3).
End Fault Protection
An end fault is defined here as a short-circuit which has occurred at the end of a line or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set. This situation is shown in Figure 6-58. The fault is located as seen from the current transformers (= measurement location) on the busbar side, thus, it will not be regarded by the feeder protection relay as a feeder fault. It can only be detected by a bus-bar protection. Nevertheless, a trip command given to the feeder circuit breaker cannot clear the fault since the opposite end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault current does not stop flowing even though the feeder circuit breaker has properly responded to the trip command.
Busbar Trip by protection
ISC Feeder
Figure 6-58 End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers
The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip signal to the remote end of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose, the output command BF EndFlt TRIP is available to trigger the intertrip input of the differential protection if applicable, together with other commands that need to be transferred. This can be achieved by external connection or via CFC.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-117
6 Functions
The end fault is detected when the current continues flowing although the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate that the breaker is open. In the 7SD52, an additional criterion is the presence of any breaker failure protection initiate signal. The schemes functionality is shown in Figure 6-59. If the breaker failure protection is initiated and current flow is detected (current criteria L> according Figure 6-48), but no circuit breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion any pole closed), then a timer T-EndFault is started. At the end of this time an intertrip signal is transmitted to the opposite end(s) of the protected object.
(from Fig 6-48)
L1> L2> L3>

FNo 1461
>1
3922 T-ENDFault
BF Start 1 pole closed
& &
T 0
FNo 1495
BF EndFlt TRIP
Figure 6-59
Function block diagram of end fault protection
Circuit Breaker Pole Discrepancy Supervision
The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state conditions, either all three poles of the breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrepancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a single-pole automatic reclose cycle. The schemes functionality is shown in Figure 6-60. The signals which are processed here are the same as those used for the breaker failure protection. The pole discrepancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed (any pole closed) and at the same time not all poles are closed (any pole open). Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 6-48) are processed. Pole discrepancy can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles (<3), i.e. through only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status. If pole discrepancy is detected, this is indicated by a fault detection signal. This signal identifies the pole which was open and caused the trip command of the pole discrepancy supervision.
6-118
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
L1>
(from Figure 6-48)
FNo 1497
& & &

<3
3932 T-PoleDiscrep.
BF CBdiscr L1
FNo 1498
L2>
BF CBdiscr L2
FNo 1499
L3>
BF CBdiscr L3
any pole closed any pole open
&
FNo 1500
BF CBdiscr TRIP
Figure 6-60
Function block diagram of pole discrepancy supervision
6.10.2 Setting the Function Parameters

General The breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision) can only operate if they were configured as Enabled during setting of the scope of functions (see Section 5.1, address 139). The complete breaker failure protection including its ancillary functions is switched OFF or ON under address 3901 FCT BreakerFail. The current threshold I> BF (address 3902) should be selected such that the protection will operate with the smallest expected short-circuit current. To ensure this, the value should be 10 % less than the minimum anticipated fault current. On the other hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary. Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address 3909 Chk BRK CONTACT to NO. The breaker failure protection in the 7SD52 can be operated single-stage or two-stage Two-stage Breaker Failure Protection With two-stage operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice can be made whether this trip repetition shall be single-pole or three-pole if the initial feeder protection trip was single-pole (provided single-pole trip is possible). This choice is made in address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1). Set this parameter to YES if you wish single-pole trip for the first stage, otherwise to NO. If the breaker does not respond to this first stage trip, the adjacent circuit breakers must be tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. The adjacent breakers are those of the other feeders on the busbar or busbar section and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end of the protected object.
Breaker Failure Protection
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-119
6 Functions
In the 7SD52, after a further delay time T2 (address 3906), the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end) are tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. An example of the time sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-61. Separate delay times can be set: for single- or three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 1-pole trip of the feeder protection under address 3904 T1-1pole, for three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the feeder protection under address 3905 T1-3pole, for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable) under address 3906 T2. The delay times are set dependant on the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker and the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-61. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the reset time of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer saturation is expected then 25 ms should be assumed.
Fault inception Fault clearance time normal Prot. trip CB operating time Reset (local) I> BF Initiation breaker failure protection Time delay T1 of breaker failure protection Trip command repetition Reset I> BF Safety margin Safety margin
Time delay T2 of breaker failure protection
CB operating time (adjacent CBs)
Total fault clearance time with breaker failure
Figure 6-61
Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using two-stage breaker failure protection
Single-stage Breaker Failure Protection
With single-stage operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay time T2 (address 3906) following initiation, should the fault not have been cleared within this time. The timers T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (address 3905) are then set to since they are not needed. Alternatively, you may use the T1timers for single-stage protection if you wish to utilize the facility of setting different delay times after single-pole trip and three-pole trip of the feeder protection. In this case, set the desired times under addresses 3904 T1-
6-120
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
1pole and 3905 T1-3pole but set address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) to NO to avoid single-pole trip to the busbar. Set T2 (address 3906) to or equal to T1-3pole. Be sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the respective trip relay(s).
Fault inception Fault clearance time normal Prot. trip CB operating time Reset I> BF Initiation breaker failure protection Time delay T2 of breaker failure protection CB operating time (adjacent CBs) Safety margin
Total fault clearance time with breaker failure
Figure 6-62
Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using single-stage breaker failure protection
The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-62. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the reset time of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer saturation is expected then 25 ms should be assumed. Circuit Breaker not Operational If the circuit breaker associated with the feeder is not operational (e.g. control voltage failure or air pressure failure), it is obvious that the local breaker cannot clear the fault. Time delay before tripping the adjacent breakers is not necessary in this case. If the relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input >CB faulty, the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are tripped after the time T3-BkrDefective (address 3907) which is usually set to 0. Address 3908 Trip BkrDefect. determines to which output the trip command is routed in the event that the breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip occurs. Select that output which is intended to trip the adjacent breakers (busbar trip). End Fault Protection The end fault protection can be switched ON or OFF separately under address 3921 End Flt. stage. An end fault is a short-circuit between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the device is informed about the circuit breaker position via breaker auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a busbar protection (the fault is seen as a busbar fault determined from the location of the current transformers), the fault current will continue to flow, because the fault is fed from the remote end of the protected object. The time T-EndFault (address 3922) is started when, during the time of pickup condition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-121
6 Functions
poles and, at the same time, current flow is still detected (address 3902). The trip command of the end fault protection is used for the transmission of an intertrip signal to the remote end circuit breaker. Thus, the delay time must be set such that it can bridge out short transient apparent end fault conditions which may occur during switching of the breaker. Pole Discrepancy Supervision The pole discrepancy supervision can be switched ON or OFF separately under address 3931 PoleDiscrepancy. It is only useful if the breaker poles can be operated individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local breaker remain open continuously. It presumes that either the breaker auxiliary contacts of each pole, or the series connection of the normally open contacts (NO contacts) and of the normally closed contacts (NC contacts) be connected to binary inputs on the device. If these conditions are not fulfilled, switch the pole discrepancy supervision OFF. The delay time T-PoleDiscrep. (address 3932) determines how long a breaker pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a three-pole trip command. This time must clearly be longer than the duration of a single-pole automatic reclose cycle. However, the time should be less than the permissible duration of an unbalanced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit breaker poles. Conventional values are 2 s to 5 s.
6.10.3 Setting Overview

Note: The indicated secondary current values for setting ranges and default settings refer to IN = 1 A. For the nominal current 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the current transformers must also be taken into consideration.
Addr. 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 Setting Title FCT BreakerFail I> BF 1p-RETRIP (T1) T1-1pole T1-3pole T2 T3-BkrDefective Trip BkrDefect. ON OFF 0.05..20.00 A NO YES 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO trips with T1-trip-signal trips with T2-trip-signal trips with T1 and T2-tripsignal Setting Options Default Setting ON 0.10 A YES 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0.15 sec 0.00 sec NO Comments Breaker Failure Protection is Pick-up threshold I> 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local trip) T1, Delay after 1pole start (local trip) T1, Delay after 3pole start (local trip) T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar trip) T3, Delay for start with defective bkr. Trip output selection with defective bkr
6-122
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr. 3909 3921 3922 3931 3932
Setting Title Chk BRK CONTACT End Flt. stage T-EndFault PoleDiscrepancy T-PoleDiscrep. NO YES ON OFF
Setting Options
Default Setting YES OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2.00 sec
Comments Check Breaker contacts End fault stage is Trip delay of end fault stage Pole Discrepancy supervision Trip delay with pole discrepancy
0.00..30.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00..30.00 sec;
6.10.4 Information Overview
F.No. 1401 1402 1403 1432 1439 1415 1435 1436 1437 1440 1451 1452 1453 1461 1493 1472 1473 1474 1476 1494 1495 >BF on >BF off >BLOCK BkrFail >BF release >BF Start w/o I >BF Start 3pole >BF Start L1 >BF Start L2 >BF Start L3 BkrFailON/offBI BkrFail OFF BkrFail BLOCK BkrFail ACTIVE BF Start
Alarm
Comments >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection >BLOCK Breaker failure >BF: External release >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) >BF: External start 3pole >BF: External start L1 >BF: External start L2 >BF: External start L3 Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker failure is BLOCKED Breaker failure is ACTIVE Breaker failure protection started BF Trip in case of defective CB BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L2 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L3 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole BF Trip T2 (busbar trip) BF Trip End fault stage
BF TRIP CBdefec BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 BF T1-TRIP 1pL2 BF T1-TRIP 1pL3 BF T1-TRIP L123 BF T2-TRIP(bus) BF EndFlt TRIP
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-123
6 Functions
F.No. 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500
Alarm BF CBdiscrSTART BF CBdiscr L1 BF CBdiscr L2 BF CBdiscr L3 BF CBdiscr TRIP BF Pole discrepancy pickup
Comments
BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L2 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L3 BF Pole discrepancy Trip
6-124
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.11 Thermal Overload Protection
6.11
Thermal Overload Protection
6.11.1 Function Description

The thermal overload protection prevents damage to the protected object caused by thermal overloading, particularly in case of transformers, rotating machines, power reactors and cables. It is in general not applicable for overhead lines, since no reliable temperature rise can be calculated due to the great variations in the environmental conditions (temperature, wind). In this case, however, a current-dependent alarm stage can indicate an imminent overload. The unit computes the temperature rise according to a thermal single-body model based on the following thermal differential equation d 1 1 I 2 ------- + ------ = ------ ------------ dt th th k I N
with th k I IN current level of temperature rise referred to the final temperature rise for the maximum continuous permissible line current k IN thermal time constant for temperature rise kfactor which states the maximum permissible continuous current
referred to the rated current of the current transformers

present RMS current rated current of current transformers
The solution of this equation under steady-state conditions is an efunction whose asymptote shows the final temperature rise end. When the temperature rise reaches the first settable temperature threshold alarm, which is below the final temperature rise, a warning alarm is given in order to allow an preventive load reduction. When the second temperature threshold, i.e. the final temperature rise or tripping temperature, is reached, the protected object is disconnected from the network. The overload protection can, however, also be set on Alarm Only. In this case only an alarm is given when the final temperature rise is reached. The temperature rises are calculated separately for each phase in a thermal replica from the square of the associated phase current. This guarantees a true RMS value measurement and also includes the effect of harmonic content. A choice can be made whether the maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases, the average temperature rise, or the temperature rise calculated from the phase with maximum current should be decisive for evaluation of the thresholds. The maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current Imax is described as a multiple of the rated current IN: Imax = k IN In addition to the k-factor, the time constant th as well as the alarm temperature alarm must be entered in the settings of the protection. Apart from the thermal alarm stage, the overload protection also includes a current overload alarm stage Ialarm, which can be provided as early warning that an overload current is imminent, even when the temperature rise has not yet reached the alarm or trip temperature rise values. The overload protection can be blocked via a binary input. In doing so, the thermal replica are reset to zero.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-125
6 Functions
4203 TIME CONSTANT 4202 KFACTOR

IL1 IL2 IL3
4206 CALC. METHOD 4204 ALARM

max (Imax)
i2
4205 I ALARM
>
FNo 1516
& &
O/L Q Alarm
FNo 1517
Winding O/L
FNo 1521
I>
1 & ThOverload TRIP

FNo 1515
L1 L2 L3
FNo 1503
&
4201 Ther. OVER LOAD OFF 1 Alarm Only ON
>BLK ThOverload
O/L I Alarm
Figure 6-63
Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection

General Information A precondition for the use of the thermal overload protection is that Overload = Enabled was configured under address 142 (Section 5.1). It can be switched ON or OFF under address 4201 Ther. OVER LOAD. Furthermore Alarm Only can be set. With that latter setting the protection function is active but only provides an alarm when the tripping temperature rise is reached, i.e. the output function ThOverload TRIP is not active. The rated current of the device is taken as the base current for detecting an overload. The setting factor k is set under address 4202 K-FACTOR. It is determined by the relation between the permissible thermal continuous current and this rated current: I max k = ----------IN The permissible continuous current is at the same time the current at which the e function of the temperature rise has its asymptote. It is not necessary to determine the tripping temperature since it results automatically from the final rise temperature at k IN. Manufacturers of electrical machines usually state the permissible continuous current. If no data are available, k is set to 1.1 times the rated current of the protected object. For cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, the insulation material, the design and the way they are laid. It can be derived from the relevant technical tables. Please note that the overload capability of electrical equipment relates to its primary current. This has to be considered if the nominal primary current of the equipment differs from the rated current of the current transformers.
kFactor
6-126
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Example: Belted cable 10 kV 150 mm2 Permissible continuous current Imax = 322 A Current transformers 400 A/5 A 322 A k = -------------- = 0.805 400 A Setting value K-FACTOR = 0.80 Time Constant The thermal time constant th is set under the address 4203 TIME CONSTANT. This value is normally stated by the manufacturer. Please note that the time constant is set in minutes. Quite often other values for determining the time constant are stated which can be converted into the time constant as follows: 1s current th perm. 1-s current 2 1 -------- = ----- ------------------------------------------------------- perm. contin. current 60 min permissible current for application time other than 1 s, e.g. for 0.5 s th 0.5 perm. 0.5s current 2 -------- = ------- ------------------------------------------------------- perm. contin. current min 60 t6time; this is the time in seconds for which a current of 6 times the rated current of the protected object may flow th -------- = 0.6 t6 min Example: Cable as above with permissible 1s current 13.5 kA th 1 2 1 13500 A 2 -------- = ----- ---------------------- = ----- 42 = 29.4 60 min 60 322 A Setting value TIME CONSTANT = 29.4 min. Alarm Stages By setting a thermal alarm stage Q ALARM (address 4204) an alarm can be provided before the tripping temperature is reached, so that a trip can be avoided by preventive load reduction or by switching over. The percentage is referred to the tripping temperature rise. The current overload alarm setpoint I ALARM (address 4205) is stated as a factor of the rated device current and should be set equal to or slightly below the permissible continuous current k IN. It can also be used instead of the thermal alarm stage. In this case the thermal alarm stage is set to 100 % and thus practically ineffective. Calculating the Temperature Rise The thermal replica is calculated individually for each phase. Address 4406 CALC. METHOD decides whether the highest of the three calculated temperatures (Q max) or their arithmetic average (Average Q) or the temperature calculated from the phase with maximum current (Q at Imax) should be decisive for the thermal alarm and tripping stage.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-127
6 Functions
Since an overload usually occurs in a balanced way, this setting is of minor importance. If unbalanced overloads are to be expected, however, these options lead to different results. Averaging should only be used if a rapid thermal equilibrium is possible in the protected object, e.g. with belted cables. If the three phases are, however, more or less thermally isolated (e.g. single conductor cables or overhead lines), one of the maximum settings should be chosen at any rate.

Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the current transformers must also be taken into consideration.
Addr. 4201 Setting Title Ther. OVER LOAD Setting Options OFF ON Alarm Only 0.10..4.00 1.0..999.9 min 50..100 % 0.10..4.00 A Theta Max Average \T \T @ Imax Default Setting OFF Comments Thermal overload protection
4202 4203 4204 4205 4206
K-FACTOR TIME CONSTANT ALARM I ALARM CALC. METHOD
1.10 100.0 min 90 % 1.00 A Theta Max
K-Factor Time Constant Thermal Alarm Stage Current Overload Alarm Setpoint Method of Acquiring Temperature

F.No. 1503 1511 1512 1513 1515 1516 1517 1521 Alarm >BLK ThOverload Th.Overload OFF Th.Overload BLK Overload ACT O/L I Alarm O/L Alarm Winding O/L ThOverload TRIP Comments >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED Overload Protection ACTIVE Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip Winding Overload Thermal Overload TRIP
6-128
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.12 Monitoring functions
6.12
Monitoring functions
The device incorporates comprehensive monitoring functions which cover both hardware and software; the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility, so that the current and voltage transformer circuits are also included in the monitoring system to a large extent. Furthermore, binary inputs are available for supervision of the trip circuits.

6.12.1.1 Hardware Monitoring The complete hardware including the measurement inputs and the output relays is monitored for faults and inadmissible states by monitoring circuits and by the processor. Auxiliary and Reference Voltages The processor voltage is monitored by the hardware as the processor cannot operate if the voltage drops below the minimum value. In that case, the device is not operational. When the correct voltage has re-established the processor system is restarted. Failure or switch-off of the supply voltage sets the system out of operation; this status is signalled by a fail-safe contact. Transient dips in supply voltage will not disturb the function of the relay (see also Subsection 10.1.2 in the Technical Data). The processor monitors the offset and the reference voltage of the ADC (analog-todigital converter). In case of inadmissible deviations the protection is blocked; persistent faults are signalled. Back-up Battery The back-up battery guarantees that the internal clock continues to work and that metered values and alarms are stored if the auxiliary voltage fails. The charge level of the battery is checked regularly. If the voltage drops below the permissible minimum the alarm Fail Battery is output. If the device is not supplied with auxiliary voltage for more than 12 to 24 hours, the internal back-up battery is switched off automatically, i.e. the time is not registered any more. Messages and fault recordings however remain stored. Memory Modules All working memories (RAMs) are checked during start-up. If a fault occurs, the start is aborted and an LED starts flashing. During operation the memories are checked with the help of their checksum. For the program memory (EPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared to a stored reference program cross-check sum. For the parameter memory (EEPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared to the cross-check sum that is refreshed after each parameterization change. If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-129
6 Functions
Sampling Frequency
The sampling frequency and the synchronism between the internal buffer modules is continuously monitored. If deviations cannot be corrected by another synchronization, the device sets itself out of operation and the red LED Blocked lights up; the Device OK relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its healthy status contact. There are four measurement inputs in the current paths. If the three phase currents and the ground current of the current transformer starpoint or of an separate summation current transformer of the protected line are connected to the device, the sum of the four digitized current values must always be zero. A fault in the current path is recognized when iF = |iL1 + iL2 + iL3 + kI iE | > SI THRESHOLD IN + SI FACTOR |i| Factor kI (parameter I4/Iph CT) considers the possibly different ratio of a separate IEtransformer (e.g. summation current transformer). SI THRESHOLD and SI FACTOR are setting parameters. The component SI FACTOR |i| takes into account permissible current proportional transformation errors in the input converters which may particularly occur under conditions of high fault currents (Figure 6-64). The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. |i| is the sum of all rectified currents: |i| = |iL1 | + |iL2 | + |iL3 | + |kI iE | As soon as a summation current fault is detected after or before a system disturbance, the differential protection is blocked. This fault is reported with Failure Si. For not causing a blocking due to transformation errors (saturation) in case of high fault currents, this monitoring function is not effective during a system fault. Note: Current sum monitoring can only operate properly when the residual current of the protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
Measured Value Acquisition: Currents
iF IN
Slope:
I FACTOR
I THRESHOLD
|i| IN Figure 6-64 Summation current monitoring
6-130
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.12.1.2 Software Monitoring Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a watchdog timer is provided in the hardware (hardware watchdog) which will reset and completely restart the processor system in the event of processor failure or if a program falls out of step. A further software watchdog ensures that any error in the processing of the programs will be recognized. Such errors also lead to a reset of the processor. If such an error is not eliminated by restarting, another restart attempt is initiated. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts within 30 s, the protection system will take itself out of service, and the red LED Blocked lights up. The Device OK relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its healthy status contact.
6.12.1.3 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits The device detects and signals most of the interruptions, short-circuits, or wrong connections in the secondary circuits of current or voltage transformers (an important commissioning aid). For this the measured values are checked in background routines at cyclic intervals, as long as no pickup condition exists. Current Balance In healthy network operation it can be expected that the currents will be approximately balanced. The monitoring of the measured values in the device checks this balance. For this the lowest phase current is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is detected when |Imin | / |Imax | Imax / IN < BAL. FACTOR I provided that > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
Imax is the highest, Imin the lowest of the three phase currents. The balance factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the degree of unbalance of the phase currents, the limiting value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower threshold of the operating range of this monitoring function (see Figure 6-65). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. This fault is indicated with the alarm Fail I balance.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-131
6 Functions
Imin IN
Slope:
BAL.FACTOR I
BALANCE I LIMIT
Imax IN
Figure 6-65
Current balance monitoring
Voltage Balance
In healthy network operation it can be expected that the voltages are nearly balanced. If measured voltages are connected to the device, this symmetry is checked by the device. To ensure the monitoring function not picking up during a single earth fault, which can also be a permanent operating state in non-earthed networks, the phaseto-phase voltages are being considered. Thus the lowest phase-to-phase voltage is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is detected when |Umin | / |Umax | < BAL. FACTOR U provided that |Umax| > BALANCE U-LIMIT
Umax is the highest, Umin the lowest of the three phase-to-phase voltages. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR U is the measure for the asymmetry of the phase voltages, the limiting value BALANCE U-LIMIT is the lower threshold of the operating range of this monitoring function (see Figure 6-66). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. This fault is indicated with the alarm Fail U balance.
Umin V
Slope:
BAL.FACTOR U
BALANCE U-LIMIT
Umax V
Figure 6-66
Voltage balance monitoring
Broken-Wire Monitoring
During steady-state operation the broken wire monitoring registers interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current transformers. In addition to the hazard potential caused by high voltages in the secondary circuit, this kind of interruptions simulates
6-132
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
differential currents to the differential protection, such as those evoked by faults in the protected object. The broken-wire monitor scans the current of each phase and picks up when the current drops abruptly to 0 (from > 0.1IN), while no corresponding drop appears in the earth current. The differential protection is blocked immediately in the relevant phase. This blocking has an impact on all ends of the protected object. The device issues the message Broken Iwire indicating also the affected phase. The blocking is cancelled as soon as the device is again supplied with current in the relevant phase. It is also suppressed as long as a high fault current (> 2.5 IN) is registered by any device of the differential protection system. Note: The broken-wire monitor only operates if the earth current of a separate earth current transformer of the protected line is connected to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay, or if no earth current is connected to this input.
6.12.1.4 Trip Circuit Supervision The differential protection relay 7SD52 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available binary inputs that are not connected to a common potential, supervision modes with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the allocation of the necessary binary inputs does not comply with the selected monitoring mode, an alarm is given (with identification of the non-compliant circuit). If single-pole tripping is possible, trip circuit supervision can be performed for each circuit breaker pole provided the binary inputs are available. Supervision Using Two Binary Inputs If two binary inputs are used, they are connected according to Figure 6-67, one in parallel to the assigned command relay contact of the protection and the other parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contact. A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is higher than the total of the minimum voltages drops at the two binary inputs (UCtrl > 2UBImin). As at least 19 V are needed at each binary input, supervision can be used with a control voltage higher than 38 V.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-133
6 Functions
L+
UCtrl UBI1 7SD52
7SD52
FNo 6854 >TripC1 TripRel FNo 6855 >TripC1 Bkr.Rel
TR
Legend: TR CB TC Aux.1 Aux.2 UCtrl UBI1 UBI2 Trip relay contact Circuit breaker Circuit breaker trip coil Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make) Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)
UBI2
CB
TC
Aux.1
Aux.2
Control voltage (trip voltage) Input voltage of 1st binary input Input voltage of 2nd binary input
L
Figure 6-67
Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.
Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Depending on the state of the trip relay and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are triggered (logic state H in Table 6-3) or short-circuited (logic state L). A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (L) is only possible in healthy trip circuits for a short transition period (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not yet open). This state is only permanent in the event of interruptions or short-circuits in the trip circuit, a battery voltage failure. Therefore, this state is one of the supervision criteria.
Table 6-3 No 1 2 3 4
Status table of the binary inputs depending on TR and CB Trip relay open open closed closed Circuit breaker CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN Aux.1 closed open closed open Aux.2 open closed open closed BI 1 H H L L BI 2 L H L H
The states of the two binary inputs are interrogated periodically, approximately every 500 ms. Only after n = 3 of these consecutive state queries have detected a fault an alarm is given (see Figure 6-68). These repeated measurements result in a delay of this alarm and thus avoid that an alarm is given during short-time transient periods. After the fault is removed in the trip circuit, the fault message is reset automatically after the same time delay.
6-134
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
FNo 6854
>TripC1 TripRel
FNo 6855
&
FNo 6865
FAIL: Trip cir.
>TripC1 Bkr.Rel
T approx. 1 to 2 s
Figure 6-68
Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision Using One Binary Input
The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of the protection device according to Figure 6-69. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with the help of a high-ohmic substitute resistor R. The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be at least twice as high as the minimum voltage drop at the binary input (UCtrl > 2UBImin). Since at least 19 V are necessary for the binary input, this supervision can be used with a control voltage higher than 38 V. An calculation example for the substitute resistance of R is shown in Subsection 8.1.2, margin Trip Circuit Supervision. In normal operation the binary input is energized when the trip relay contact is open and the trip circuit is healthy (logic state H), as the monitoring circuit is closed via the auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or via the substitute resistance R. The binary input is short-circuited and thus deactivated only as long as the tripping relay is closed (logic state L). If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed.
L+
UCtrl UBI 7SD52
7SD52
FNo 6854 >TripC1 TripRel
TR
Legend: TR CB TC Aux.1 Aux.2 R UCrtl UBI UR Trip relay contact Circuit breaker Circuit breaker trip coil Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make) Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break) Substitute resistor
R
UR
CB
TC
Aux.1
Aux.2
Control voltage (trip voltage) Input voltage of binary input Voltage across the substitute resistor
L
Figure 6-69
Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.
Principle of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
As the trip circuit supervision is not operative during a system fault condition (pickedup status of the device), the closed trip contact does not lead to an alarm. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices are connected in parallel, the alarm must be delayed with Alarm Delay (see also Figure 6-70). After the fault in the trip circuit is removed, the alarm is reset automatically after approximately 1.5 to 2 seconds.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-135
6 Functions
FNo 6854
4003 Alarm Delay
>TripC1 TripRel Fault
&
Tr
FNo 6865
FAIL: Trip cir.
Tr approx. 1 to 2 s
Figure 6-70
Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
6.12.1.5 Fault Reactions Depending on the kind of fault detected, an alarm is given, the processor is restarted or the device is taken out of operation. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts the protection system will take itself out of service and indicate this condition by drop-off of the Device OK relay, thus indicating the device failure. The red LED Blocked on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal auxiliary voltage, and the green LED RUN goes off. If the internal auxiliary voltage supply fails, all LEDs are dark. Table 6-4 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the fault reactions of the device.
Table 6-4
Summary of the fault reactions of the device Possible causes External (aux. voltage) Internal (converter) Fault reaction Device out of operation or alarm, if possible Alarm All LEDs dark Error 5V Output DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off as allocated DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off
Supervision Auxiliary voltage failure
Measured value ac- Internal (converter or ref- Protection out of opera- LED ERROR quisition erence voltage) tion, alarm Error A/D-conv. Back-up battery Internal (back-up battery) Alarm Device out of operation Restart attempt1) Restart attempt1), Restart abort device out of operation Restart attempt1) Restart attempt1) Fail Battery LED ERROR LED ERROR LED flashes
Hardware watchdog Internal (processor failure) Software watchdog Working memory Internal (program flow) Internal (RAM)
Program memory Parameter memory Scanning frequency 1 A/5 Asetting
Internal (EPROM) Internal (EEPROM or RAM)
LED ERROR LED ERROR LED ERROR
DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off
Internal (clock generator) Device out of operation 1/5 A jumper wrong
Alarms: Error1A/5Awrong Protection out of opera- Error A/D-conv. tion LED ERROR Alarm: Using default values Alarm NO calibr
Calibration data
1) 2)
Internal (EEPROM or RAM)
as allocated
After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation DOK = Device OK relay
6-136
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 6-4
Summary of the fault reactions of the device Possible causes Module does not comply with ordering number Internal (measured data acquisition) External (system or transformer) External (system or transformer) External (system or current transforme)r External (trip circuit or control voltage) Fault reaction Alarm Output DOK ) drops off
2
Supervision Modules
Alarms: Error Board 1... Protection out of opera- and if applicable tion Error A/D-conv. Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Failure Si Fail I balance Broken Iwire Fail U balance FAIL: Trip cir.
Summation current Current symmetry Wire break Voltage symmetry Trip circuit supervision
1) 2)
as allocated as allocated as allocated as allocated as allocated
After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation DOK = Device OK relay
6.12.1.6 Group Alarms Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. Table 6-5 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.
Table 6-5
Group alarms Group alarm Designation Fail I Superv. Fail U Superv. Alarm Sum Event Composed of Designation Failure Si Fail I balance Fail U balance Failure Si Fail I balance Fail U balance >FAIL:Feeder VT Clock SyncError Fail Battery Alarm NO calibr Topol complete, negated Error Board 1 Error Board 2 1) Error Board 3 1) Error Board 41) Error Board 51) Error Board 61) Error Board 71)
FNo 161 164 160
FNo 289 163 167 289 163 167 361 68 177 193 3464 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
1)
depending on the version (number of printed circuit boards)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-137
6 Functions
Table 6-5
Group alarms Group alarm Designation Error Sum Alarm Composed of Designation Error 5V Error1A/5Awrong Error A/D-conv.
FNo 140
FNo 144 192 181
) depending on the version (number of printed circuit boards)

The sensitivity of the measurement supervision can be altered. Experiential values set ex works are sufficient in most cases. If an extremely high operational unbalance of the currents and/or voltages is to be expected in the specific application, or if during operation monitoring functions are activated sporadically, the relevant parameters should be set less sensitive. Symmetry Supervision The symmetry supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2901 MEASURE. SUPERV. Address 2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT determines the threshold voltage (phase-tophase) above which the voltage symmetry supervision is effective (see also Figure 666). Address 2903A BAL. FACTOR U is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the symmetry characteristic (Figure 6-66). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Address 2904A BALANCE I LIMIT determines the threshold current above which the current balance supervision is effective (also see Figure 6-65). Address 2905A BAL. FACTOR I is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance characteristic (Figure 6-65). Broken Wire Supervision Summated Current Supervision The broken wire supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2908 BROKEN WIRE. The summated current supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2921 FAST S i SUPERV. Address 2906A SI THRESHOLD determines the threshold current above which the summation current supervision (see Figure 6-64) is effective (absolute value, only referred to IN). The relative value (referred to the maximum phase current) for the pickup of the summated current supervision (Figure 6-64) is set in address 2907A SI FACTOR. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Note: Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the protected line is connected to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
6-138
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Trip Circuit Supervision
When address 140 TripCirc.Superv was configured (Section 5.1), the number of trip circuits that are to be monitored was set. If the trip circuit supervision function is not used at all, Disabled is set there. The trip circuit supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT TripSuperv.. The number of the binary inputs per trip circuit is entered under address 4002 No. of BI. If the routing of the binary inputs required for this does not comply with the selected supervision mode, an alarm is given (with identification of the noncompliant circuit). The trip circuit alarm is delayed for approximately 1 s to 2 s in supervision with two binary inputs, whereas the delay can be set under address 4003 Alarm Delay for supervision with one binary input. 1 s to 2 s are sufficient if only device 7SD52 is connected to the trip circuits as the trip circuit supervision does not operate during a system fault. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices work also on the trip circuit in parallel, the alarm must be delayed for longer than the longest possible duration of a tripping command.

Measurement Supervision Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration. Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.
Addr. 2901 2902A 2903A 2904A 2905A 2908 2921 2906A 2907A Setting Title MEASURE. SUPERV BALANCE U-LIMIT BAL. FACTOR U BALANCE I LIMIT BAL. FACTOR I BROKEN WIRE FAST i SUPERV I THRESHOLD I FACTOR Setting Options ON OFF 10..100 V 0.58..0.95 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.95 ON OFF ON OFF 0.10..2.00 A 0.00..0.95 Default Setting ON 50 V 0.75 0.50 A 0.50 ON ON 0.25 A 0.50 Comments Measurement Supervision Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Balance Monitor Balance Factor for Current Monitor Fast broken current-wire supervision State of fast current summation supervis Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-139
6 Functions

Addr. 4001 4002 4003 Setting Title FCT TripSuperv. No. of BI Alarm Delay ON OFF 1..2 1..30 sec Setting Options Default Setting OFF 2 2 sec Comments TRIP Circuit Supervision is Number of Binary Inputs per trip circuit Delay Time for alarm

Hardware and Software Monitoring
F.No. 140 144 160 177 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 192 193 Alarm Error Sum Alarm Error 5V Alarm Sum Event Fail Battery Error A/D-conv. Alarm Clock Error Board 1 Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Error1A/5Awrong Alarm NO calibr Error with a summary alarm Error 5V Alarm Summary Event Failure: Battery empty Error: A/D converter Alarm: Real Time Clock Error Board 1 Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting Alarm: NO calibration data available Comments
Measurement Supervision
F.No. 161 163 Fail I Superv. Fail I balance Alarm Comments Failure: General Current Supervision Failure: Current Balance
6-140
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
F.No. 164 167 197 295 296 289 290 291 292 Fail U Superv. Fail U balance MeasSup OFF
Alarm
Comments Failure: General Voltage Supervision Failure: Voltage Balance Measurement Supervision is switched OFF Broken wire supervision is switched OFF Current summation superv is switched OFF Alarm: Current summation supervision Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L1 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L2 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L3
Broken wire OFF i superv. OFF Failure i Broken Iwire L1 Broken Iwire L2 Broken Iwire L3

F.No. 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6861 6865 6866 6867 6868 >TripC1 TripRel >TripC1 Bkr.Rel >TripC2 TripRel >TripC2 Bkr.Rel >TripC3 TripRel >TripC3 Bkr.Rel TripC OFF FAIL: Trip cir. TripC1 ProgFAIL TripC2 ProgFAIL TripC3 ProgFAIL Alarm Comments >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker Relay >Trip circuit superv. 2: Trip Relay >Trip circuit superv. 2: Breaker Relay >Trip circuit superv. 3: Trip Relay >Trip circuit superv. 3: Breaker Relay Trip circuit supervision OFF Failure Trip Circuit TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set TripC2 blocked: Binary input is not set TripC3 blocked: Binary input is not set
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-141
6 Functions
6.13
Function Control
The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of the protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information coming from the power system. Among these are switch-in recognition, processing of the circuit breaker position, fault detection/pickup logic, tripping logic.
6.13.1 Switch-in Recognition

During energization of the protected object, several measures may be required or desirable; e.g. for manual closure onto a fault usually instantaneous tripping is desired. This is done e.g. in the overcurrent protection by bypassing the delay time of specific stages. For every short-circuit protection function which can be delayed, at least one stage can be selected that will operate instantaneously in the event of a manual closing, as mentioned in the relevant sections. Also see Subsection 6.1.3 under the subtitle Circuit Breaker Status, page 6-17. The manual closing command must be indicated to the device via a binary input. The command duration is fixed to a defined length (to be set under address 1150A SI Time Man.Cl). That is to make the processing of the switch-in recognition independent of the actual duration of an individual manual closing operation. Figure 6-71 shows the logic diagram.
FNo 356
1150 SI Time Man.Cl
>Manual Close
FNo 2851
&
FNo 561 T
Man.Clos.Detect
AR Close
Figure 6-71
Logic diagram of the manual closing procedure
If the 7SD52 is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the integrated manual closing logic differentiates automatically between an external control command via the binary input and an automatic reclosure through the internal auto-reclose function. Thus the binary input configured with >Manual Close can be connected directly to the circuit of the closing coil of the circuit breaker (Figure 6-72). With the user definable logic functions (CFC) further control functions can be processed in the same way as a manualclose command. If, however, external closing commands are possible which must not activate the manual closing function (e.g. external reclosure device), the binary input configured with >Manual Close must be activated by a separate contact of the control-discrepancy switch (Figure 6-73).
6-142
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.13 Function Control
L+
Control discrep. switch
7SD52
FNo 356
>Manual Close
FNo 2851
AR Close
CB
CBC
Legend: CB Circuit breaker CBC Circuit breaker closing coil
L
Figure 6-72
Manual closing with internal auto-reclosure function
L+ External AR device
Reclose command
Control discrep. switch
7SD52
FNo 356
>Manual Close
CB
CBC
Legend: CB Circuit breaker CBC Circuit breaker closing coil
L
Figure 6-73 Manual closing with external auto-reclosure device
6.13.2 Processing of the Circuit Breaker Position

Several protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the circuit breaker for proper functioning. This is e.g. helpful for the conditions when connecting the protected object (cf. Subsection 6.7.1) to the network, start of the dead times before auto-reclosure (cf. Subsection 6.9.1), plausibility check before auto-reclosure (cf. Subsection 6.9.1), the enabling condition for the high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (I>>> stage, cf. Subsection 6.7.1), also applicable for all ends of the protected object, the circuit breaker failure protection (cf. Subsection 6.10.1), the verification of the reset conditions for the tripping command (cf. Subsection 6.13.4), the trip circuit check with the help of the TRIPCLOSEtest cycle (cf. Subsection 6.13.5).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-143
6 Functions
The device is equipped with a circuit breaker position logic (Figure 6-74), which offers different options depending on which auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are available and on how they are connected to the device. In most cases it is sufficient to have the status of the circuit breaker signalled by its auxiliary contact to the device via a binary input. This is valid if the circuit breaker is always operated three-pole. In this case the make contact of the auxiliary contact is to be connected to a binary input which must be allocated to the input function >CB 3p Closed (FNo 379). Then the other inputs are not assigned and the logic is limited to the transmission of this input information. If the breaker poles can be operated individually and e.g. only the series-connected break contacts (pole open) are available, the associated binary input is also allocated to function >CB 3p Open (FNo 380). The other inputs are not assigned either in that case. If the breaker poles can be closed individually and the auxiliary contacts are accessible individually, each auxiliary contact should be assigned its own binary input as far as possible if the device can and is supposed to perform single-pole tripping. With the help of this connection, the device can process a maximum amount of information. Three binary inputs are necessary for this: >CB Aux. L1 (FNo 351), for the auxiliary contact of pole L1, >CB Aux. L2 (FNo 352), for the auxiliary contact of pole L2, >CB Aux. L3 (FNo 353), for the auxiliary contact of pole L3, The inputs FNo 379 and FNo 380 are not used in this case. If the breaker poles can be operated individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both the series-connected make contacts (pole closed) and the series-connected break contacts (pole open) of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are available. The series circuit of the make contacts is allocated on the input function >CB 3p Closed (FNo 379) and the series circuit of the break contacts on the input function >CB 3p Open (FNo 380) in this case. Please note that Figure 6-74 shows the entire logic of all connection possibilities. Only a part of the inputs is used for the respective application as described above. The 8 output signals of the circuit breaker status logic can be processed by the individual protection and ancillary functions. The output signals are blocked if the signals transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the circuit breaker cannot be open and closed at the same time. In 7SD52 the position of the circuit breaker poles detected by the device is also transmitted to the remote end device(s). This way the position of the circuit breaker poles is also recognized by at all other ends. The high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (see 6.7.1) makes use of this function. Special binary inputs are available for the auto-reclosure function and for the circuit breaker check; they are to be handled in the same way and additionally allocated if necessary. These inputs have an analogue meaning to the inputs described above and are identified with CB1 ... for easier distinction: >CB1 3p Closed (FNo 410) for the series circuit of the make contacts of the auxiliary contacts, >CB1 3p Open (FNo 411) for the series circuit of the closing contacts of the auxiliary contacts, >CB1 Pole L1 (FNo 366) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
6-144
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.13 Function Control >CB1 Pole L2 (FNo 367) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2, >CB1 Pole L3 (FNo 368) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3.
CB auxiliary contacts:
L1
L2
L3
FNo 380
R 380
(Series-connected break contacts)
>CB 3p Open
R 380
1 &
any pole closed
L1
FNo 351
R 351
>CB Aux. L1
&
L1 closed
R 351
&
L1 open
L2
FNo 352
R 352
>CB Aux. L2
&
L2 closed
R 352
&
L2 open
L3
FNo 353
R 353
>CB Aux. L3
&
L3 closed
R 353
&
L3 open
L1
L2
L3
FNo 379
R 379
(Series-connected make contacts)
>CB 3p Closed
1 &
R 379
any pole open
L1, L2, L3 FNo ... R ...
Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Binary input with FNo Binary input is allocated
PoleOpenCurrent
3
Plausibility check
Figure 6-74
Circuit breaker position logic
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-145
6 Functions
6.13.3 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device

Phase Segregated Pickup The fault detection logic combines the pickup signals of all protection functions. For those protection functions which allow phase-segregated pickup, the pickup information is provided per phase. When a protection function has detected an earth fault, this is also indicated. Thus the alarms Relay PICKUP L1, Relay PICKUP L2, Relay PICKUP L3 and Relay PICKUP E are available. These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. Some protection functions can also indicate the phase pickup as a group signal for the local displaying of fault messages and for the transmission of the messages to a PC or a central control system, e.g. Diff Flt. L12E for differential protection pickup L1L2E; only one of these is displayed at a time and represents the entire pickup situation. General Pickup The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device. It is signalled with the alarm Relay PICKUP. If no protection function of the device has picked up any longer, Relay PICKUP disappears (message: Going). The general pickup is the precondition for a number of internal and external consequential functions. Among these functions, which are controlled by the general pickup, are: Start of a fault log: All fault messages are entered into the trip log from the beginning of the general pickup to the drop-off. Initialization of the fault recording: The recording and storage of fault wave forms can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command. Creation of spontaneous messages: Certain fault messages can be displayed as so called spontaneous messages (see Spontaneous Alarms below). This display can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command. Start of the action time of the auto-reclosure (if available and used). External functions can be controlled via an output contact. Examples are: Reclosure devices, Further additional devices or similar. Spontaneous Alarms Spontaneous alarms are alarms that are displayed automatically after a general pickup of the device or after the trip command of the device. In the case of 7SD52 they are the following: Relay PICKUP: pickup of the differential protection with phase indication; PU Time: TRIP Time: the operating time from the general pickup to the dropout of the device, the time is given in ms; the operating time from the general pickup to the first trip command of the device, the time is given in ms.
6-146
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.13.4 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device

Three-pole Tripping Three-pole tripping is the usual action of the device in the event of a fault, single-pole tripping, however, is also possible depending on the version ordered (see below). If a single-pole tripping is generally not possible or not desired, the output function Relay TRIP 3ph. is used for the output of commands to the circuit breaker. In these cases the following subtitle on Single-pole Tripping is not relevant. Single-pole tripping is advisable only for overhead lines on which auto-reclosures are to be executed and which are equipped with circuit breakers suitable for single-pole tripping on all ends. In this case, in the event of a single-phase fault, the faulty phase can be tripped single-pole with subsequent reclosure; in the event of two-phase or three-phase faults with or without ground a three-pole tripping is issued in general. Preconditions for pole-segregated tripping concerning the device are, that the device is equipped with pole-segregated tripping (according to the order specification), that the tripping protection function is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (for example, not for overload protection), that the binary input >1p Trip Perm is allocated and activated or that the internal auto-reclosure function is ready for auto-reclosure on single-pole tripping. In all other cases tripping will be three-pole. The binary input >1p Trip Perm is the logic inversion of a three-pole coupling and is activated by an external auto-reclosure device as long as this is ready for a single-pole auto-reclosure cycle. With the 7SD52, three-pole coupling of the trip command is also possible if tripping only concerns one phase but more than one phase has picked up. This can be the case e.g. if two faults occur in two different places of which only one is within the range of the differential protection zone. This is achieved with the help of setting parameter 3pole coupling which can be set to with PICKUP (each multiphase pickup leads to three-pole tripping) or with TRIP (three-pole tripping in the event of a multi-pole trip command). The tripping logic combines the trip signals of all protection functions. Trip commands are output per phase if the protection functions allow single-pole tripping. The relevant informations are Relay TRIP L1, Relay TRIP L2 and Relay TRIP L3. These informations can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of a threepole tripping all three informations are provided. If single-pole tripping is possible, the protection functions can also output a group signal for the local displaying of alarms and for the transmission of the alarms to a PC or a central control system, e.g. Diff TRIP 1p L1, Diff TRIP 1p L2, Diff TRIP 1p L3 for single-pole tripping by the differential protection and Diff TRIP L123 for three-pole tripping. Only one of these alarms is displayed at a time. These informations are also used as trip commands to the circuit breaker.
Single-pole Tripping
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-147
6 Functions
Single-pole Tripping after a Two-phase Fault
The single-pole tripping after a two-phase fault is a special case. If a phase-to-phase fault clear of ground occurs in a grounded system, the fault may be cleared by a singlepole auto-reclosure, since this is sufficient to interrupt the fault current loop. The phase selected for this must be the same on all line ends and should be the same everywhere else within the system. The setting parameter Trip2phFlt allows to select whether this tripping should be 1pole leading , i.e. single-pole tripping of the leading phase, or 1pole lagging , i.e. single-pole tripping of the lagging phase. Standard setting is 3pole, i.e. threepole tripping after two-phase faults (default setting). Table 6-6 shows a summary of the conditions for single-pole or three-pole tripping.
Table 6-6
Single- and three-pole tripping depending on the type of fault Parameter Output signals for tripping Relay TRIP 1pL1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Relay TRIP 1pL2 Relay TRIP 1pL3 Relay TRIP 3ph.
Type of fault (of protection functions) L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L1 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L3 L3 E E L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 E E E E E E
Trip2phFlt
(any) (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging 3pole 1pole leading 1pole lagging (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) (any)
General Tripping
All tripping signals of the protection functions are ORcombined and lead to the alarm Relay TRIP. This can be allocated to an LED or output relay.
6-148
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Terminating the Trip Command
Once a trip command is activated, it is stored separately for each pole (each of the three poles after three-pole tripping, see Figure 6-75). At the same time a minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started to ensure that the command is sent to the circuit breaker long enough if the tripping protection function should drop off too quickly. The trip commands cannot be terminated until the last protection function has dropped off (no function activated) AND the minimum trip command time is over. Another condition for terminating the trip command is that the circuit breaker is open (with single-pole tripping the relevant circuit breaker pole). The current must have fallen below the value that corresponds to the setting value PoleOpenCurrent (address 1130A, refer to Circuit Breaker Status in Subsection 6.1.3, page 6-17) plus 10 % of the fault current.
FNo 507
from protection fucntions
Trip L1 CB open L1 &
S R
Relay TRIP L1
FNo 508
S R
Relay TRIP L2
FNo 509
S R
Relay TRIP L3
&
TMin TRIP CMD 240
1
T
Figure 6-75Storage and termination of the trip command
Reclosure Interlocking
When tripping the circuit breaker with a protection function the manual reclosure must often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. 7SD52 therefore provides the integrated reclosure interlocking function. The interlocking feature is realized by a RS flipflop which is protected against auxiliary voltage failure (see Figure 6-76). The RS flipflop is set via a binary input >Lockout SET (FNo 385). With the output alarm LOCKOUT (FNo 530), if interconnected correspondingly, a reclosure of the circuit breaker (e.g. for automatic reclosure, manual close signal, synchronization, closing via control) can be blocked. Only once the cause for the protection operation is known, should the interlocking be reset by a manual reset via binary input >Lockout RESET (FNo 386).
FNo 385 FNo 530
>Lockout SET
FNo 386
S R
LOCKOUT
>Lockout RESET
Figure 6-76
Reclosure lockout
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-149
6 Functions
Conditions which cause reclosure interlocking and control commands which have to be interlocked can be set individually. The two inputs and the output can be wired via the correspondingly allocated binary inputs and outputs or be linked via user-defined logic functions (CFC). If, for example, each trip by the protection function has to cause a reclosing lock-out, then combine the tripping command Relay TRIP (FNo 511) with the binary input >Lockout SET (FNo 385). If automatic reclosure is applied, only the final trip of the protection function should activate reclosing lock-out. Then combine the output alarm Final Trip (FNo 536) with the interlocking input >Lockout SET (FNo 385), so that the interlocking function is not activated when an automatic reclosure is still expected to come. In the most simple case the output alarm LOCKOUT (FNo 530) can be allocated to the output which trips the circuit breaker without creating further links. Then the tripping command is maintained until the interlock is reset via the binary reset input. Naturally it has to be ensured in advance that the close coil at the circuit breaker as is usually done is blocked as long as a tripping command is maintained. The output alarm LOCKOUT can also be applied to interlock certain closing commands (externally or via CFC), e.g. by combining the output alarm with the binary input >CloseCmd.Blo (FNo 357) or by connecting the inverted alarm with the bay interlocking of the feeder. The reset input >Lockout RESET (FNo 386) resets the interlocking state. This input is initiated by an external device which is protected against unauthorized or unintentional operation. The interlocking state can also be controlled by internal sources, e.g. a function key, operation of the device or using DIGSI 4 on a PC. For each case please make sure the corresponding logical combinations, security measures, etc. are taken into account for the routing of the binary inputs and outputs (Section 5.2) and are also considered for the setting of user-defined logic functions (Section 5.3), if necessary. Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression While on feeder without automatic reclosure every trip command by a protection function is final, it is desirable, when using automatic reclosure, to prevent the operation detector of the circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the breaker) from sending an alarm if the trip of the breaker is not final (Figure 6-77). For this purpose, the signal from the circuit breaker is routed via a correspondingly allocated output contact of the 7SD52 (output indication CB Alarm Supp, FNo 563). An output relay with a normally closed contact (NC contact) must be available and has to be allocated. In the idle state and when the device is turned off, this contact remains closed. Prior to the command, with the internal automatic reclosure in the ready state, the contact is opened so that no signal from the circuit breaker is forwarded. Also when closing the breaker via the binary input >Manual Close (FNo 356) or via the integrated automatic reclosure the contact is opened so that no breaker alarm can be passed during closure. Further optional closing commands which are not sent via the device cannot be taken into consideration. Closing commands for control can be linked to the alarm suppression via the user-defined logic functions (CFC). If the device issues a final trip command, the contact remains closed. This is the case, during the reclaim time of the automatic reclosure cycle, when the automatic reclosure
6-150
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
is blocked or switched off or, due to other reasons is not ready for automatic reclosure (e.g. tripping only occurred after the action time expired). Figure 6-78 shows time diagrams for manual trip and close as well as for protection tripping with a single unsuccessful automatic reclosure attempt.
L+
Close Trip
(Signalling Voltage)
7SD52
FNo 563
CB
CB operation detector
CB Alarm Supp
Alarm: Breaker Trip
Figure 6-77
Breaker tripping alarm suppression
Manual trip
(as desired)
Manual Close via binary input >Manual Close Protection pick-up
Fault inception
Protection trip Auto-reclosure (AR)
AR dead time
CB Pole
CB Operation Detector
Binary output CB Alarm Supp Alarm: Breaker Trip

Manual opening Final trip of protection function
Figure 6-78
Breaker tripping alarm suppression sequence examples
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-151
6 Functions
No Trip no Flag
The storage of alarms allocated to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous alarms can be made dependent on the device sending a trip command. Fault event information is then not output when one or more protection functions have picked up due to a fault but no tripping occurred because the fault was removed by another device (e.g. on a different line). The information is thus limited to faults on the protected line no trip no flag. Figure 6-79 shows the logic diagram of this function.
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Target on PU

1
Target on TRIP
Device TRIP Device dropoff
&
Reset LED and spontaneous alarms
Figure 6-79
Logic diagram of the notripnoflag function (command-dependent alarms)
CB Operation Statistics
The number of trips caused by the device 7SD52 is counted. If the device is to be used for single-pole tripping, this number is counted for each CB pole individually. Furthermore, the current switched for each pole is acquired, provided as an information and summated in a memory. If the device is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the automatic closing commands are counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole trip, after three-pole trip, as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and further reclosure cycles. The levels of these counted values are buffered against auxiliary voltage failure. They can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For further information see Subsection 7.1.2.
6.13.5 Circuit Breaker Test

The differential protection 7SD52 allows an easy check of the trip circuits and the circuit breakers. The test programs according to Table 6-7 are available for the test. Of course, singlepole tests are available only if the device is suitable for single-pole tripping. The output alarms mentioned must be allocated to the relevant command relays (according to Subsection 5.2.4) that are used for controlling the circuit breaker coils. The test is started via the operation panel on the front of the device or via the PC with DIGSI 4. To know how to proceed refer to Section 7.3. Figure 6-80 shows the chronological sequence of one TRIPCLOSE test cycle. The set times are those stated in Subsection 6.1.1 for Trip Command Duration and Circuit Breaker Test.
6-152
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate the status of the circuit breaker or of its poles to the device via binary inputs, the test cycle can only be initiated if the circuit breaker is closed. The information on the circuit breaker status during the circuit breaker test is not automatically adopted from the position logic according to 6.13.2 (Figure 6-74). It is rather that special binary inputs are provided to process the breaker status feedbacks for the circuit breaker test. This must be taken into consideration when allocating the binary inputs, as described in Subsection 6.13.2. (Page 6-144). The device displays the states of the test sequence with the respective indications.
Table 6-7 Item no. 1 2 3 4
Circuit breaker test programs Test programs Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L1 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L2 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L3 Three-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle Associated close command LS 1 Circuit breaker Output alarms (FNo) CB1-TESTtrip L1 (7325) CB1-TESTtrip L2 (7326) CB1-TESTtrip L3 (7327) CB1-TESTtrip123 (7328) CB1-TEST close (7329)
TRIP CLOSE
TMin TRIP CMD 240 T-CBtest-dead 242 TMax CLOSE CMD 241
Figure 6-80
TRIPCLOSE test cycle
6.13.6 Setting the function parameters

The parameters for the tripping logic of the entire device and the circuit breaker test have already been set in Subsections 6.1.3 and 6.1.1. Address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD still decides whether the alarms that are allocated to local LEDs and the spontaneous alarms that appear on the local display after a fault should be stored on every pickup of a protection function (Target on PU) or whether they should be stored only when a tripping command is given (Target on TRIP).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-153
6 Functions

Fault Display
Addr. 610 Setting Title FltDisp.LED/LCD Setting Options Display Targets on every Pickup Display Targets on TRIP only Default Setting Display Targets on every Pickup Comments Fault Display on LED / LCD

Circuit Breaker Test
F.No. 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 Alarm CB1-TESTtrip L1 CB1-TESTtrip L2 CB1-TESTtrip L3 CB1-TESTtrip123 CB1-TEST close CB-TEST running CB-TSTstop FLT. CB-TSTstop OPEN CB-TSTstop NOTr CB-TSTstop CLOS CB-TST .OK. CB1tst L1 CB1tst L2 CB1tst L3 CB1tst 123 Comments CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L1 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L2 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L3 CB1-TEST TRIP command L123 CB1-TEST CLOSE command CB-TEST is in progress CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Fault CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED CB-TEST was succesful CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1 CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L2 CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L3 CB1-TEST trip/close Phases L123
6-154
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.14 Commissioning Tools
6.14
Commissioning Tools

The device is provided with a comprehensive commissioning and monitoring tool that checks the communication and the whole differential protection system. Using a personal computer in conjunction with a web-browser this tool enables the user to chart the state of the system and the communication of the differential protection clearly. The necessary operator software is integrated in the device; online-help can be found on the DIGSI 4CD and is also available in the Internet. To ensure a proper communication between the device and the PC browser the transmission speed must be equal for both. Furthermore, the user must set an IP-address so that the browser can identify the device. Thanks to the IBS-tool the user is able to operate the device with the PC. On the PCscreen the front panel of the device is emulated, a function that can also be deactivated by the settings.
6.14.2 Setting Parameters

The parameters of the IBS-tool can be set separately for the front operating interface and the service interface. The relevant addresses are those which relate to the interface that is used for communication with the PC and the IBS-tool. Addresses 4401 to 4406 are to configure the front interface. The 12-digit IP-address is formatted as follows: ***.***.***.***. There is a 3-digit block in each of the following setting addresses: 4401 IP-A (A.x.x.x), 4402 IP-B (x.B.x.x), 4403 IP-C (x.x.C.x) and 4404 IP-D (x.x.x.D). The address 4405 NUM LOCK determines if the differential protection device should be operated with the IBStool from the PC. When setting YES, the devices cannot be operated by the front panel emulation of the PC. This is the normal state during operation. Once this address is set to NO during commissioning, all device parameters can be changed to correct, for example, false or inconsistent settings. In address 4406 LCP/NCP set if your PC-interface supports LCP (Link Control Protocol) and NCP (Network Control Protocol). To make possible the long-distance data transmission for a point-to-point connection the setting must be YES (default setting). When using a star coupler only one device (master-device) requires the setting YES, the other devices require NO. Addresses 4411 IP-A (A.x.x.x), 4412 IP-B (x.B.x.x), 4413 IP-C (x.x.C.x) and 4414 IP-D (x.x.x.D), 4415 NUM LOCK and 4416 LCP/NCP are to configure the rear interface.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-155
6 Functions

Addr. 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 Setting Title IP-A (A.x.x.x) IP-B (x.B.x.x) IP-C (x.x.C.x) IP-D (x.x.x.D) NUM LOCK LCP/NCP IP-A (A.x.x.x) IP-B (x.B.x.x) IP-C (x.x.C.x) IP-D (x.x.x.D) NUM LOCK LCP/NCP Setting Options 0..255 0..255 0..255 0..255 YES NO NO YES 0..255 0..255 0..255 0..255 YES NO NO YES Default Setting 141 142 255 150 YES YES 141 142 255 160 YES YES Comments IP-address .xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3) IP-address xxx..xxx.xxx(Position 4-6) IP-address xxx.xxx..xxx(Position 7-9) IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.(Pos. 10-12) Num Lock Front interface supports LCP/NCP mode IP-address .xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3) IP-address xxx..xxx.xxx(Position 4-6) IP-address xxx.xxx..xxx(Position 7-9) IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.(Pos. 10-12) Num Lock Service interface supports LCP/NCP mode
6-156
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.15 Ancillary Functions
6.15
Ancillary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7SD52 relay include: processing of messages, processing of operational measured values, storage of fault record data.
6.15.1 Processing of Messages

For the detailed fault analysis, the information regarding the reaction of the protection device and the measured values following a system fault are of interest. For this purpose, the device provides information processing which operates in a threefold manner: Indicators (LEDs) and Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Important events and states are indicated with optical indicators (LED) on the front plate. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. Most of the signals and indications can be marshalled, i.e. routing can be changed from the presetting with delivery. In Appendix A and Section 5.2 the state of the delivered relay (presetting) and marshalling facilities are extensively discussed. The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually set). The latched state is saved against loss of auxiliary supply. It is reset: locally by operation of the key LED reset on the front of the device, from remote via a binary input, via one of the serial interfaces, automatically on detection of a new fault. Condition messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the condition to be reported has reset. This applies to e.g. messages from monitoring functions, or similar. A green LED indicates that the device is in service (RUN); it can not be reset. It extinguishes if the self-monitoring of the microprocessor recognizes a fault or if the auxiliary supply fails. In the event that the auxiliary supply is available while there is an internal device failure, the red LED (ERROR) is illuminated and the device is blocked. Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or to a Personal Computer Events and states can be obtained from the LCD on the front plate of the device. A personal computer can be connected to the front interface or the service interface for retrieval of information. In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values). In
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-157
6 Functions
the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the so-called spontaneous messages, are displayed instead. The quiescent state information is displayed again once the fault messages have been acknowledged. The acknowledgement is identical to the resetting of the LEDs (see above). The device in addition has several event buffers for operational messages, switching statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a battery buffer. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC interface. The retrieval of events/alarms during operation is extensively described in Subsection 7.1.1. Following a system fault, it is for example possible to retrieve important information regarding its sequence of events, such as pick-up and trip. The start of the fault is time stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The sequence of events during the disturbance is indicated with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection (first pickup of a protection function), so that the duration of the fault until tripping and up to the reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms. With a PC and the protection data processing program DIGSI 4 it is also possible to retrieve and display the events with the convenience of visualisation on the screen and a menu-guided dialogue. The data may be printed or stored for later evaluation. The protection device stores the messages of the last eight system faults; in the event of a ninth fault, the oldest is erased. A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection functions, i.e. first pickup of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection, i.e. dropout of the last protection function, or after the expiry of the auto-reclose reclaim time, so that several unsuccessful auto-reclose cycles are also stored as a combined unit. Accordingly a system fault may contain several individual fault events (from fault detection up to reset of fault detection). Information to a Control Centre If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be transferred via this interface to a centralised control and monitoring system. Several communication protocols are available for the transfer of this information.
6.15.2 Measurement during Operation

Displaying of Measured Values A number of measured values and the values derived thereof are available for interrogation in site or for data transmission (see Table 6-8). Precondition for a correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the nominal values of the instrument transformers and the power system according to Subsection 6.1.1. Depending on the version ordered, the connection of the device, and the configured protection functions, only a part of the measured operating values listed in Table 6-8 is available. The residual voltage 3U0 is the e-n-voltage multiplied by 3 (if Uen is connected) or calculated from the phase-to-ground-voltages 3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|. For this the three voltage inputs phase-to-ground must be connected. Overload measured values can appear only if the overload protection was configured Enabled.
6-158
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 6-8
Operational measured values of the local device Measured values primary A A A kV kV kV kV MVA, MW, MVAR (abs) Hz % % secondary A A A V V V V (abs) Hz
IL1, IL2, IL3 3I0 (IL1IL2), (IL2IL3), (IL3IL1) I1, I2 UL1L2, UL2L3, UL3L1 UL1E, UL2E, UL3E 3U0
Phase currents Ground current (residual current) Phase angle of the phase currents towards each other Positive and negative sequence component of currents Phase-to-phase voltages Phase-to-ground voltages Displacement voltage (Residual voltage)
(UL1UL2), (UL2UL3), Phase angle of the phase voltages towards each other (UL3UL1) (UL1IL1), (UL2IL2), (UL3IL3) U1, U2 S, P, Q cos f L1/TRIP, L2/TRIP, L3/TRIP /TRIP Phase angle of the phase voltages towards the phase currents Positive and negative sequence component of voltages Apparent, active and reactive power Power factor Frequency
Thermal value of each phase, referred to the tripping value Thermal resultant value, referred to the tripping value, calculated according to the set method
The operational measured values are also calculated in the event of a running fault and approximately every 0.2 s. Differential Protection Values The differential and restraint values of the differential protection are listed in Table 6-9.
Table 6-9
Measured values of the differential protection Measured values % referring to
IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3 IRestL1, IRestL2, IRestL3

1
Calculated differential currents of the three phases Calculated restraint currents of the three phases
Rated operating current 1) Rated operating current 1)
) for lines according to address 1104 (see Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers calculated from address 1106 (see Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-159
6 Functions
Remote Measured Values
When the 7SD52 devices communicate, the data of the opposite ends of the protected object can be read out. The currents and voltages involved as well as phase shifts between the local and remote measured quantities can be displayed. This is especially helpful for checking the correct and coherent phase allocation at the different line ends and for the verification of the vector group if a power transformer is within the protected zone. Furthermore, the device addresses of the other device are transmitted. In this way all important data of all ends are available at any line end. All possible data are listed in Table 6-10.
Table 6-10
Operational measured values transmitted from the other ends and compared with the local values Data % referring to (abs)
Device ADR IL1, IL2, IL3 remote IL1, IL2, IL3 local (IL1), (IL2), (IL3) UL1, UL2, UL3 remote UL1, UL2, UL3 local
Device address of the remote device Phase currents of the remote device Phase currents of the local device Phase angles between the remote and the local phase currents Voltages of the remote device Voltages of the local device
Rated operat. current 1) Rated operat. current 1)
Rated operat. voltage/3 2) Rated operat. voltage/3 2)
(UL1), (UL2), (UL3) Phase angles between the remote and the local voltages
1
) for lines according to address 1104 (see Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers calculated from address 1106 (see Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) 2) according to address 1103 (see Subsection 6.1.3)
Transmission Statistics
In 7SD52 the data concerning the protection communication is registered in statistics. The transmission times of the information between the devices via interfaces (send and receive) are measured continuously. The values are kept stored in the Statistics folder. The availability of the transmission media is also reported. The availability is indicated in %/min and %/h. This allows the user to assess the quality of the transmission. If GPSsynchronization is used, the transmission times for both directions and each protection data interface are regularly measured and indicated.
IBS-tool
The commissioning tool IBS-tool enables the user to chart on a PC-screen the currents, voltages (if connected to the system) and their phase angles for all devices connected to the differential protection system. In addition to phasor diagrams showing the measured values also numerical values, frequency and device addresses are indicated. For more details refer to Subsection 7.1.3.2.
6-160
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.15.3 Fault Recording

The differential protection 7SD52 is equipped with a fault recording function. The instantaneous values of the measured quantities iL1, iL2, iL3, 3 i0, uL1, uL2, uL3, 3 u0 and IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3, IRestL1, IRestL2, IRest L3 (voltages depending on the connection) are sampled at 1 ms intervals (for a frequency of 50 Hz) and stored in a cyclic buffer (20 samples per period). During a system fault these data are stored over a time span that can be set (5 s at the longest for each fault record). Up to 8 faults can be stored. The total capacity of the fault record memory is approx. 15 s. The fault recording buffer is updated when a new fault occurs, so that acknowledging is not necessary. Fault recording can be initiated, additionally to the protection pickup, via the integrated operator panel, the serial operator interface and the serial service interface. For the differential protection system of a protected object all fault records of all ends are synchronized by time management features. This ensures that all fault records operate with exactly the same time basis. Therefore equal measured values are coincident at all ends. The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI 4 and the graphic analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during the system fault and calculates additional information from the measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the measured quantities are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented. If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by the respective programs in the central device. The measured quantities are referred to their maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation. In addition, internal events are recorded as binary traces (marks), e.g. fault detection, tripping. Where transfer to a central device is possible, the request for data transfer can be executed automatically. It can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the protection, or only after a trip.

Data Storage for Fault Recording The configuration of the fault recording memory is done in the sub-menu Oscillographic Fault Recordings of the menu Settings. Distinction is made between the starting instant (i.e. the instant where time tagging is T = 0) and the criterion to save the record (address 402 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). With the setting Save w. Pickup, the starting instant and the criterion for saving are the same: the pickup of any protective element. The option Save w. TRIP) means that the pickup of a protective function still starts fault recording but the record is saved only if the device issues a trip command. The third option for address 402 is Start w.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-161
6 Functions
TRIP: A trip command issued by the device is both the starting instant and the criterion to save the record. A fault event starts with the fault detection of any protection function and ends with the reset of the last fault detection. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (address 403 SCOPE OF WAVEFORM DATA = Fault event). If automatic reclosure is implemented, the entire system disturbance possibly with several reclose attempts up to the final fault clearance can be stored (address 403 SCOPE OF WAVEFORM DATA = Power System fault). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history, but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-reclosure dead time(s). The actual storage amount of data encompasses the pre-trigger time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 411) before the starting instant, the normal recording time and the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 412) after the storage criterion has reset. The maximum permissible storage period per fault recording MAX. LENGTH is set in address 410. A maximum recording time of 5 s is available per fault recording. In total up to 8 fault records with a total recording time of max. 15 s can be stored. An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved via a binary input or via the operating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The length of the fault recording is set in address 415 BinIn CAPT.TIME (maximum length however is MAX. LENGTH, address 410). The pre- and post-fault times are additive. If the time for the binary input is set to , the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), the maximum length however still is MAX. LENGTH (address 410).

Addr. 402A Setting Title WAVEFORMTRIGGER Setting Options Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP Fault event Power System fault 0.30..5.00 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec; Default Setting Save with Pickup Comments Waveform Capture
403A 410 411 412 415
WAVEFORM DATA MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME
Fault event 2.00 sec 0.25 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec
Scope of Waveform Data Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input
6-162
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Statistics
F.No. 2895 2896 2897 2898 1000 1001 1002 1003 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 7751 7875 7876 7752 7877 7878 7753 7754 7755 7756 Alarm AR #Close1./1p= AR #Close1./3p= AR #Close2./1p= AR #Close2./3p= # TRIPs= TripNo L1= TripNo L2= TripNo L3= IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = Last IL1 = Last IL2 = Last IL3 = PI1 TD PI1 TD R PI1 TD S PI2 TD PI2 TD R PI2 TD S PI1A/m PI1A/h PI2A/m PI2A/h Comments No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands 1pole No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands 3pole No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands 1p No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands 3p Number of breaker TRIP commands Number of breaker TRIP commands L1 Number of breaker TRIP commands L2 Number of breaker TRIP commands L3 Accumulation of interrupted current L1 Accumulation of interrupted current L2 Accumulation of interrupted current L3 Last fault current Phase L1 Last fault current Phase L2 Last fault current Phase L3 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay rec. Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay send Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay rec. Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay send Prot.Interface 1: Availability per min. Prot.Interface 1: Availability per hour Prot.Interface 2: Availability per min. Prot.Interface 2: Availability per hour
Measured Values
F.No. 601 602 603 610 IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = 3I0 = Alarm I L1 I L2 I L3 3I0 (zero sequence) Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-163
6 Functions
F.No. 619 620 7731 7732 7733 621 622 623 624 625 626 631 634 635 641 642 643 645 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 644 801 802 803 804 I1 = I2 = IL1L2= IL2L3= IL3L1= UL1E= UL2E= UL3E= UL12= UL23= UL31= 3U0 = U1 = U2 = P= Q= PF = S= UL1L2= UL2L3= UL3L1= UIL1= UIL2= UIL3= Freq= /trip = /tripL1= /tripL2= /tripL3=
Alarm I1 (positive sequence) I2 (negative sequence) PHI IL1L2 (local) PHI IL2L3 (local) PHI IL3L1 (local) U L1-E U L2-E U L3-E U L12 U L23 U L31 3U0 (zero sequence) U1 (positive sequence) U2 (negative sequence) P (active power) Q (reactive power) Power Factor S (apparent power) PHI UL1L2 (local) PHI UL2L3 (local) PHI UL3L1 (local) PHI UIL1 (local) PHI UIL2 (local) PHI UIL3 (local) Frequency
Comments
Temperat. rise for warning and trip Temperature rise for phase L1 Temperature rise for phase L2 Temperature rise for phase L3
Remote Values
F.No. 7761 7762 Relay ID IL1_opN= Alarm Relay ID of 1. relay IL1(% of Operational nominal current) Comments
6-164
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
F.No. 7763 7764 7765 7766 7767 7769 7770 7771 7772 7773 7774 F.No. 7781 7782 7783 7784 7785 7786 7787 7789 7790 7791 7792 7793 7794 F.No. 7801 7802 7803 7804 7805 7806 7807 7809 Relay ID IL1_opN= I L1= IL2_opN= I L2= IL3_opN= I L3= UL1_opN= Relay ID IL1_opN= I L1= IL2_opN= I L2= IL3_opN= I L3= UL1_opN= U L1= UL2_opN= U L2= UL3_opN= U L3= I L1= IL2_opN= I L2= IL3_opN= I L3= UL1_opN= U L1= UL2_opN= U L2= UL3_opN= U L3=
Alarm Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc
Comments
IL2(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL2_rem <-> IL2_loc IL3(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL3_rem <-> IL3_loc UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc UL2(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc UL3(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL3_rem <-> UL3_loc Alarm Relay ID of 2. relay IL1(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc IL2(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL2_rem <-> IL2_loc IL3(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL3_rem <-> IL3_loc UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc UL2(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc UL3(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL3_rem <-> UL3_loc Alarm Relay ID of 3. relay IL1(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc IL2(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL2_rem <-> IL2_loc IL3(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL3_rem <-> IL3_loc UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) Comments Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-165
6 Functions
F.No. 7810 7811 7812 7813 7814 F.No. 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 7827 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 F.No. 7841 7842 7843 7844 7845 7846 7847 7849 7850 7851 7852 7853 7854 Relay ID IL1_opN= I L1= IL2_opN= I L2= IL3_opN= I L3= UL1_opN= U L1= UL2_opN= U L2= UL3_opN= U L3= Relay ID IL1_opN= I L1= IL2_opN= I L2= IL3_opN= I L3= UL1_opN= U L1= UL2_opN= U L2= UL3_opN= U L3= U L1= UL2_opN= U L2= UL3_opN= U L3=
Alarm
Comments Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc UL2(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc UL3(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL3_rem <-> UL3_loc
Alarm Relay ID of 4. relay
Comments
IL1(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc IL2(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL2_rem <-> IL2_loc IL3(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL3_rem <-> IL3_loc UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc UL2(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc UL3(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL3_rem <-> UL3_loc Alarm Relay ID of 5. relay IL1(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc IL2(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL2_rem <-> IL2_loc IL3(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL3_rem <-> IL3_loc UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc UL2(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc UL3(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL3_rem <-> UL3_loc Comments
6-166
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
F.No. 7861 7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7867 7869 7870 7871 7872 7873 7874 Relay ID IL1_opN= I L1= IL2_opN= I L2= IL3_opN= I L3= UL1_opN= U L1= UL2_opN= U L2= UL3_opN= U L3=
Alarm Relay ID of 6. relay
Comments
IL1(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc IL2(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL2_rem <-> IL2_loc IL3(% of Operational nominal current) Angle IL3_rem <-> IL3_loc UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc UL2(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc UL3(% of Operational nominal voltage) Angle UL3_rem <-> UL3_loc
Diff-Values
F.No. 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 IDiffL1= IDiffL2= IDiffL3= IRestL1= IRestL2= IRestL3= Diff3I0= Alarm Comments IDiffL1(% Operational nominal current) IDiffL2(% Operational nominal current) IDiffL3(% Operational nominal current) IRestL1(% Operational nominal current) IRestL2(% Operational nominal current) IRestL3(% Operational nominal current) Diff3I0 (Differential current 3I0)
Fault Recording
F.No. 4 203 Alarm >Trig.Wave.Cap. Wave. deleted FltRecSta >Trigger Waveform Capture Waveform data deleted Fault Recording Start Comments
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-167
6 Functions
6.16
General
Processing of Commands
In addition to the protective functions described so far, control command processing is integrated in the SIPROTEC 7SD52 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four command sources: Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device Local or remote operation using DIGSI 4, Remote operation via system (SCADA) interface (e.g. SICAM), Automatic functions (e.g. using a binary inputs, CFC). The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is basically limited by the number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control commands it has be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are configured and provided with the correct properties (see also Subsection 5.2.4 under Accelerated Binary Outputs). If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic functions (CFC) (see Section 5.3). The Control of Switchgear is described in Section 7.4.
6.16.1 Types of Commands

Two types of commands can be issued with this device: Control commands, Internal / pseudo commands. Control Commands These commands operate binary outputs and change the power system status: Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (without synchro-check) as well as commands for the control of isolators and earth switches, Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps, Commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils). Internal / Pseudo Commands These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate or acknowledge changes of state. Manual entries to change the feedback indication of plant such as the status condition, for example in the case when the physical connection to the auxiliary contacts is not available or is defective. The process of manual entries is recorded and can be displayed accordingly.
6-168
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.16 Processing of Commands Additionally, tagging commands can be issued to establish internal settings, such as switching authority (remote / local), parameter set changeover, data transmission inhibit and metering counter reset or initialization. Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers. Status information commands for setting / deactivating the information status for the information value of an object: Controlling activation of binary input status, Blocking binary outputs.
6.16.2 Steps in the Command Sequence

Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately for each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored after its release. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following: Check Sequence Command entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device) Check password access rights; Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) selection of deactivated interlocking status. User configurable interlocking checks that can be selected for each command Switching authority (local, remote), Switching direction control (target state = present state), Zone controlled/bay interlocking (logic using CFC), System interlocking (centrally via SICAM), Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation), Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions). Fixed commands Timeout monitoring (time between command initiation and execution can be controlled), Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are rejected or delayed), Equipment not present at output (if controllable equipment is not assigned to a binary output, then the command is denied), Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is denied), Component hardware malfunction,
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-169
6 Functions Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each circuit breaker or switch), 1-out-of-n check (for schemes with multiple assignments and common potential contact, it is checked whether a command has already been initiated for the common output contact). Monitoring the Command Execution Interruption of a command because of a cancel command, Running time monitor (feedback message monitoring time).
6.16.3 Interlocking
Interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC). The interlocking checks of a SICAM/SIPROTEC-system are classified into: System interlocking checked by a central control system (for interbay interlocking) Zone controlled/bay interlocking checked in the bay device (for the feeder-related intelocking) System interlocking relies on the system data base in the central control system. Zone controlled/bay interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration and interlocking logic of the relay. Switchgear which is subject to system interlocking in the central control system is identified with a specific setting in the command properties (in the routing matrix). For all commands the user can select the operation mode with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode): for local commands by reprogramming the settings with password check, for automatic commands via command processing with CFC, for local / remote commands by an additional interlocking command via Profibus.
6.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching The command checks that can be selected for the SIPROTEC-relays are also referred to as standard interlocking. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deactivated (non interlocked) via DIGSI 4. Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are bypassed in the relay. Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked in the command check routines. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be
6-170
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.16 Processing of Commands
rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. CO-), followed by an operation response information. Table 6-11 shows some types of commands and messages. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.
Table 6-11
Types of command and messages

Type of command Abbrev. CO MT IB OB CA Message CO+/ MT+/ IB+/ *) OB+/ *) CA+/
Control issued Manual tagging (positive / negative) Input blocking Output blocking Control abortion
The plus sign indicated in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: the command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 6-81 shows the messages relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful operation of the circuit breaker. The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.
EVENT LOG --------------------19.06.99 11:52:05,625 Q0 CO+ close 19.06.99 11:52:06,134 Q0 FB+ close
Figure 6-81 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0
Standard Interlocking
The standard interlocking includes the checks for each device which were set during the configuration of inputs and outputs, see Subsection 5.2.4 under Accelerated Binary Outputs. An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure 6-82.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-171
6 Functions
Device with Source of Command = LOCAL SAS REMOTE ), DIGSI AUTO Switching Authority (Local/Remote)
1
Switching Authority On/Off
Switching Mode
&
Local
Local
&
&
Remote
&
&
Switching Authority DIGSI DIGSI
DIGSI
or
&
Remote
Switching Mode Local
Non-Interlocked
&
Switching Mode Remote
or
SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n
Interlocked
&
or
feedback Indication On/Off Protection Blocking 52 Close 52 Open
SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n System Interlock.*)y/n Field Interlocking y/n Protection Blockingy/n Double Oper. Blocky/n SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n
or
Command Output to Relay
Event Condition
*) Starting With Version 4.2
1)
Source REMOTE also includes SAS.
LOCALCommand via substation controller. REMOTECommand via telecontrol system to substation controller and from substation controller to device.
Figure 6-82
Standard Interlocking Arrangements
The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters explained in the following table 6-12.
Table 6-12
Interlocking commands Interlocking commands Abbrev. L S Message L S
Control authorization System interlock
6-172
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6.16 Processing of Commands
Interlocking commands Zone controlled Target state = present state (check switch position) Block by protection
Abbrev. Z P B
Message Z P B
Figure 6-83 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in table 6-12. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 6-83).
Interlocking 01/03 -------------------Q0 Close/Open S Z P B Q1 Close/Open S Z P B Q8 Close/Open S Z P B Figure 6-83 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Control Logic using CFC
For zone controlled/field interlocking, control logic can be programmed, using the CFC. Via specific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked are available.
6.16.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands

During the processing of the commands, independent of the further processing of information, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. The messages are entered in the event list. Acknowledgement of Commands to the Device Front Acknowledgement of Commands to Local/Remote/Digsi All information which relates to commands that were issued from the device front Command Issued = Local is transformed into a corresponding message and shown in the display of the device. The messages which relate to commands with the origin Command Issued = Local/ Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface). The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not provided with a response indication as it is done with the local command but with ordinary recorded command and feedback information.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
6-173
6 Functions
Monitoring of Feedback Information
The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls whether the device operation is executed with the required final result within the monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information is detected. If no feedback information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time is indicated and the command sequence is terminated. Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets. The plus appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output and Switching Relays
The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear are described in Section 5.2 and Subsection 5.2.1.

F.No. Cntrl Auth ModeLOCAL ModeREMOTE Alarm Control Authority Controlmode LOCAL Controlmode REMOTE Comments
6-174
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Control During Operation
This chapter describes interaction possibilities with the SIPROTEC 7SD52 device during operation. The information that can be obtained and the procedure for retrieving the data are discussed. Methods of influencing the device functions during operation and controlling the system using the device are covered. Detailed knowledge about the device functions is not required at this point. However, the configuration of the device covered in Chapter 5 especially configuration of the input and output functions is assumed to have already taken place. Please note that the examples shown are general and may differ in wording or details from the device at hand. Also, depending on the model variant, some of the functions discussed below may not be available.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
Read-out of Information Control of Device Functions Circuit Breaker Test Function Control of Switchgear
7-2 7-28 7-40 7-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-1
7 Control During Operation
7.1
General
Read-out of Information
The device provides a great deal of information that can be obtained on-site or from data transfer: Messages, Operating measurement and metered values, Waveform data in oscillographic fault records. This information is individually discussed below. Methods for viewing, retrieving, acknowledging, and storing this information on a PC are also explained.
7.1.1
7.1.1.1
Messages
Output of Messages Messages provide operating information about the power system, the device, and the measurements. Other messages give an overview of important events such a network fault and the operation of device functions. The information provided is useful in checking overall operation of the device during testing and commissioning. Password entry is not required to read messages. The messages generated in the device can be presented in various ways: Display using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front of the device, Operation of output relays connected to external signalling equipment, Display in the LCD on the front of the device, Display on the screen of a PC running the DIGSI 4 program, connected to the operating or service interface of the device, Transfer to a master station using one of the serial system interfaces (if available).
Light-Emitting Diodes
The green light-emitting diode with the label RUN lights continuously during normal operation. The red LED with the label ERROR indicates that the processor system has recognized an internal problem. If this LED lights up, then the device is not operational. Chapter 9 discusses steps to take if a failure occurs in the device. The other LEDs on the front of the device display the messages in accordance with the configuration, as discussed in Chapter 5. The description of each LED illumination should then be indicated on the label strips. If the messages for the LEDs are latched, then the memory can be reset with the LED key LED . This key simultaneously serves as a functional check for all of the LEDs except the RUN and ERROR LEDs. While the key is pressed, all of these LEDs must light.
7-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.1 Read-out of Information
LEDs that display a condition should light for as long as the condition is maintained. The LED action is therefore generally not latched. Of course, these LEDs are also included in the function check with the LED key LED . Output Relays Indications can be configured to output relays for external indication (e.g. annunciator, sequence-of-events recorder, RTU, etc), and operate like LEDs. See also Chapter 5 for details. To retrieve messages using the front panel: First press the MENU key MENU. The MAIN MENU appears. The first menu item (Annunciation) is marked. All menus and message lists begin with a title. The number in the upper right corner of the display indicates presently selected menu entry or message, and, behind the slash, the total number of menu entries or messages (see Figure 7-1, each first line). Press the key to go to the ANNUNCIATION sub-menu, as shown in Figure 7-1. In this menu the messages can be reached by entering the associated selection number, or by selecting the desired entry using the and keys and moving further with the key. This procedure is described in more detail below.
Front Panel
MAIN MENU 01/05 -------------------->Annunciation > 1 Measurement > 2
ANNUNCIATION 01/05 -------------------->Event Log > 1 Trip Log > 2
Figure 7-1
Selection of messages on the operator control panel example
PCInterfaces
A personal computer running the DIGSI 4 program can be connected to the operating interface on the front of the device to retrieve the messages. A PC can also be connected to the service interface on the back of the device. This connection typically applies when the PC is hard-wired with several devices, using a data bus (station computer) or modem. Details about the operation of DIGSI 4 are contained in the DIGSI 4 Device Operation handbook, order no. E50417-H1176-C097.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-3
Figure 7-2
Function selection screen in DIGSI 4 example
If the DIGSI 4 Online directory is opened with a double-click, the operating functions for the device appear in the navigation window (Figure 7-2). By double clicking on Annunciation, the tree structure expands and shows the individual message groups. The groups are described in detail below. System (SCADA) Interface Division of Messages The system interface (if available) is generally hardwired and transfers all device information to a master station via data cable or optical fibre cable. The messages are categorized as follows: Event Log: these are operating messages that can occur during the operation of the device. They include information about the status of device functions, measurement data, system data, and similar information. Trip Log: these are fault messages from the last eight network faults that were processed by the device. Switching statistics; these messages count the trip commands initiated by the device, close commands, values of accumulated circuit currents and interrupted currents. Erasing and setting the messages named above. A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix. The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a SIPROTEC 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions are not present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as Disabled in device configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.
7-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.1.1.2
Event Log (Operating Messages) Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message. Faults in the power system are indicated with Network Fault and the present fault number. The fault messages (Trip Log) contain details about the history of faults. This topic is discussed in Subsection 7.1.1.3. All predefined operating messages are listed and explained in a table in Appendix A.7. In a specific case, of course, only the appropriate messages appear in the display. The appendix also shows whether the message is only issued as ON (to indicate an event), or as ON and OFF (to designate the beginning and end of a condition).
With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. The first menu item (Annunciation) is marked. Press the key to enter the ANNUNCIATION menu (see Figure 7-1). Here, select the menu item Event Log (already marked). The EVENT LOG table appears. If no messages are present, then the text list is empty appears. Otherwise important events and changes in conditions are listed in chronological order (see Figure 7-3 as an example). Upon entering the menu, the newest (last) message is displayed at first. The applicable date and time are noted in the display line directly above the message. If the memory for the operating messages is not full, then the end of the entries is indicated by END.
EVENT LOG 19/19 --------------------06/19/99 11:52:05.625 Reset LED ON

Figure 7-3
Example of an operating message in the operating field of the device
The
and
MENU
keys can be used to move up and down in the event log. key to return to the MAIN MENU.
Press the From PC with DIGSI 4
Click on Annunciation. The options appear in the data window (Figure 7-4). Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case Event Log. A date and time appear in the data window as shown in Figure 7-4. Double click on the date and time and the contents of the message group are displayed in another window.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-5
Figure 7-4
Selection of operational messages in DIGSI 4 example
Figure 7-5
Example of operational messages in DIGSI 4
7-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.1.1.3
Trip Log (Fault Messages) The spontaneous messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pickup of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the device front in the sequence shown in Figure 7-6. The spontaneous messages can be acknowledged by pressing the knowledgement, the default display is shown.
LED
Spontaneous Messages
key. After ac-
Diff Pickup L1E PU Time 93 ms TRIP Time 0 ms
Protection function that had picked up first, e.g. differencial protection, with phase information; Elapsed time from pick-up until drop-off; Elapsed time from pick-up until the first trip command of a protection function; differential protection mostly 0
Figure 7-6
Display of spontaneous messages in the display example
Retrieved messages
The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. The definition of a network fault is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the system fault is considered to be one network fault. If auto-reclosure occurs, then the network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means after a successful or finalunsuccessful reclosing. Therefore, the entire clearing process, including the reclosing attempt (or all reclosing attempts), occupies only one fault log buffer. Within a network fault, several fault events can occur (from the first pick-up of a protective function to the last drop-out of a protective function). Without auto-reclosing, every fault event is a network fault. Altogether up to 600 indications can be stored. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full. All available indications are displayed and explained in the Appendix A.7. In a specific case, of course, only the applicable messages appear on the display.
With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. The first menu item (Annunciation) is marked. Press the key to enter the ANNUNCIATION sub-menu (see Figure 7-1). Using the key, select the sub-menu item Trip Log and move to the Trip Log submenu using the key. The TRIP LOG selection appears. In this sub-menu, the indications for the last 8 network faults can be selected, again using the and keys. See the example in Figure 7-7. If no messages are present for a fault, then entrance is denied and List Empty is displayed. The messages within a fault record are listed in chronological order and numbered, from the oldest to the newest. The inception of a fault is identified with the date and time in hours, minutes, and seconds (resolution to ms). See the example in Figure 7-7. The individual messages that are associated with the fault are tagged with a relative time. At least one complete individual message always appears in the display.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-7
TRIP LOG 01/08 -------------------->Last Fault > 1 >2nd Last Fault > 2 etc
Figure 7-7
LAST FAULT 01/10 --------------------06/22 23:49:34,845 Network Fault 6 ON
Example of fault messages in the front display
Use the
and
keys to move up and down in the fault messages.
Use the key to move back into the TRIP LOG level; or press the MENU key to go back to the MAIN MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4
Click on Annunciation. The options appear in the data window (see Figure 7-2). Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case the Trip Log. A list appears in the data window, as shown in Figure 7-8. By double clicking on an entry in the list view, the associated contents of the network fault is displayed in another window. The entries are chronologically listed with the newest message appearing first.
Figure 7-8
Selection of fault messages in DIGSI 4 example
7-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Figure 7-9
Example of fault messages in DIGSI 4
7.1.1.4
Saving and Erasing the Messages Normally, erasing the messages is not necessary because the oldest messages are automatically erased when new events are entered, if the memory is full at the time. However, erasure of the stored messages may be useful, for instance, after revision of the plant, so that in the future the memory only contains information about actual events. Erasing the memory takes place separately for each of the message groups. Note: When the Trip Log (fault messages) is erased, then the fault records are erased, too, and all corresponding counters are set to zero. If, however, a fault record is erased (cf. Sub-section 7.1.4), the fault messages are unaffected. If erasure is desired, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. The first menu item Annunciation is marked. Press the Using the key. key to enter the ANNUNCIATION menu (see Figure 7-1). key, select the item Set/Reset, and switch to the sub-menu using the key, and then press the
Here, select the message group to be erased using the ENTER key. See Figure 7-10 as an example.
Password No. 5 (for setting changes) is required at this point. After entering the password and confirming with the ENTER key, the safety question Are you sure? appears. The response YES is the default (Figure 7-10). Confirm with the ENTER key, if the message group should really be erased. If the message group should not be erased, press the key so that the response NO is highlighted, and confirm this an-
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-9
swer with the ENTER key. Before confirming with the ENTER key, the responses can be toggled between YES and NO using the and keys. Alternatively, the ESC key can be pressed to cancel the erasure procedure.
SET/RESET 01/04 -------------------->Event Log 01 >Trip Log 02 Etc PW Settings? =------ENTER
Select the associated message group or press the associated number key to select the messages to be erased.
Enter Password No. 5 (for setting change) and confirm with ENTER
Are you sure? >Yes No

Figure 7-10
Confirm Yes with the ENTER key and complete the erasing of the selected messages, or switch to No with the key and cancel the erasure with the ENTER key.
Erasing messages from the front panel
Operating the device from the PC via DIGSI 4 enables the user to save the above described messages on your hard disc before clearing them from the device. Proceed as if reading out the messages. However, instead of opening the information list by making a double-click on the event group, select the option File Save in the menu of the DIGSI window. Then DIGSI automatically creates a directory for the event group. For more details also refer to the instruction manual of DIGSI 4, ordering no. E50417-H1100-C097, Section 9.4. If all event groups required are stored in the PC, they can be deleted from the device - as before described - via the front panel. Naturally all messages stored via DIGSI 4 can be deleted from your hard disc like any other object.
7.1.1.5
General Interrogation
The present condition of a SIPROTEC device can be examined by using DIGSI 4 to view the contents of the General Interrogation annunciation. The messages are found by double-clicking on Annunciation (see Figure 7-2), double-clicking on General Interrogation, and double-clicking on the date and time that appear in the right window. All of the messages that are needed for a general interrogation are shown along with the actual values and states.
7-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.1.1.6
Spontaneous Messages
The spontaneous messages that can be displayed via DIGSI 4 are refreshed immediately. Find the message groups by clicking on Annunciation (Figure 7-2). Double click Spontaneous Annunciation in the data window. The date and time appear in the data window. By double clicking on them, the Spontaneous Annunciation window opens, as shown in the following figure. Each entering message appears immediately, without requiring that an update be initiated.
Figure 7-11
Spontaneous annunciation window example
7.1.2
Switching Statistics
The messages in switching statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the breaker. The interrupted currents are in primary terms. Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI 4 and connected to the operating or service interface. A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is required to change or delete the statistics. In 7SD52 the statistics register the data of the protection communication. The transmission time of the information from device to device via protection data interfaces (coming and going) is measured steadily and registered in the folder Statistic. The availability of the means of transmission is also indicated. The availability is indicated in %/min and %/h. This enables the user to assess the transmission quality.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-11
7.1.2.1
Viewing the Switching Statistics For each trip command initiated by a protective element of the device, the magnitude of interrupted current for each circuit breaker pole is determined and stored. The current magnitudes are added to previously interrupted currents, and the accumulated values are stored.
With a device ready for operation, first press the The first menu item Annunciation is marked. Press the Use the using the
MENU
key. The MAIN MENU appears.
key to enter the ANNUNCIATION sub-menu (see Figure 7-1). key to select the item Statistic, and switch to the list of statistics values key. The STATISTIC list appears. See Figure 7-12.
STATISTICS 1/05 -------------------- IL1= 0.00kA IL2= 0.00kA

Etc. Figure 7-12 Switching statistics viewed from the front display example
Under Annunciation (Figure 7-2), the switching statistics can be found by double clicking. Double click on Statistic. The contents of the statistic counters is displayed in another window. See Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13
List of statistic values in DIGSI 4 example
7-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.1.2.2
Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics The memories and counters for switching statistics are secured against a loss of power supply voltage. The values can, however, be set to zero, or to any desired value within certain setting limits.
In the STATISTIC (see previous sub-section) sub-menu (see previous sub-section), select the value to be set by using the key, and then press the ENTER key. See Figure 7-14 for an example of changing the trip counter. After a password is entered, the cursor blinks and the number value is highlighted in a box. The number can be overwritten using the number keys. If the new value is outside of the allowable range, either above or below, then the maximum or minimum limit value appears at the bottom edge of the screen. Confirm the change with the ENTER key.
STATISTICS 08/08 --------------------IL3= 214.53kA Trip Count= >34
ENTER
Trip Hrs.= 34 Oper.Count= 3420000 Max 2147483648
Figure 7-14
Setting statistics values from the device front example
In the Statistic window (see previous sub-section), mark the value that is to be set. With the right mouse button, open a context menu and select Set. See Figure 7-15. After the password for individual settings is entered, the previous value in the window can be overwritten.
Figure 7-15
Setting statistic values in DIGSI 4 example
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-13
7.1.3
Measured Values
Operating measured values are determined in the background by the processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI 4, or transferred to a central master station via the system interface (if available). No password entry is required to view the measured values. The values are updated every few seconds. Most measured values can be displayed in primary quantities, secondary quantities, and percentages based on nominal values. A precondition for correct display is that the nominal values be correctly set in the power system data. The secondary quantities are those which are directly applied to the analog inputs of the device.
7.1.3.1
Measured Values Under normal conditions, the so-called default display is the default image in the relay display. It shows measured values of the protected equipment. Depending on the relay type, a number of predefined basic displays are available. Using the and keys, one of the displayed images may be selected (see example in Figure 7-16).
Default Display
% I ULE ULL L1 100.1 102.0 102.2 L2 102.5 102.5 100.0 L3 98.7 98.7 99.8
Figure 7-16 Default displays example
Read-out of Measured Values
In the 7SD52 with maximum functionality the measured values as shown in Table 7-1 to 7-3 are available. The displacement voltage 3U0 is either measured directly (3U0 = 3Uen, if Uen is connected to the voltage input U4) or calculated (from 3U0 = |UL1-E + UL2-E + UL3-E|). The power measurements P, Q are positive, if real power or inductive reactive power flows into the protected object. This is assuming that this direction has been parameterized as forward. The sign of the power factor cos corresponds to the sign of the real power. In addition to those measured values listed in the table, it is possible to retrieve user defined measurement, metering and set points, if these were generated during the configuration of the device according to Section 5.2 and/or 5.3. The differential and restraint values of the differential protection according to Table 72 can also be read out.
7-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Remote measured values come from the remote ends of the protected object. Currents, voltages and the phase displacement between local and remote measured values can be viewed for each device of the differential protection system. Furthermore the addresses of the partner devices are transmitted to the substation. Thus all important data are available in one place. The remote measured values are listed in Table 7-3.
Table 7-1
Operational measured values of the local device Measured values primary A A A kV kV kV kV MVA, MW, MVAR (abs) Hz % % secondary A A A V V V V (abs) Hz
IL1, IL2, IL3 3I0 (IL1IL2), (IL2IL3), (IL3IL1) I1, I2 UL1L2, UL2L3, UL3L1 UL1E, UL2E, UL3E 3U0 (UL1UL2), (UL2UL3), (UL3UL1) (UL1IL1), (UL2IL2), (UL3IL3) U1, U2 S, P, Q cos f L1/trip, L2/trip, L3/trip /trip
phase currents earth currents phase angles of phase currents in relation positive and negative sequence currents line voltages phaseearth voltages displacement voltage phase angles of phase voltages in relation phase angles of phase voltages in relation to phase currents positive and negative sequence voltages apparent, real, and reactive power power factor frequency thermal value of each line related to trip value thermal value, related to trip value, calculated according to the configured method
Table 7-2
Measured values of the differential protection Measured values % referred to operational nominal current 1) operational nominal current 1)
IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3
calculated differential currents of the three lines
IRestL1, IRestL2, IRestL3 calculated restraint currents of the three lines

1
) for lines acc. to address 1104 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address 1106 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-15
Table 7-3
Operating measured values transmitted from the other end in comparison with the local operating measured values Data % referred to (absolute) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal voltage /3 2) operating nominal voltage / 3 2)
Device ADR IL1, IL2, IL3 remote IL1, IL2, IL3 local (IL1), (IL2), (IL3)
device address of the remote device phase currents of the remote device phase currents of the local device phase angles between remote and local phase currents
UL1, UL2, UL3 remote voltages of remote device UL1, UL2, UL3 local voltages of local device (UL1), (UL2), (UL3) phase angles between remote and local voltages
1
) for lines acc. to address 1104 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address 1106 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) ) acc. to address 1103 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)
With a device ready for operation, first press the
MENU
Use the key to select the menu item Measurement, and switch to the list of measured values using the key. The MEASUREMENT selection appears. See figure 7-17.
MAIN MENU 02/05 --------------------Annunciation > 1 >Measurement > 2
MEASUREMENT 01/12 ------------------->Operation. pri 01 >Operation. sec 02

Etc.
Figure 7-17
Selection of measured values on the front example
The measured values are divided into the following groups: 01 Operation. pri 11 Operation. sec 21 Percent 51 User Defined 61 Set Points Operating measured values, primary. Operating measured values, secondary. Operating measured values, in percent of nominal quantities. Measured values that are defined by the user during initial setting of the device (see Section 5.3). Impulse counter generated by the user defined logic CFC (according to Section 5.3).
7-16
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
71 Set points (MV) Threshold values generated by the user defined logic CFC (according to Section 5.3). If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots appear. If the value is undefined (e.g., cos , when no current is flowing), then appears (3 horizontal bars). If a measured value overruns, then (3 asterisks) is displayed. Use the key to select the measured value group that has the values desired, and switch to the display of this group with the key. Figure 7-18 shows an example for the display of operating measured values.
MEASUREMENT 01/14 ------------------->Operation. pri 01 >Operation. sec 11

Etc.
OPERATION. PRI 02/25 -------------------->IL1 = 1062.8A >IL2 = 1081.5A

Etc.
Figure 7-18
Viewing operating measured values on the front display
Move up and down in the table of measured value groups using the
and
keys.
Use the key to return to the MEASUREMENT sub-menu. Use the MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4
The measured value groups are found under Measurement (Figure 7-2) with a double click, as shown in Figure 7-19, left.
Figure 7-19
Measurement window in DIGSI 4 example
The measured values are divided into the following groups: Primary (local) with Operational values, primary, Secondary (local) with Operational values, secondary,
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-17
7 Control During Operation Rated in % (local; remote) with Differential an Restraint Current Angles Measurements from relay 1, Measurements from relay 2, Measurements from relay 3, Measurements from relay 4, Measurements from relay 5, Measurements from relay 6, related to nominal operational values. Others with Thermal overload values, User defined measured values, User defined counter, Set point value of measured value, i.o.w. only such values that were generated in the configuration (according to Section 5.2) and/or with the user definable logic CFC (according to Section 5.3). If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots appear. If the value is undefined (e.g., cos , when no current is flowing), then appears (3 horizontal bars). If the measured value overruns, then (3 asterisks) are displayed. Double click on the desired measure value group; e.g. Primary (local). The next sub-group is displayed. Double click on the desired sub-group; e.g. Operational values, primary. By double clicking on an entry in the list on the right side of the window, the associated contents of the measured value group are displayed in another window, as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20
Example of measured values shown in DIGSI 4
7-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.1.3.2
Illustrating Measured Values The IBS-tool allows to illustrate the measured values of both ends of the protected object during commissioning and during operation. The IBS-tool offers a wide range of commissioning and monitoring functions that allows a detailed illustration of the differential protection communication and the power system conditions via a personal computer equipped with a browser. For more details refer to the Online Help for the IBStool. The Online Help can be downloaded from the INTERNET download area under http://www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/siprote1.htm. With the IBS-tool the you can view the local measured values according to Table 7-4 on the PC-screen. Currents and voltages appear as vector diagrams and are indicated as numerical values (such as angles and frequency). See Figure 7-21.
The IBS-Tool
Local Measured Values
Table 7-4
Operational measured values of the local device Measured values primary A A kV kV Hz secondary A A V V Hz
IL1, IL2, IL3 3I0 (IL1IL2), (IL2IL3), (IL3IL1) UL1E, UL2E, UL3E 3U0 (UL1UL2), (UL2UL3), (UL3UL1) (UL1IL1), (UL2IL2), (UL3IL3) f
phase currents earth current phase angles of phase currents in relation phaseearth voltages displacement voltage phase angles of phase voltages in relation phase angles of phase voltages in relation to phase currents frequency
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-19
Figure 7-21
Local measured values example for voltages and currents
Remote Measured Values
For the remote device in case of more than two ends for each of the remote devices the local measured values can be compared with the remote measured values, refer to Table 7-5. Figure 7-22 gives an example.
Table 7-5
Operating measured values transmitted from the other ends in comparison with the local operating measured values Data % referred to (absolute) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal voltage /3 2)
Device ADR IL1, IL2, IL3 remote IL1, IL2, IL3 local (IL1), (IL2), (IL3) UL1, UL2, UL3 remote
1) 2
device address of the remote device phase currents of the remote device phase currents of the local device phase angles between remote and local phase currents voltages of remote device
for lines acc. to address 1104 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address 1106 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN)
) acc. to address 1103 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)
7-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 7-5
Operating measured values transmitted from the other ends in comparison with the local operating measured values Data % referred to operating nominal voltage / 3 2)
UL1, UL2, UL3 local
voltages of local device
(UL1), (UL2), (UL3) phase angles between remote and local voltages
1
) for lines acc. to address 1104 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address 1106 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) ) acc. to address 1103 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)
Figure 7-22
Local and remote measured values example for voltages and (flowing) currents
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-21
Values Measured by the Differential Protection
The differential and restraint values are listed below the local and remote addresses (Figure 7-22). Additionally the position of the differential and restraint values can be viewed in the pickup characteristic. See Figure 7-23.
Figure 7-23
Pickup characteristic of the differential protection - example showing an operating state
7.1.3.3
Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points In the 7SD52 measured value set-points can be configured with the user definable logic CFC (see Section 5.3). If during normal operation a measured value reaches one of these set-points, the device generates an alarm which is indicated as an operational event. As is the case for all operational messages, it is also possible in this case to output the information to LED and/or output relay and via the interfaces. If such set-points were defined during the configuration of the device, they can be viewed and with password No. 5 they can be changed:
7-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Use the key to select the menu item Measurement, and switch to the list of measured values using the key. The MEASUREMENT selection appears. There, select the menu item Set Points (MV) with the list of limit values using the key (see Figure 7-24). key, and switch to the
Measurement 13/14 -------------------->Set Points(MV) 71 Reset 81
SET POINTS (MV) 01/11 --------------------IL1 Limit 100.0 A IL2 Limit 100.0 A u.s.w.
PW Settings? = ------
ENTER
Enter password Nr. 5 (for individual parameters) and confirm with ENTER
IL1 Limit Are you sure? >Yes No Escape

Figure 7-24
90.0%
ENTER
ENTER
Setting of set-points on the device front example
With the keys
and
paging up and down in the set-point table is possible. and and sub-
To change a set-point, it must be marked by means of the keys sequently the key ENTER must be pressed.
A prompt for the entry of password No. 5 (for individual parameters) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation thereof with ENTER , the current value appears in a frame with a flashing cursor. The current value must be overwritten with the desired new value with the numeric keys. If the permissible range for the setting value is exceeded to the top or the bottom, the maximum or minimum set point value appears at the bottom of the display when the value is entered. Press the
ENTER .key.
The new value now appears in the list of set point values.
In the same way, further set points, if available, can be modified. If this level is exited with the key or MENU the query Are you sure?, with the default answer Yes appears (Figure 7-23). Confirm with the key ENTER , if the modified value must be accepted. If the value must not be modified the key, so that the answer No is marked, and confirm with the ENTER key. If the value is to be modified once more, mark Abort, confirm this with the ENTER key and re-enter the value. From PC with DIGSI 4
Set points are only available in online-mode. The metered value groups are found under Measurement (Figure 7-25) with a double click. Select Other and then Set Points (Measured Values)(Figure 7-25). By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-23
mouse button, open the context menu and click on Set, as shown in Figure 7-25. A password inquiry (password no. 5 for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue field Set Metered Value is opened. Enter the desired value in the entry field. Then click on OK. The entered value is transferred to the device and the display within the window in Figure 7-25 is updated.
Figure 7-25
Setting of set-points in DIGSI 4 example
7.1.3.4
Retrieval and Resetting of User Defined Pulse Metered Values (PMV) In the 7SD52 it is possible to define pulse metered values with the user definable logic (CFC) (see Section 5.3). If such pulse metered values were defined during the configuration of the device, they can with password No. 5 be reset to 0:
With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Use the key to select the menu item Measurement, and switch to the list of measured values using the key. The MEASUREMENT selection appears. There select with key the menu item User Defined Counter and switch to the RESET option with the key (refer to Figure 7-26).
Reset -------------------Meter res > 0

Figure 7-26 Resetting of pulse metered values on the device front
7-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
With the keys are available.
and
you may page up and down in the table, if several positions and , and then se-
If one of the memories should be reset, mark it with the keys lect it by pressing the ENTER key.
A prompt to enter the password No. 5 (for individual parameters) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation with ENTER , the reset command is executed. Press the
ENTER
key. The display confirms the entry with Change OK. Continue.
ENTER
Confirm again by pressing the
key. The resetting is complete.
If further counters are available, they can be reset in the same manner. With the key, a return to the level Measurement is possible, with the MENU key, you may jump to the MAIN MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4
Double click on Measurement (Figure 7-2). Select Other and then User Defined. By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right mouse button, open the context menu and click on Set. A password inquiry (password for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue field Set Value is opened. Enter the desired value in the entry field, if applicable, the value 0. Then click on OK. The new value is transferred to the relay.
7.1.4
Fault Records
Waveform or rms data is stored in the device and can be graphically represented on a personal computer using DIGSI 4, together with the graphic program SIGRA 4. The settings associated with fault recording such as duration and pre- and post-trigger times had been are set according to Chapter 6.
7.1.4.1
Viewing Fault Records
To view the fault recording data on a screen, one of the programs SIGRA 4 or Comtrade Viewer (included with SIMATIC Manager) is needed. Do the following: Double click on Oscillographic Records (Figure 7-27). The folders listed in the right window show an overview of oscillographic records. The records are identified with a network fault number, a fault record number, and the date and time. By double clicking on an fault record in the list view in the right side of the window, one of the above programs is opened, and the selected waveform data are loaded. (See also DIGSI 4, Operating Handbook, order no. E50417H1176C097, Subsection 8.3.3).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-25
Figure 7-27
Retrieval of fault records in DIGSI 4 example
SIGRA 4 provides support in the analysis of faults on the power system. The program graphically prepares the data recorded during a fault, and calculates additional measurement quantities, such as impedances or rms values. The quantities can be represented in these views: Time signals Phasor diagrams Locus diagrams Harmonics Selection takes place using the menu bar (View), or clicking in the symbol bar above the represented switching fields. Figure 7-28 shows all four views simultaneously. The recorded data read into the PC memory are first shown in full on the screen. Current, and possibly voltage, for each phase and the ground are represented separately. The fault number, data and time, network, and feeder are also displayed. Representation of primary or secondary quantities can be selected. The base values for currents and voltages are the nominal values of the transformers (CTs or VTs). An identical scale is used for all currents, relative to the largest occurring current value, and for all voltages, relative to the largest occurring voltage value.
7-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Figure 7-28
SIGRA 4 Diagrams in the four possible views example
During configuration any signal can be selected in its properties to be displayed in the fault record. (See chapter 5.2.3.) Further details about the many possibilities that SIGRA 4 offers can be found in the SIGRA handbook (Order No. E50417H1176C070).
7.1.4.2
Saving the Fault Records Oscillographic records that are received from the device are not automatically saved in the PC. The data can, however, be saved in files. For more details, see the DIGSI 4 Operating Handbook, Order No. E50417H1176 C097, Section 9.4. The oscillographic records stored in the device do not need to be erased, since the data are stored in a revolving buffer. The oldest data are automatically overwritten by the newest data.
Storage of Fault Recording Data
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-27
7.2
Control of Device Functions

You may change individual functions and messages in a 7SD52 while the device is inservice. Some examples are given above, including erasing stored information (Subsection 7.1.1.4) and setting/resetting counters and set-points (Subsections 7.1.2.2 and 7.1.3.4). In this section, three other control capabilities are discussed. They are correcting the date and time, changing the settings group, and affecting information at the system interface during test operations.
7.2.1
Read and Set Date and Time

Whether and by which synchronization source the internal clock should be set was already determined in Section 5.5, Date and Time Stamping. Once the device is not supplied with power, the internal time clock (RTC) continues working by taking its power from the integrated buffer battery. Right after the running up of the device it displays a plausible time. The time then is changed automatically by the synchronization source linked to the device or is altered manually. Before initiating a synchronization process which is going to stamp a valid time, different types of time indication in the device display are possible. The following paragraph gives you more details about this matter. In a differential protection system with 7SD52 devices the time is usually synchronized by only one device, the so-called Timing master. Generally it is the device with index 1. It synchronizes all partner-devices via the protection communication. The time can therefore only be changed in this device. However, the state and time can be read out in all devices of a differential protection system at any time.
Time Status
Besides the display of date and time, the status of these readings is also provided. The text of the status display can have the appearances given in Table 7-6, under regular conditions of time control.
Table 7-6 Status Bits
Time Status No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 not synchronized synchronized
-- -- -- --- -- -- ST -- -- ER --- -- ER ST -- NS ER --- NS -- --
7-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.2 Control of Device Functions
The text symbols, or status bits, for the time status have the following meanings: NS ER ST Not synchronized Time error Daylight savings time Time was neither set manually nor synchronized after power-up. At the moment, there is no cyclical synchronization within the tolerance times (time can jump) The latest synchronization signal received supplied a daylight savings time bit
Representation of the Time
Various representations of the date and time stamp may be given in the DATE/TIME sub-menu and in all messages stamped with the date and time. The year number stored in the device and the values of the status bits Not synchronized and Time error determine the representations. The possible representations and the associated causes are listed in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 Item Representations of Date and Time: Display (Example) Date 1 2 3 4 5
00.00.0000
Year
Time Error
Time Invalid
Time 15?07:15 15?07:15 15?07:15 15:07:15 15?07:15 1990<Year<2090 Year = 1990 Yes Yes No No irrelevant No Yes No Yes
04/19/1999 04?19/1999 04/09/1998

00?00.0000
? appearing in the date and time field indicate that the clock synchronisation has been lost. Item 1 appears if the internal clock RTC did not have a valid time upon start-up. The messages in the memory buffers are dated 01/01/1990. Corrective action: Set the date and time manually (see margin header Changing the Time below). Item 2 appears if the time was actually set, but not synchronized. This can happen: briefly upon device power-up, if synchronization is lost; that is, if the cyclical synchronization is interrupted for a time longer than the set tolerance time. Corrective action: If an external synchronizing source is being used, check the source and the connection. Item 3 is displayed if the RTC had a valid value upon device start-up but the time was neither manually set nor synchronized since. Corrective action: Set the date and time manually, or wait until the cyclical synchronization takes effect.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-29
7 Control During Operation Item 4 displays the normal condition; that is, the time is synchronized cyclically according to the type of operation. Item 5 is displayed if synchronization via the system interface is marked as invalid. Changing the Time The time can be changed by setting the time manually, using the integrated control panel or DIGSI 4, by adjusting the settings for time control. The date and time can be manually set during operation, provided the device allows this. A precondition is that the appropriate type of operation for time control must be selected (see Section 5.7). When the source of time synchronization is internal or pulse via binary input the date and time can be manually set during operation at any instant. The annunciations time error ON and time error OFF appear in the annunciation log to indicate time synchronization and loss of time synchronization, respectively. In the other operating modes, manual adjustments are only accepted if the synchronization is momentarily lost. The messages time error ON and time error OFF are given when manually changing the year in the IRIG B mode. Without healthy or external time synchronisation the free running date and time can also be relatively adjusted (+/ 23:59:59) using the entry field Diff.time. This input possibility is not to be confused with the parameter Offset (see Section 5.7), which affects the specific general offset to the received synchronization time of the radio clock receiver (e.g. local time vs. GMT time). From the DeviceFront With a device ready for operation, first press the
MENU
Select Settings, and in the sub-menu SETUP/EXTRAS. To set the date and time manually, choose the selection Date/Time and move to the DATE/TIME display using the key. See Figure 7-29.
SETUP/EXTRAS 01/06 ------------------->Date/Time > 1 >Clock Setup > 2
DATE/TIME Status: -- -- ->06/24/1999 21:07:32 Diff.time: --------
Figure 7-29
Manual date and time adjustment from the front panel
To change one of the previous settings (date, time, differential time), mark the item using the and keys, and then press the ENTER key. The actual setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor. Overwrite this setting with the desired new one using the number keys. Be careful to enter the format properly. Confirm the change with the
ENTER
key.
To change the time offset or the tolerance time for a clock error signal, select Clock Setup under SETUP/EXTRAS, as shown in Figure 7-30. Under Offset, the time offset can be changed. Under Error Time, the time delay for the alarm can be adjust-
7-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
ed. These adjustments are done in the same manner as setting the time, by overwriting the displayed values and confirming with the ENTER key. To return to the SETUP/EXTRAS level, press the return to the MAIN MENU, press the MENU key. key, several times if necessary. To
SETUP/EXTRAS 02/06 ------------------->Date/Time > 1 >Clock Setup > 2
CLOCK SETUP 01/03 -------------------Offset >0min Error Time 2min Source Internal
Figure 7-30
Date and time settings from the front panel
To manually change the date and time of the device: Click on Device in the menu bar as shown in Figure 7-31. Select the command Set Clock.
Figure 7-31
Selecting the command Set Clock in DIGSI 4
A dialog field, Set clock & date in device, is opened. The displayed values are the present date and time. The day of the week is automatically derived from the date and cannot be edited. Edit the input fields Date and Time. The format depends on your regional settings of the PC. See Figure 7-32. Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyy Time: hh.mm.ss Click on OK to transfer the entered values into the device. The previous values are changed and the dialog field is closed.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-31
Figure 7-32 Dialog Field: Set clock & date in device
If you realize during operation that the time offset and tolerance time are set too sensitive, these parameters settings can be changed according to the description in Section 5.5.
7.2.2
Changeover of Setting Groups

Four different setting groups for the protective functions are available. The active group can be changed onsite while the 7SD52 is in-service by using the integrated operating field on the device or the operating interface on a PC running DIGSI 4. Alternatively, you may decide that the active setting group be remotely controlled via binary inputs or the system (SCADA) interface. Password No. 5 (password for individual settings) is required to change setting groups. The first setting group is called group A. The others are groups B, C, and D. If setting group changing is to be used, then settings for the groups to be employed must have been entered (see Section 6) and the switching process must be Enabled under Address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION.
When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Settings and switch to the settings with the key. The selection SETTINGS appears. Using the with the key, select the item Change Group and move to the selection of groups key. The sub-menu CHANGE GROUP appears, as shown in Figure 7-33.
The first Address 0301 is marked. The address displays the setting group presently in effect (in Figure 7-33, the active group is Group A). Using the key, select Address 0302 and confirm with the
ENTER
key.
Enter the password for individual settings, and confirm.
7-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Using the source.
key, select one of the four groups A, B, C, or D, or give control to another
If Binary Input (activation using binary inputs) is selected, setting group switching is controlled by binary inputs, provided appropriate configuration has been done and the necessary physical connections are present (see Section 5.2). If via Protocol is chosen, setting group changes can be controlled via the system serial interface.
CHANGE GROUP 01/02 -------------------0301 ACTIVE GROUP Group A 0302 CHANGE to >Group A >Group A Group B Group C Group D via Binary Input via Protocol Are you sure? Yes No
The currently-active setting group is displayed under Address 0301.
The setting group can be changed under Address 0302: by pressing the ENTER key, after entering the password, two possible alternatives are displayed in a new window each time:
Using the keys, select one of the alternatives and confirm with the ENTER key; The next question (Are you sure?) is answered with Yes and the selected alternative is confirmed, or is answered with No using the key and the change is cancelled with the ENTER key.
ENTER
Figure 7-33
Switching setting groups from the front panel example
Control of the setting groups can always be regained by switching to one of the groups A through D. The key can be used to return to the SETTINGS sub-menu; the pressed to returns to the MAIN MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4
MENU
key can be
By opening the Online directory with a double click in DIGSI 4, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window. See Figure 7-34.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-33
Figure 7-34
Function selection window in DIGSI 4 example
Double click on Settings to find Change Group in the data window (Figure 7-34 right). Double click on Change Group. The Change Group window is opened, as shown in Figure 7-35.
Figure 7-35
Setting group switching in DIGSI 4 example
7-34
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
The active setting group is displayed. To switch to another setting group, click on the field Value and select the desired option from the drop-down list. Before closing the window, transfer the change to the device. This is done by clicking on the button Digsi Device. A request for Password No. 7 (password for setting groups) is given. Enter the correct password, and then click on OK.
7.2.3
Test Messages to the System (SCADA) Interface during Test Operation

Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred via the system (SCADA) interface can be identified with an added message test operation- bit while the devive is being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally transferred via the SCADA interface can be blocked during the testing (Block data transmission). A password for test and diagnostics is required (password no. 4) to block the messages and measured values. Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using the operating panel on the device, or via DIGSI 4. If binary inputs are used, then the appropriate inputs must have been configured.
With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, highlight the menu item Test/Diagnose, and then press the key to enter sub-menu. TEST/DIAGNOSE will appear at the top of the menu. At this point, highlight the menu item Test Enable using the key, and then press the key to enter sub-menu. TEST ENABLE will appear at the top of the menu. See Figure 7-36.
TEST DIAGNOSE 02/06 -------------------Device Reset > 1 >Test Enable > 2 Blk Data Trans> 3 Hardware Test > 4 Set/Reset > 11 SIEMENS Intern 12
Figure 7-36
TEST ENABLE ------------------->Test mode OFF
Applying test mode from the front panel example
To switch to test mode, press the ENTER key, enter the password for test and diagnostics, and confirm with the ENTER key. A new window appears with the options ON and OFF. Use the and keys to select the desired mode, and press the ENTER key. The question Are you sure? is displayed. Highlight the desired response and press the ENTER key. If the mode is changed, the device responds with the message Control Executed.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-35
Use the key to return to the TEST/DIAGNOSE level; press the MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU. The procedure for changing the Block Data Transmission mode is the same. See Figure 7-37 (simplified).
TEST/DIAGNOSE 03/06 ------------------->Blk Data Trans> 3 Hardware Test > 4
BLK DATA TRANS ------------------->DataStop OFF
Figure 7-37
Applying data transmission block from the front panel (simplified) example
The settings for the test mode and the data transmission block are normally OFF. Definitions: Test mode With the ON setting, the test mode-bit is transferred for messages compatible with IEC 608705103. DataStop With the ON setting, no messages or measured values are transferred (data tranmission block).
Click on Device in the menu bar to reach the commands Block Data Transmission or Test Mode. See Figure 7-38.
Figure 7-38
Applying Test Mode or Block Data Transmission in DIGSI 4 example
Click on Block Data Transmission to activate or deactivate the transfer block. After entry of Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and confirmation with OK, the setting change is complete. Activation is indicated with a check mark in front of the command.
7-36
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Follow the same procedure for the command Test Mode, if this option is desired. Note: Remember to change the settings for Test Mode or Block Data Transmission back to the desired, in-service settings (both typically OFF) when the tests are complete.
7.2.4
Changeover of Operating Mode

During testing and station revision it is possible to change the operating mode of a devices in order to perform such work with minimum effect on running operation. The following modes are available: Log out device: logging out a device from the differential protection system with the circuit breaker being switched off. For more than two ends the differential protection continues to be active at the other ends; thus, the other ends may remain switched on. As the local circuit breaker is open (as well as the outgoing disconnector) revision work can be done at the local feeder without affecting operation at the other ends. This mode can also be set via a binary input (FNo 3451 >Logout) if this has been configured when allocating the binary inputs (see also Section 5.2). Test mode: All currents from the other devices are set to zero in the local device. Thus the local device has been isolated from the differential protection system and can be checked. If the device has been logged out before (see above), all the other devices can operate normally. Otherwise, the differential protection system is blocked in all linked devices. Emergency operation with time overcurrent protection is feasible. Commissioning mode: All tripping commands of the differential protection system are blocked. The differential system as an entity can be checked using primary or secondary values. The first two modes are in particular relevant for operation. For mode changeover, password No. 2 is required (for switching/tagging/manual overwriting). Every mode that has been changed is stored in the device safe from an auxiliary voltage failure.
With a device ready for operation first press the
MENU
Select the item Control with and move to the selection of control options using . The selection CONTROL appears. With select the item Taggings and move to the selection of TAGGINGS (see Figure 7-39) using . Then select the item Set with 7-39). and move to the next display SET with (see Figure
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-37
TAGGING 02/02 -------------------Display > 01 >Set > 02
SET 01/03 ------------------->Log out OFF Test mode OFF
Figure 7-39
Set taggings at the front cover example
Using the
and
keys you can select the mode to be set.
With you indicate your intention to change the corresponding mode. The password for interlocked switching (No. 2) will then be requested. Having entered and confirmed the password with ENTER , you can change over to: ON for mode setting, OFF for deleting this mode. Every mode can be determined separately. Press the ENTER .
ENTER
key. Answer the question Are you sure? with Yes, confirm with
If the feeder is still current-carrying, or if the circuit breaker is signalled to be closed by the auxiliary contacts, the device will refuse tag setting for this mode and will show a corresponding message on the display. When the mode has been confirmed, testing and revision works can be done as described above. As the mode set has been saved as tag message, the auxiliary voltage may also be switched off. With the key you return to the MEASUREMENT level, with MENU you can return to the MAIN MENU. In order to change to normal operation proceed in the same way and set the corresponding modes to OFF. From PC with DIGSI 4
When you double-click to open the Online directory in DIGSI 4 you will see the operating functions in the left part of the display window (Figure 7-40).
Figure 7-40
Function selection window in DIGSI 4 example
7-38
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
In the Control subdirectory you can click on the Taggings under Function Selection in the right window. Double-click Taggings. A dialogue box Tagging is opened. (Figure 7-41).
Figure 7-41
Tagging dialogue box
In the Name column the different modes have been listed, Status refers to the current state with OFF meaning that the mode is not effective, ON meaning that it is effective. By clicking one of buttons under Scheduled you can change the desired mode. In a security query you will be requested to confirm this. Then you will be requested to enter the password for switching/tagging/substituting. If you want to make multiple changes, you only have to enter the password before implementing the first action. Having entered the password, confirm with the OK button. If the feeder is still current-carrying, or if the circuit breaker has been signalled closed by the auxiliary contacts, the device refuses tag setting for this mode and displays a corresponding message on the monitor. When the mode has been confirmed, testing and revision works can be done as described above. As the mode set has been saved as tag indication, the auxiliary voltage may also be switched off.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-39
7.3
Circuit Breaker Test Function

The circuit breaker and the trip circuits can be tested during normal operation by execution of a TRIP and CLOSE command via the device. A prerequisite for this test is that the required test commands were allocated to the corresponding command relays during the configuration of the device. It is also possible to test the individual circuit breaker poles, provided that the device is capable of singlepole tripping, the circuit breaker is capable of single-pole tripping and that the wiring and routing has been done accordingly. A maximum of 4 test programs is available (refer to Table 7-8). For the circuit breaker CB1 it may be possible to initiate single- and three-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycles. In the event of three-pole tripping, only item 4 is important.
Table 7-8 Item 1 2 3 4
Circuit breaker test programs Test Program 1-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle phase L1 1-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle phase L2 1-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle phase L3 3-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle associated close command Operational Messages CB1TEST TRIP command Only L1 CB1TEST TRIP command Only L2 CB1TEST TRIP command Only L3 CB1TEST TRIP command L123 CB1TEST CLOSE command
In the event that circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are used to derive the switching state of the circuit breaker via binary inputs to the device, the test cycle can only be initiated when the circuit breaker is in the closed position. A further prerequisite for the initiation of the test is that no protection function in the device has picked up, and that the circuit breaker is ready. The device indicates the status of the test sequence with corresponding messages in the display or on the monitor of a PC. If the device refuses to run or terminates the test sequence, it is likely that one of the preconditions for the execution of the test cycle has not been satisfied. The reason for the refusal or termination is also shown in the front display or monitor of the PC.
CB-TEST running CB-TSTstop FLT. CB-TSTstop OPEN CB-TSTstop NOTr CB-TSTstop CLOS CB-TST .OK. Circuit breaker test in progress Circuit breaker test cannot be started as a system fault is present Circuit breaker test cannot be started as the circuit breaker is not closed Circuit breaker test cannot be started as the circuit breaker is not ready Circuit breaker test has been terminated as the CB is still closed (prior to CB test reclosure) Circuit breaker test cycle has been completed successfully
7-40
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.3 Circuit Breaker Test Function
The following diagram shows the test sequence in principal:
TRIP CLOSE
T TRIP CMD.MIN. T PAUSE TEST T CLS. CMD MAX.
Figure 7-42
TRIP-CLOSE test cycle
The initiation of the test is done via the keypad and display on the front of the device or with a PC running DIGSI 4. Entry of the password (password No. 4 for test and diagnostics) is required.
DANGER!
A successful initiation of a test cycle may cause closure of the circuit breaker if an external reclose device is available!
With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Select the Test/Diagnose option using the DIAGNOSE with the key. With the with the key and enter the sub-menu TEST/
key, the CB test (21) is now marked and the test program is selected key.
A prompt for entry of password No. 4 (test and diagnostics) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation with ENTER , the query Breaker closed? appears, with the default response Yes (Figure 7-43). This must be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key if the circuit breaker is definitely closed. If circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected and marshalled, the device rejects the test cycle when the auxiliary contacts indicate that the circuit breaker is not closed, even if the operator confirms the opposite. Only if no auxiliary contacts are marshalled, will the device rely on the confirmation by the operator. If the test cycle should be cancelled, press the key in response to the above query, so that the answer No is marked. This must be confirmed with the ENTER key. Prior to the confirmation with the ENTER it is possible to toggle between Yes and No with the and keys. Alternatively, the test sequence may also be cancelled by pressing the ESC key.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-41
MAIN MENU 05/05 -------------------->Settings 4 >Test/Diagnose 5
TEST/DIAGNOSE 07/07 -------------------->SIEMENS intern 12 >CB test 21
CB Test 01/08 -------------------->CB1tst L1 1 >CB1tst L2 2 u.s.w. S PW Test+Diagnose? =------ENTER
Select the desired test program or press the relevant numeric key to select the desired test sequence.
Enter password Nr. 4 (for test and diagnostics) and confirm with ENTER .
Breaker closed? >Yes No
Press the ENTER to confirm with Yes and thereby execute the selected breaker test cycle, or change to No with the key to terminate the test when ENTER is pressed.
CB Test 01/08 -------------------->CB1tst L1 1 Control Executed

Figure 7-43
After confirmation that the CB is closed, the CB test cycle is executed, subsequently a feedback message stating successful completion of the test , or a relevant alarm appears.
Circuit breaker trip test cycle from the front of the device
If the Online directory in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operation functions of the device appear in the left hand side of the window. By clicking on the Test function, a list of the available functions appears on the right hand side of the display (Figure 7-44). By a double click on the Circuit breaker test, a dialogue window is opened in which the desired test sequence can be marked for selection. Following a double click, a prompt for the entry of password No. 4 (for test and diagnosis) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation with Ok the test sequence is executed. In the spontaneous event window, the execution of the test is displayed with the corresponding control responses and messages.
7-42
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.3 Circuit Breaker Test Function
Figure 7-44
Circuit breaker trip test in DIGSI 4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-43
7.4
Control of Switchgear
A SIPROTEC 4 device 7SD52 contains control functions that allow for opening and closing of power system switching devices (i.e. circuit breakers). Local control is possible utilizing different elements of the 7SD52. Breaker control from a remote location is also possible using the SCADA interface or DIGSI 4. (Performing control functions with a PC running DIGSI 4, connected to the front serial port, is considered a remote operation for breaker control purposes.) Some control actions from a 7SD52 include unsynchronized commands for circuit breakers, disconnectors, ground switches, etc., and stepping commands for increasing or decreasing transformer LTC steps. Safety mechanisms in the command path ensure a command can only take place if the check of previously defined safety criteria is concluded positively. Note: It is an important precondition for the switchgear control that the corresponding binary inputs and outputs were allocated during the configuration (according to Section 5.2). Furthermore the lockout conditions must have been made available for the device by means of user-definable logic functions (according to Section 5.3). If a power system switching device has auxiliary contacts that indicate the position of the device and these contacts are connected to the 7SD52 and configured as doublepoint indications then the switching device provides feedback indication that are monitored for plausibility of control actions. If a switching device does not indicate either the closed or open position, the display for the switching device indicates an invalid position in the 7SD52. All subsequent control operations to the equipment are interlocked. Control from a 7SD52 to a power system equipment can originate from four sources: Local operation using the operator control panel, Binary inputs, Remote operation using the SCADA interface, Operation with a PC, via the operating interface and DIGSI 4. Switching priority for the four command sources is set using the Switching Authority. For Interlocked Switching, all programmed interlocking conditions are checked before a control operation is performed. If one of the conditions is not met, then the command is rejected and an error message is recorded and displayed. The following tests can be activated (on) or deactivated (off) for a switching device: Switching authority (Local/Remote), Zone controlled (Field interlocking e.g., logic in CFC), Substation controller, to be implemented with Version 4.2, Double operation (blocking of multiple control operations), Blocking by protection (control operations blocked by protective functions), Device position (check SCHEDULED = ACTUAL comparison).
7-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7.4 Control of Switchgear
7.4.1
Display Equipment Position and Control

With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Control, and go to editing the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears (See Figure 7-45).
MAIN MENU 03/05 -------------------Messurement > 2 >Control > 3
CONTROL 01/03 ------------------->Breaker/Switch > 1 Tagging > 2
Figure 7-45
Control selections from the front panel
Select, by means of the key, the item Breaker/Switch, and continue with the item by pressing the key. The selection BREAKER/SWITCH appears. See Figure 7-46. Select Display (default) and press the key. The selection DISPLAY appears, in which the positions of all planned switching devices can be read out.
BREAKER/SWITCH 01/04 ------------------->Display > 1 >Control > 2
DISPLAY 01/03 ------------------->52Breaker OPEN >Disc.Swit. CLOS
Figure 7-46
Display of switch positions in the HMI example
The
key can be used to return to BREAKER/SWITCH.
To control a switching device, select the option Control in the BREAKER/SWITCH sub-menu and press the key to go to the table of operating resources that can be controlled. See Figure 7-47. All planned switching devices appear. The actual position of each switch is displayed first. Use the and keys to move to the desired switch.
BREAKER/SWITCH 02/04 -------------------->Display > 1 >Control > 2
CONTROL 01/03 -------------------52Breaker >CLOS Disc.Swit. CLOS GndSwit. OFF
Figure 7-47
Control of switching devices from the operator control panel example
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-45
Select the switch to be controlled using the
and
keys and press the
ENTER
key.
Enter Password No. 1 (for interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the ENTER key. Note: if the switching mode is NONINTERLOCKED (Test) (Sub-section 7.4.7), all switching operations are only possible with Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching). A new window appears. Depending on the operating and command type of the selected switching device, various options are offered. Move between them using the and keys.
CONTR ---- >OPEN PS > CLOSE Tre Escape

Figure 7-48
1/03 ---ON ON
Selection window for control operations on the front panel example
To perform control, confirm with the ENTER key. A safety inquiry appears, Are you sure?. If the response is YES, the switching operation is initiated (provided the Local command is allowed). A message is displayed and recorded indicating the results of the control action. Acknowledge this by pressing the ENTER key once again. The command is not executed if the switching operation is restricted. The operation may be restricted for reasons pertaining to, for example, switching authority (see Subsection 7.4.6) or interlocking (see Sub-section 7.4.7). A message is displayed and recorded indicating the results of the control action. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key. Parameters to set control properties can be examined in the display. Refer to Sub-section 7.4.4. The key can be used to return to BREAKER/SWITCH. Press the to the MAIN MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4
MENU
key to return
When the Online window in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Clicking on Control displays the associated function selection in the data window. See Figure 749.
Figure 7-49
Window for control of operating resources in DIGSI 4 example
7-46
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
By double clicking on Breaker/Switches, a dialog field is opened in which the present status of each switch is visible. See Figure 7-50. Control can be performed from this dialog box provided the switching authority is set to REMOTE. The switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI 4 at the moment the control window shown in Figure 7-50 is opened. The configuration matrix discussed in Section 5.2 determines the control devices that have information displayed in this field.
Figure 7-50
Dialog box for performing control in DIGSI 4 example
A description of the switching device is displayed in the left column of the dialog field. This represents the contents of the Long Text column within the configuration matrix. The actual position of the switch is displayed in the Status column (OPEN, CLOSE, Intermediat). The switching possibilities are displayed in the Scheduled column. Four control fields are shown in the right part of the dialog field. If a check mark is displayed in one of these fields, AB (Access Block = Block Input Acquisition), TB (Transmission Block = Serial Interface Blocked), TR (Manual Overwriting), and CB (Chatter Block), the associated block function is set or the feedback indications of the device have been simulated. Normally, operating devices are switched in the interlocked (Normal) mode. The configured interlocking conditions are checked before a control command is carried out. As soon as a control command is entered in the Scheduled column, Password No. 1 for interlocked switching is requested for safety reasons. Further control possibilities remain possible until the control dialog field is closed, or the switching mode is changed. If a control command is successfully executed, then the display of the actual condition of the affected switch is updated in the window. Operating resources can be switched without interlocking condition checks; however, the correct Password No. 2 for non-interlocked switching must be entered. Mark the option Unlock by clicking on the field.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-47
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power system conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switching operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property damage.
7.4.2
Manual Overwriting
When using the Control with Feedback feature, the device checks the feedback indications before and after a control command is issued. If for some reason, the physical connection from a circuit breaker auxiliary contact to the binary inputs of the device is broken, inadvertently shorted, or disconnected, commands may be blocked. If this situation occurs, and the affected switching device is to be operated, the desired device position indication can be simulated through manual overwriting (Input Tagging). The entered device position indication in the 7SD52 can be used to simulate and check interlocking conditions. To accomplish manual overwriting in the 7SD52 the binary inputs of the affected device must be decoupled first. AB (Access Block = Block Input Acquisition) This decoupling of the system is accomplished by setting the respective status. The decoupling is discussed in Sub-section 7.4.3.
To enter the desired position indication for a switching device: With a 7SD52 ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Control and go to the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears. By pressing the 51). key, the BREAKER/SWITCH sub-menu is entered (see Figure 7-
Select the item Man. Overwrite using the key, and move to the next selection using the key. MAN. OVERWRITE appears, as shown in Figure 7-51. The actual position of each switching device is displayed. Move to the desired switch using the and keys.
BREAKER/SWITCH 03/04 --------------------Display > 1 Control > 2 >Man. Overwrite > 3 Set status > 4
MAN. OVERWRITE 01/03 -------------------52Breaker >OPEN Disc.Swit. CLOS GndSwit. OPEN
Figure 7-51
Manual overwriting for switching devices from the front panel example
7-48
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
By pressing the ENTER key, a selection window is opened for the marked switch, in which manual overwriting can be done with the options OPEN/CLOSE. See Figure 752. Make the selection using the and keys, and confirm with the
ENTER
key.
ENTER
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the key.
MAN. O ------ >OPEN >52Bre CLOS >Disc.

Figure 7-52
01/03 ------>OPEN CLOS
Selection window for manual overwriting of a switch position, front panel example
A safety inquiry appears: Are you sure? Provided manual overwriting is allowed, a response of YES results in an appropriate message on the display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key again. Manual overwriting is cancelled if the process is restricted because, for example, input ignored is not set (see Subsection 7.4.3). Manual overwriting is also canceled if the user aborts the procedure. The display provides an appropriate message if manual overwriting is canceled. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key. Return to the BREAKER/SWITCH sub-menu using the pressing the MENU key. From PC with DIGSI 4 key, or the MAIN MENU by
For safety reasons, manual overwriting is only possible locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. The feature is not available in DIGSI 4.
7.4.3
Set Status
A feature of the 7SD52 that is especially useful during testing and commissioning of the device is the capability of temporarily removing the coupling between a switching device and the 7SD52, or between the SCADA and the 7SD52, without physically disconnecting the equipment. This type of separation is also necessary, for instance, if a switch position feedback message is not functioning properly (refer to Sub-section 7.4.2). The menu item SET STATUS is used to perform the decoupling. The menu displays a list of all planned switching devices and associated status information identified by a letter. The letters have the following meanings: T Device is tagged (manually overwritten). I Input ignored, which means the acquisition of an input status is de-coupled from the process (from the switch-gear).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-49
7 Control During Operation B Blocked, which means data transmissions to the central device (or SCADASCADA) are blocked. C Chatter block active, which means, because of frequent message changes, the chatter block was set. O Output block active, which means the command output is de-coupled from the process (from the system). None of the listed limitations is in effect. Note: Input ignored only works for physical inputs! Do not set the block for indications created by CFC. key. The MAIN MENU appears.
MENU
Using the key, select the menu item Control and go to editing the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears. Enter the BREAKER/SWITCH menu by pressing the key. Select the item Set Status with the key and switch to the next option using the key. SET STATUS appears, as shown in Figure 7-53.
BREAKER/SWITCH 04/04 --------------------Display > 1 Control > 2 >Man. Overwrite > 3 >Set status > 4
SET STATUS 02/03 -------------------52Breaker T I - - O Disc.Swit.->- - - GndSwit. - - - - -
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
Figure 7-53 Set status at the front panel example
Move the cursor, using the and keys, to each of the second (Input Ignore) and fifth (Control Block) columns of the switching device for which a status change is desired. Entries in this table can only be made in these two columns. Press the ENTER key. A selection window is opened that displays the meaning of the field and the change options that are available. The second column is reserved for setting Input Ignore (I); the fifth for setting the output block (O). The first, third, and fourth columns can only be read in this menu. The example in Figure 7-53 shows the position for the circuit breaker (52) was tagged (T) after the input ignore (I) was set, which means the message input was de-coupled from the system. The output block is active (O), so the command output is also decoupled from the system. For the disconnect switch and the ground switch, no limitations are set.
7-50
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Select the desired changes using the
and
keys, and confirm with the
ENTER
key.
ENTER
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the key.
A safety inquiry appears: Are you sure? If the response is YES, and provided the return routing is allowed, then the display gives an appropriate message. To return to the BREAKER/SWITCH level, press the MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4 key as necessary. Press the
For safety reasons, Status changes are only possible locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. Status changes are not possible in DIGSI 4.
7.4.4
Interlocking
Operating equipment such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and ground switches can be subject to interlocking conditions. These conditions can be viewed at the device under the menu item INTERLOCK; however, the conditions cannot be changed. The Interlock display has an object table similar to the one described for Set Status. The table provides the set interlocking conditions, which prevent, or could prevent, a local control operation. Letters identify the interlocking conditions. The meanings of the letters are: L S Z P Local/Remote (Switching Authority), Equipment is subject to System Interlocking (in Substation Controller). Commands entered locally are sent to the central computer or controller, Zone controlled (Field- or Bay-Interlocking), Check switch position (test actual vs. scheduled),
B Blocking by picked-up protection elements, Non-Interlocked.
With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Control and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears. Select the item Interlock with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection INTERLOCK appears. See Figure 7-54.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-51
CONTROL 03/03 ------------------->Tagging > 2 > >Interlock > 3
INTERLOCK 01/03 ------------------->52Breaker L Z P B >DiscSwit. L Z P B GndSwit. L Z P B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
Figure 7-54
Example of interlocking conditions for switching equipment, front panel
Interlocking is set for each switching device during project planning (see Sub-section 5.2.4) using the matrix and the dialog box Object Properties. Readout of the actively set interlocking is always possible, across the entire path, without a password. If the Online window in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Double clicking on Settings brings up the function selection in the right side of the window. By double clicking on Masking I/O, the matrix is opened. Mark the switching device (in the line for the operating message of the switching device). Using the right mouse key, the properties of the switching device can now be called up. The conditions for Interlock Switching, among other items, are recognizable in the dialog box that opens. Active test conditions are identified with a check mark.
7.4.5
Tagging
To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done. The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in interlocking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as for operating devices.
MENU
Using the key, select the menu item Control and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears. Select the item Tagging with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection TAGGING appears. See Figure 7-55. The status of the tagging is displayed Tagging Display, or changed using Tagging Set.
7-52
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
MAIN MENU 03/05 -------------------Annunciation > 1 Measurement > 2 Control > 3
CONTROL 02/03 --------------------Breaker/Switch > 1 Tagging > 2 Interlock > 3
TAGGING 01/02 --------------------Display > 1 Set > 2
Figure 7-55
Tagging equipment from the HMI example
For safety reasons, tag only locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. Do no tag with DIGSI 4.
7.4.6
Switching Authority
Switching authority determines the command sources that are permitted for control.
With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. Using the key, select the menu item Control and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears. Here, select the menu item Control Auth. with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection CONTROL AUTH. appears (see Figure 7-56). Pressing the are offered.
ENTER
key opens a selection window in which the options LOCAL/REMOTE
CONTROL 04/05 ------------------->Interlock > 3 >Control Auth. > 4
CONTROL AUTH. -------------------Switch Auth.> Local
PW Unlock Control? =-------
ENTER
Enter password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with ENTER
CONTRO ------ >Remote ----Switc Local Local

Figure 7-56 Setting switching authority with the operator control panel example
ENTER
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-53
Choose the desired option using the
and
keys, and confirm with the

ENTER
ENTER
key.
Acknowledge the subsequent message pressing the Use the MENU. From PC with DIGSI 4
key.
key to return to the SWITCH AUTH level; the MENU key to return to the MAIN
For safety reasons, switching authority can only be changed locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. Switching authority cannot be changed with DIGSI 4. To perform control with DIGSI 4, switching authority at the device must be set to REMOTE, or the test conditions for remote control of switching authority must not be set to active. Switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI 4 when the control window (see Figure 7-50) is opened.
7.4.7
Switching Mode
The switching mode can be changed during operation; so, for example, non-interlocked switching can be enabled during the commissioning of the installed equipment.
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power system conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switching operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property damage. key. The MAIN MENU appears.
MENU
Using the key, select the menu item Control and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears. Here, select the menu item Switch Mode with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection SWITCH MODE appears (see Figure 7-57).
CONTROL 05/05 ------------------->Switch Auth > 4 >Switch Mode > 5

Figure 7-57
SWI --->INTERLOCKED IN NONINTERLOCKED NO
Operating menu for switching mode using front panel
Pressing the ENTER key opens a selection window in which the options INTERLOCKED/ NON-INTERLOCKED are offered. Make the choice using the and keys, and confirm with the
ENTER
key.
Acknowledge the safety inquiry that follows by again pressing the ENTER key. Use the key to return to the CONTROL level. Press the MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU. 7-54
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
When the On-line window in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Clicking on Controls brings up the function selection in the right side of the window (Figure 749). By double clicking on Breaker/Switches, a dialog field is opened in which, among other options, the option for interlocked and non-interlocked (Unlock) switching is offered. To switch operating resources without a check of the associated interlocking conditions, mark the option Unlock by clicking in that field, see section 7.3.1. To set the switching mode for interlocked switching, the aforementioned option field must not be marked. The marking is removed by clicking in the field again. Further switching operations are possible until the dialogue field Breaker/Switches is closed, or the switching mode is changed.
7.4.8
Control Messages
In the course of system control, the device generates several messages that document the process. For example, messages may be given to report the end of a command or provide the reason for a command denial.
7.4.9
Other Commands
If the device is equipped with a serial interface for connection to the System (SCADA) interface. it can receive standardized commands (according to the supported protocol) and transmit them to the respective switching devices, or activate internal functions, e.g. block inputs/outputs or set tags (manual overwrite), or release processing of functions in the CFC. This command processing is determined during project planning and configuration of the matrix. n
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7-55
7-56
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Installation and Commissioning
This chapter is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety rules, safety regulations, and the operation of the power system. Installation of the 7SD52 is described in this chapter. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also given. Commissioning tests are provided. Some of the tests require the protected object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4
Mounting and Connections Checking the Connections Commissioning Final Preparation of the Device
8-2 8-24 8-29 8-55
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-1
8 Installation and Commissioning
8.1
Mounting and Connections
Warning!
The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, installation, and application by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, ANSI, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or substantial property damage.
Preconditions
Verification of the ratings of the 7SD52 according to Subsection 3.2.1 as well as matching to ratings of the power equipment must have been completed.
8.1.1
Installation
Depending on the version of the device, the housing size may be 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19 inch rack. For the size 1/2 (Figure 8-1) there are 4 covers and four holes for securing the device, with size 1/1 (Figure 8-2) there are six covers and six securing holes.
G
Panel Flush Mounting
Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, for size 1/ the 2 additional covering caps located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the 1 4 or 6 slots in the mounting flange. Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten with 4 or 6 screws. Refer to Figure 10-5 or 10-6 in Section 10.13 for dimensions. Replace the four or six cover caps. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the device according to the wiring diagram for the panel. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
G G G
8-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.1 Mounting and Connections
Elongated holes
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
MENU
LED
ESC
ENTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
Figure 8-1
Panel flush mounting of a 7SD52 (housing size 1/2)
Elongated holes
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
MENU
LED
ESC
ENTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
Figure 8-2
Panel flush mounting of a 7SD52 (housing size 1/1)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-3
Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting
Depending on the version of the device, the housing size may be 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19 inch rack. For the size 1/2 (Figure 8-3) there are 4 covers and four holes for securing the device, with size 1/1 (Figure 8-4) there are six covers and six securing holes. To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in the appendix in Section A.1.1.
G G
Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws. Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, for size 1 /1 the 2 additional covering caps located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the 4 or 6 slots in the mounting flange. Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws. Replace the four or six covering caps. Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws. Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G G G G
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
MENU
LED
ESC
ENTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
Mounting bracket Figure 8-3 Installing a 7SD52 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/2)
8-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
01/04 1 2
MENU
LED
ESC
ENTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 4 1
8 5 2 0
9 6 3 +/-
Figure 8-4
Installing a 7SD52 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/1)
Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the device according to the wiring diagram for the rack. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figures 10-5 to 10-8 in Section 10.13 for dimensions. Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The crosssectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. Solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area 2.5 mm2) must be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. Connect the screwed terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to the wiring diagram for the panel. Section 2.2 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
Panel Surface Mounting
G G
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-5
8.1.2
Termination variants
Outline diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be checked that the setting configuration of the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) corresponds with the connections to the device.
Currents
The Figures A-15 and A-16 show examples of the current transformer connection options. For the normal connection according to Figure A-15 address 0220 must be set to I4 transformer = In prot. line, and furthermore address 0221 must be set to I4/ Iph CT = 1.000. For the connection as shown in Figure A-16 the setting of address 0220 must also be I4 transformer = In prot. line. The factor 0221 I4/Iph CT may deviate from 1. For notes on how to calculate the factor, refer to Subsection 6.1.1 under Connection of the Currents.
Voltages
This Section is only relevant if the measured voltages are connected to the device, a condition which was already set during the configuration (address 0144, see Section 5.1). The Figures A-17 and A-18 show examples of the voltage transformer connection options. For the normal connection as shown in Figure A-17 the fourth voltage measuring input U4 is not used. Correspondingly address 0210 must be set to U4 transformer = Not connected. The factor in address 0211 Uph / Udelta must however be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording values). Figure A-18 shows the additional connection of an e-n-winding of the voltage transformer set. Address 0210 U4 transformer = Ux transformer must be set. The factor in address 0211 Uph / Udelta depends on the transformation ratio of the en-winding. For more information refer to Connecting the Voltage in Subsection 6.1.1.
Binary Inputs and Outputs
The configuration of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the system conditions, is described in Section 5.2. The preset allocation of the binary inputs and outputs of the device can be found in Tables A-1 and A-2 in Section A.4 of Appendix A. Also check if the labels on the front panel correspond to the configured message functions. If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note: Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for >Set Group Bit 0, the other input for >Set Group Bit 1. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled. To control two setting groups, one binary input set for >Set Group Bit 0 is sufficient since the binary input >Set Group Bit 1, which is not assigned, is considered to be not controlled.
Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs
8-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.1 Mounting and Connections The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active. Table 8-1 shows the relationship between >Set Group Bit 0, >Set Group Bit 1, and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary inputs are illustrated in Figure 8-5. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated binary input is energized (high).
Table 8-1
Setting group selection with binary inputs example
Binary Input Events >Set Group Bit 0 >Set Group Bit 1 no yes no yes
no = not energized yes= energized
Active Group Group A Group B Group C Group D
no no yes yes
Selector switch for setting group A B C D L

Binary input set for: 7 >Set Group Bit 0, High
L+
L+
A B C D
7SD52
L
Binary input set for: 8 >Set Group Bit 1, High
Figure 8-5
Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs
It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage. If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must be volt-free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input. If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure 86). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary contact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The value of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-7
Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.
L+
UCTR UBI 7SD52
7SD52 >RTC Status
RTC
Legend:
R
TC Aux1 Aux2
RTC CB TC Aux1
CB
Relay Tripping Contact Circuit Breaker circuit breaker Trip Coil circuit breaker Auxiliary contact (closed when CB is closed) Aux2 circuit breaker Auxiliary contact (closed when CB is open) R bypass Resistor UCTR Control voltage (trip voltage) input voltage for Binary Input UBI
L
Figure 8-6
Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected. R max + R min R = --------------------------------2 In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as: U CRT U BI min R max = ------------------------------------- R CBTC I BI (High) So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as: U CTR U TC (LOW) R min = R TC ---------------------------------------------- U TC (LOW)
IBI (HIGH) UBI min Constant current with BI on (=1.7 mA) Minimum control voltage for BI =19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V =88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V Control voltage for trip circuit DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping
UCTR RCBTC UCBTC (LOW)
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Sub-section 8.1.3). For the power consumption of the resistance: 2 U CTR 2 P R = I R = --------------------------- R R + R CBTC
8-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Example:
IBI (HIGH) UBI min UCTR RCBTC 1.7 mA (from SIPROTEC 7SD52) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V 88 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V 110 V from trip circuit (control voltage) 500 from trip circuit (resistance of CB trip coil)
UCBTC (LOW) 2 V from trip circuit (max. voltage not to trip breaker)
110 V 19 V R max = --------------------------------- 500 1.7 mA 110 V 2 V R min = 500 ----------------------------- 500 2V R max = 53 k R min = 27 k R max + R min R = ------------------------------- = 40 k 2 The closest standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is:
2 110 V P R = --------------------------------------- 39 k 39 k + 0.5 k
P R 0.3 W
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-9
8.1.3
8.1.3.1
Hardware Modifications
General Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the pick-up threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain applications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In either case, hardware modifications are needed. If modifications are done or interface modules are replaced, please observe the details in Subsections 8.1.3.2 to 8.1.3.5.
Power Supply Voltage
There are different input ranges for the power supply voltage. Refer to the data for the 7SD52 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of Appendix A. The power supplies with the ratings 60/110/125 VDC and 110/125/220/250 VDC are interconvertible. Jumper settings determine the rating. The assignment of these jumpers to the supply voltages are illustrated below in Section 8.1.3.3 under subtitle Input/Output Board I/O1 and I/O 10. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they need not be altered. Jumper settings determine the rating of the current input transducers of the device. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker to 1 A or 5 A. The physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the different current ratings are described below in Section 8.1.3.3 under subtitle Input/Output Board I/O2. Note: If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be recorded under address 0206 CT SECONDARY in the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) (see Subsection 6.1.1).
Nominal Currents
Control Voltages for Binary Inputs
When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corresponds to the rated voltage of the power supply. In general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the pickup voltage of the inputs should be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a pickup voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set according to the function performed. A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The physical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pickup voltages is explained below in Section 8.1.3.3 under Input/Output Board I/O1 and I/O10. Note: If the 7SD52 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and a resistor, are connected in series. The pickup voltage of these inputs must be less than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.
8-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Type of Contact for Binary Outputs
Input and output boards may contain relays the contact of which can be set as normally closed or normally open contact. Therefore it is necessary to rearrange a jumper. Subsection 8.1.3.3, Input/Output Board I/O1 and I/O10 and Input/Output Board I/ O2 describes to which type of relays in which boards this applies. The serial interface modules can be replaced. Which kind of interfaces and how the interfaces can be replaced is described in Replacing Interface Modules, Subsection 8.1.3.4. If the device is equipped with a serial RS 485 port, the RS 485 bus must be terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For this purpose, terminating resistors are provided on the interface modules. The physical arrangement and jumper positions on the interface modules CPUboard are explained in Subsection 8.1.3.4 RS485 Interfaces. As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
Interface Modules
Termination of Serial Interfaces
8.1.3.2
Disassembling the Device If changes to jumper settings are required to modify the rating of the power supply, the nominal rating of the current inputs, the pickup voltage of binary inputs, or the state of the terminating resistors, proceed as follows:
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self-adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement stickers.
Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed: screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip, 1 Philips screwdriver, 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o o o
Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting. If the device has more communication interfaces on the rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting. Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become accessible.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-11
Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with a short ribbon-cable.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs, and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part. The order of the boards for housing size 1/2 is shown in Figure 8-7, for housing size 1 /1 refer to Figure 8-8.
o o o o
At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the CPU board (). To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front cover. Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the CPU board () and the I/O-11 boards (). Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from electrostatic damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in versions of the device for surface mounting, because of the plug connectors. Check the jumpers according to Figures 8-9 to 8-14 and the following notes. Change or remove the jumpers as necessary.
1 2 3
Processor printed circuit board CPU Input/output printed circuit board I/O-1 Input/output printed circuit board I/O-2
Slot 5
1
Slot 19
2
Slot 33
3
7SD52***A/E/J Binary inputs (BI)
BI1 to BI8 Figure 8-7
Front view of the device with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
8-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Processor printed circuit board CPU Input/output printed circuit board I/O-1 Input/output printed circuit board I/O-2 Input/output printed circuit board I/O-1 or I/O10 1)
1
4
1 42 1 42
) depending on version
Slot 5
1
Slot 19
Slot 33
2
Slot 19
4
Slot 33
3
BI1 to BI8
BI9 to BI16
7SD52***C/G/L Binary inputs (BI)

3
BI17 to BI24
BI1 to BI8
BI9 to BI16
7SD52***D/H/M Binary inputs (BI)

3
BI1 to BI8
BI9 to BI16
7SD52***N/Q/S Binary inputs (BI)

3
BI17 to BI24 Figure 8-8
BI1 to BI8
BI9 to BI16
7SD52***P/R/T Binary inputs (BI)
Front view of the device with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-13
8.1.3.3
Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards The design of a jumper setting for the input/output board I/O1 is shown in Figure 89. the input/output board I/O10 in Figure 8-10. The power supply is situated for housing size 1/2 on the input/output board I/O1 ( in Figure 8-7, slot 19), for housing size 1/1 on the input/output board I/O1 ( in Figure 8-8, slot 33 left). The preset rated voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table 8-2, the quiescent state of the life contact is checked according to Table 8-3.
Input/Output Board I/O1 and I/O10
Table 8-2
Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the input/output board I/O1 with power supply Nominal voltage
Jumper X51 X52 X53
DC 60/110/125 V 12 12 and 34 12
DC 110/125/220/250 V AC 115 V 23 23 23
DC 24/48 V Jumpers X51 to X53 not fitted not changeable
can be interchanged
Table 8-3
Jumper settings for the quiescent state of the life contact on the input/output board I/O1 with power supply Open in quiescent state (NO) 12 Closed in quiescent state (NC) 23 presetting 23
Jumper X40
Depending on the device version the contacts of some binary outputs can be changed from normally open to normally closed operation (see also in Appendix, Section A.2). The following outputs can be modified: Version 7SD52D/H/M (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs) BO16 and BO24 (Figure 8-8, slot 19 left and right); Version 7SD52C/G/L (housing size 1/1 with 24 binary outputs) BO16 (Figure 8-8, slot 19 right); Version 7SD52P/R/T (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs and acceleration) BO24 (Figure 8-8, slot 19 left). Table 8-4 shows the jumper settings for the contact mode.
8-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 8-4
Jumper settings for the contact mode of outputs BO16 and BO24 on the input/output board I/O1 printed circuit board slot 19 left slot 19 right for BA16 BA24 BA16 BA24 Jumper X40 X40 X40 X40 Open in quiescent state (NO) 12 12 12 12 Closed in quiescent state (NC) 23 23 23 23 Presetting 12 12 12 12
Device version 7SD52 D/H/M
C/G/L P/R/T
slot 19 right slot 19 left
3 2 1 X51
F1
X40 1 2 3
3 4
X52
3 2 1 X53
Figure 8-9
Input/output board I/O1 with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration
LMH
X36 X35
LMH
X34 X33
LMH
X32 X31
X73 X72 X71
(AD2) (AD1) (AD0)
LMH
X30 X29
LMH
X28 X27
LMH
X26 X25
LMH
X24 X23
LMH
X22 X21
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-15
Figure 8-10
Input/output board I/O10 with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration
Check of the control voltage of the binary inputs: BI1 to BI8 (for housing size 1/2) according to Table 8-5, BI1 to BI24 (for housing size 1/1depending on version) according to Table 8-6.
8-16
LMH
X36 X35
LMH
X34 X33
LMH
X32 X31
X73 X72 X71
(AD2) (AD1) (AD0)
LMH
X30 X29
LMH
X28 X27
LMH
X26 X25
LMH
X24 X23
LMH
X22 X21
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Table 8-5
Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI8 on the input/output board I/O1, for housing size 1/2 Jumper X21/X22 X23/X24 X25/X26 X27/X28 X29/X30 X31/X32 X33/X34 X35/X36 Pickup 17 V 1) L L L L L L L L Pickup 73 V 2) M M M M M M M M Pickup 154 V 3) H H H H H H H H
Binary inputs Slot 19 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
1 2
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 24 to 125 V ) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 110 to 250 V and AC 115 V 3) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 220 to 250 V and AC 115 V
Table 8-6
Jumper settings for the pickup voltage of the binary inputs BI1 through BI24 on the input/output boards I/O1 or I/O10, for housing size 1/1 Binary inputs Jumper X21/X22 X23/X24 X25/X26 X27/X28 X29/X30 X31/X32 X33/X34 X35/X36 Pickup 17 V 1) L L L L L L L L Pickup 73 V 2) M M M M M M M M Pickup 154 V 3) H H H H H H H H
Slot 33 left BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
1
Slot 19 right BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16
Slot 19 left BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 24 to 125 V Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 110 to 250 V and AC 115 V 3 ) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 220 to 250 V and AC 115 V
2)
The jumpers X71 to X73 serve for identification of the modules on the internal serial bus for housing size 1/1. They must not be changed. Table 8-7 shows the jumper positions. These jumpers are not fitted in housing size 1/2.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-17
Table 8-7 Jumper X71 X72 X73
Jumper settings for the bus address of the input/output boards I/O2 Presetting Slot 19 left H L H Presetting Slot 19 right L L H
Input/Output Board I/O2
The design of the input/output board I/O2 is show in Figure 8-11. The contact of BO13 binary output can be changed from normally closed to normally open operation (see also Section A.2, in Appendix A): for housing size 1/2 ( in Figure 8-7, slot 33), for housing size 1/1 ( in Figure 8-8, slot 33, right).
Table 8-8 Jumper X41
Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the contact of output BO13 Open in quiescent state (NO) 12 Closed in quiescent state (NC) 23 Presetting 12
o o
The preset rated currents of the current transformer are checked on the input/output board I/O2. All jumpers must be set unitary for one rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X64) for each current transformer, additionally there is one common jumper X60. The jumpers X71 to X73 serve for identification of the modules on the internal serial bus. They must not be changed. Table 8-9 shows the jumper positions: for housing size 1/2 ( in Figure 8-7, slot 33), for housing size 1/1 ( in Figure 8-8, slot 33, right).
Table 8-9 Jumper X71 X72 X73
Jumper settings for the bus address of the input/output boards I/O2 Presetting 12 (H) 12 (H) 23 (L)
8-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
(AD0) (AD1) (AD2)
5A 3 2 1A 1 X60
T2
X62 1A 1 2 5A 3
T1
T3
X63 1A 1 2 5A 3
T4
5A 3 2 1A 1 X64
Figure 8-11
Jumpers on the input/output board I/O2 for the input current transformers
5A 3 2 1A 1 X61
X41 3 2 1
3 3 L 2 2 1 1 H X71 X72 X73
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-19
8.1.3.4
Interface Modules The interface modules are located on the processor board CPU ( in Figure 8-7 or Figure 8-8). Figure 8-12 shows the CPU board and the location of the interface modules.
Replacing Interface Modules
Mounting location (rear side of housing) Protection data interface 2 E
Protection data interface 1
Service interface
System interface
Figure 8-12
Processor board CPU with the interface modules (max. complement)
Please note the following: Interface modules can only be exchanged for devices with flush mounting housing. Interface modules for devices with surface mounting housing must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre.
8-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.1 Mounting and Connections Use only interface modules that can be ordered as an option of the device (see also Appendix A.1). With interfaces with bus capability, ensure that the bus termination is correct (if applicable); see head margin RS485 Interfaces below.
Table 8-10
Exchange interface modules for devices with flush mounting housing Mounting Location Exchange Module RS232
Interface
System Interface
RS485 LWL 820 nm RS232
Service Interface
RS485 LWL 820 nm
Protection Data Interface 1 Protection Data Interface 2
D E
FO5 to FO8 FO5 to FO8
The ordering numbers of the exchange modules are listed in Appendix A.1.1 (Accessories). RS232 Interfaces The interface RS232 can be transformed into interface RS485 according to Figure 814. Figure 8-12 shows the PCB of the CPU with the location of the modules. Figure 8-13 shows how jumpers of interface RS232 are located on the interface module. Here, terminating resistors are not required. They are always disabled.
1 2 3 1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3 1 2 3 X3 X6 X7 X4 X5 1 2 3 8X
Jumpers illustrated in Factory position
X13 C53207A324-B180
Figure 8-13
Location of the jumpers on interface module for RS232
With jumper X11 the flow control which is important for modem communication is enabled. Jumper settings are explained in the following: Jumper setting 23: The modem control signals CTS (Clear-To-Send) according to RS232 are not available. This is a standard connection via star coupler or optical fibre 8-21
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
converter. They are not required since the connection to the SIPROTEC devices is always operated in the half-duplex mode. Please use connection cable with order number 7XV51004. Jumper setting 12: Modem signals are made available. For a direct RS232 connection between the device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole).
Table 8-11 Jumper X11
Jumper setting for CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module /CTS from RS232 interface 12 /CTS controlled by /RTS 23 *)
*) Factory setting
RS485 Interfaces
The interface RS485 can be transformed into interface RS232 according to Figure 813. Using interfaces with bus capability requires a termination for the last device at the bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be switched to the line. Talking about the 7SD52 this refers to the version with the RS485 interface. The terminating resistors are connected to the corresponding interface module that is mounted to the processor input/output board CPU (Figure 8-12). The module for the RS485 interface is illustrated in Figure 8-14. When it leaves the facilities the jumpers are set in such a way that the terminating resistors are switched off. The two jumpers of a module must always be plugged in the same direction.
Terminating resistors Jumper X3 X4 Connected 2-3 2-3 Disconnected 1-2*) 1-2*) *) Factory Setting
1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3
X3 X6 X7 X4 X5
1 2 3
X13 C53207A324-B180
8X
1 2 3
1 2 3
Figure 8-14
Location of the jumpers for the terminating resistors of the RS485interface module
Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug connectors) as shown in Figure 8-15. In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface module must be switched out.
8-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
+5 V 390 A/A 220 B/B 390

Figure 8-15 External terminating resistors
8.1.3.5
To Reassemble the Device To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:
Carefully insert the boards into the housing. The installation locations of the boards are shown in Figures 8-7 and 8-8. For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to insert the CPU board. The installation is easier with the lever. First insert the plug connectors on the ribbon cable in the input/output boards I/O and then on the processor board CPU. Be careful not to bend any of the connecting pins! Do not use force! Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor board CPU and the front cover in the socket on the front cover. Press the latches of the plug connectors together. Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws. Replace the covers. Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o o o o o o
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-23
8.2
8.2.1
Checking the Connections

Data Connections
The tables of the following margin headers list the pin-assignments for the different serial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface. The physical arrangement of the connectors is illustrated in Figure 8-16.
5 9 6 1
Operating Interface at the Front Side
RS232-LWL RS232 RS485
1 6 9 5
1 6 9 5
Time Synchronization Interface at the Rear Side (Panel Flush Mounting)
Serial Interface at the Rear Side Figure 8-16 9-pin D-subminiature sockets
PC Operating Interface at Front
When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between the SIPROTEC device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1 for an ordering description of the cable. When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control system, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other device, and vice versa. The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO 2110 (see also Table 8-12): TxD RxD RTS CTS DGND data transmit data receive request to send clear to send signal/chassis ground
System (SCADA) Interface
The cable shield is to be grounded at only both ends. The physical arrangement of the connectors is illustrated in Subsection 2.1.5, Figure 2-16.
8-24
P-Slave AME
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.2 Checking the Connections
Table 8-12 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pin-assignment of the D-subminiature ports RS232 RS485 RS485
Operating interface RxD TxD DGND RTS CTS
Shield (with shield ends electrically connected) RxD TxD DGND RTS CTS A/A' (RxD/TxDN) C/C' (DGND) *) B/B' (RxD/TxDP) B/B' (RxD/TxDP) CNTRA (TTL) C/C' (DGND) +5 V (max. load 100 mA) A/A' (RxD/TxDN)
*) Pin 7 also may carry the RS232 RTS signal to an RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!
RS 485 Termination
The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B' with a common relative potential C/C' (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do not. Jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface modules RS 485 (Figure 8-14). It is also possible that the terminating resistors are arranged externally (Figure 8-15). If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors switched in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Time Synchronization Interface
Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the connections are made as indicated in Table 8-13.
Table 8-13 Pin-No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pin-assignment for the D-subminiature port of the time synchronization interface Designation P24_TSIG P5_TSIG M_TSIG M_TSYNC*) Screen P12_TSIG P_TSYNC*) Screen Signal meaning Input 24 V Input 5 V Return Line Return Line*) Shield potential Input 12 V Input 24 V*) Shield potential
*) only for GPS signal
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-25
Optical Fibres
Refer to Subsection 8.2.2 for differential protection communication. For the system (SCADA) interface, signals transmitted over optical fibres are unaffected by interference. The fibres guarantee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The character idle state for the optical fibre interface is Light off. If this setting is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI 4, as described in Section 5.4.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
8.2.2
Checking the Differential Protection Communication

The differential protection communication is conducted either directly from device to device via optical fibres or via communication converters and a communication network or a dedicated transmission medium.
Optical Fibres
The direct optical fibre connection is visually checked like the other optical fibre connections. There is one connection for each direction. Therefore the output of the one device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. Transmission and receiving connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and receive channels is relevant. For use of the FO5modules and the recommended fibre type for short distances, laser class 1 is valid. Higher laser powers can occur in other cases.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look into the LEDs or fibre-optic elements! Do not use optical instruments! Laser class 3A according to EN 608251.
If using more than two devices, the connections of all protection data interfaces are checked according the topology selected. Communication Converter Optical fibres are usually used for the connections between the devices and communication converters. The optical fibres are checked in the same manner as the optical fibre direct connections. Set address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER or 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER (see also Section 6.4.2) to configure the correct type of connection. Further connections For further connections a visual control is sufficient for the time being. Electrical and functional controls are done during commissioning (Section 8.3.5).
8-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.2 Checking the Connections
8.2.3
Checking Power Plant Connections
Warning!
Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages. They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values see Subsection 10.2.1 under Technical Data.
Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature and to minimize humidity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
o o
Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the power supply and the measured voltages must be opened. Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connection diagrams:
G G G G G G G G
Are the current transformers grounded properly? Are the polarities of the current transformers the same? Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct? Are the voltage transformers grounded properly (if used)? Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct (if used)? Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct (if used)? Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used)? Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (if used, e.g. with open delta winding)?
Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode (open). The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.
G G
Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 8-7 or 8-8). Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O2 board ( in Figure 8-7 or 8-8), and pull the board out until there is no contact between the board and the rear connections of the device. At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from the CTs. Firmly re-insert the I/O2 board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend any connector pins! Do not use force!
G G
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-27
G G
Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again. Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the meter is appropriate. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. Check the polarity and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals. The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power consumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current of capacitors. Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches. Disconnect the measuring equipment; restore the normal power supply connections. Apply voltage to the power supply. Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used). Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct. Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used) and the power supply. Check the trip circuits to the power system circuit breakers. Check the close circuits to the power system circuit breakers (if used). Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct. Check the signalling connections. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. If communication converters are used, check the auxiliary voltage supply for the communication converters. If the communication converter is connected to the communication network, its device-ready-relay (DR) picks up. This also signalizes that the clock pulse of the communication network is recognized. Further checks are performed according to Subsection 8.3.5. Please also observe carefully the documentation on the communication converter.
8-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
8.3
Commissioning
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. Particular attention must be drawn to the following: The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor before any other electrical connection is made. Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!). Wait for at least 10 s after having disconnected the supply voltage before you reapply the voltage in order to achieve defined initial conditions. The limit values stated in the Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip and close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before the current leads to the device are disconnected! If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits, it is sufficient to place them into the Test position provided the short-circuit functions has been previously tested. For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.
Warning!
Primary tests must only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-29
8.3.1
Testing Mode and Transmission Blocking

If the device is connected to a substation control system or a server, the user is able to modify, in some protocols, information that is transmitted to the substation (see Section A.5 Protocol Dependent Functions in Appendix A). In the testing mode all messages sent from a SIPROTEC4device to the substation are marked with an extra test bit so that the substation is able to identify them as messages announcing no real faults. Furthermore the transmission blocking function leads to a total blocking of the message transmission process via the system interface in the testing mode. Refer to Subsection 7.2.3 to know how the testing mode and the transmission blocking can be enabled and disabled. Please note that it is necessary to be Online during the configuration of the device with DIGSI 4 to be able to use the testing mode.
8.3.2
Checking Time Synchronization

If external time synchronization sources are used (IRIG B, DCF77) the data of the time source (antenna system, time generator) are checked (see Subsection 10.1.4 under Time Synchronization). Using time signal IRIG B or DCF77 the correct time must appear at last 3 minutes after startup of the processor system, i.e. the clock alarm must go off (message Alarm Clock OFF in the operating messages or spontaneous messages, refer also to Subsection 7.2.1, margin header Time Status). Additionally, if GPSsynchronization is used, check that the GPS signal is received: Approximately 3 seconds after startup of the processor system, the message GPS loss OFF appears.
8.3.3
Checking the System (SCADA) Interface

Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI 4 operational function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test feature while the device is in service on a live system!
Preliminary Notes
DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the SIPROTEC4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!
8-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Note: After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test. The system interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI 4:
G G G
Double-click on the Online directory to open the required dialogue box. Click on Test and the functional options appear on the right side of the window. Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list view. The dialogue box Generate Indications opens (refer to Figure 8-17).
Structure of the Dialogue Box
In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system interface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Status Scheduled the user has to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By doubleclicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.
Figure 8-17
Dialogue box: Generate indications
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-31
Changing the Operating State
Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column Action you will be asked for password no. 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password messages can be issued. To do so, click on Send. The corresponding message is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC4 device as well as from the central master computer. As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message Direction
For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is to be checked under Status Scheduled:
G G
Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and refer to DANGER!) Click on Send and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central station and shows the desired reaction.
Test in Command Direction Exiting the Test Mode
The information beginning with > is transmitted towards the device. This kind of information must be sent by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
f
To end the system interface test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the processor system starting up. The dialogue box closes.
8.3.4
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs

The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually and precisely controlled using DIGSI 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not be used while the device is in service on a live system.
Preliminary Notes
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI 4 results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be operated as a result of these actions! Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test. The hardware test can be done using DIGSI 4 in the online operating mode:
G G G
Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear. Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen. Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialogue box of the same name opens (see Figure 8-18).
8-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Figure 8-18
Dialogue box for hardware test example
Structure of the Test Dialogue Box
The dialogue box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components within the associated group can be turned on or off. In the Status column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol. The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text under the Scheduled column, which is next to the Status column. The intended condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state. The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components.
Changing the Hardware Conditions
To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the Scheduled column. Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Binary Outputs
Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay of the 7SD52 and the plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-33
switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command cannot be executed.
G G G
Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under DANGER!). Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduledcell in the dialog box. The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading Exiting the Procedure), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests.
Test of the Binary Inputs
To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SD52 the condition in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do this, the dialogue box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
G G
Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated. The response of the device must be checked in the Statuscolumn of the dialogue box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display.
If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
G
Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading Exiting the Procedure).
Test of the LEDs
The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protection function or operation of the LED reset key. When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hardware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs: for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed, for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked, for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update (20sec) field is marked.
Updating the Display
Exiting the Procedure
To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.
8-34
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
8.3.5
General
Checking the Communication Topology

The communication topology can either be checked from the PC using DIGSI 4 or a web browser via the IBS-Tool. If you choose to work with the IBS-Tool, please note the Help files referring to the IBS-Tool. You can either connect the PC to the device locally using the operator interface at the front, or the service interface at the rear of the device (Figure 8-19). Or you can log into the device using a modem via the service interface (example in Figure 8-20). If you use the IBS-Tool:
G
Make sure that the 12-digit IP-address valid for the browser is set correctly according to the following format: ***.***.***.***. A three-digit block of the IP address is inserted into each address from 4401 to 4404, or 4411 to 4414. Set the address 4405 or 4415 NUM LOCK to No, if you are directly interfaced to the device. You will then have the option to operate the device with the IBS-Tool. If you are interfaced to the devices via modem you can set the address 4405 or 4415 NUM LOCK to No. You will then have the option to access all devices with the IBS-Tool.
G G
7SD52
7SD52
Figure 8-19
PC interfacing directly to the device schematic example
7SD52
Mo d em Mo
7SD52
d em
:
Figure 8-20
Mo
d em
PC interfacing via modem schematic example
Checking a Connection Using Direct Link
For two devices linked with fibre optical cables (as in Figure 8-19 or 8-20), this connection is checked as follows.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-35
o o
Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on. Check in the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations (see Subsection 7.1.1.6) for the following:
G
If the message PI1 with (protection data interface 1 connected with, FNo. 3243) is provided with the device index of the other device, a link has been established and one device has recognized the other. If the protection data interface 2 has also been connected, a corresponding message will appear (FNo 3244).
In the event of a communication link error the message PI1 Data fault (FNo. 3229) or PI2 Data fault (FNo. 3231) will be displayed. In this case, check the fibre optical cable link again:
G G G
Have the devices been linked correctly and no cables been interchanged? Are the cables free from mechanical damage, intact, and the connectors locked? Repeat check if necessary.
Proceed with Consistency of Topology and Parameterization. Checking a Connection via a Communication Converter If a communication converter is used, please note the instructions enclosed with the device. The communication converter has a test setting where its outputs are looped back to the inputs. Links via the communication converter are tested by means of local loop-back (Figure 8-21, left).
Local Communication Converter
Remote Communication Converter
7SD52
optical
CC1
electrical
Communication Network
electrical
CC2
optical
7SD52
Figure 8-21
local
Differential protection communication via communication converter and communication network schematic example
o o
Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on. First configure the communication converter CC1:
G
Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage from both poles.
DANGER!
Before opening the communication converter, it is absolutely necessary to isolate it from the auxiliary supply voltage at all poles! There is a danger to life by energized parts!
8-36
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
G G
Open the communication converter. Set the jumpers to the matching position for the correct interface type and transmission rate; they must be identical with the parameterization of the 7SD52 (address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER for protection data interface 1, 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER for protection data interface 2, see also Subsection 6.4.2). Move the communication converter into test position (jumper X32 in position 23). Close the communication converter housing.
G G
o o o
Reconnect the auxiliary supply voltage for the communication converter. The communication network (X.21 or G.703.1) must be active and connected to the communication converter. Check this by means of the device readycontact of the communication converter (continuity at the NO contact). If the device readycontact of the communication converter does not close, check the connection between the communication converter and the net (communication device). The communication device must emit the correct transmitter clock to the communication converter. Change the interface parameters at the 7SD52 (at the device front or via DIGSI 4):
G G
Address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing protection data interface 1, Address 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing protection data interface 2.
Check the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6):
G G G G
Message 3217 PI1 Data reflec ON (Protection interface 1 data reflection ON) when you are testing protection data interface 1. Message 3218 PI2 Data reflec ON (Protection interface 2data reflection ON) when you are testing protection data interface 2. When working with both interfaces, note that the current interface of the 7SD52 is connected to its associated communication converter. If the message is not transmitted check for the following: Has the 7SD52 fibre optical transmitting terminal output been correctly linked with the fibre optical receiving terminal input of the communication converter and vice versa (No erroneous interchanging)? Does the 7SD52 device have the correct interface module and is it working correctly? Are the fibre optic cables intact? Are the parameter settings for interface type and transmission rate at the communication converter correct (see above; note the DANGER instruction!)?
Repeat the check after correction if necessary.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-37
Reset the interface parameters at the 7SD52 correctly:

G G
Address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = required setting, when you have tested the protection data interface 1, Address 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER = required setting, when you have tested the protection data interface 1.
o o o
Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage of the communication converter at both poles. Note the above DANGER instruction! Reset the communication converter to normal position (X32 in position 1-2) and close the housing again. Reconnect the supply voltage of the communication converter. Perform the above check at the other end with the device being connected there and its corresponding communication converter. Continue with Consistency of Topology and Parameterization.
Consistency of Topology and Parameterization
Having performed the above checks, the linking of a device pair including their communication converters if applicable has been completely tested and connected to auxiliary supply voltage. Now the devices communicate by themselves.
Now check the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6) of the device where you are working:
G
Message FNo. 3243 PI1 with (protection data interface 1 linked with) followed by the device index of the other device, if interface 1 is applying. For protection data interface 2 the message is FNo 3244 PI2 with. If the devices are at least connected once, the message FNo 3464 Chaintopology will then be displayed, too. If no other devices are involved in the topology as an entirety, the message FNo 3464 Topol complete (Topology complete) will appear. And if the device parameterization is also consistent, i.e. the prerequisites for setting the Configuration of the Scope of Functions (Section 5.1), the Power System Data 1 (6.1.1), the General Protection Data (Power System Data 2) (6.1.3), the settings for Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology (Section 6.4.2) have been considered, the fault message, i.e. FNo. 3229 PI1 Data fault or FNo. 3231 PI2 Data fault, for the interface just checked, will disappear. The communication and consistency test has now been completed. If the fault message of the interface being checked does not disappear, however, the fault must be found and eliminated. Table 8-14 lists messages that indicate such faults.
G G G
8-38
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Table 8-14 FNo 3233
Messages announcing inconsistency Setting Meaning / Measures
DT inconsistent Device table inconsistent: the indexing of the devices is in-
consistent (missing numbers or one number used twice, see Section 6.4.2
3234 3235 DT unequal Par. different
Device table unequal: the ID-numbers of the devices are unequal (see Section 6.4.2)
Parametrization different: different functional parameters were set for the devices. They have to be equal at both ends:
Differential protection available or not (see Section 5.1), Transformer in protected zone or not (see Section 5.1), Nominal frequency (see Section 6.1.1), Operational power or current (see Section 6.1.3)
Availability of the Protection Data Interfaces
The quality of protection data transmission depends on the availability of the protection data interfaces and the transmission. Therefore, check the statistic information of the device. For further details refer to Subsection 7.1.2.1. Check the following messages:
G
FNo 7753 PI1A/m indicates the availability of the protection data interface 1 per minute, FNo 7754 PI1A/h per hour. After 2 minutes of data transfer the first value should indicate at least 99.85 % per-minute-availability, after one hour the per-houravailability should be at least 99.85 %. If protection data interface 2 is used, the corresponding messages can be found under FNo 7755 PI2A/m (per minute) and FNo 7756 PI2A/h (per hour). If the values are not attained, the protection communication must be checked.
G G
If GPSsynchronization is used, the transmission times can be retrieved, separately for each direction:
G G
Concerning protection data interface 1, FNo 7876 PI1 TD S indicates the transmission time in sending direction, FNo 7875 PI1 TD R in receiving direction. Concerning protection data interface 2, FNo 7878 PI2 TD S indicates the transmission time in sending direction, FNo 7877 PI2 TD R in receiving direction. FNo 7751 PI1 TD indicates the transmission time via protection data interface 1. FNo 7752 PI2 TD indicates the transmission time via protection data interface 2.
In other cases, the mean value of both directions can be retrieved:

G G
Checking further Links
If more than two devices have been linked, that is if the object to be protected has more than two ends, or, if two devices have been linked via both protection data interfaces to create redundancy, repeat all checks for every possible link as described above including the consistency check. If all devices involved in the topology communicate properly and all parameters are consistent, the message FNo 3464 Topol complete appears.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-39
If there is a ring topology, the message FNo 3457 Ringtopology must also appear after closing the ring. However, if you have got a ring topology which only issues the message Chaintopology instead of Ringtopology, the differential protection system is functionable, but the ring has not yet been closed. Check the missing link as described above including the consistency test until all links to the ring have been made. Finally, there should be no more fault messages of the protection data interfaces. IBS-Tool The topology can be displayed as a graph on the monitor using the IBS-Tool. For this you need a personal computer and a web browser. Figure 8-22 exemplifies a differential protection system for three ends with a ring topology. The devices have been properly linked (green shaded squares) and work as differential protection (Status: Differential Mode). The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 2 (PCconnected relay). Figure 8-22 illustrates the interface data of a 7SD52 with GPSsynchronization as an example. The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 3. The transmission time at protection data interface 1 is 0.000 ms, at protection data interface 2 it is 0.763 ms in transmission direction, 0.772 ms in receiving direction.
Figure 8-22
Example of a ring topology with three ends communicating correctly
8-40
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Figure 8-23
Example of viewing the transmission times and availability of the protection data interfaces
8.3.6
Checking for Breaker Failure Protection

If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used, the interaction with the breakers of the power plant must be tested. Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of the power plant it is not possible to give detailed description of the test steps necessary to verify the correct interaction between the breaker failure protection and the breakers. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings. It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep the busbar disconnector and the line disconnector open, in order to ensure operation of the breaker without risk.
Caution!
Tripping of the complete busbar or busbar section may occur even during tests at the local feeder breaker. Therefore, it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the adjacent (busbar) breakers e.g. by switch-off of the associated control voltage. Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of a real primary fault if parts of the power plant are in service. The trip command of the tested differential protection is made ineffective so that the local breaker can be tripped only by the breaker failure protection function. The following lists do not claim to cover all possibilities. On the other hand, they may contain items that can be bypassed in the actual application.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-41
Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts
The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked (Subsection 8.3.4). If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by external protection devices, each of the external initiation conditions must be checked. Depending on the device version and the setting on the breaker failure protection, single-pole trip or singleand three-pole trip are possible. Note that the internal pole discrepancy supervision or the pole discrepancy supervision of the breaker itself may lead to a later three-pole trip after single-pole trip during the tests. Reconsider the settings of the breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions. Refer to Subsection 6.10.2 (addresses 3901 etc.) if more information is desired. At least the tested phase of the device must be subjected to a test current to enable initiation of the breaker failure protection. This may be a secondary injected current. Following every initiation the message BF Start (FNo 1461) must appear in the fault annunciations (trip log) or in the spontaneous messages. The following applies for phase segregated initiation:
G
External Initiation Conditions
Start by single-pole trip command L1 of the external protection: Binary inputs >BF Start L1 (FNo 1435) and if necessary >BF release (FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command depending on the settings. Start by single-pole trip command L2 of the external protection: Binary inputs >BF Start L2 (FNo 1436) and if necessary >BF release (FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command depending on the settings. Start by single-pole trip command L3 of the external protection: Binary inputs >BF Start L3 (FNo 1437) and if necessary >BF release (FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command depending on the settings. Start by three-pole trip command L1, L2, L3 of the external protection via all three binary inputs: Binary inputs >BF Start L1 (FNo 1435) and >BF Start L2 (FNo 1436) and >BF Start L3 (FNo 1437), and if necessary >BF release (FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command three-pole.
The following applies for common phase initiation:

G
Start by three-pole trip command L123 of the external protection: Binary inputs >BF Start 3pole (FNo 1415) and if necessary >BF release (FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command three-pole (dependent on settings).
Switch off test current. The following applies if initiation without current flow is possible:
G
Start by trip command of the external protection without current flow: Binary inputs >BF Start w/o I (FNo 1439) and if necessary >BF release (FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command three-pole (dependent on settings).
8-42
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Busbar trip
The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails. The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. In other words, the adjacent breaker are those of all feeders which may feed the same busbar or busbar section as the faulty feeder. The identification of the adjacent feeders depends widely on the topology of the busbar and its possible arrangement or switching states. That is why a generally detailed test description cannot be specified. In particular if multiple busbars are concerned the trip distribution logic to the other breakers must be checked. It must be verified for each busbar section that all breakers connected to the same section are tripped in case the concerned feeder breaker fails, and no other breakers.
Remote Trip
If the trip command of the breaker failure protection or its ancillary functions (e.g. end fault protection) is intended to trip also the circuit breaker of the remote end of the concerned feeder, the correct transmission and reception of this remote trip must be checked. Practically, this is performed in conjunction with the transmission checks according to Subsection 8.3.10. After completion of the tests, re-establish all provisory measures which might have been taken for the above tests. Ensure that the states of all switching devices of the plant are correct, that interrupted trip commands are reconnected and control voltages are switched on, that setting values which might have been altered are reverted to correct values, and that protective function are switched to the intended state (on or off).
Termination of the Checks
8.3.7
Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of One Line End

Should secondary test equipment be connected to the device, it is to be removed or, if applying, test switches should be in normal operation position. Note: It must be taken into consideration that tripping can occur even at the opposite ends of the protected object, if connections were made wrong. Before energizing the object to be protected at any end, short-circuit protection must be ensured at least at the feeding ends. If a separate back-up protection (e.g. overcurrent protection) is available, this has to be put into operation and switched to alert first.
Voltage and Rotary Field Test
If the device has been connected to voltage transformers, these connections are checked using primary values. For devices without voltage transformer connection the rest of this margin header may be omitted. The voltage transformer connections are individually tested at either end of the object to be protected. At the other end(s) the circuit breaker(s) remain open first.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-43
Having closed the local circuit breaker, none of the measurement monitoring functions in the device may respond.
G
If there was a fault message, however, the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous messages (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6) could be checked to investigate the reason for it. At the indication of symmetry monitoring there might actually be asymmetries of the primary system. If they are part of normal operation, the corresponding monitoring function is set less sensitive (see Subsection 6.12.2 under Voltage Balance, page 6-132).
The voltages can be read on the display at the front, or called up in the PC via the operator or service interface, and compared with the actual measured quantities as primary or secondary values (refer to Subsection 7.1.3.1). Apart from the absolute values of the line-earth and line-line voltages, voltage phase differences are indicated so that the correct phase sequence and polarity reversal of individual voltage transformers can be seen. The voltages can also be read with the IBS-Tool (see below, Current Test).
The voltages should be almost equal. All the three angles (ULxULy) must be approximately 120.
G
If the measured quantities are not plausible, the connections must be checked and revised after switching off the line. If the phase difference angle between two voltages is 60 instead of 120, one voltage must be polarity-reversed. The same applies if there are phase-to-phase voltages which almost equal the phase-to-ground voltages instead of having a value that is 3 greater. The measurements are to be repeated after setting the connections right. In general, the phase rotation is a clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an counter-clockwise phase rotation, this must go for all ends of the protected object. The measured value allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the line has been isolated. The phase rotation check must then be repeated.
Open the miniature circuit breaker of the feeder voltage transformers. The measured voltages in the operational measured values (Subsection 7.1.3.1) appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no concern).
G
Check in the event log (Section 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous messages (Section 7.1.1.6) that the VT mcb trip was noticed (message >FAIL:Feeder VT ON). A precondition is that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb: The above message appears in the event log as OFF, i. e. >FAIL:Feeder VT OFF).
G G
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals (Subsection 5.2.4) must be checked. If the ON-state and OFF-state are swapped, the contact type (H-active or L-active) must be checked and remedied (Subsection 5.2.4).
o o
The protected object is switched off. The check must be carried out for all ends.
8-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
8.3.8
Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of Two Line Ends

The connections of the current transformers are tested with primary values. A load current of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is possible. This test cannot replace visual inspection of the correct current transformer connections. Therefore, the inspection according to Section 8.2.3 is a prerequisite.
Current Test
o o
The current transformer connections are tested at each end of the protected object. The current flows through the protected object. For more than two ends, one current path (i.e. two ends) is tested first. After closing the circuit breakers, none of the measured value monitoring functions in the 7SD52 must respond. However, in the event of a monitoring signal, the reason for this signal can be investigated in the Event Log (see Section 7.1.1.2) or in the spontaneous messages (Section 7.1.1.6).
G G
If current summation errors occur, check the matching factors (see Section 6.1.1, Connection of the Currents). Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in the primary system. If they are part of normal operation, the corresponding monitoring function is set less sensitive (see Section 6.12.2, Symmetry Supervision).
Currents can be viewed as primary or secondary measured values in the front display panel or via the operator or service interface with a personal computer, and compared with the actually measured values (see also Section 7.1.3.1). The absolute values as well as the phase differences of the currents are indicated so that the correct phase sequence and polarity of individual transformers can also be seen. The IBS Tool provides comfortable read-out possibilities for all measured values with visualisation using phasor diagrams (Figure 8-24).
The current amplitudes must be approximately the same. Each one of the three angles (ILxILy) must be approximately 120.
G
If the measured values are not plausible, the connections must be checked and corrected after switching off the protected object and short-circuiting the current transformers. If, for example, the phase difference between two currents is 60 instead of 120, one of the currents must have a reversed polarity. The same is the case, if a substantial earth current 3I0 occurs: 3I0 phase current one or two phase currents are missing, 3I0 doubled phase current one or two phase currents have a reversed polarity.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-45
Figure 8-24
Local measured values in the IBS Tool example of plausible measured values
o o
The measurements are to be repeated after setting the connections right. The previously stated tests of the measured values are to be repeated at the other end of the tested current path. The current value of the other end can also be read out locally as percentage values as well as the phase angles (cf. Subsection 7.1.3). In the IBS Tool, the local and remote measured values can be graphically displayed. Figure 8-25 shows an example.
Polarity Check
If the device is connected with voltage transformers, the local measured values already provide a polarity test. For more than two ends, one current path is continued to be tested first. A load current of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is possible but must be known.
With closed circuit breakers, the power values can be viewed as primary and secondary measured values in the front display panel or via the operator or service interface with a personal computer (see also Subsection 7.1.3.1). Here, again, the IBS Tool is a comfortable help as the vector diagrams also show the correlation between the currents and voltages (Figure 8-25). Cyclically and acyclically swapped phases can easily be detected.
8-46
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Figure 8-25
Local and remote measured values in the IBS Tool examples for plausible measured values
With the aid of the measured power values you are able to verify that they correlate to the load direction, reading either at the device itself or in DIGSI 4 (Figure 8-26).
G G G G
P positive, if active power flows into the protected object, P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar, Q positive, if (inductive) reactive power flows into the protected object, Q negative, if (inductive) reactive power flows towards the busbar.
Therefore, the power results and their components must have opposite signs at both ends. It must be taken into consideration that high charging currents, which might occur with long overhead lines or with cables, are capacitive, i.e. correspond to a negative reactive power into the line. In spite of a resistive-inductive load, this may lead to a slightly negative reactive power at the feeding end whereas the other end shows an increased
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-47
negative reactive power. The lower the load current for the test, the higher the significance of this influence. In order to get unambiguous results, you should increase the load current if necessary.
P
Positive active power in the direction of the line
SLoad
jQ Positive reactive power in the direction of the line Negative reactive power in the direction of the line
Figure 8-26
Complex (apparent) power
The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values of one end have the correct polarity.
G G
If the reactive power is correct but the active power has the wrong sign, cyclic phase swapping of the currents (right) or of the voltages (left) might be the cause. If the active power direction is correct but the reactive power has the wrong sign, cyclic phase swapping of the currents (left) or of the voltages (right) might be the cause. If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign, the polarity according to the address 201 CT Starpoint is to be checked and corrected.
The phase angles between currents and voltages must also be conclusive. Each one of the three phase angles (ULxILx) must be approximately the same and must represent the operating status. In the event of power in the direction of the protected object, they represent the current phase displacement (cos positive); in the event of power in the direction of the busbar they are higher by 180 (cos negative). However, charging currents might have to be taken into consideration (see above).
o o
The measurements may have to be repeated after correction the connections. The above described tests of the measured values also have to be performed at the other end of the tested current path. The current and voltage values as well as the phase angles of the other end can also be read out locally as percentage values (Subsection 7.1.3). Note that currents flowing through the object (without charging currents) ideally have opposite signs at both ends, i.e. turned by 180. In the IBS Tool the local and remote measured values can be shown graphically. You can see an example in Figure 8-25.
The protected object is now switched off, i.e. the circuit breakers are opened.
8-48
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Polarity Check for the Current Input I4
If the standard connection of the device is used whereby the current measuring input I4 is connected in the starpoint of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit diagram in the Appendix, Figure A-15), then the correct polarity of the earth current path in general automatically results. If however the current I4 is derived from a separate summation CT (e.g. a core balance CT) an additional direction check with this current is necessary.
The test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with cases that may occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. These must therefore be ignored during such tests.
.
DANGER!
Working on measurement transformers requires the highest precautions! Short-circuit the secondary side of the current transformers before any current connections to the device are opened!
L1 Bus bar L2 L3
(alternatively disconnect here)
e
bypass one phase Ue IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 Un
n
UL1 UL2 UL3 Un
7SD52
Line Figure 8-27 Polarity testing for I4, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen connection
To generate a displacement voltage, the en winding of one phase in the voltage transformer set (e.g. L1) is bypassed (refer to Figure 8-27). If no connection on the en windings of the voltage transformer is available, the corresponding phase is open circuited on the secondary side. Via the current path only the current from the current transformer in the phase from which the voltage in the voltage path is missing, is connected; the other CTs are short-circuited. If the line carries load in the first quadrant, the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during an earth fault in the direction of the line.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-49
o o
The same manipulation is carried out with the current and voltage transformers at the other end. Figure 8-28 illustrates an example corresponding to the circuit in Figure 8-27, when the current flows in direction of the object to be protected. The currents IL2 and IL3 are almost zero, an earth current 3I0 of the same value as IL1 appears. Accordingly, the voltage UL1E is missing and a zero sequence voltage 3U0 appears. In the event of a polarity fault, 3I0 is in opposite phase with IL1 or the zero sequence voltage 3U0 supplements the other two voltages to a (here false) voltage star. Open the circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers and set current and voltage transformer connections right. Repeat test. Having finished the test, open all circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers and restore current and voltage transformer connections.
Local Measurement Primary Values

Currents: +90 Voltages: +90
180
0 180
90 Address: 2 IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = 3I0 = 199.71 A, 0.00 A, 0.00 A, 199.37 A, 0.0 0.0 0.3 0.1
90 Frequency: 50.00 Hz UL1E = 0.71 kV, 10.4 UL2E = 133.44 kV, 109.3 UL3E = 132.34 kV, 130.4 3U0 = 133.00 kV, -169.8
Figure 8-28
Local measured values example for single-phase, asymmetrical test
Measuring Differential and Restraint Currents
The test for two ends is terminated with the reading of the differential and restraint currents which simultaneously check that the current transformer connections have been restored correctly after the I4 test (if performed).
8-50
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
Read out the differential and restraint currents. They are available for every phase at the device display or in DIGSI 4 amongst the measured values (cf. Subsection 7.1.3.1).
G
The differential currents must be low, at least one scale less than the currents flowing through. If high charging currents are to be expected in long overhead lines or cables, these are additionally included in the differential currents.
Figure 8-29
Differential and restraint currents example for plausible currents
The restraint currents result from the pickup value I-DIFF> (address 1210, cf. Subsection 6.2.2) in addition to the sum of the current errors to be tolerated: such as the locally permissible current transformer error according to address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N (cf. Subsection 6.1.1) the permissible current transformer errors at the other ends according to that setting there, as well as the internal estimation of the system errors (frequency, synchronization and delay time difference errors). With the default values for I-DIFF> (0.3 IN) and E% ALF/ALF_N (5.0 % = 0.05) there is I stab I I ---------- = 0.3 + 0.05 ------- + 0.05 ------- + Sytem errors I N1 I N2 I NO
Set value I-DIFF> Permiss. Local CT error Permiss. Remote CT error
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-51
with I INO IN1 IN2
the actual current flowing, the nominal operating current as parameterized, the primary nominal current of the local current transformers, the primary nominal current of the current transformers of the remote end.
In the IBS-Tool, the differential and restraint currents are displayed as a graph in a characteristics diagram. One example is illustrated in Figure 8-29.
If there is a differential current in the size of twice the through-flowing current, you may assume a polarity reversal of the current transformer(s) at one line end. Check the polarity again and set it right after short-circuiting all the three current transformers. If you have modified these current transformers, also perform a power and angle test. Finally, open circuit breaker again. If parameter settings have been changed for the tests, reset them to the values necessary for operation.
o o
8.3.9
Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections for More than Two Ends
If there are more than two ends, all tests according to Subsection 8.3.8 as far as they are applying in this case have to be repeated for the other current paths in such a way that all ends of the object to be protected have been included in the current flow test at least once. It is not necessary to test every possible current path. At the ends not involved in a test the circuit breakers are to remain open. Also pay attention to all safety notes, especially the DANGER warning in Section 8.3.8! The circuit breakers are reopened after the last test. In the event that parameters were modified for the tests, they finally have to be set to the values necessary for operation.
8.3.10 Remote Tripping, Remote Signalling etc.

As soon as the communication between the devices has been established, the functions that depend on the transmission can be tested. This applies in particular to
G G G
remote tripping via a binary input (cf. Section 6.3), transmission of further remote commands and remote signals (cf. Section 6.6), verification of remote circuit breaker positions.
The IBS-Tool can be used to achieve the latter. It contains a sheet where the circuit breaker position is notified. Note that the circuit breaker position can only be indicated reliably, if the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts have been signalled to the corresponding device via binary inputs. Without these auxiliary contacts the devices can
8-52
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.3 Commissioning
only deduce the circuit breaker positions from the current flow. But as the current may be zero even if the circuit breaker is closed, you must expect wrong indications. The circuit breaker position is, however, always interpreted by the protection functions in such a way that it goes on the safe side if in doubt. For all the other commands and information to be transmitted, generate the source of the information and check that the desired effect is created at the receiving end. Also note the following:
DANGER!
Make sure that switching operations produced by remote command can be performed without any danger during the actual switching state!
8.3.11 Testing User Defined Functions

7SD52 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked. Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switchgear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). They must be considered and tested.
8.3.12 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker and tripping circuits can be conveniently tested by the device 7SD52. The procedure is described in detail in Section 7.3. If the check does not produce the expected results, the cause may be established from the text in the display of the device or the PC. If necessary, the connections of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be checked: It must be noted that the binary inputs used for the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be assigned separately for the CB-test. It is accordingly not sufficient that the auxiliary contacts are assigned to the binary inputs with FNo 351 to 353, 379 and/or 380 (depending on the options of the auxiliary contacts); in addition, the corresponding FNos 366 to 368 and/or 410 and/or 411 (depending on the options of the auxiliary contacts) must be configured (see also Section 6.13.2). These are exclusively used for the CB-test. In addition, the ready state of the circuit breaker for the CB-test must be indicated to the binary input FNo 371.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-53
8.3.13 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings

At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit breaker(s), under load conditions, should be done to assure the stability of the protection during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic recordings obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the 7SD52. Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7SD52 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program DIGSI 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function >Trig.Wave.Cap. (FNo 4). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker may be used to control the binary input for triggering. An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The externally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence. Triggering with DIGSI 4 To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click the entry Test Wave Form in the list in the right part of the window to trigger the recording. See Figure 8-30. A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed. The SIGRA program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data. Refer to Subsection 7.1.4
Figure 8-30
Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4
8-54
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device
8.4
Final Preparation of the Device

Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.
Caution!
Do not use force! The tightening torques according to Chapter 2 must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under device configuration, input/output configuration are especially important (Section 5.1) as well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through D (if applicable). All desired elements and functions must be set ON. See Chapter 6. Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC. Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to Subsection 7.2.1. The annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the operational messages (event log) and fault messages (trip log). Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults. To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU Annunciation Set/Reset. Refer to Subsection 7.1.1 if further assistance is needed. The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing, or to values in accordance with the user's practices. Set the statistics by pressing MAIN MENU Annunciation Statistic. Refer to Subsection 7.1.2 if more information is needed. Press the
ESC
key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed. Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions. The green RUN LED must be on. The red ERROR LED must not be lit. Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position. The device is now ready for operation. n
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8-55
8-56
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Maintenance and Fault Tracing
General comments about the routine checks and maintenance activities to ensure the high reliability of the 7SD52 are given in this chapter. A procedure for replacing components such as the buffer battery is discussed. Troubleshooting advice is provided. A procedure for replacing the power supply fuse is described. Some comments concerning the return of a device to the factory are given.
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6
General Routine Checks Maintenance Fault Tracing Corrective Action/Repairs Return
9-2 9-3 9-5 9-8 9-10 9-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-1
9 Maintenance and Fault Tracing
9.1
General
Siemens numerical protective and control SIPROTEC 4 devices are designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal processing circuits are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays are hermetically sealed or provided with protective covers. Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output relays, hardware and software problems are automatically reported. The selfmonitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are not required. Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. The live status relay drops out to provide an alarm by its breaking contact. If a problem is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides messages. Recognized software failures result in the resetting and restarting of the processor system. If such a failure is not resolved by the restart, further restart attempts are initiated. If a problem is still present after three restart attempts, the device is automatically taken out of service. Then the live status contact drops out to provide an alarm and the red ERROR LED on the front panel illuminates. The reaction of the device to failures and problems can be viewed in chronological sequence in the operational messages (event log). See Sub-section 7.1.1. The messages can be used to diagnose the problem. When the device communicates with a master control system of the substation or other central control systems, the event and alarm messages are also sent over the serial interface.
9-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9.2 Routine Checks
9.2
Routine Checks
Routine checks of the characteristic curves or pick-up values of the protective elements are not necessary because they form part of the continuously supervised firmware programs. The normally scheduled interval for plant maintenance can be used for carrying out operational testing of the protective and control equipment. The maintenance serves mainly to check the serial or hardwired interfaces of the device, i.e. the coupling with the plant. The steps listed below are recommended for routine checks. If a problem is detected during these checks, refer to Section 9.4.
o o o o o o
Verify that the green RUN LED is lit on the front panel and the red ERROR LED is not. Check that the states of the LEDs on the front panel give an accurate image of the conditions of the device and the plant. Investigate any problems or uncertainties. Press the LED key. All of the LEDs should temporarily light except for the ERROR LED. Only the LEDs indicating specific present conditions should remain lit. Read the measurement values and compare them to an independent source to check the measuring circuits of the 7SD52. Refer to Subsection 7.1.3 for assistance. Review the messages given in the event log. Be sure there are no reports of unknown problems or abnormal occurrences related to the device, the measuring circuits, or the power system. See Sub-section 7.1.1.2 for help. Perform a reset (reboot) of the device. A complete check of the hardware is done. The device is effectively out of service during the reset, which lasts for about 10 to 15 seconds. To perform the reset from the operator control panel, press the MENU key and use the and keys to select the Device Reset under the TEST/DIAGNOSE submenu. Press the ENTER key, enter Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and answer with Yes. During the reset, the ERROR and RUN LEDs are lit. After a successful reset, the default display reappears and the LEDs return to indicate normal operation. The device is then back in-service. To perform the reset with DIGSI 4, establish the Online mode, select Device in the menu bar, and then Reset. Enter the password for test and diagnostics; then OK. Other testing can be done with DIGSI 4 on-line. In Hardware Test under Test, the conditions of all of the binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs can be monitored. Compare the indicated conditions with the actual conditions. Do not change the states of the device components because the power station is immediately affected!
Warning!
Alterations of the states of the binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs must not be done with test features during normal operation. Any such change immediately affects the inputs and outputs of the device, and therefore the connected switching devices! This includes, for instance, non-interlocked primary switching!
o o
The trip and close circuits for circuit breakers and other primary equipment can be verified with operator control actions. Refer to Section 7.3 for details. The IBS-tool enables the user to check measured data and states at both ends of the protected object. For more details see Subsection 7.1.3.2.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-3
Individual devices can be switched out of the differential protection system for test and revision works. See Subsection 7.2.4.
9-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9.3 Maintenance
9.3
9.3.1
Maintenance
Replacing the Buffer Battery
The battery is used to retain the annunciation memories and fault recording data in the event of an interruption of the power supply. The battery also maintains the internal system clock with calendar after a loss of the power supply. The battery is checked by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated. The battery should be changed when this alarm is given, or at the latest, after 10 years of service. Recommended Battery: Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA. For example: VARTA Order Number 6127 101 501 The battery is located near the front edge of the CPU printed circuit board. The front panel of the device must be removed to change the battery. To replace the battery:
Save the annunciations and fault records. These are the data under the Annunciation sub-menu (all items in this sub-menu). The records and data are lost when the battery is removed. The simplest and fastest method is to use the save feature in DIGSI 4 when the program is on-line. Note: All of the protective and control settings, including the input/output configuration and the CFC logic, are not affected by a power supply interruption. The settings are stored independently of the battery. The settings are not lost when the battery is removed, nor are the settings affected if the device operates without a battery.
Have the replacement battery ready.
Caution!
Do not short the battery! Do not reverse the polarity of the battery! Do not lay the battery on the ground mat used to protect components from electrostatic discharges! Do not recharge the battery!
Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches for both terminals.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and connectors must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part before handling the internal components. Do not insert or remove interface connectors under live conditions!
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-5
Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is disconnected and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!
o o o
Remove the covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are securing the front panel. Carefully pull off the front panel and bend it aside. The front panel is connected to the internal CPU printed circuit board with a short ribbon-cable. Disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (), at the side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front panel. The battery is located on the bottom-front side of the CPU () board. See Figure 9-1.
Battery grip
Battery
G1
Slot 5
Slot 19
Figure 9-1
Processor board CPU Input/output board I/O
Front view without front panel position of buffer battery (simplified and reduced)
o o o
Remove the old battery from the snap-on connector using the plastic battery grip shown in Figure 9-1. Remove the battery grip from the old battery, and place the grip on the new battery. Observing the polarity and firmly insert the new battery into the snap-on connector shown in Figure 9-1.
9-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9.3 Maintenance
o o o o o
Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU () board and the front panel. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure that the plug connectors latch. Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cable. Fasten the panel to the case with the screws. Replace the covers. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. After the device is operating, data saved in DIGSI 4 can be loaded back into the device. If the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized via a serial interface, then the clock should be set at this point. Refer to Subsection 7.2.1 if assistance is needed to set the clock.
Warning!
The used battery contains Lithium. Do not throw the battery into the trash! It must be disposed off in line with the applicable regulations! Do not reverse the polarity! Do not completely discharge! Do not throw the battery into a fire! Explosion hazard!
9.3.2
Replacing Interface Modules

The serial interface modules are replaceable. If an interface is suspected to be defect, the module can be replaced by a different module (only for test or definitely). The replacing procedure is described precisely in Subsection 8.1.3.4. If a module is replaced, please observe the hints for disassembly in Subsection 8.1.3.2 and reassembly of the device in Subsection 8.1.3.5. In 7SD522, the place for the protection data interface PROT I 2 which is not required in this device can be used for a spare module.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-7
9.4
Fault Tracing
If a device reports a problem or failure, the procedure below is recommended. If none of the LEDs on the front panel are lit, then verify:
G G G G
Are the modules placed correctly and locked by the front panel? Are the plug-in connectors of the ribbon cables plugged properly into the modules and are the interlockings latched correctly? Are the voltage magnitude and polarity correct for the power supply? Connection drawings are shown in Section A.2 of Appendix A. Has the fuse in the power supply not blown. The location of the fuse is shown in Figure 9-5. If the fuse needs to be replaced, see Subsection 9.5.2.
If the red ERROR LED is on and the green RUN LED is off, then the device has recognized an internal fault. Re-initializing the device can be attempted (see Section 9.2). If you see the following display, the device has arrived monitor-mode. In this case you may initialize the device via DIGSI 4:
MONITOR 01/05 --------------------Equipment data > 1 User interface > 2 System I-face > 3 Reset > 4 Siemens intern > 5
Figure 9-2 Monitor menu in the display
G G
Connect the SIPROTEC 4 device to the PC and open the DIGSI 4 application in the PC. Select Initialize device in the menu Device (Figure 9-3).
Figure 9-3
Initializing device via DIGSI 4 example
9-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9.4 Fault Tracing
Enter password No. 7. The display becomes blank. After a successful initialization, the LEDs return to indicate normal operation and the default display reappears. The device settings are downloaded to the device provided they had been saved in the PC after commissioning (refer to Section 8.4). The device is then in-service.
Further Assistance
If these steps do not resolve the problem, please call your local Siemens representative or customer hot-line. Our customer hot-line needs the following information to assist you: the complete order number of the device (MLFB), the serial number of the device (BF ...), the firmware version, the boot system version. This information can be read out from the device panel. From the MAIN MENU select Settings Setup/Extras. The ordering code and the serial number can also be found on the name plate sticker on the device housing. If a device file had been created on the harddisk of the PC, the information can be found in the device file using DIGSI 4 in online mode as shown in Figure 9-4.
G G G
Open the DIGSI 4 application in the PC and select the device. Open the device in Offline mode. Select File Properties from the menu bar. The desired information is shown.
Figure 9-4
Retrieving the device data in the device properties example
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-9
9.5
9.5.1
Corrective Action/Repairs
Software Procedures
A restart of the processor system, as described in Section 9.2, can be done as an attempt to solve a problem. Setting changes can be made to solve simple problems, such as sporadic alarms from elements of the measured value supervision. These attempts of solving problems can be done while the device is in service. If a processor restart or setting change does not remedy the problem, then no further action should be done while the device is in service. Instead, replace the device with a tested spare.
9.5.2
Hardware Procedures
Hardware modifications or repair should be limited in scope to changes that are absolutely necessary. Some examples of hardware repair are changing the mini-fuse in the power supply and replacing a printed circuit board or module. Hardware modifications or repair should only be done by experienced personnel. Do not insert or extract a printed circuit board unless the device is completely isolated. Soldering work must not be done on the printed circuit boards.
Disassembling the Device
The device must be disassembled if work is to be done on the printed circuit boards. The procedure below should be used.
Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed: Screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm or 1/4 inch tip. #1 Phillips screwdriver. 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o o
Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches (test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for both terminals.
S
Disconnect all communication cables from the device. Carefully remove optical fibres from the device. Apply protective caps to the fibre ends and the communication ports on the device. These activities do not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
9-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9.5 Corrective Action/Repairs
o o o o
Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting. If the device has more communication interfaces at locations B and/or C on the rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. These activities are not necessary if the device is for surface mounting. Remove the corner covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are holding the front panel to the device case. Carefully pull off the front panel. The front panel is connected to the CPU board with a short ribbon-cable. On devices with detached operator panel, the front panel can be pulled off directly (without a ribbon cable).
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and connectors must be avoided! Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove interface connectors under live conditions!
Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is disconnected and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!
At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (), at the side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front panel. For the surface mounted device, the 7-pin connector X16 must be disconnected from the CPU board behind the D-subminiature port, and the ribbon-cable that runs to the 68-pin connector on the back must be detached. Disconnect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the I/O board. The boards can be removed and laid on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage. A greater effort is required to remove the CPU board from the device designed for surface mounting, because of the type of connectors.
o o
Replacing the Power Supply Fuse
Keep ready replacement fuse 5 x 20 mm. Verify the correct rating, correct characteristic (T) as well as the correct coding. This data is printed on the module (see Figure 9-5). The type of fuse depends on the auxiliary supply voltage (refer to Table 9-1). The processor module CPU, which also incorporates the power supply (refer to Figure 8-7 in Subsection 8.1.3) must be removed and placed on a surface suitable for electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD).
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-11
Remove the defective fuse. Figure 9-5 illustrates the fuse.
2 3 4
F1
B20 T4H250V B30 B40 T2H250V
Figure 9-5
Power supply mini-fuse on the input/output board I/O1
Table 9-1
Assigning of the mini-fuse rating to the device auxiliary voltage rating Rated Auxiliary Voltages 24 V to 48 V DC 60 V to 125 VDC 110 V to 250 VDC; 115 VAC Fuse Type T4H250V T2H250V T2H250V
7SD52 Version 2 4 5
o o
Reassembling the Device
Install the new fuse into the holder. Carefully install the processor board CPU in the case. To reassemble the device:
o o o o o
9-12
Connect the ribbon-cable between the I/O board and the CPU board. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the connectors latch. Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the front panel. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the plug connectors latch. Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cables. Fasten the front panel to the case with the screws. Replace the covers. The following steps are not applicable for the surface mount version: Align and fix the rear interfaces again.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
C53207-A324-B20C53207-A324-B30C53207-A324-B40-
9.5 Corrective Action/Repairs
o o o
Attach all D-subminiature plugs to the matching D-subminiature sockets. Screw in all the fibre optical connectors where applicable. Tighten all optical connectors. When connecting an FCconnector make sure that its lug is plugged properly into the slot of the socket and it does not come out when tightening the knurled nut. The knurled nut must not be tightened too strong.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look into the LEDs or fibre-optic elements! Do not use optical instruments! Laser class 3A according to EN 608251.
Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. If the green RUN LED does not light, there is a fault in the power supply. The device should be sent to the factory. See Section 9.6.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
9-13
9.6
Return
Siemens strongly recommends that no further repairs on defective devices, boards, or components be done. Special electronic components are used for which procedures for preventing electrostatic discharges must be followed. Most importantly, special production techniques are necessary to avoid damaging the wave-soldered multilayer boards, the sensitive components, and the protective varnish. If a problem cannot be solved by the procedures described in Section 9.5, then the complete device (including front cover) should be returned to the factory. The original transport packaging material should be used for returning a device. If alternative packaging material is used, then the device and other contents must be provided with protection against shock and vibration according to IEC 60255211 Class 2 and IEC 60255212 Class 1. Before returning a device, retrieve and save all of the configuration, function and control settings, and any important information. Note any changes that were made to the jumpers on the internal printed circuit boards after the device was first delivered. Note: Repaired devices are returned from the factory with all jumpers on the printed circuit boards set in the original positions according to the ordering number. All configuration, function and control parameters have the default setting.
9-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Technical Data
10
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 7SD52 device and its individual functions, including the limiting values that must not be exceeded under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data of fully equipped 7SD52 devices are followed by the mechanical data, with dimensional drawings.
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13
General Device Data Differential Protection Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping Transmission of Binary Information (optional) Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology Time Overcurrent Protection (optional) Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection Automatic Reclosure Function (optional) Thermal Overload Protection Monitoring Functions Supplementary Functions Dimensions
10-2 10-11 10-13 10-14 10-15 10-16 10-21 10-21 10-23 10-25 10-26 10-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-1
10 Technical Data
10.1
General Device Data
10.1.1 Analog Inputs and Outputs

Nominal frequency Current Inputs Nominal current fN IN 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A or 5 A (adjustable)
Power consumption per phase and earth path at IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA at IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA Current overload capability per input thermal (rms) 500 A for 1 s 150 A for 10 s 20 A continuous 1250 A (half cycle)
dynamic (pulse) Requirements for Current Transformers
For a maximum fault current the current transformers must not be saturated under steady-state conditions. I F cont max The accuracy limiting factor must be n ------------------------I N prim at least 30 Maximum ratio between primary currents of current transformers at the ends of the protected object I prim max -------------------- 8 I prim min 80 V to 125 V
AND
n 30
Voltage Inputs
Nominal voltage
UN
(adjustable)
Power consumption per phase at 100 V 0.1 VA Voltage overload capability per phase thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
10.1.2 Power Supply

Direct Voltage Voltage supply via integrated DC/DC converter:
Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC Permissible voltage ranges Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC Permissible voltage ranges
24/48 VDC 19 to 58 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 88 to 300 VDC
60/110/125 VDC 48 to 150 VDC 220/250 VDC 176 to 300 VDC
Permissible AC ripple voltage, peak to peak
15 % of the nominal power supply voltage
10-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.1 General Device Data
Power consumption quiescent approx. 5 W energized with 7SD52***A/E/J approx. 12 W with 7SD52***C/G/L/N/Q/S approx. 15 W with 7SD52***D/H/M/P/R/T approx. 18 W plus approx. 1 W per protection data interface Bridging time for failure/short-circuit of the power supply Alternating Voltage 50 ms at UH = 48 V and UNDC 110 V 20 ms at UH = 24 V and UNDC = 60 V
Voltage supply via integrated AC/DC converter

Nominal power supply alternating voltage UNAC Permissible voltage ranges 115 VAC 92 to 132 VAC
Power consumption quiescent approx. 6.5 VA energized with 7SD52***A/E/J approx. 17 VA with 7SD52***C/G/L/N/Q/S approx. 20 VA with 7SD52***D/H/M/P/R/T approx. 23 VA plus approx. 1.5 VA per protection data interface Bridging time for failure/short-circuit of the power supply 50 ms
10.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs

Binary Inputs Number with 7SD52***A/E/J with 7SD52***C/G/L/N/Q/S with 7SD52***D/H/M/P/R/T Nominal voltage Switching thresholds for nominal voltages 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC for nominal voltages 110/125/ 220/250 VDC for nominal voltages 220/250 VDC Current consumption, energized Maximum permissible voltage Input interference suppression
8 (allocatable) 16 (allocatable) 24 (allocatable) 24 VDC to 250 VDC in 3 ranges, bipolar adjustable with jumpers Upickup 19 VDC Udropoff 14 VDC Upickup 88 VDC Udropoff 66 VDC Upickup 176 VDC Udropoff 117 VDC approx. 1.8 mA independent of the control voltage 300 VDC 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V with recovery time >60 ms
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-3
10 Technical Data
Binary Outputs
Alarm/command relays (see also General Diagrams in Section A.2 of Appendix A) Number and data dependent on device version (allocatable):
Ordering version NO (normal) 7 14 7 21 14 MAKE BREAK NO (accelerated) 7 7 10 7 10 NO (highspeed) 5 5 NO/NC (selectable) 1 2 1 3 2
7SD52A/E/J 7SD52C/G/L 7SD52N/Q/S 7SD52D/H/M 7SD52P/R/T Switching capability
1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W resistive 25 W at L/R 50 ms 250 V 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 8 ms 5 ms 1 ms 8 ms
Switching voltage Permissible current per contact Permissible total current on common paths Operating time, approx.
10.1.4 Communications Interfaces

Protection Data Interface Operation Interface See Section 10.5 Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232 9-pin DSUB socket for connecting a personal computer with DIGSI 4 min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud; parity: 8E1 15 m (50 ft) isolated interface for data transfer acc. ordered version with DIGSI 4
Operation Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Service/Modem Interface (optional) RS232/RS485/Optical Operation
10-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
RS232 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case rear panel, mounting location C 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom shielded data cable Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case rear panel, mounting location C 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom shielded data cable Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Optical fibre Connector Type for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2 STconnector rear panel, mounting location C at the inclined housing on the case bottom = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m 500 V; 50 Hz min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud 1000 m (3300 ft) 500 V; 50 Hz min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud 15 m (50 ft)
Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance Character idle state System (SCADA) Interface (optional) RS232/RS485/Optical acc. to ordered version RS232 Connectionfor flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd factory setting: 19200 Bd 15 m (50 ft) 2 km (1.25 miles) selectable; factory setting: Light off isolated interface for data transfer to a master terminal
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-5
10 Technical Data
RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Optical fibre Connector Type for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2 STconnector rear panel, mounting location B at the inclined housing on the case bottom = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m 2 km (11/4 miles) selectable; factory setting: Light off DCF77/IRIG B/GPS rear panel, mounting location A 9-pin DSUB socket at the terminal on the case bottom rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V, 50 Hz min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd factory setting: 19200 Bd 1000 m (3300 ft)
Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance Character idle state Time Synchronization Signal type Connectionfor flush mounted case for surface mounted case Signal properties for DCF77/IRIG B:
5V Nominal signal input voltage 12 V 24 V
UIHigh UILow IIHigh RI
6.0 V
15.8 V 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 890 at UI = 4 V 1930 at UI = 8.7 V 640 at UI = 6 V 1700 at UI = 15.8 V
31 V 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA 3780 at UI = 17 V 3560 at UI = 31 V
Signal properties for GPS Nominal signal voltage PPS signal pulse duty factor max. rise/fall time deviation of all receivers 24 V 1/999 to 1/1 3 s
GPSreceiver, antenna, power supply see Appendix A, Section A.1.1 Accessories
10-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.1.5 Electrical Tests

Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product standards) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0; C37.90.0.1; C37.90.0.2 DIN 57435 Part 303 See also standards for individual tests IEC 602555 and 6087021 2.5 kV (rms); 50 Hz
Insulation Tests
Standards: High voltage test (routine test) all circuits except power supply, binary inputs, and communication/time sync. interfaces High voltage test (routine test) only power supply and binary inputs High Voltage Test (routine test) only isolated communication /time sync. interfaces Impulse voltage test (type test) all circuits except communication /time sync. interfaces, class III
3.5 kVDC 500 V (rms); 50 Hz
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 Ws; 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s IEC 602556 and 22 (Product standards) EN 500822 (Generic standard) DIN 57435 Part 303 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s Ri = 200 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
EMC Tests; Interference Immunity (Type Tests)
Standards:
High frequency test IEC 60255221, class III and VDE 0435 part 303, class III Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255222 class IV and IEC 6100042, class IV
Irradiation with HF field, non-modulated10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz IEC 60255223 (report) class III Irradiation with HF field, amplitude 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; modulated; IEC 6100043, class III 1 kHz Irradiation with HF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency pulse modulated 200 Hz; duty cycle of 50 % IEC 6100043/ENV 50204, class III Fast transient disturbance/burst IEC 60255224 and IEC 6100044, class IV High energy surge voltages (SURGE), IEC 6100045 installation class 3 power supply analogue inputs, binary inputs and outputs 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min impulse: 1.2/50 s 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 10-7
common mode: diff. mode: common mode: diff. mode:
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10 Technical Data
Line conducted HF, amplitude 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz modulated; IEC 6100046, class III Power system frequency magnetic field; IEC 6100048, class IV; IEC 602556 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
Oscillatory surge withstand capability 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1.5 MHz ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 decaying wave; 50 surges per s; duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Fast transient surge withstand capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 4 kV to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s; both polarities; duration 2 s; Ri = 80
Radiated electromagnetic interference 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated Damped oscillations IEC 60694, IEC 61000412 EMC Tests; Interference Emission (Type Tests) Standard: Conducted interference, only power supply voltage IECCISPR 22 Radio interference field strength IECCISPR 22 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating; 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz; Ri = 200 EN 50081* (Generic standard) 150 kHz to 30 MHz limit class B 30 MHz to 1000 MHz limit class B
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests

Vibration and Shock During Operation Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, class 2 IEC 6006826 IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068 sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes. half-sine shaped acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes sinusoidal 1 Hz to 8 Hz: (horizontal axis) 1 Hz to 8 Hz: (vertical axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: (horizontal axis) 3.5 mm amplitude 1.5 mm amplitude 1 g acceleration
Shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068227 Seismic vibration IEC 60255213, class 1 IEC 6006833
10-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis) Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes Vibration and Shock During Transport Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, class 2 IEC 6006826 IEC 6025521 and IEC 60068 sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes half-sine shaped acceleration 15 g; duration 11 ms; 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes half-sine shaped acceleration 10 g; duration 16 ms; 1000 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes
Shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068227 Continuous shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068229
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests

Ambient Temperatures Standards: IEC 602556 (+23 F to +131 F)
(when max. half of the inputs and outputs are subjected to the max permissible values)
recommended operating temperature 5 C to +55 C
recommended operating temperature 5 C to +40 C
(+23 F to +104 F)
(when all inputs and outputs are subjected to the max permissible values)
limiting temporary (transient) operating temperature limiting temperature during storage limiting temperature during transport
Visibility of display may be impaired above +55 C/130 F in quiescent state, i.e. no pickup and no indications
20 C to +70 C (4 F to 158 F)
25 C to +55 C (13 F to 131 F) 25 C to +70 C (13 F to 158 F)
Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging! Humidity Permissible humidity mean value p. year 75 % relative humidity on 56 days per year up to 93 % relative humidity; condensation not permissible!
All devices shall be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-9
10 Technical Data
10.1.8 Service Conditions

The device is designed for use in an industrial environment or an electrical utility environment, for installation in standard relay rooms and compartments so that proper installation and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. In addition, the following are recommended: All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components. For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required. Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. When handling the modules or the boards outside of the case, standards for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The modules, boards, and device are not endangered when the device is completely assembled.
10.1.9 Construction
Housing Dimensions Weight (mass), approx. in flush mounted case, size 1/2 in flush mounted case, size 1/1 in surface mounted case, size 1/2 in surface mounted case, size 1/1 Degree of protection acc. IEC 60529 for the device in surface mounted case in flush mounted case front rear for human safety 7XP20 see drawings, Section 10.13 6 kg 10 kg 11 kg 19 kg (13 lb) (22 lb) (24 lb) (42 lb)
IP 51 IP 51 IP 50 IP 2x with closed protection cover
10-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.2
Differential currentIDIFF> 0.10 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 A)
Pickup Values
Differential current when switching onto a fault IDIFF switch on 0.10 A to 20.00 A1) Differential current High set differential currentIDIFF>> Tolerances 0.8 A to 100.0 A1) or (stage disabled)
5 % of setting value for 2 or 3 ends 10 % of setting value for 6 ends or 10 mA1) per end
) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Tripping Times
The tripping time depends on the number of ends and the communication speed. The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of commands via high-speed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Pickup/trip times of the IDIFF>>stages approx. for 2 ends, minimum typical for 3 ends, minimum typical for 6 ends, minimum typical 9 ms 12 ms 9 ms 12 ms 14 ms 20 ms
Drop-off time of the IDIFF>>stages approx. typical 35 ms to 50 ms
Pickup / trip times of the IDIFF>stages approx. for 2 ends, minimum (50 Hz) minimum (60 Hz) typical for 3 ends, minimum (50 Hz) minimum (60 Hz) typical for 6 ends, minimum (50 Hz) minimum (60 Hz) typical 27 ms 24 ms 30 ms 27 ms 24 ms 31 ms 32 ms 28 ms 38 ms
Drop-off time of the IDIFF>stages approx. typical 35 ms to 50 ms
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-11
10 Technical Data
Delay Times
Delay time of the Delay time of the for 1-phase pickup Expiry tolerance
IDIFF>stage TI-DIFF> IDIFF>stage T3I0 1PHAS
0.00 s to 60.00 s or (stage ineffective)
(steps 0.01 s)
0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) or (stage ineffective for 1-phase pickup) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
The times set are pure delay times
Self-Restraint
Current transformer error at each end of the protected object Ratio between operating accuracy limit factor and nominal accuracy limit factor n'/n 1.00 to 10.00 Transformer error at n'/n Transformer error at n IN (class) Further stabilizing quantities (adaptive self-restraint) 0.5 % to 50.0 % 0.5 % to 50.0 % (steps 0.01) (steps 0.1 %) (steps 0.1 %)
Frequency deviation, delay time differences, harmonics, synchronous quality, jitter 10 % to 45 %

1
Inrush Restraint
Restraint ratio 2nd harmonic
I2fN/IfN
(steps 1 %)
Maximum current for restraint Crossblock function Max. action time for crossblock
1)
1.1 A to 25.0 A ) (steps 0.1 A) can be enabled and disabled
CROSSB 2HM or (active until drop off)
0.00 s to 60.00 s
(steps 0.01 s)
Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Conditioning for Transformers (optional) Emergency Operation (optional) Frequency
Vector group matching Star-point conditioning Communication failure Frequency correction within range
0 to 11 ( 30)
(steps 1)
earthed or unearthed (for each winding) see Section 10.6 0.8 f/fN 1.2 stable when starting machine
10-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.3 Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping
10.3
Intertrip
Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping

Intertripping of the opposite end when singeend tripping
can be enabled and disabled
External Direct Local Tripping
The operating time refers to the output of commands via highspeed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Operating time, total Trip time delay Expiry tolerance
The set times are pure delay times.
approx. 6 ms 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) (steps 0.01 s)
1 % of setting value or 10 ms
External Direct Remote Tripping
Tripping of remote ends by a command that is coupled into a binary input The operating time depends on the number of ends and the communication speed. The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of commands via highspeed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Operating times, total approx. for 2 ends, minimum typical for 3 ends, minimum typical for 6 ends, minimum typical Drop-off times, total approx. for 2 ends, typical for 3 ends, typical for 6 ends, typical Trip time delay Trip time prolongation Expiry tolerance
7 ms 12 ms 9 ms 13 ms 13 ms 18 ms
19 ms 20 ms 26 ms 0.00 s to 30.00 s 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)
1 % of setting value or 10 ms
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-13
10 Technical Data
10.4
Transmission of Binary Information (optional)

Number of possible remote commands 4
Remote Commands
The operating time depends on the number of ends and the communication speed. The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of commands via highspeed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Operating times, total approx. for 2 ends, minimum typical for 3 ends, minimum typical for 6 ends, minimum typical Drop-off times, total approx. for 2 ends, typical for 3 ends, typical for 6 ends, typical Remote Annunciations 19 ms 20 ms 26 ms 8 ms 12 ms 10 ms 14 ms 15 ms 18 ms
Number of possible remote annunciations 24 The operating time depends on the number of ends and the communication speed. The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of commands via highspeed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Operating times, total approx. for 2 ends, minimum typical for 3 ends, minimum typical for 6 ends, minimum typical Drop-off times, total approx. for 2 ends, typical for 3 ends, typical for 6 ends, typical 24 ms 25 ms 35 ms 9 ms 16 ms 12 ms 18 ms 17 ms 23 ms
10-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.5 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology
10.5
Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology

Number of devices for protected object (= number of ends of the protected object limited by CTs) Number Connection optical fibre for flush mounted case for surface mounted case 2 for 7SD522 (chain topology) 2 to 6 for 7SD523 (chain topology or ring topology) 1 (7SD522) or 2 (7SD523) mounting position D (1 connection) or mounting pos. D and E (2 connections) on the rear side on the bottom side
Topology
Connection modules for protection data interface(s), depending on the ordering version:
Module in device FO5 1) FO6 2) FO7 2) FO8 2) Type of connector ST ST ST FC Type of fibre Multimode 62.5/125 m Multimode 62.5/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Optical wavelength 820 nm 820 nm Perm. path attenuation 8 dB 16 dB 7 dB 18 dB Distance, typical 1.5 km 0.95 miles 3.5 km 2.2 miles 10 km 6.25 miles 35 km 22 miles
1300 nm 1300 nm
2)
) Laser class 1 according to EN 608251/ 2 using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Laser class 3A according to EN 608251/ 2
Protection Data Communication
Direct connection: Transmission speed Type of fibre Optical wavelength Permissible path attenuation Transmission distance Connection via communication networks: Communication converter Supported network interfaces see Appendix A, Section A.1.1 Accessories G703.1 with 64 kBit/s; X.21 with 64 or 128 or 512 kBit/s Pilot wires up to 8 km (5 miles) with 128 kBit/s 512 kBit/s see Table above
Connection to communication converter see Table above under module FO5 Transmission speed 64 kBit/s with G703.1 512 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kBit/s with X.21 128 kBit/s with pilot wires 0.1 ms to 30 ms 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms (steps 0.1 ms) (steps 0.001 ms)
Max. transmission time Max. transmission time difference
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-15
10 Technical Data
10.6
Time Overcurrent Protection (optional)

As emergency overcurrent protection or back-up overcurrent protection: Emergency overcurrent protection Back-up overcurrent protection operates on communication failure operates independent of any events IPh>>, 3I0>>, IPh>, 3I0> IP, 3I0P one of the characteristics according to Figure 10-1 to 10-3 can be selected (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)
Operating Modes
Characteristics
Definite time stages Inverse time stage
(definite) (IDMT)
Current Stages
High set stages
IPh>> (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective) TIPh>> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 3I0>> (earth) T3I0>> (earth) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective)
Overcurrent stages (definite time)
IPh> (phases)
TIPh> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 3I0> (earth) T3I0> (earth) Overcurrent stages (inverse time acc. IEC) IP (phases) TIP (phases) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.05 s to 3.00 s or (ineffective)
TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 3I0P (earth) T3I0P (earth) 0.05 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.05 s to 3.00 s or (ineffective) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (ineffective)
T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Overcurrent stages IP (phases) (inverse time acc. ANSI) DIP (phases)
TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s
10-16
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.6 Time Overcurrent Protection (optional)
3I0P (earth) D3I0P (earth)
0.05 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (ineffective)
(steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)
T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Tolerances with definite time Tolerances with inverse time (IEC) currents times currents times
3 % of set value or 1% of nominal current 1 % of set value or 10 ms Pickup 5 % 15 ms at or 1.05 I/IP 1.15; 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15 for 2 I/IP 20 and TIP/s 1; or 2 I/3I0P 20 and T3I0P/s 1 for 2 I/IP 20 and DIP/s 1; or 2 I/3I0P 20 and D3I0P/s 1
(ANSI)
times
5 % 15 ms
The set times are pure delay times with definite time protection.
1)
Further Definite Stages; Stub Protection
Overcurrent IPh >STUB (phases) TIPh STUB (phases) 3I0 >STUB (earth) T3I0 STUB (earth) Tolerances currents times
0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s) or (ineffective) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s) or (ineffective) 3 % of setting value or 1% of rated current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Enable via special binary input is necessary.

1)
Operating Times of Definite Stages
The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Pickup time, minimum Pickup time, typical Dropout time, typical approx. 15 ms with fN = 50 Hz approx. 13 ms with fN = 60 Hz approx. 20 ms with fN = 50 Hz approx. 18 ms with fN = 60 Hz approx. 30 ms with fN = 50 Hz approx. 30 ms with fN = 60 Hz approx. 0.95 for IP/IN 0.5
Drop-off to Pickup Ratios
Current stages
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-17
10 Technical Data
100 t [s] 30 20 10 Tp 3.2
100 t [s] 30 20 10
5
3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 Normal inverse: (Type A) 2 3 5 7 10 I/Ip
0.14 t = -------------------------------- T p 0.02 ( I Ip ) 1 [s]
5
1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.05 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.05 20 1 Very inverse: (Type B) 2 3 5 10 I/Ip
13.5 t = -------------------------- T p [s] 1 (I I ) 1 p
Tp 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4
0.1
20
100
1000 t [s] 300
t [s] 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 0.05 10 I/Ip Extremely inverse: (Type C)
80 t = --------------------------- T p [s] 2 (I I ) 1 p
200 100
50
30 20
Tp 3.2
Tp 3.2 1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.05 1 2 3 5 7 10 I/Ip 20

[s]
10 5
1.6
3 2 1 0.5
0.4 0.1 0.2 20
0.1
Longtime inverse:
t Tp I Ip
trip time setting value time multiplier fault current setting value current
120 t = --------------------------- T p 1 (I I ) 1 p
Note: For earth fault read 3I0p instead of Ip and T3I0p instead of Tp
Figure 10-1
Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. IEC (phases and earth)
10-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.6 Time Overcurrent Protection (optional)
100 t [s] 30 20 10
100 t [s] 30 20 10 7 D [s] 15 10 5
7 5
3 2 1 0.7 0.5
5
3 2 1 0.7 0.5 0.3 D [s] 15 10 5
2 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.07 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip INVERSE

8.9341 t = ------------------------------------- + 0.17966 D ( I I )2.0938 1 p [s]
1 0.5
0.2 0.1 0.07 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip SHORT INVERSE 20
0.5
20
0.2663 t = ------------------------------------- + 0.03393 D ( I I ) 1.2969 1 p
[s]
100 t [s] 50 D [s] 15 10 20 5 10 5 3 2 0.5 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip LONG INVERSE
5.6143 t = ------------------------ + 2.18592 D [s] (I I ) 1 p
100 t [s] 50
20 10 2 1 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 0.5
D [s] 15 10 5
20
10 I/Ip
20
MODERATELY INVERSE
0.0103 t = -------------------------------- + 0.0228 D ( I I )0.02 1 p
[s]
Figure 10-2
Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. ANSI/IEEE, (phases and earth)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-19
10 Technical Data
100 t [s] 30 20 10
100 t [s] 30 20 10
5
3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip VERY INVERSE
3,922 t = -------------------------- + 0.0982 D [s] ( I I )2 1 p
5
D [s] 15 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.5 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip EXTREMELY INVERSE
5.64 t = -------------------------- + 0.02434 D [s] 2 (I I ) 1 p
D [s] 15 10 5 2 1 20
2 1 0.5 20
100 t [s] 30 20 10 5 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 2 3 5 10 I/Ip DEFINITE INVERSE
0.4797 t = ------------------------------------- + 0.21359 D ( I I )1.5625 1 p [s]
t D I Ip
D [s] 15 10 5
trip time setting value time multiplier fault current setting value current
2 1 0.5
Note: For earth fault read 3I0p instead of Ip and D3I0p instead of DIp
20
Figure 10-3
Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and earth)
10-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.7
Pickup
Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection

High-current pickup High-current pickup Dropout to pickup ratio Pickup tolerance
1
I>>> I>>>>
0.10 A to 15.00 A1) 1.00 A to 25.00 ) or (ineffective) approx. 0.90 A1
(steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 A)
3 % of set value or 1% of IN
Times
The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays (7SD52***N/P/Q/R/S/T). Shortest tripping time approx. 5 ms
10.8
Automatic Reclosure Function (optional)

Number of reclosure attempts Operating modes Control max. 8, first 4 with individual settings 1-pole, 3-pole or 1-/3-pole with pickup or trip command (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (fix) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)
Automatic Reclosures
Action times 0.01 s to 300.00 s; Initiation possible without pickup and action time Dead times for all cycles Dead times after evolving fault recognition Reclaim time after reclosure Lockout time after dynamic blocking Blocking time after manual closing Start signal monitoring time Circuit breaker supervision time Adaptive Dead Time / Dead Line Check Operating modes 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; 0.50 s to 300.00 s 0.5 s 0.50 s to 300.00 s; 0 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.01 s to 300.00 s
with voltage measurement or with close command transmission (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)
Action time 0.01 s to 300.00 s; Initiation possible without pickup and action time Maximum dead time Voltage measurement dead line Voltage measurement live line Measuring time Delay for close comm. transmission 0.50 s to 3000.00 s;
2 V to 70 V (phase-to-earth)(steps 1 V) 30 V to 90 V (phase-to-earth)(steps 1 V) 0.10 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s) 0.00 s to 300 s; (steps 0.01 s)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-21
10 Technical Data
10.9
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional)

Current flow monitoring Dropoff to pickup ratio Pickup tolerance Breaker status monitoring with three-pole control with individual pole control 0.25 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) approx. 0.95 5 % of set value or 0.01 A1) binary input for CB auxiliary contact 1 binary input each for each pole, or 1 binary input each for NO and NC contacts
Circuit Breaker Supervision
Note: Breaker failure protection can operate without the mentioned breaker auxiliary contacts but with reduced functionality. Processing of the auxiliary contacts are necessary for: Breaker failure protection without or with insufficient current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection), end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision.
1)
Starting Conditions
for beaker failure protection
single-pole trip internally three-pole trip internally single-pole trip externally three-pole trip externally three-pole trip without current
via binary inputs
Times
Pickup time
approx. 5 ms with measured quantities present approx. 20 ms after switch-on of measured quantities 15 ms with sinusoidal meas. quantities, 25 ms maximum 0.00 s to 30.00 s; (steps 0.01 s) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Reset time Delay times for all stages Time tolerance End Fault Protection
with signal transmission to the opposite line end Delay time Time tolerance Starting criterion Supervision time Time tolerance 0.00 s to 30.00 s; (steps 0.01 s) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms any pole open and any pole closed 0.00 s to 30.00 s; (steps 0.01 s) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Pole Discrepancy Supervision
10-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Setting Ranges Factor k according to IEC 602558 Time factor Alarm temperaturerise Current alarm stage
1
0.10 to 4.00 1.0 min to 999.9 min
(steps 0.01) (steps 0.1 min)
alarm/trip Ialarm
50 % to 100 % related to the trip temperature rise (steps 1 %) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Calculation Method Tripping Characteristic
Calculation method temperature rise
maximum temperature rise of 3 phases means of temperature rise of 3 phases temperature rise from maximum current see Figure 10-4
Tripping characteristic for (I/ k IN) 8

Meaning of abbreviations:
I pre 2 I ------------ 2 ------------ k I N k I N t = ln -----------------------------------------------I ------------ 2 1 k I N

t I Ipre k IN tripping time thermal time constant actual load current previous load current setting factor according to IEC 602558 rated current of protected object
Drop-off Ratios
/trip /alarm I/Ialarm
drop-off with alarm approx. 0.99 approx. 0.95 2 % or 10 mA1); class 2 % according to IEC 60 2558 3 % or 1 s; class 3 % according to IEC 60 2558 for I/(k IN) > 1.25
Tolerances
Relating to k IN Relating to tripping time

1
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-23
10 Technical Data
100 t [min] 50
Parameter: Setting value; Time constant
100 t [min] 50
30 [min] 20 1000
30 20
10
500
10
Parameter: Setting value; Time constant
5
200 3 2 100
[min] 1000
3 2
500
1 50
1 200
0.5 20 0.3 0.2 10
0.5 100
0.3 0.2
50
0.1 5
0.1 20
0.05 1 2 3 4
1 5
2 6 7 8 10 12 I / (kIN)
0.05 1 2
2 3 4
5 5
10 6 7 8 10 12
I / (kIN)
without previous load current

2 I ------------- k I N t = ln ------------------------------I 2 ------------- 1 k I N
with 90 % previous load current

I pre 2 I ------------- ------------- - k I - k I N N t = ln --------------------------------------------------- [min] 2 I ------------- 1 k I N
2
[min]
Figure 10-4
Tripping characteristic of the overload protection
10-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.11 Monitoring Functions
10.11 Monitoring Functions

Measured Values Current sum SUM.I Threshold SUM.I factor Current symmetry BAL.FACTOR I BAL.I LIMIT Voltage symmetry BAL.FACTOR U BAL.U LIMIT Open circuit IF = |i L1 + iL2 + iL3 + kI iE | > I THRESHOLD IN + I FACTOR |i| 0.05 A to 2.00 A1) (steps 0.01) 0.00 to 0.95 (steps 0.01) |Imin | / |Imax | < BAL.FACTOR I as long as Imax / IN > BAL.I LIMIT / IN 0.10 to 0.95 (steps 0.01) 0.10 A to 1.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) |Umin | / |Umax | < BAL.FACTOR U as long as |Umax | > BAL.U LIMIT 0.58 to 0.95 (steps 0.01) 10 V to 100 V (steps 1 V) Monitoring of current transformer circuits on current step change in one phase without residual current
1)
Number of supervised trip circuits Operation of each trip circuit Alarm delay
1 to 3 with 1 binary input or with 2 binary inputs 1 s to 30 s (steps 1 s)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-25
10 Technical Data
10.12 Supplementary Functions

Operational Measured Values Operational measured values of currents IL1; IL2; IL3 in A primary and secondary and % of IN oper Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN Operational measured values of currents 3I0; I1; I2 in A primary and secondary Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN Phase angles of currents Tolerance (IL1 IL2); (IL2 IL3); (IL3 IL1) in 1 at rated current
Operational measured values of voltages UL1L2; UL2L3; UL3L1 (if connected) in kV primary and V secondary Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of UN Operational measured values of voltages UL1E; UL2E; UL3E (if connected) in kV primary and V secondary Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of UN Operational measured values of voltages UL1E; UL2E; UL3E (if connected) in % of UN oper /3 Tolerance 2 % of measured value or 2 % of UN Operational measured values of voltages 3U0; U1; U2 (if connected) in kV primary and V secondary Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of UN Phase angles of voltages (if connected) (UL1 UL2); (UL2 UL3); (UL3 UL1) in Tolerance 1 at rated voltage Phase angles of voltages vs. currents Tolerance Operational measured values of power (if voltage applied) Tolerance Operational measured values of power factor (if voltage applied) Tolerance Operational measured values of frequency Range Tolerance Operational measured value for thermal value Measured values of the differential protection (UL1 IL1); (UL2 IL2); (UL3 IL3) in 1 at rated voltage and current S; P; Q (apparent; active; reactive power) in MVA, MW or Mvar primary 2 % of measured apparent power (3UI) or 1 MVA/MW/Mvar cos 0.02 f in Hz 10 Hz to 75 Hz 20 mHz within range fN 10 % at nominal measured values L1; L2; L3; res referred to tripping temperature rise trip IDIFF L1; IDIFFL2; IDIFFL3; IRESTL1; IREST L2; IRESTL3 in % of operational rated current
10-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.12 Supplementary Functions
Remote measured values of currents Remote measured values of voltages
IL1; IL2; IL3 of remote end in % of IN oper; (IL1); (IL2); (IL3) (remote vs. local) in UL1; UL2; UL3 of remote end in % of UN oper /3 ; (UL1); (UL2); (UL3) (remote vs. local) in
Fault Event Data Log Fault Recording
Storage of the messages of the last 8 faults with a total of max. 200 messages Number of stored fault records Storage period (start with pickup or trip) Sampling rate at fN = 50 Hz Sampling rate at fN = 60 Hz max. 8 max. 5 s for each fault approx. 15 s in total 1 ms 0.83 ms
The fault recordings are synchronized between the ends. Statistics Number of trip events caused by 7SD52 Number of auto-reclose events caused by 7SD52 Total of interrupted currents caused by 7SD52 Availability of transmission Delay time of transmission Real Time Clock and Buffer Battery Resolution for operational messages Resolution for fault messages Buffer battery pole segregated segregated according to 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR 1st AR and further ARs pole segregated availability in %/min and %/h resolution 0.01 ms 1 ms 1 ms 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA self-discharging time approx. 10 years
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-27
10 Technical Data
10.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Size 1/2 (of 19")
29.5
172 Mounting plate
34
29.5
172 Mounting plate
29 30
266
266
244
Side view (with screwed terminals) 225 220
Side view (with plug-in terminals)
244 221 + 2 5 or M4 245

+1
255.8 0.3
5.4
13.2 7.3
180 0.5 206.5 0.3 Panel cut-out
Rear view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 10-5 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/2)
10-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Size 1/1 (of 19")
29.5 172 Mounting plate 34 29.5 172 Mounting plate 29 30
266
266
244
Side view (with screwed terminals) 450 445
Side view (with plug-in terminals)
244 Rear view 6 Panel cut-out (view from the device front) 6
255.8 0.3
5 or M4 245 + 1 446 + 2 5 or M4
6 216.1 0.3 405 0.5 5.4 13.2
13.2 7.3
Dimensions in mm
431.4 0.3
Figure 10-6
Dimensions 7SD52 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/1)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-29
10 Technical Data
Housing for Panel Surface Mounting Size 1/2 (of 19")
240 219
51 76 75 100
10.5
260 29.5
280 320 344
1 26
25 50
71 Front view Side view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 10-7 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel surface mounting (size 1/2)
10-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
266
225
10.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Surface Mounting Size 1/1 (of 19")
465 444
101 151 150 200
10.5
1 51
50 100
Front view 260 29.5
266
71 Side view Figure 10-8
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions 7SD52 for panel surface mounting (size 1/1)
280 320 344
450
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
10-31
10 Technical Data
10-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Appendix
A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This Chapter provides ordering information for the models of 7SD52. General diagrams indicating the terminal connections of the 7SD52 models are included. Connection examples show the proper connections of the device to primary equipment in typical power system configurations. Tables with all settings and all information available in a 7SD52 equipped with all options are provided.
A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8
Ordering Information and Accessories General Diagrams Connection Examples Preset Configurations Protocol Dependent Functions List of Settings List of Information Measured Values
A-2 A-6 A-20 A-24 A-28 A-29 A-41 A-63
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-1
A Appendix
A.1
Ordering Information and Accessories
Version Differential protection for two-end operation Differential protection for multi-end operation Measured Current IPh = 1A, IE = 1A IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A Auxiliary Voltage (Power supply, Pick-up Threshold of Binary Inputs) DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 17 V 2) DC 60 to 125 V 1), binary input threshold 17 V 2) DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115 V, binary input threshold 73 V 2) DC 220 to 250 V, AC 115 V, binary input threshold 154 V 2)
7SD52
2 3
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
1 5
2 4 5 6
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs (BI) and Outputs (BO) Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/2 19", 8 BI, 15 BO, 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO, 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO, 1 Live status contact Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/2 19", 8 BI, 15 BO, 1 Live status contact Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO, 1 Live status contact Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO, 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/2 19", 8 BI, 15 BO, 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO, 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO, 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 Live status contact Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 Live status contact Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 Live status contact Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 Live status contact Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions Region GE, 50 Hz, IEC, German language (can be changed) Region world, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Englisch language (can be changed) Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, US-English language (can be changed) System Interface: Function and Hardware No system interface IEC Protocoll, electrical RS232 IEC Protokoll, electrical RS485 IEC Protokoll, optical 820 nm, ST-plug
A C D E G H J L M N P Q R S T
A B C
0 1 2 3
continued next page A-3
1) 2
with plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected ) for each binary input one of 3 pick-up threshold ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper
A-2
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
DIGSI/Modem Interface and Protection Data Interface 1 (Device Rear) See additional specification M Functions 1 Only 3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure Only 3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 1-/3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 1-/3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure With protection data interface 2 see additional specification N (3 has to be at position 6) Backup Functions without with emergency / backup time-overcurrent protection with emergency / backup time-overcurrent protection / breaker failure protection Additional Funktions 1 4 Remote Commands / 24 Remote Indication without without with with without external GPS synchronisation with external GPS synchronisation Additional Specification M DIGSI/Modem Interface (Device Rear) no DIGSI interface DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST-plug
7SD52
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
0 1 2 3 9
A B C
Transformer Expansions (Vector Group Adaption) without with without with
A E J N 0 1
+ M 0 1 2 3
Protection Data Interface 1 Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 1.5 km, for direct connection or communication networks Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a lenght of 3.5 km, for direct connection via multimode fibre Optical 1300 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 10 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre Optical 1300 nm, 2 FC-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 35 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre Additional Specification N Functions 1 Only 3-pole tripping Only 3-pole tripping 1-/3-pole tripping 1-/3-pole tripping
A B C D + N
without automatic reclosure with automatic reclosure without automatic reclosure with automatic reclosure
0 1 2 3
Protection Data Interface 2 Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 1.5 km, for direct connection or communication networks Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 3.5 km, for direct connection via multimode fibre Optical 1300 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 10 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre Optical 1300 nm, 2 FC-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 35 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre Ordering example: 7SD52214AA392AJ0 +M1A Differential protection here: pos. 12 = 9 pointing at M1A, i.e. version with DIGSI-interface RS232 on the rear side Protection data interface 1: 820 nm direct connection or communication networks
A B C D
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-3
A Appendix
A.1.1
Accessories
Converter for the serial connection of the differential protection system 7SD52 to the synchronous communication interfaces X.21 or G.703 or copper cable (Cu)
Name Opticalelectrical communication converter (CC-X/G) Opticalelectrical communication converter (CC-Cu) Order No. 7XV5662-0AA00 7XV5662-0AC00
GPS
Name GPSreceiver and antenna Power supply Order No. 7XV5664-0AA00 7XV5810-0BA00
Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker
Nominal varies Thermal 1.6 A; magnetic 6 A
Order No.
3RV1611-1AG14
Interface Modules
Exchange interface modules

Name RS232 RS485 LWL 820 nm F05 with STplug; 820 nm; multimode fibre up to a length of 1.5 km 1) F06 with STplug; 820 nm; multimode fibre up to a length of 3.5 km F07 with STplug; 1300 nm; monomode fibre up to a length of 10 km F08 with FCplug; 1300 nm; monomode fibre up to a length of 35 km
1
Order No. C73207-A351-D641-1 C73207-A351-D642-1 C73207-A351-D643-1 C53207-A351-D651-1 C53207-A351-D652-1 C53207-A351-D653-1 C53207-A351-D654-1
) is also used for the connection to an optical-electrical communication converter
Terminal Block Covering Caps
Covering cap for terminal block type 18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block 12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block
Order No. C73334-A1-C31-1 C73334-A1-C32-1
Short Circuit Links

Short circuit links for purpose/terminal type Voltage connections, 18 terminal, or 12 terminal Current connections,12 terminal, or 8 terminal Order No. C73334-A1-C34-1 C73334-A1-C33-1
A-4
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
Plug-in Connectors
Connector Type 2 pin 3 pin Order No. C73334-A1-C35-1 C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Bracket for 19"-Racks
Name
Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) Battery

Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA VARTA
C73165-A63-C200-3
Order No. 6127 101 501
Interface Cable
An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the operating software DIGSI 4.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Cable with 9-pin male/female connections Order No. 7XV5100-4
Operating Software DIGSI 4
Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC 4 devices

Operating Software DIGSI 4 DIGSI
Order No. 7XS5400-0AA00 7XS5402-0AA0
4, basic version with license for 10 computers
DIGSI 4, complete version with all option packages
Graphical Analysis Program SIGRA
Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4
Graphical analysis program DIGRA Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS5410-0AA0
DIGSI REMOTE 4
Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star connector) using DIGSI 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI 4.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS5440-1AA0
SIMATIC CFC 4
Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and creating additional function is SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete version of DIGSI 4.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Full version with license for 10 machines Order No. 7XS5450-0AA0
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-5
A Appendix
A.2
A.2.1
General Diagrams
Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting
7SD52A/J
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12
1 2 3 2
K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R5 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12
1 2 3 2
*) accelerated
BO13
BO14 BO15 BI7 BI8 Live status contact Power supply
K3 K4
+
(~)
K1 K2
System interface Service interface Time synchronization Operator interface Earthing at the rear wall
B C A
Interference suppression capacitors at the contacts, Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-1
General diagram 7SD52A/J (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
A-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables 8-12 and 8-13 in Section 8.2.1
A.2 General Diagrams 7SD52C/L

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 P17 P18 N1 N2 N3 N4 N6 N5 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 BO23 Live status contact Power supply
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R5 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P5 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 K3 K4
+
(~)
*) accelerated outputs
K1 K2 E D B C A
Protection data interface 2 Protection data interface 1 System interface Service interface Time synchronization Operator interface Earthing at the rear wall
Figure A-2
General diagram 7SD52C/L (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-7
A Appendix 7SD52N/S
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 P17 P18 N1 N2 N3 N4 N6 N5 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BO13 BO14 BO15 **) BO16 *) BO17 *) BO18 *) BO19 **) BO20 **) BO21 **) BO22 **) BO23 Live status contact Power supply
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R5 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P5 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 K3 K4
+
(~)
*) accelerated outputs **) high-speed
K1 K2 E D B C A
Protection data interface 2 Protection data interface 1 System interface Service interface Time synchronization Operator interface Earthing at the rear wall
Figure A-3
General diagram 7SD52N/S (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
A-8
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.2 General Diagrams
7SD52 D/M
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 P17 P18 N1 N2 N3 N4 N6 N5 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 H17 H18 G1 G2 G3 G4 G6 G5 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12
IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 BO23 BO24 BO25 BO26 BO27 BO28 BO29 BO30 BO31 Live status contact Power supply
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R5 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P5 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 H3 H4 H6 H7 H8 H5 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 K3 K4 K1 K2 E D B C
+
(~)
Time synchronization Operator interface Earthing at the rear wall
Protection data interface 1 System interface Service interface
Figure A-4
General diagram 7SD52D/M (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-9
A Appendix
7SD52 P/T
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 R15 R17 R18 R16 R13 R14 K17 K18 J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J5 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 P17 P18 N1 N2 N3 N4 N6 N5 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 H17 H18 G1 G2 G3 G4 G6 G5 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12
IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 **) BO16 *) BO17 *) BO18 *) BO19 **) BO20 **) BO21 **) BO22 **) BO23 BO24 BO25 BO26 BO27 BO28 BO29 BO30 BO31 Live status contact Power supply
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
K6 K7 K8 K5 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 R1 R2 R3 R4 R6 R5 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 P3 P4 P6 P7 P8 P5 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 H3 H4 H6 H7 H8 H5 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 K3 K4 K1 K2 E D B C
+
(~)
Time synchronization Operator interface Earthing at the rear wall
Protection data interface 1 System interface Service interface
Figure A-5
General diagram 7SD52P/T (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
A-10
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.2.2
Panel Surface Mounting
7SD52E
25 50 24 49 23 48 22 47 20 19 44 45 21 46 43 18 42 17 41 40 39 14 38 13 37 12 36 11 IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BO13
1 2 3 2
63 87 62 88 86 61 85 60 84 59 83 58 74 99 73 98 72 97 96 71 95 70 94 69
1 2 3 2
BO14 BO15 Live status contact Power supply
90 65
+
(~)
L+ L Earthing terminal (26)
Operator interface
Pin assignment of interfaces see Table 8-12 in Section 8.2.1
Earthing at the side wall
Figure A-6
General diagram 7SD52E (panel surface mounting)
For further serial interfaces refer to Figure A-7 and A-8.
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-11
A Appendix 7SD52E (up to development state /BB)
Channel B RS232
System interface optical or electrical
5 6 7 8 9 10
CTS RTS
GND TxD RxD

Screen
RS485 B GND A
Channel C RS232
Service interface optical or electrical
30 31 32 33 34 35
CTS RTS
GND TxD RxD

Screen
RS485 B GND A
optical
Channel D
optical
Channel E
Time synchronization
electrical
2 27 3 28 4 29 1
IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V

Screen
Figure A-7
General diagram 7SD52E up to development state /BB (panel surface mounting)
A-12
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.2 General Diagrams 7SD52E (beginning with development state /CC)
System interface
optical electrical
Channel B
electric RS232/RS485
Service interface
optical electrical
Channel C
For the pin assignment of the interfaces see tables 8-12 and 8-13 in subsection 8.2.1
Protection data interface 1 optical
Channel D
optical
Channel E
Clock synchronisation
electrical
2 27 3 28 4 29 1
IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V Screen
Figure A-8
General diagram 7SD52E beginning with development state /CC (panel surface mounting)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-13
A Appendix 7SD52G
50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 45 44 94 95 46 96 75 25 74 24 73 23 22 72 71 21 70 20 69 19 90 40 89 39 86 36 35 85 84 34 83 33 82 32 IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 Live status contact Power supply
1 2 3 2
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 BO23
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
123 172 122 173 171 121 170 120 169 119 168 118 149 199 148 198 147 197 196 146 195 145 194 144 190 140 139 188 138 189 187 137 186 136 185 135 184 134
174 124
+
(~)
Operator interface

Figure A-9
General diagram 7SD52G (panel surface mounting)
A-14
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.2 General Diagrams 7SD52Q

50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 45 44 94 95 46 96 75 25 74 24 73 23 22 72 71 21 70 20 69 19 90 40 89 39 86 36 35 85 84 34 83 33 82 32 IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 Live status contact Power supply
1 2 3 2
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 **) BO16 *) BO17 *) BO18 *) BO19 **) BO20 **) BO21 **) BO22 **) BO23
1 2 3 2
123 172 122 173 171 121 170 120 169 119 168 118 149 199 148 198 147 197 196 146 195 145 194 144 190 140 139 188 138 189 187 137 186 136 185 135 184 134
174 124
+
(~)
Operator interface

Figure A-10
General diagram 7SD52Q (panel surface mounting)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-15
A Appendix
7SD52H
50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 45 44 94 95 46 96
75 25 74 24 73 23 22 72 71 21 70 20 69 19 90 40 89 39 86 36 35 85 84 34 83 33 82 32 68 18 67 17 66 16 15 65 64 14 63 13 62 12
IL1
IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BO21 BO22 BO23 BO24 BO25 BO26 BO27 BO28
1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 2
123 172 122 173 171 121 170 120 169 119 168 118 149 199 148 198 147 197 196 146 195 145 194 144 190 140 139 188 138 189 187 137 186 136 185 135 184 134 166 116 115 164 114 165 163 113 162 112 161 111 160 110 174 124
+
(~)
BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22
BO29 BO30 BO31
BI23 BI24
Live status contact Power supply

Operator interface
1 2 3 2
L+ L
Earthing terminal (51)
Figure A-11
General diagram 7SD52H (panel surface mounting)
For further serial interfaces refer to Figure A-13 and A-14. A-16
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
7SD52R
50 100 49 99 48 98 47 97 45 44 94 95 46 96
75 25 74 24 73 23 22 72 71 21 70 20 69 19 90 40 89 39 86 36 35 85 84 34 83 33 82 32 68 18 67 17 66 16 15 65 64 14 63 13 62 12
IL1
IL2 IL3 I4 UL1 UL2 UL3 U4 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18
*) BO1 *) BO2 *) BO3 *) BO4 *) BO5 *) BO6 *) BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 **) BO16 *) BO17 *) BO18 *) BO19
1 2 3 2
123 172 122 173 171 121 170 120 169 119 168 118 149 199 148 198 147 197 196 146 195 145 194 144 190 140 139 188 138 189 187 137 186 136 185 135 184 134
1 2 3 2
**) BO20
**) BO21
**) BO22
**) BO23 BO24 BO25 BO26 BO27 BO28
BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22
BO29 BO30 BO31
BI23 BI24
166 116 115 164 114 165 163 113 162 112 161 111 160 110 174 124
+
Live status contact Power supply

Operator interface
1 2 3 2
(~)
L+ L
Earthing terminal (51)
Figure A-12
General diagram 7SD52R (panel surface mounting)
For further serial interfaces refer to Figure A-13 and A-14. A-17
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A Appendix 7SD52G/H/Q/R (up to development state /BB)
Channel B RS232
System interface optical or electrical
5 6 7 8 9 10
CTS RTS
GND TxD RxD

Screen
RS485 B GND A
Channel C RS232
Service interface optical or electrical
55 56 57 58 59 60
CTS RTS
GND TxD RxD

Screen
RS485 B GND A
optical
Channel D
optical
Channel E
Time synchronization
electrical
2 52 3 53 4 54 1
IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V

Screen
Figure A-13
General diagram 7SD52G/H/Q/R up to development state /BB (panel surface mounting)
A-18
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.2 General Diagrams 7SD52G/H/Q/R (beginning with development state /CC)

optical
System interface
Channel B
electrical
Service interface
optical electrical
Channel C
For the pin assignment of the interfaces see tables 8-12 and 8-13 in subsection 8.2.1
Protection data interface1
optical
Channel D
optical
Channel E
Clock synchronisation
electrical
2 52 3 53 4 54 1
IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC COMMON IN 5 V IN 24 V screen
Figure A-14
General diagram 7SD52G/H/Q/R beginning with development state /CC (panel surface mounting)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-19
A Appendix
A.3
Connection Examples
Current Transformer Connection Examples
Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 25 24 23

P2 S2
Q1 Q3 Q5
IL1 IL2 IL3
Q2 Q4 Q6
50 49 48
P1
S1
22
Q7 7SD52
I4
Q8
47
L1
L2
L3
Housing size 1/2

P2 S2
Q1 Q3 Q5
IL1 IL2 IL3
Q2 Q4 Q6
100 99 98
P1
S1
47
Q7 7SD52
I4
Q8
97
L1
L2
L3
Housing size 1/1
Figure A-15
Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection for earth current (residual 3I0 neutral current), normal circuit layout appropriate for all networks
A-20
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.3 Connection Examples

P2 S2
Q1 Q3 Q5
IL1 IL2 IL3
Q2 Q4 Q6
50 49 48
P1
S1
47
Q8 7SD52
I4
Q7
22
L1
L2
L3
P2
S2
P1
S1
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 current input I4
Housing size 1/2

P2 S2
Q1 Q3 Q5
IL1 IL2 IL3
Q2 Q4 Q6
100 99 98
P1
S1
97
Q8 7SD52
I4
Q7
47
L1
L2
L3
P2
S2
P1
S1
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side! Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 current input I4
Housing size 1/1

Figure A-16 Current connections to three current transformers and a separate neutral current transformer (summation transformer) for earth current preferred for solidly or low-resistive earthed networks
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-21
A Appendix
Voltage Transformer Connection Examples
L1
L2 L3
Panel surface mounted Flush mounted/cubicle 20 R15

A B
UL1 UL2 UL3
19 R17 44 R18
a b
45 R16 7SD52
Housing size 1/2
L1
L2 L3

A B
UL1 UL2 UL3
44 R17 94 R18
a b
95 R16 7SD52
Housing size 1/1
Figure A-17
Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers (normal circuit layout)
A-22
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.3 Connection Examples
L1
L2 L3

A B
UL1 UL2 UL3
19 R17 44 R18
da dn a b
45 R16 U4
21 R13 46 R14
7SD52
Housing size 1/2
L1
L2 L3

A B
UL1 UL2 UL3
44 R17 94 R18
da dn a b
95 R16 U4
46 R13 96 R14
7SD52
Housing size 1/1
Figure A-18
Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers with additional open-delta windings (dadnwinding)
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-23
A Appendix
A.4
Preset Configurations
Binary Inputs
Table A-1 Binary input presettings LCD Text >Reset LED >Manual Close >BLOCK O/C I>> >BLOCK O/C I> >BLOCK O/C Ip >BLOCK O/C Ie>> >BLOCK O/C Ie> >BLOCK O/C Iep >BLOCK I-STUB >BLOCK O/CIe>>> >CB 3p Open >CB1 3p Open >CB1 Ready Function No. 5 356 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7130 7132 380 411 371 Remarks Reset of latched indications, Hactive Manual close command, Hactive no presetting Blocking of all stages of the time overcurrent protection, H-active Binary Input BI 1 BI 2 BI 3 BI 4
BI 5 BI 6
Circuit breaker in closed position, H-active Circuit breaker ready for TRIP-CLOSE cycle (CB check before AR), Hactive Direct transfer trip (remote trip 3-pole), H-active no presetting
BI 7 (further)
>Remote Trip1
3541
Binary Outputs
Table A-2 Binary Output BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 Binary output presettings LCD Text Relay PICKUP PI1 Data fault PI2 Data fault 4) Relay TRIP 2) Relay TRIP 1pL1 1) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1)
1) 3)
Function No. 501 3229 3231 4) 511 2) 512 1) 515 1)
Remarks Device (general) pickup, non-latched Data fault on reception at protection data interface 1, non-latched Data fault on reception at protection data interface 2, non-latched 4) Device (general) trip command, non-latched 2) Device trip command pole L1, non-latched 1)
2) 4)
Devices with 1- and 3-pole trip Devices with auto-reclosure option
Devices with 3-pole trip only Devices with 2 protection data interfaces
A-24
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.4 Preset Configurations
Table A-2 Binary Output BO5
Binary output presettings LCD Text Relay TRIP 2) Relay TRIP 1pL2 1) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1) Function No. 511 2) 513 1) 515 1) 2) 514 1) 515 1) 2851 3) 3148 2784 3) 3190 3192 2054 160 511 2) 512 1) 515 1) 511 2) 513 1) 515 1) 2) 514 1) 515 1) Remarks Device (general) trip command, non-latched 2) Device trip command pole L2, non-latched 1) no presetting 2) Device trip command pole L3, non-latched 1) Close command of auto-reclosure, non-latched 3) Differential protection blocked, non-latched Auto-reclosure not ready, non-latched 3) Differential protection in test mode, local or at a remote end, non-latched Emergency mode in progress, non-latched Group alarm of all alarms, non-latched Device (general) trip command, non-latched 2) Device trip command pole L1, non-latched 1) Device (general) trip command, non-latched 2) Device trip command pole L2, non-latched 1) no presetting 2) Device trip command pole L3, non-latched 1) no presetting
2 4
BO6
2) Relay TRIP 1pL3 1) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1)
BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13
AR Close 3) Diff block AR is NOT ready 3) Test Diff. TestDiff.remote Emer. mode Alarm Sum Event Relay TRIP 2) Relay TRIP 1pL1 1) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1)
BO14
Relay TRIP 2) Relay TRIP 1pL2 1) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1)
BO15
2) Relay TRIP 1pL3 1) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1)
(further)
1 3
) Devices with 1- and 3-pole trip ) Devices with auto-reclosure option
) Devices with 3-pole trip only ) Devices with 2 protection data interfaces
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-25
A Appendix
LEDs
Table A-3 LED LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED presettings LCD Text Relay PICKUP L1 Relay PICKUP L2 Relay PICKUP L3 Relay PICKUP E DT inconsistent DT unequal Par. different Equal IDs Relay TRIP 2) Relay TRIP 3ph. 1) LED7 2) Relay TRIP 1pL1 1) Relay TRIP 1pL2 1) Relay TRIP 1pL3 1) LED8 LED9 LED10 LED11 LED12 LED13 LED14
1 3
Function No. 503 504 505 506 3233 3234 3235 3487 511 2) 515 1) 2) 512 1) 513 1) 514 1) 3190 3192 3229 3231 4) 3148 2784 3) 2054 160
Remarks Device (general) trip command, latched Device (general) pickup phase L1, latched Device (general) pickup phase L2 latched Device (general) pickup phase L3, latched Inconsistencies between devices: Device table, settings, more than 1 device with the same address, non-latched Device (general) trip command, latched 2) Device trip command three-pole, latched 1) no presetting 2) Device trip command single-pole, latched 1) Differential protection in test mode, local or at a remote end, non-latched Data fault on reception at protection data interface 1, non-latched Data fault on reception at protection data interface 2, non-latched 4) Differential protection blocked, non-latched Auto-reclosure not ready, non-latched 3) Emergency mode in progress, non-latched Group alarm of all alarms, non-latched
2 4
LED6
Test Diff. TestDiff.remote PI1 Data fault PI2 Data fault 4) Diff block AR is NOT ready 3) Emer. mode Alarm Sum Event
) Devices with 1- and 3-pole trip ) Devices with auto-reclosure option
) Devices with 3-pole trip only ) Devices with 2 protection data interfaces
A-26
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.4 Preset Configurations
Preset CFCCharts
7SD52 provides a CFC configuration sheet with preset logical functions. These convert the binary inputs >DataStop and >Test mode from single point indication (SP) into internal single point indication (IntSP).
Negator NEG Negator BO X1 PLC1_BEA 1/ Y BO
IN: Device >DataStop SP
OUT: Device UnlockDT IntSP
Timer TIMER Timer PLC1_BEA 4/ Q BO QT1 BO QT2 BO OR OR ORGate BO X1 BO X2 PLC1_BEA 5/ Y BO
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP
0 BO R 10 10
BO S I T1x1ms I T2x1ms
INVERT NEG Negator BO X1 PLC1_BEA 2/ Y BO DM BUILD_DI Create Double PLC1_BEA 3/ Y W
COM BOOL_TO_IC PLC1_BEA Bool to intern 6/
16#0 W ORIGIN 16#0 W PROP 0 I TIMx100m

BO TRIG W VAL
IE BO
OUT: Diff. Prot Test Diff. IntSP
0 BO TYP_DP_I
BO VAL OFF BO VAL ON
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-27
A Appendix
A.5
Protocol Dependent Functions
Protocol Function Operational measured values Metering values Fault recording
IEC 608705103 Yes Yes Yes
User-defined alarms and switch- Yes ing objects Time synchronization Via Protocol; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Binary Input Yes
Alarms with Time Stamp Commissioning Tools: Alarm and measured value transmission blocking Generate test alarms
Yes
Yes
A-28
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.6 List of Settings
A.6
List of Settings
Note: Depending on the version and the variant ordered some addresses are not used or have different default settings. The setting ranges and presettings listed in the following table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values the transformation ratio of the transformer also must be taken into consideration. Note: Addresses which have an A attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI 4, under Additional Settings.
Addr.
103 104 110 112 115 116 118 122 124 126
Setting Title
Grp Chge OPTION OSC. FAULT REC. Trip 1pole DIFF.PROTECTION P. INTERFACE 1 P. INTERFACE 2 GPS-SYNC. DTT Direct Trip HS/SOTF-O/C Back-Up O/C Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting Options
Default Setting
Disabled Enabled 3pole only Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Disabled
Comments
Setting Group Change Option Oscillographic Fault Records 1pole trip permitted Differential protection Protection Interface 1 (Port D) Protection Interface 2 (Port E) GPS synchronization DTT Direct Transfer Trip Instantaneous HighSpeed/SOTF Overcurrent Backup overcurrent
3pole only 1-/3pole Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) Disabled with Pickup and Action time with Pickup but without Action time withTrip and Action time with Trip but without Action time Disabled Enabled
133
Auto Reclose
Auto-Reclose Function
134
AR control mode
with Trip but without Action time
AR control mode
139
BREAKER FAILURE
Disabled
Breaker Failure Protection
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-29
A Appendix
Addr.
140
Setting Title
Trip Cir. Sup.
Setting Options
Disabled 1 trip circuit 2 trip circuits 3 trip circuits Disabled Enabled 2 relays 3 relays 4 relays 5 relays 6 relays not connected connected NO YES
Default Setting
Disabled
Comments
142 143
Therm.Overload NUMBER OF RELAY
Disabled 2 relays
Thermal Overload Protection Number of relays
144 145
V-TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER
connected NO
Voltage transformers Transformer inside protection zone
Addr.
201 203 204 205 206 210 211 220
Setting Title
CT Starpoint Unom PRIMARY Unom SECONDARY CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY U4 transformer Uph / Udelta I4 transformer
Function
Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1
Setting Options
towards Line towards Busbar 1.0..1200.0 kV 80..125 V 10..5000 A 1A 5A not connected Udelta transformer 0.10..9.99 not connected Neutral Current (of the protected line) 0.010..5.000 50 Hz 60 Hz 0.02..30.00 sec 0.01..30.00 sec 0.00..30.00 sec 1.00..10.00
Default Setting
towards Line 400.0 kV 100 V 1000 A 1A not connected 1.73 Neutral Current (of the protected line) 1.000 50 Hz 0.10 sec 1.00 sec 0.10 sec 1.00
Comments
CT Starpoint Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L) CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current U4 voltage transformer is Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-Delta-VT I4 current transformer is
221 230 240A 241A 242 251
I4/Iph CT Rated Frequency TMin TRIP CMD TMax CLOSE CMD T-CBtest-dead K_ALF/K_ALF_N
Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's Rated Frequency Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Dead Time for CB test-autoreclosure k_alf/k_alf nominal
A-30
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr.
253 254 301
Setting Title
E% ALF/ALF_N E% K_ALF_N ACTIVE GROUP
Function
Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 Change Group
Setting Options
0.5..50.0 % 0.5..50.0 % Group A Group B Group C Group D Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP Fault event Power System fault 0.30..5.00 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec; Display Targets on every Pickup Display Targets on TRIP only 1.0..1200.0 kV 10..5000 A 10.0..5000.0 MVA 0.05..1.00 A 0.01..30.00 sec with Pole Open Current Threshold only with CBaux AND Pole Open Current 0.01..30.00 sec with Pickup with Trip
Default Setting
5.0 % 10.0 % Group A
Comments
CT Error in % at k_alf/k_alf nominal CT Error in % at k_alf nominal Active Setting Group is
302
CHANGE
Change Group
Group A
Change to a diffedent setting group
402A
WAVEFORMTRIGGER Oscillographic Fault Records WAVEFORM DATA MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME FltDisp.LED/LCD Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Oscillographic Fault Records Device
Save with Pickup
Waveform Capture
403A 410 411 412 415 610
Fault event 2.00 sec 0.25 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec Display Targets on every Pickup
Scope of Waveform Data Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input Fault Display on LED / LCD
1103 1104 1106 1130A 1132A 1134
FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. OPERATION POWER PoleOpenCurrent SI Time all Cl. Line status
Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2
400.0 kV 1000 A 692.8 MVA 0.10 A 0.10 sec with Pole Open Current Threshold only
Measurement: Full Scale Voltage (100%) Measurement: Full Scale Current (100%) Operational power of protection zone Pole Open Current Threshold Seal-in Time after ALL closures Line status
1150A 1155
SI Time Man.Cl 3pole coupling
Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2
0.30 sec with Trip
Seal-in Time after MANUAL closures 3 pole coupling
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-31
A Appendix
Addr.
1156A
Setting Title
Trip2phFlt
Function
Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Intertrip Intertrip Intertrip Intertrip Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E)
Setting Options
3pole 1pole, leading phase 1pole, lagging phase 0..11 0..11 Solid Earthed Not Earthed OFF ON 0.10..20.00 A 0.10..20.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.8..100.0 A; YES NO Alarm only Trip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00..30.00 sec ON OFF Direct connection with fibre optic cabel Communication converter with 64 kBit/s Communication converter with 128 kBit/s Communication converter with 512 kBit/s 0.1..30.0 ms 0.000..3.000 ms 0.05..2.00 sec 0.0..60.0 sec
Default Setting
3pole
Comments
Trip type with 2phase faults
1161 1162 1163 1201 1210 1213 1217A 1218A 1233 1301 1302 1303 1304 1501 1502
VECTOR GROUP U VECTOR GROUP I TRANS STP IS STATE OF DIFF. I-DIFF> I-DIF>SWITCH ON T-DELAY I-DIFF> T3I0 1PHAS I-DIFF>> I-TRIP SEND I-TRIP RECEIVE T-ITRIP BI T-ITRIP PROL BI STATE PROT I 1 CONNEC. 1 OVER
0 0 Solid Earthed ON 0.30 A 0.30 A 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 1.2 A NO Alarm only 0.02 sec 0.00 sec ON Direct connection with fibre optic cabel
Vector group numeral for voltage Vector group numeral for current Transformer starpoint is State of differential protection I-DIFF>: Pickup value I-DIFF>: Value under switch on condition I-DIFF>: Trip time delay Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol. star-point) I-DIFF>>: Pickup value State of transmit. the intertrip command Reaction if intertrip command is receiv. Delay for intertrip via binary input Prolongation for intertrip via bin.input State of protection interface 1 Connection 1 over
1505A 1506A 1509 1510
PROT 1 T-DELAY PROT 1 UNSYM. T-DATA DISTURB T-DATAFAIL
Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E)
30.0 ms 0.100 ms 0.10 sec 6.0 sec
Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay time Prot 1: Diff. in send and receive time Time delay for data disturbance alarm Time del for transmission failure alarm
A-32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr.
1511
Setting Title
PI1 SYNCMODE
Function
Protection Interface (Port D+E)
Setting Options
Telegram and GPS Telegram or GPS GPS synchronization OFF 0.00..300.00 sec; ON OFF Direct connection with fibre optic cabel Communication converter with 64 kBit/s Communication converter with 128 kBit/s Communication converter with 512 kBit/s 0.1..30.0 ms 0.000..3.000 ms Telegram and GPS Telegram or GPS GPS synchronization OFF 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 1..65534 relay 1 relay 2 relay 3 relay 4 relay 5 relay 6 ON OFF 0.5..60.0 sec
Default Setting
Telegram and GPS
Comments
PI1 Synchronizationmode
1512 1601 1602
Td ResetRemote STATE PROT I 2 CONNEC. 2 OVER
Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E)
0.00 sec ON Direct connection with fibre optic cabel
Remote signal RESET DELAY for comm.fail State of protection interface 2 Connection 2 over
1605A 1606A 1611
Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E)
30.0 ms 0.100 ms Telegram and GPS
1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1710
ID OF RELAY 1 ID OF RELAY 2 ID OF RELAY 3 ID OF RELAY 4 ID OF RELAY 5 ID OF RELAY 6 LOCAL RELAY
Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology
1 2 3 4 5 6 relay 1
Identification number of relay 1 Identification number of relay 2 Identification number of relay 3 Identification number of relay 4 Identification number of relay 5 Identification number of relay 6 Local relay is
1801 1803A 2201 2202
GPS-SYNC. TD GPS FAILD FCT Direct Trip Trip Time DELAY
Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E)
OFF 2.1 sec OFF 0.01 sec
GPS synchronization Delay time for local GPS-pulse loss Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) Trip Time Delay
DTT Direct Trans- ON fer Trip OFF DTT Direct Trans- 0.00..30.00 sec; fer Trip
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-33
A Appendix
Addr.
2301 2302 2303 2305 2310 2401
Setting Title
INRUSH REST. 2nd HARMONIC CROSS BLOCK MAX INRUSH PEAK CROSSB 2HM FCT HS/SOTF-O/C
Function
Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Backup overcurrent
Setting Options
OFF ON 10..45 % NO YES 1.1..25.0 A 0.00..60.00 sec; ON OFF 0.10..15.00 A;
Default Setting
OFF 15 % NO 15.0 A 0.00 sec ON
Comments
Inrush Restraint 2nd. harmonic in % of fundamental Cross Block Maximum inrush-peak value Time for Crossblock with 2nd harmonic Inst. High Speed/SOTF-O/C is
2404
I>>>
1.50 A
I>>> Pickup
2405A
I>>>>
1.00..25.00 A;
I>>>> Pickup
2601
Operating Mode
ON Only Emergency protection OFF 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES
ON
Operating mode
2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625
Iph>> T Iph>> 3I0>> PICKUP T 3I0>> I>> Telep/BI I>> SOTF Iph> T Iph> 3I0> T 3I0> I> Telep/BI I> SOTF
Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent
2.00 A 0.30 sec 0.50 A 2.00 sec YES NO 1.50 A 0.50 sec 0.20 A 2.00 sec NO NO
Iph>> Pickup T Iph>> Time delay 3I0>> Pickup T 3I0>> Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Iph> Pickup T Iph> Time delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault
A-34
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr.
2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2640 2642 2643 2646 2650 2652 2653 2656 2660
Setting Title
Iph> STUB T Iph STUB 3I0> STUB T 3I0 STUB I-STUB Telep/BI I-STUB SOTF Ip> T Ip Time Dial Time Dial TD Ip T Ip Add 3I0p PICKUP T 3I0p TimeDial TimeDial TD3I0p T 3I0p Add IEC Curve
Function
Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent
Setting Options
0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.00 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.00..30.00 sec 0.05..4.00 A; 0.05..3.00 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.00..30.00 sec Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long time inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse NO YES NO YES 0.00..30.00 sec ON OFF
Default Setting
1.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 2.00 sec NO NO A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec A 0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec Normal Inverse
Comments
Iph> STUB Pickup T Iph STUB Time delay 3I0> STUB Pickup T 3I0 STUB Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Ip> Pickup T Ip Time Dial Time Dial TD Ip T Ip Additional Time Delay 3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial Time Dial TD 3I0p T 3I0p Additional Time Delay IEC Curve
2661
ANSI Curve
Backup overcurrent
Inverse
ANSI Curve
2670 2671 2680 2901
I(3I0)p Tele/BI I(3I0)p SOTF SOTF Time DELAY MEASURE. SUPERV
Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Measurement Supervision
NO NO 0.00 sec ON
Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Trip time delay after SOTF Measurement Supervision
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-35
A Appendix
Addr.
2902A 2903A 2904A 2905A 2906A 2907A 2908 2921 3401 3402 3403 3404 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411A 3420 3421 3423 3424 3425 3430
Setting Title
BALANCE U-LIMIT BAL. FACTOR U BALANCE I LIMIT BAL. FACTOR I I THRESHOLD I FACTOR BROKEN WIRE FAST i SUPERV AUTO RECLOSE CB? 1.TRIP T-RECLAIM T-BLOCK MC EV. FLT. RECOG. EV. FLT. MODE T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT T RemoteClose T-DEAD EXT. AR WITH DIFF AR w/ SOTF-O/C AR WITH I.TRIP AR w/ DTT AR w/ BackUpO/C AR TRIP 3pole
Function
Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose
Setting Options
10..100 V 0.58..0.95 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.95 0.10..2.00 A 0.00..0.95 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON YES NO 0.50..300.00 sec 0.50..300.00 sec; 0 with Pickup with Trip Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR-cycle 0.01..300.00 sec 0.01..300.00 sec 0.00..300.00 sec; 0.50..300.00 sec; YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO
Default Setting
50 V 0.75 0.50 A 0.50 0.25 A 0.50 ON ON ON NO 3.00 sec 1.00 sec with Trip starts 3pole AR-cycle 0.50 sec 3.00 sec 0.20 sec sec YES YES YES YES YES YES
Comments
Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Balance Monitor Balance Factor for Current Monitor Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor Fast broken current-wire supervision State of fast current summation supervis Auto-Reclose Function CB ready interrogation at 1st trip Reclaim time after successful AR cycle AR blocking duration after manual close Evolving fault recognition Evolving fault (during the dead time) AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Send delay for remote close command Maximum dead time extension AR with differential protection ? AR with switch-onto-fault overcurrent AR with intertrip ? AR with direct transfer trip AR with back-up overcurrent 3pole TRIP by AR
A-36
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr.
3431
Setting Title
DLC / RDT
Function
Auto Reclose
Setting Options
Without Dead Line Check (DLC) 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.50..3000.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.10..30.00 sec 30..90 V 2..70 V YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO
Default Setting
Without
Comments
Dead Line Check
3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3440 3441 3450 3451 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470
T-ACTION ADT T-MAX ADT ADT 1p allowed ADT CB? CLOSE ADT SynRequest T U-stable U-live> U-dead< 1.AR: START 1.AR: T-ACTION 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 1.AR Tdead 2Flt 1.AR Tdead 3Flt 1.AR Tdead1Trip 1.AR Tdead3Trip 1.AR: Tdead EV. 1.AR: CB? CLOSE 1.AR SynRequest 2.AR: START 2.AR: T-ACTION 2.AR Tdead 1Flt 2.AR Tdead 2Flt 2.AR Tdead 3Flt 2.AR Tdead1Trip 2.AR Tdead3Trip 2.AR: Tdead EV. 2.AR: CB? CLOSE
Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose
0.20 sec 5.00 sec NO NO NO 0.10 sec 48 V 30 V YES 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO
Action time Maximum dead time 1pole TRIP allowed CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR Supervision time for dead/live voltage Voltage threshold for live line or bus Voltage threshold for dead line or bus Start of AR allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-37
A Appendix
Addr.
3471 3472 3473 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907
Setting Title
2.AR SynRequest 3.AR: START 3.AR: T-ACTION 3.AR Tdead 1Flt 3.AR Tdead 2Flt 3.AR Tdead 3Flt 3.AR Tdead1Trip 3.AR Tdead3Trip 3.AR: Tdead EV. 3.AR: CB? CLOSE 3.AR SynRequest 4.AR: START 4.AR: T-ACTION 4.AR Tdead 1Flt 4.AR Tdead 2Flt 4.AR Tdead 3Flt 4.AR Tdead1Trip 4.AR Tdead3Trip 4.AR: Tdead EV. 4.AR: CB? CLOSE 4.AR SynRequest FCT BreakerFail I> BF 1p-RETRIP (T1) T1-1pole T1-3pole T2 T3-BkrDefective
Function
Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure
Setting Options
YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO ON OFF 0.05..20.00 A NO YES 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec;
Default Setting
NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO ON 0.10 A YES 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0.15 sec 0.00 sec
Comments
Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR Breaker Failure Protection is Pick-up threshold I> 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local trip) T1, Delay after 1pole start (local trip) T1, Delay after 3pole start (local trip) T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar trip) T3, Delay for start with defective bkr.
A-38
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Addr.
3908
Setting Title
Trip BkrDefect.
Function
Breaker Failure
Setting Options
Default Setting
Comments
Trip output selection with defective bkr
NO NO trips with T1-trip-signal trips with T2-trip-signal trips with T1 and T2trip-signal NO YES ON OFF 0.00..30.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00..30.00 sec; YES OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2 2 sec OFF
3909 3921 3922 3931 3932 4001 4002 4003 4201
Chk BRK CONTACT End Flt. stage T-EndFault PoleDiscrepancy T-PoleDiscrep. FCT TripSuperv. No. of BI Alarm Delay Ther. OVER LOAD
Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure Breaker Failure
Check Breaker contacts End fault stage is Trip delay of end fault stage Pole Discrepancy supervision Trip delay with pole discrepancy TRIP Circuit Supervision is Number of Binary Inputs per trip circuit Delay Time for alarm Thermal overload protection
Trip Circuit Super- ON vision OFF Trip Circuit Super- 1..2 vision Trip Circuit Super- 1..30 sec vision Thermal Overload OFF ON Alarm Only Thermal Overload 0.10..4.00 Thermal Overload 1.0..999.9 min Thermal Overload 50..100 % Thermal Overload 0.10..4.00 A Thermal Overload Theta Max Average \T \T @ Imax Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool 0..255 0..255 0..255 0..255 YES NO NO YES 0..255
4202 4203 4204 4205 4206
K-FACTOR TIME CONSTANT ALARM I ALARM CALC. METHOD
1.10 100.0 min 90 % 1.00 A Theta Max
K-Factor Time Constant Thermal Alarm Stage Current Overload Alarm Setpoint Method of Acquiring Temperature IP-address .xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3) IP-address xxx..xxx.xxx(Position 4-6) IP-address xxx.xxx..xxx(Position 7-9) IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.(Pos. 10-12) Num Lock Front interface supports LCP/ NCP mode IP-address .xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3)
4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4411
IP-A (A.x.x.x) IP-B (x.B.x.x) IP-C (x.x.C.x) IP-D (x.x.x.D) NUM LOCK LCP/NCP IP-A (A.x.x.x)
141 142 255 150 YES YES 141
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-39
A Appendix
Addr.
4412 4413 4414 4415 4416
Setting Title
IP-B (x.B.x.x) IP-C (x.x.C.x) IP-D (x.x.x.D) NUM LOCK LCP/NCP
Function
Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool Commissioning Tool
Setting Options
0..255 0..255 0..255 YES NO NO YES
Default Setting
142 255 160 YES YES
Comments
IP-address xxx..xxx.xxx(Position 4-6) IP-address xxx.xxx..xxx(Position 7-9) IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.(Pos. 10-12) Num Lock Service interface supports LCP/NCP mode
A-40
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.7 List of Information
A.7
List of Information
Note: * under the Log-Buffers means that the associated message can be configured by the user but is not pre-configured.
F.No. Description Function Type of Information Log-Buffers Ground Fault Log On/Off Marked in Oscill. Record Trip (Fault) Log On/Off Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
>Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock (>Time Synch) >Trigger Waveform Capture (>Trig.Wave.Cap.) >Reset LED (>Reset LED) >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Group Bit0) >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Group Bit1) >Test mode (>Test mode)
Device
SP
LED BI
BO
Oscillographic Fault Records Device Change Group
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
5 7
SP SP
* *
* *
LED BI LED BI
BO BO
Change Group
SP
LED BI
BO
15
Device
SP
ON OFF * ON OFF ON OFF * ON ON
LED BI
BO
135
53
16 51
>Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Device is Operational and Protecting (Device OK) At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active (ProtActive) Reset Device (Reset Device) Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Reset LED (Reset LED)
Device Device
SP OUT
* *
LED BI LED
BO BO
135 135
54 81
1 1
52
Device
IntSP
LED
BO
192
18
55 56 60
Device Device Device
OUT OUT OUT_ Ev OUT OUT
* * *
LED LED LED
BO BO BO
192 192 192
4 5 19
1 1 1
67 68
Resume (Resume) Clock Synchronization Error (Clock SyncError) Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSavTime) Setting calculation is running (Settings Calc.) Settings Check (Settings Check) Level-2 change (Level-2 change)
Device Device
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * ON OFF * ON
* *
LED LED
BO BO
135
97
69
Device
OUT
LED
BO
70
Device
OUT
LED
BO
192
22
71 72
Device Device
OUT OUT
* *
LED LED
BO BO
73 110
Local setting change (Local change) Event lost (Event Lost)
Device Device
OUT OUT_ Ev OUT
* * LED BO 135 130 1
113
Flag Lost (Flag Lost)
Device
ON
LED
BO
135
136
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-41
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
Ground Fault Log On/Off
Marked in Oscill. Record
Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
125
Chatter ON (Chatter ON)
Device
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
BO
135
145
126
Protection ON/OFF (via system port) (ProtON/OFF) Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port) (AR ON/OFF) Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) Error 5V (Error 5V)
Device
IntSP
LED
BO
127
Auto Reclose
IntSP
LED
BO
140
Device
OUT
LED
BO
192
47
144
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
164
160
Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Event) Failure: General Current Supervision (Fail I Superv.) Failure: Current Balance (Fail I balance) Failure: General Voltage Supervision (Fail U Superv.) Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail U balance) Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery)
Device
OUT
LED
BO
192
46
161
Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Device
OUT
LED
BO
192
32
163
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
135
183
164
OUT
LED
BO
192
33
167
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
BO
135
186
177
OUT
LED
BO
135
193
181
Error: A/D converter (Error A/D-conv.)
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
178
182
Alarm: Real Time Clock (Alarm Clock)
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
194
183
Error Board 1 (Error Board 1)
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
171
184
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
172
185
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
173
186
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
174
187
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
175
188
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
176
189
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
177
192
Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting (Error1A/5Awrong) Alarm: NO calibration data available (Alarm NO calibr)
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
169
193
Device
OUT
LED
BO
135
181
A-42
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
Configurable in Matrix
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
197
Measurement Supervision is switched OFF (MeasSup OFF) Waveform data deleted (Wave. deleted) Alarm: Current summation supervision (Failure i) Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L1 (Broken Iwire L1) Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L2 (Broken Iwire L2) Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L3 (Broken Iwire L3) Broken wire supervision is switched OFF (Broken wire OFF) Current summation superv is switched OFF (i superv. OFF) Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.)
Measurement Supervision Oscillographic Fault Records Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Measurement Supervision Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2
OUT
ON OFF ON
LED
BO
135
197
203
OUT_ Ev OUT
LED
BO
135
203
289
ON OFF ON
LED
BO
135
250
290
OUT
LED
BO
135
137
291
OUT
ON
LED
BO
135
138
292
OUT
ON
LED
BO
135
139
295
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
BO
296
OUT
LED
BO
301
OUT
ON
135
231
302
Fault Event (Fault Event)
OUT
ON
135
232
351
>Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1 (>CB Aux. L1) >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2 (>CB Aux. L2) >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Phase L3 (>CB Aux. L3) >Manual close signal (>Manual Close)
SP
LED BI
BO
150
352
SP
LED BI
BO
150
353
SP
LED BI
BO
150
356
SP
LED BI
BO
150
357
>Block all close commands from external (>CloseCmd.Blo) >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) (>FAIL:Feeder VT) >CB1 Pole L1 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) (>CB1 Pole L1) >CB1 Pole L2 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) (>CB1 Pole L2) >CB1 Pole L3 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) (>CB1 Pole L3) >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for reclosing (>CB1 Ready) >CB faulty (>CB faulty)
SP
ON OFF ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
150
361
SP
LED BI
BO
192
38
366
SP
LED BI
BO
150
66
367
SP
LED BI
BO
150
67
368
SP
LED BI
BO
150
68
371
SP
LED BI
BO
150
71
378
SP
LED BI
BO
379
>CB aux. contact 3pole Closed (>CB 3p Closed)
SP
LED BI
BO
150
78
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-43
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
380
>CB aux. contact 3pole Open (>CB 3p Open) >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR (>1p Trip Perm) >External AR programmed for 1phase only (>Only 1ph AR)
Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2
SP
LED BI
BO
150
79
381
SP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
382
SP
LED BI
BO
383
>Enable all AR Zones / Stages (>Ena- Power System Data ble ARzones) 2 >Lockout SET (>Lockout SET) Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2
SP
ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
385
SP
LED BI
BO
150
35
386
>Lockout RESET (>Lockout RESET)
SP
LED BI
BO
150
36
410
>CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CBTest) (>CB1 3p Closed) >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test) (>CB1 3p Open) Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP)
SP
LED BI
BO
150
80
411
SP
LED BI
BO
150
81
501
OUT
LED
BO
192
84
503
Relay PICKUP Phase L1 (Relay PIKKUP L1) Relay PICKUP Phase L2 (Relay PIKKUP L2) Relay PICKUP Phase L3 (Relay PIKKUP L3) Relay PICKUP Earth (Relay PICKUP E) Relay TRIP command Phase L1 (Relay TRIP L1) Relay TRIP command Phase L2 (Relay TRIP L2) Relay TRIP command Phase L3 (Relay TRIP L3) General CLOSE of relay (Relay CLOSE) Relay GENERAL TRIP command (Relay TRIP) Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L1 (Relay TRIP 1pL1) Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L2 (Relay TRIP 1pL2) Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L3 (Relay TRIP 1pL3) Relay TRIP command Phases L123 (Relay TRIP 3ph.)
OUT
LED
BO
192
64
504
OUT
LED
BO
192
65
505
OUT
LED
BO
192
66
506
OUT
LED
BO
192
67
507
OUT
LED
BO
192
69
508
OUT
LED
BO
192
70
509
OUT
LED
BO
192
71
510
OUT
LED
BO
511
OUT
* OFF
LED
BO
192
68
512
OUT
LED
BO
513
OUT
LED
BO
514
OUT
LED
BO
515
OUT
LED
BO
A-44
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
530
LOCKOUT is active (LOCKOUT)
Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 Statistics
IntSP
ON OFF *
LED
BO
533
Primary fault current IL1 (IL1 =)
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON LED BO
150
177
534
OUT
150
178
535
OUT
150
179
536
Final Trip (Final Trip)
OUT
ON
150
180
545
Time from Pickup to drop out (PU Time) Time from Pickup to TRIP (TRIP Time) Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase (Trip Coupled 3p) Manual close signal detected (Man.Clos.Detect) CB alarm suppressed (CB Alarm Supp) Number of breaker TRIP commands (# TRIPs=) Number of breaker TRIP commands L1 (TripNo L1=) Number of breaker TRIP commands L2 (TripNo L2=) Number of breaker TRIP commands L3 (TripNo L3=) Accumulation of interrupted current L1 ( IL1 =) Accumulation of interrupted current L2 ( IL2 =) Accumulation of interrupted current L3 ( IL3 =) Last fault current Phase L1 (Last IL1 =) Last fault current Phase L2 (Last IL2 =) Last fault current Phase L3 (Last IL3 =) >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection (>BF on) >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection (>BF off)
OUT
546
OUT
560
OUT
ON
LED
BO
150
210
561
OUT
ON
LED
BO
150
211
563
OUT
LED
BO
1000
OUT
1001
Statistics
OUT
1002
Statistics
OUT
1003
Statistics
OUT
1027
Statistics
OUT
1028
Statistics
OUT
1029
Statistics
OUT
1030
Statistics
OUT
1031
Statistics
OUT
1032
Statistics
OUT
1401
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1402
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-45
General Interrogation GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
1403
>BLOCK Breaker failure (>BLOCK BkrFail) >BF: External start 3pole (>BF Start 3pole) >BF: External release (>BF release)
Breaker Failure
SP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
166
103
1415
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1432
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1435
>BF: External start L1 (>BF Start L1)
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1436
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1437
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1439
>BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) (>BF Start w/o I) Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI (BkrFailON/offBI) Breaker failure is switched OFF (BkrFail OFF) Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail BLOCK) Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail ACTIVE) Breaker failure protection started (BF Start) BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL1) BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L2 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL2) BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L3 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL3) BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole (BF T1TRIP L123) BF Trip in case of defective CB (BF TRIP CBdefec) BF Trip T2 (busbar trip) (BF T2TRIP(bus)) BF Trip End fault stage (BF EndFlt TRIP) BF Pole discrepancy pickup (BF CBdiscrSTART) BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 (BF CBdiscr L1) BF Pole discrepancy pickup L2 (BF CBdiscr L2)
Breaker Failure
SP
LED BI
BO
1440
Breaker Failure
IntSP
LED
BO
1451
Breaker Failure
OUT
LED
BO
166
151
1452
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
166
152
1453
Breaker Failure
OUT
LED
BO
166
153
1461
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON OFF ON
LED
BO
166
161
1472
Breaker Failure
OUT
LED
BO
1473
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON
LED
BO
1474
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON
LED
BO
1476
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON
LED
BO
1493
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON
LED
BO
1494
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON
LED
BO
192
85
1495
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON
LED
BO
1496
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
BO
1497
Breaker Failure
OUT
LED
BO
1498
Breaker Failure
OUT
LED
BO
A-46
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
1499
BF Pole discrepancy pickup L3 (BF CBdiscr L3) BF Pole discrepancy Trip (BF CBdiscr TRIP) >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection (>BLK ThOverload) Thermal Overload Protection OFF (Th.Overload OFF) Thermal Overload Protection BLOKKED (Th.Overload BLK) Overload Protection ACTIVE (Overload ACT) Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (O/L I Alarm) Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip (O/L Alarm) Winding Overload (Winding O/L)
Breaker Failure
OUT
ON OFF ON
LED
BO
1500
Breaker Failure
OUT
LED
BO
1503
Thermal Overload
SP
LED BI
BO
167
1511
Thermal Overload
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
BO
167
11
1512
Thermal Overload
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
167
12
1513
Thermal Overload
OUT
LED
BO
167
13
1515
Thermal Overload
OUT
LED
BO
167
15
1516
Thermal Overload
OUT
LED
BO
167
16
1517
Thermal Overload
OUT
LED
BO
167
17
1521
Thermal Overload TRIP (ThOverload TRIP) Emergency mode (Emer. mode)
Thermal Overload
OUT
ON
LED
BO
167
21
2054
Device
OUT
ON OFF * * ON OFF *
ON OFF * * *
LED
BO
192
37
2701 2702 2703
>Auto reclose ON (>AR ON) >Auto reclose OFF (>AR OFF) >BLOCK Auto reclose (>BLOCK AR)
Auto Reclose Auto Reclose Auto Reclose
SP SP SP
LED BI LED BI LED BI
BO BO BO
40 40 40
1 2 3
1 1 1
2711
>External start of internal Auto reclose (>AR Start) >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR (>Trip L1 AR) >AR: Ext. Trip L2 for internal AR (>Trip L2 AR) >AR: Ext. Trip L3 for internal AR (>Trip L3 AR) >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. (>Trip 1p for AR) >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. (>Trip 3p for AR) >AR: Remote Close signal (>AR RemoteClose) >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.check (>Sync.release) >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK 1pole AR)
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
11
2712
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
12
2713
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
13
2714
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
14
2715
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
15
2716
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
16
2727
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
22
2731
Auto Reclose
SP
LED BI
BO
40
31
2737
Auto Reclose
SP
ON OFF
LED BI
BO
40
32
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-47
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
2738
>AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK 3pole AR) >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle (>BLK 1phase AR) >AR: Block 2phase-fault AR-cycle (>BLK 2phase AR) >AR: Block 3phase-fault AR-cycle (>BLK 3phase AR) >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle (>BLK 1.ARcycle)
Auto Reclose
SP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
40
33
2739
Auto Reclose
SP
LED BI
BO
40
34
2740
Auto Reclose
SP
LED BI
BO
40
35
2741
Auto Reclose
SP
LED BI
BO
40
36
2742
Auto Reclose
SP
LED BI
BO
40
37
2743
>AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle (>BLK 2.AR- Auto Reclose cycle) >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle (>BLK 3.AR- Auto Reclose cycle) >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles (>BLK 4.-n. AR) >AR: External Trip for AR start (>Trip for AR) >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start (>Pickup L1 AR) >AR: External pickup L2 for AR start (>Pickup L2 AR) >AR: External pickup L3 for AR start (>Pickup L3 AR) >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start (>Pickup 1ph AR) >AR: External pickup 2phase for AR start (>Pickup 2ph AR) >AR: External pickup 3phase for AR start (>Pickup 3ph AR) Auto recloser is switched OFF (Auto recl. OFF) Auto recloser is switched ON (Auto recl. ON) AR: Auto-reclose is blocked (AR is blocked) Auto recloser is NOT ready (AR is NOT ready) AR: Circuit breaker not ready (CB not ready) AR: CB ready monitoring window expired (AR T-CBreadyExp) AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI (AR on/off BI) Auto Reclose
SP
LED BI
BO
40
38
2744
SP
LED BI
BO
40
39
2745
SP
LED BI
BO
40
40
2746
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
41
2747
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
42
2748
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
43
2749
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
44
2750
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
45
2751
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
46
2752
Auto Reclose
SP
ON
LED BI
BO
40
47
2781
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
40
81
2782
Auto Reclose
IntSP
LED
BO
192
16
2783
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
40
83
2784
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
192
130
2787
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
87
2788
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
88
2796
Auto Reclose
IntSP
LED
BO
A-48
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
2801
Auto-reclose in progress (AR in progress) AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired (AR T-Start Exp) AR: Maximum dead time expired (AR TdeadMax Exp) AR: Evolving fault recognition (AR evolving Flt) AR is set to operate after 1p trip only (AR Program1pole) AR dead time after evolving fault (AR Td. evol.Flt) AR dead time after 1pole trip running (AR Tdead 1pTrip) AR dead time after 3pole trip running (AR Tdead 3pTrip) AR dead time after 1phase fault running (AR Tdead 1pFlt) AR dead time after 2phase fault running (AR Tdead 2pFlt) AR dead time after 3phase fault running (AR Tdead 3pFlt) AR 1st cycle running (AR 1stCyc. run.) AR 2nd cycle running (AR 2ndCyc. run.) AR 3rd cycle running (AR 3rdCyc. run.) AR 4th or higher cycle running (AR 4thCyc. run.) AR cycle is running in ADT mode (AR ADT run.) Auto-reclose Close command (AR Close) AR: Close command after 1pole 1st cycle (AR Close1.Cyc1p) AR: Close command after 3pole 1st cycle (AR Close1.Cyc3p) AR: Close command after 2nd cycle (AR Close 2.Cyc) AR: Reclaim time is running (AR TRecl. run.) Auto reclose cycle successful (AR Successful) Auto reclose Lockout (AR Lockout)
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
101
2809
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
174
2810
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
175
2818
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
118
2820
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
143
2821
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON OFF ON
LED
BO
40
197
2839
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
148
2840
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
149
2841
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
150
2842
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
151
2843
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
154
2844 2845
Auto Reclose Auto Reclose
OUT OUT
* *
ON ON
LED LED
BO BO
40 40
155 157
2 2
2846
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
158
2847
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
159
2848
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
130
2851
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
192
128
2852
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
152
2853
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
153
2854
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
192
129
2861
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
161
2862
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
162
2863
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
163
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-49
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
2864
AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR (AR 1p Trip Perm) AR: Synchro-check request (AR Sync.Request) AR: TRIP command 3pole (AR TRIP 3pole) AR 1st cycle zone extension release (AR 1.CycZoneRel) AR 2nd cycle zone extension release (AR 2.CycZoneRel) AR 3rd cycle zone extension release (AR 3.CycZoneRel) AR 4th cycle zone extension release (AR 4.CycZoneRel) AR zone extension (general) (AR Zone Release) AR Remote close signal send (AR Remote Close) No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands 1pole (AR #Close1./1p=) No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands 3pole (AR #Close1./3p=) No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands 1p (AR #Close2./1p=) No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands 3p (AR #Close2./3p=) Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L1 (2nd Harmonic L1) Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L2 (2nd Harmonic L2) Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L3 (2nd Harmonic L3) Diff: Active (Diff active)
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
164
2865
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
165
2871
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
171
2889
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
160
2890
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
169
2891
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
170
2892
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
172
2893
Auto Reclose
OUT
LED
BO
40
173
2894
Auto Reclose
OUT
ON
LED
BO
40
129
2895
Statistics
OUT
2896
Statistics
OUT
2897
Statistics
OUT
2898
Statistics
OUT
3102
Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection
OUT
LED
BO
92
89
3103
OUT
LED
BO
92
90
3104
OUT
LED
BO
92
91
3120
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
92
92
3132
Diff: Fault detection (Diff. Gen. Flt.)
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
BO
3133
Diff: Fault detection in phase L1 (Diff. Flt. L1) Diff: Fault detection in phase L2 (Diff. Flt. L2) Diff: Fault detection in phase L3 (Diff. Flt. L3) Diff: Earth fault detection (Diff. Flt. E)
OUT
LED
BO
92
93
3134
OUT
LED
BO
92
94
3135
OUT
LED
BO
92
95
3136
OUT
LED
BO
92
96
A-50
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
3137
Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>> (IDiff>> Flt.) Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff> (I-Diff> Flt.) Diff: General TRIP (Diff. Gen. TRIP)
Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
BO
92
97
3139
OUT
LED
BO
92
98
3141
OUT
LED
BO
92
99
3142
Diff: TRIP - Only L1 (Diff TRIP 1p L1)
OUT
LED
BO
92
100
3143
OUT
LED
BO
92
101
3144
OUT
LED
BO
92
102
3145
Diff: TRIP L123 (Diff TRIP L123)
OUT
LED
BO
92
103
3146
Diff: TRIP 1pole (Diff TRIP 1pole)
OUT
LED
BO
3147
Diff: TRIP 3pole (Diff TRIP 3pole)
OUT
LED
BO
3148
Diff: Differential protection is blocked (Diff block) Diff: Diff. protection is switched off (Diff OFF) Diff: Fault detection L1 (only) (Diff Flt. 1p.L1) Diff: Fault detection L1E (Diff Flt. L1E)
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
BO
92
104
3149
OUT
LED
BO
92
105
3176
OUT
LED
BO
3177
OUT
LED
BO
3178
Diff: Fault detection L2 (only) (Diff Flt. 1p.L2) Diff: Fault detection L2E (Diff Flt. L2E)
OUT
LED
BO
3179
OUT
LED
BO
3180
Diff: Fault detection L12 (Diff Flt. L12)
OUT
LED
BO
3181
Diff: Fault detection L12E (Diff Flt. L12E) Diff: Fault detection L3 (only) (Diff Flt. 1p.L3) Diff: Fault detection L3E (Diff Flt. L3E)
OUT
LED
BO
3182
OUT
LED
BO
3183
OUT
LED
BO
3184
Diff: Fault detection L31 (Diff Flt. L31)
OUT
LED
BO
3185
Diff: Fault detection L31E (Diff Flt. L31E) Diff: Fault detection L23 (Diff Flt. L23)
OUT
LED
BO
3186
OUT
LED
BO
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-51
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
3187
Diff: Fault detection L23E (Diff Flt. L23E) Diff: Fault detection L123 (Diff Flt. L123) Diff: Fault detection L123E (Diff Flt. L123E) Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection (Test Diff.) Diff: Set Commissioning state of Diff. (Comm. Diff) Diff: Remote relay in Teststate (TestDiff.remote) Diff: Commissioning state is active (Comm.Diff act.) Diff: >Test Diff. (>Test Diff.)
Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E)
OUT
LED
BO
3188
OUT
LED
BO
3189
OUT
LED
BO
3190
IntSP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
LED
FK
BO
92
106
3191
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
92
107
3192
OUT
LED
BO
92
108
3193
OUT
LED
BO
92
109
3194
SP
LED BI
BO
3195
Diff: >Comm. Diff (>Comm. Diff)
SP
LED BI
BO
3215
Incompatible Firmware Versions (Wrong Firmware) Prot Int 1: Own Datas received (PI1 Data reflec) Prot Int 2: Own Datas received (PI2 Data reflec) >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is switched off (>PI1 light off) >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off (>PI2 light off) Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data (PI1 Data fault) Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure (PI1 Datafailure) Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data (PI2 Data fault) Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure (PI2 Datafailure) Device table has inconsistent numbers (DT inconsistent) Device tables are unequal (DT unequal) Differences between common parameters (Par. different) Different PI for transmit and receive (PI1<->PI2 error)
OUT
LED
BO
3217
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
BO
3218
OUT
LED
BO
3227
SP
LED BI
BO
3228
SP
LED BI
BO
3229
OUT
LED
BO
93
135
3230
OUT
LED
BO
93
136
3231
OUT
LED
BO
93
137
3232
OUT
LED
BO
93
138
3233
OUT
LED
BO
3234
OUT
LED
BO
3235
OUT
LED
BO
3236
OUT
LED
BO
A-52
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
3239
Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high (PI1 TD alarm) Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too high (PI2 TD alarm) Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID (PI1 with) Prot Int 2: Connected with relay ID (PI2 with) > GPS failure from external (>GPS failure) GPS: local pulse loss (GPS loss)
Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Protection Interface (Port D+E) Differential Topology Differential Topology
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
BO
93
139
3240
OUT
LED
BO
93
140
3243
OUT
3244
OUT
3245
SP
LED BI
BO
3247
OUT
LED
BO
3248
GPS: Prot Int 1 is GPS sychronized (PI 1 GPS sync.) GPS: Prot Int 2 is GPS sychronized (PI 2 GPS sync.) GPS:PI1 unsym.propagation delay too high (PI 1 PD unsym.) GPS:PI2 unsym.propagation delay too high (PI 2 PD unsym.) > PI1 Synchronization RESET (>SYNC PI1 RESET) > PI2 Synchronization RESET (>SYNC PI2 RESET) > Logout input signal (>Logout)
OUT
LED
BO
3249
OUT
LED
BO
3250
OUT
LED
BO
3251
OUT
LED
BO
3252
SP
LED BI
BO
3253
SP
LED BI
BO
3451
SP
LED BI
BO
3457
System operates in a closed Ringtopology (Ringtopology)
OUT
LED
BO
93
141
3458
System operates in a open Chaintopo- Differential Topology (Chaintopology) logy Communication topology is complete (Topol complete) Relay 1 in Logout state (Rel1Logout) Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology Differential Topology
OUT
LED
BO
93
142
3464
OUT
LED
BO
3475
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
93
143
3476
Relay 2 in Logout state (Rel2Logout)
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
93
144
3477
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
93
145
3478
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
93
146
3479
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
93
147
3480
IntSP
LED
FK
BO
93
148
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-53
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
3484
Local activation of Logout state (Logout) Equal IDs in constellation (Equal IDs)
Differential Topology Differential Topology
IntSP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
FK
BO
93
149
3487
OUT
LED
BO
3501
I.Trip: >Intertrip L1 signal input (>Inter- Intertrip trip L1) I.Trip: >Intertrip L2 signal input (>Inter- Intertrip trip L2) I.Trip: >Intertrip L3 signal input (>Inter- Intertrip trip L3) I.Trip: >Intertrip 3 pole signal input (>Intertrip 3pol) I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L1 (ITrp.rec.PI1.L1) I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L2 (ITrp.rec.PI1.L2) I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L3 (ITrp.rec.PI1.L3) I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 2 L1 (ITrp.rec.PI2.L1) I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 2 L2 (ITrp.rec.PI2.L2) I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 2 L3 (ITrp.rec.PI2.L3) I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L1 (ITrp.sen.PI1.L1) I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L2 (ITrp.sen.PI1.L2) I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L3 (ITrp.sen.PI1.L3) I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 2 L1 (ITrp.sen.PI2.L1) I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 2 L2 (ITrp.sen.PI2.L2) I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 2 L3 (ITrp.sen.PI2.L3) I.Trip: General TRIP (ITrp. Gen. TRIP) Intertrip
SP
LED BI
BO
3502
SP
LED BI
BO
3503
SP
LED BI
BO
3504
SP
LED BI
BO
3505
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3506
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3507
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3508
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3509
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3510
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3511
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3512
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3513
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3514
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3515
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3516
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3517
Intertrip
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
BO
3518
I.Trip: TRIP - Only L1 (ITrp.TRIP 1p L1) I.Trip: TRIP - Only L2 (ITrp.TRIP 1p L2) I.Trip: TRIP - Only L3 (ITrp.TRIP 1p L3)
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
93
150
3519
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
93
151
3520
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
93
152
A-54
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
3521
I.Trip: TRIP L123 (ITrp.TRIP L123)
Intertrip
OUT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED
BO
93
153
3522
I.Trip: TRIP 1pole (Diff TRIP 1pole)
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3523
I.Trip: TRIP 3pole (Diff TRIP 3pole)
Intertrip
OUT
LED
BO
3525
>Differential protection blocking signal (> Diff block) Differential blocking received at PI1 (Diffblk.rec PI1) Differential blocking received at PI2 (Diffblk.rec PI2) Differential blocking sending via PI1 (Diffblk.sen PI1) Differential blocking sending via PI2 (Diffblk.sen PI2) >Remote Trip 1 signal input (>Remote Trip1) >Remote Trip 2 signal input (>Remote Trip2) >Remote Trip 3 signal input (>Remote Trip3) >Remote Trip 4 signal input (>Remote Trip4) Remote Trip 1 received (RemoteTrip1 rec) Remote Trip 2 received (RemoteTrip2 rec) Remote Trip 3 received (RemoteTrip3 rec) Remote Trip 4 received (RemoteTrip4 rec) >Remote Signal 1 input (>Rem. Signal 1) >Remote Signal 2 input (>Rem.Signal 2) >Remote Signal 3 input (>Rem.Signal 3) >Remote Signal 4 input (>Rem.Signal 4) >Remote Signal 5 input (>Rem.Signal 5) >Remote Signal 6 input (>Rem.Signal 6)
Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Differential Protection Remote Signals
SP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off
LED BI
BO
3526
OUT
LED
BO
3527
OUT
LED
BO
3528
OUT
LED
BO
3529
OUT
LED
BO
3541
SP
LED BI
BO
3542
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3543
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3544
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3545
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
154
3546
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
155
3547
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
156
3548
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
157
3549
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3550
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3551
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3552
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3553
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3554
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-55
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
3555
>Remote Signal 7 input (>Rem.Signal 7) >Remote Signal 8 input (>Rem.Signal 8) >Remote Signal 9 input (>Rem.Signal 9) >Remote Signal 10 input (>Rem.Signal10) >Remote Signal 11 input (>Rem.Signal11) >Remote Signal 12 input (>Rem.Signal12) >Remote Signal 13 input (>Rem.Signal13) >Remote Signal 14 input (>Rem.Signal14) >Remote Signal 15 input (>Rem.Signal15) >Remote Signal 16 input (>Rem.Signal16) >Remote Signal 17 input (>Rem.Signal17) >Remote Signal 18 input (>Rem.Signal18) >Remote Signal 19 input (>Rem.Signal19) >Remote Signal 20 input (>Rem.Signal20) >Remote Signal 21 input (>Rem.Signal21) >Remote Signal 22 input (>Rem.Signal22) >Remote Signal 23 input (>Rem.Signal23) >Remote Signal 24 input (>Rem.Signal24) Remote signal 1 received (Rem.Sig 1recv) Remote signal 2 received (Rem.Sig 2recv) Remote signal 3 received (Rem.Sig 3recv) Remote signal 4 received (Rem.Sig 4recv)
Remote Signals
SP
on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off
LED BI
BO
3556
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3557
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3558
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3559
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3560
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3561
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3562
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3563
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3564
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3565
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3566
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3567
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3568
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3569
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3570
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3571
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3572
Remote Signals
SP
LED BI
BO
3573
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
158
3574
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
159
3575
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
160
3576
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
161
A-56
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
3577
Remote signal 5 received (Rem.Sig 5recv) Remote signal 6 received (Rem.Sig 6recv) Remote signal 7 received (Rem.Sig 7recv) Remote signal 8 received (Rem.Sig 8recv) Remote signal 9 received (Rem.Sig 9recv) Remote signal 10 received (Rem.Sig10recv) Remote signal 11 received (Rem.Sig11recv) Remote signal 12 received (Rem.Sig12recv) Remote signal 13 received (Rem.Sig13recv) Remote signal 14 received (Rem.Sig14recv) Remote signal 15 received (Rem.Sig15recv) Remote signal 16 received (Rem.Sig16recv) Remote signal 17 received (Rem.Sig17recv) Remote signal 18 received (Rem.Sig18recv) Remote signal 19 received (Rem.Sig19recv) Remote signal 20 received (Rem.Sig20recv) Remote signal 21 received (Rem.Sig21recv) Remote signal 22 received (Rem.Sig22recv) Remote signal 23 received (Rem.Sig23recv) Remote signal 24 received (Rem.Sig24recv) >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF Overcurrent (>BLOCK SOTF-O/C)
Remote Signals
OUT
on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off *
LED
BO
93
162
3578
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
163
3579
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
164
3580
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
165
3581
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
166
3582
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
167
3583
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
168
3584
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
169
3585
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
170
3586
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
171
3587
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
172
3588
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
173
3589
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
174
3590
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
175
3591
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
176
3592
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
177
3593
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
178
3594
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
179
3595
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
180
3596
Remote Signals
OUT
LED
BO
93
181
4253
Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-57
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
4271
SOTF-O/C is switched OFF (SOTF-O/ Instantaneous C OFF) HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED (SOTF-O/C BLOCK) Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent
OUT
ON OFF
LED
BO
25
71
4272
OUT
ON OFF
ON OFF
LED
BO
25
72
4273
SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE (SOTF-O/C ACTIVE)
OUT
LED
BO
25
73
4281
SOTF-O/C PICKED UP (SOTF-O/C PICKUP)
OUT
* OFF
LED
BO
25
81
4282
SOTF-O/C Pickup L1 (SOF O/ CpickupL1)
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
82
4283
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
83
4284
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
84
4285
High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L1 (I>>>>O/C p.upL1)
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
85
4286
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
86
4287
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
87
4289
High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L1 (HS/SOF TRIP1pL1)
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
89
4290
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
90
4291
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
91
4292
High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 1pole (HS/SOF TRIP 1p)
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
94
4293
High Speed/SOTF-O/C General TRIP (HS/SOF Gen.TRIP)
OUT
ON
LED
BO
4294
High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 3pole (HS/SOF TRIP 3p)
OUT
ON
LED
BO
A-58
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
4295
High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP command L123 (HS/SOF TRIPL123)
Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip DTT Direct Local Trip
OUT
ON
LED
BO
25
95
4403
>BLOCK Direct Local Trip function (>BLOCK DTT) >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L1 (>DTT Trip L1) >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L2 (>DTT Trip L2) >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L3 (>DTT Trip L3) >Direct Local Trip INPUT 3ph L123 (>DTT Trip L123) Direct Local Trip is switched OFF (DTT OFF) Direct Local Trip is BLOCKED (DTT BLOCK) DTT TRIP command - Only L1 (DTT TRIP 1p. L1) DTT TRIP command - Only L2 (DTT TRIP 1p. L2) DTT TRIP command - Only L3 (DTT TRIP 1p. L3) DTT TRIP command L123 (DTT TRIP L123) >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay (>TripC1 TripRel) >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker Relay (>TripC1 Bkr.Rel) >Trip circuit superv. 2: Trip Relay (>TripC2 TripRel) >Trip circuit superv. 2: Breaker Relay (>TripC2 Bkr.Rel) >Trip circuit superv. 3: Trip Relay (>TripC3 TripRel) >Trip circuit superv. 3: Breaker Relay (>TripC3 Bkr.Rel) Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC OFF) Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.)
SP
LED BI
BO
4412
SP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
4413
SP
LED BI
BO
4414
SP
LED BI
BO
4417
SP
LED BI
BO
4421
OUT
LED
BO
51
21
4422
OUT
ON OFF ON
LED
BO
51
22
4432
OUT
LED
BO
51
32
4433
OUT
ON
LED
BO
51
33
4434
OUT
ON
LED
BO
51
34
4435
OUT
ON
LED
BO
51
35
6854
Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- SP sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED BI
BO
6855
LED BI
BO
6856
LED BI
BO
6857
LED BI
BO
6858
LED BI
BO
6859
LED BI
BO
6861
LED
BO
170
53
6865
LED
BO
170
55
6866
TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set (TripC1 ProgFAIL) TripC2 blocked: Binary input is not set (TripC2 ProgFAIL)
LED
BO
6867
LED
BO
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-59
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
6868
TripC3 blocked: Binary input is not set (TripC3 ProgFAIL) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>> (>BLOCK O/C I>>) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I> (>BLOCK O/C I>) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip (>BLOCK O/C Ip) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>> (>BLOCK O/C Ie>>) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie> (>BLOCK O/C Ie>) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Iep (>BLOCK O/C Iep) >Backup OverCurrent InstantaneousTrip (>O/C InstTRIP) >BLOCK I-STUB (>BLOCK I-STUB)
Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT sion Backup overcurrent SP
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF * *
LED
BO
7104
LED BI
BO
64
7105
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
7106
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
7107
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
7108
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
7109
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
7110
Backup overcurrent
SP
ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
64
10
7130
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
30
7131
>Enable I-STUB-Bus function (>ISTUB ENABLE) >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>>> (>BLOCK O/CIe>>>) Backup O/C is switched OFF (O/C OFF) Backup O/C is BLOCKED (O/C BLOCK) Backup O/C is ACTIVE (O/C ACTIVE) Backup O/C PICKED UP (O/C PIKKUP) Backup O/C PICKUP L1 (O/C Pickup L1) Backup O/C PICKUP L2 (O/C Pickup L2) Backup O/C PICKUP L3 (O/C Pickup L3) Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH (O/C Pickup E) Backup O/C Pickup I>> (O/C PICKUP I>>) Backup O/C Pickup I> (O/C PICKUP I>) Backup O/C Pickup Ip (O/C PICKUP Ip)
Backup overcurrent
SP
ON OFF *
LED BI
BO
64
31
7132
Backup overcurrent
SP
LED BI
BO
64
32
7151
Backup overcurrent
OUT
LED
BO
64
51
7152
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON OFF * M OFF
LED
BO
64
52
7153 7161
Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent
OUT OUT
LED LED
BO BO
64 64
53 61
1 2
7162
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
62
7163
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
63
7164
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
64
7165
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
65
7191
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
91
7192
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
92
7193
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
93
A-60
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F.No.
Description
Function
7201
O/C I-STUB Pickup (I-STUB PICKUP)
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON OFF *
LED
BO
64
101
7211
Backup O/C General TRIP command (O/C TRIP) Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1 (O/C TRIP 1p.L1) Backup O/C TRIP - Only L2 (O/C TRIP 1p.L2) Backup O/C TRIP - Only L3 (O/C TRIP 1p.L3) Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123 (O/C TRIP L123) Backup O/C TRIP I>> (O/C TRIP I>>) Backup O/C TRIP I> (O/C TRIP I>) Backup O/C TRIP Ip (O/C TRIP Ip) O/C I-STUB TRIP (I-STUB TRIP) CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L1 (CB1-TESTtrip L1) CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L2 (CB1-TESTtrip L2) CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L3 (CB1-TESTtrip L3) CB1-TEST TRIP command L123 (CB1-TESTtrip123) CB1-TEST CLOSE command (CB1TEST close) CB-TEST is in progress (CB-TEST running) CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Fault (CB-TSTstop FLT.) CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN (CB-TSTstop OPEN) CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY (CB-TSTstop NOTr) CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED (CB-TSTstop CLOS) CB-TEST was succesful (CB-TST .OK.) >Back Light on (>Light on)
Backup overcurrent
OUT
LED
BO
64
111
7212
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
112
7213
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
113
7214
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
114
7215
Backup overcurrent
OUT
ON
LED
BO
64
115
7221 7222 7223 7235 7325
Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Backup overcurrent Testing
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
* * * * ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
ON ON ON ON *
LED LED LED LED LED
BO BO BO BO BO
64 64 64 64 153
121 122 123 135 25
2 2 2 2 2 GI
7326
Testing
OUT
LED
BO
153
26
7327
Testing
OUT
LED
BO
153
27
7328
Testing
OUT
LED
BO
153
28
7329
Testing
OUT
LED
BO
153
29
7345
Testing
OUT
LED
BO
153
45
7346
Testing
OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev OUT_ Ev SP
7347
Testing
ON
7348
Testing
ON
7349
Testing
ON
7350
Testing
ON
Device
ON OFF
BI
CB1-TEST trip/close Phases L123 (CB1tst 123)
Testing
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-61
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1 (CB1tst L1) CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L2 (CB1tst L2) CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L3 (CB1tst L3) Clock Synchronization (SynchClock)
Testing
Testing
Testing
Device
IntSP_ Ev IntDP
LED
BO
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth)
Control Authorization Control Authorization Control Authorization Oscillographic Fault Records Change Group
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED
101
85
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL)
IntDP
LED
101
86
Controlmode REMOTE (ModeREMOTE) Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta)
IntDP
LED
IntSP
LED
BO
Group A (Group A)
IntSP
LED
BO
192
23
Group B (Group B)
Change Group
IntSP
LED
BO
192
24
Group C (Group C)
Change Group
IntSP
LED
BO
192
25
Group D (Group D)
Change Group
IntSP
LED
BO
192
26
Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod)
Device
IntSP
LED
BO
Stop data transmission (DataStop)
Device
IntSP
LED
BO
192
20
Test mode (Test mode)
Device
IntSP
LED
BO
192
21
Unlock data transmission via BI (UnlockDT)
Device
IntSP
A-62
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
General Interrogation GI GI GI GI GI GI GI GI
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)
Type of Information
Log-Buffers
IEC 60870-5-103
Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
A.8 Measured Values
A.8
Measured Values
F.No.
Description
Function
IEC 60870-5-103 Data Unit (ASDU)
Configurable in Matrix Control Display Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
601
I L1 (IL1 =)
Measurement
192 134
148 129 148 129 148 129
comp priv comp priv comp priv
9 9 9 9 9 9
1 1 2 2 3 3
602
I L2 (IL2 =)
Measurement
192 134
603
I L3 (IL3 =)
Measurement
192 134
610 619 620 621
3I0 (zero sequence) (3I0 =) I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) U L1-E (UL1E=)
Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement 192 134 148 129 148 129 148 129 129 129 129 comp priv comp priv comp priv priv priv priv 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 4 4 5 5 6 6 10 11 12
622
U L2-E (UL2E=)
Measurement
192 134
623
U L3-E (UL3E=)
Measurement
192 134
624 625 626 631 634 635 641
U L12 (UL12=) U L23 (UL23=) U L31 (UL31=) 3U0 (zero sequence) (3U0 =) U1 (positive sequence) (U1 =) U2 (negative sequence) (U2 =) P (active power) (P =)
Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement
134 134 134
192 134
148 129 148 129
comp priv comp priv
9 9 9 9
7 7 8 8
642
Q (reactive power) (Q =)
Measurement
192 134
643 644
Power Factor (PF =) Frequency (Freq=)
Measurement Measurement 192 134 148 129 comp priv 9 9 9 9
645 801 802
S (apparent power) (S =) Temperat. rise for warning and trip ( /trip =) Temperature rise for phase L1 ( /tripL1=)
Measurement Measurement Measurement
CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-63
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
803 804 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7742
Temperature rise for phase L2 ( /tripL2=) Temperature rise for phase L3 ( /tripL3=) PHI IL1L2 (local) ( IL1L2=) PHI IL2L3 (local) ( IL2L3=) PHI IL3L1 (local) ( IL3L1=) PHI UL1L2 (local) ( UL1L2=) PHI UL2L3 (local) ( UL2L3=) PHI UL3L1 (local) ( UL3L1=) PHI UIL1 (local) ( UIL1=) PHI UIL2 (local) ( UIL2=) PHI UIL3 (local) ( UIL3=) IDiffL1(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL1=)
Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement Differential and Restraint Current Differential and Restraint Current Differential and Restraint Current Differential and Restraint Current Differential and Restraint Current Differential and Restraint Current Differential and Restraint Current Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics 134 134 121 122 priv priv 9 9 3 8 134 134 122 122 priv priv 9 9 7 9 134 122 priv 9 1
7743
IDiffL2(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL2=)
134
122
priv
7744
IDiffL3(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL3=)
134
122
priv
7745
IRestL1(% Operational nominal current) (IRestL1=)
134
122
priv
7746
134
122
priv
7747
134
122
priv
7748
Diff3I0 (Differential current 3I0) (Diff3I0=)
7751 7752 7753 7754
Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay (PI1 TD) Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay (PI2 TD) Prot.Interface 1: Availability per min. (PI1A/m) Prot.Interface 1: Availability per hour (PI1A/h)
7755 7756
Prot.Interface 2: Availability per min. (PI2A/m) Prot.Interface 2: Availability per hour (PI2A/h)
Statistics Statistics 134 134 121 122 priv priv 9 9 6 10
7761
Relay ID of 1. relay (Relay ID)
Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1
7762
IL1(% of Operational nominal current) (IL1_opN=)
7763
Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc (I L1=)
A-64
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC
A.8 Measured Values
F.No.
Description
Function
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
7764
Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 1 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2 Measurements from relay 2
7765
7766
7767
7769
UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) (UL1_opN=)
7770
Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc (U L1=)
7771
7772
7773
7774
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-65
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
7801
7802
7803
7804
7805
7806
7807
7809
7810
7811
7812
7813
7814
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7829
7830
7831
A-66
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A.8 Measured Values
F.No.
Description
Function
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
7832
7833
7834
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7861
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
A-67
A Appendix
F.No.
Description
Function
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
7869
Measurements from relay 6 Measurements from relay 6 Measurements from relay 6 Measurements from relay 6 Measurements from relay 6 Measurements from relay 6 Statistics Statistics Statistics Statistics 134 134 134 134 121 121 121 121 priv priv priv priv 9 9 9 9 1 2 4 5
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875 7876 7877 7878
Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay rec. (PI1 TD R) Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay send (PI1 TD S) Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay rec. (PI2 TD R) Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay send (PI2 TD S)
A-68
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC CFC
Index
Index
A
Accessories A-4 Accuracy limit factor 6-10 Acknowledgement of commands 6-173 Action times (of AR) 6-80 Adaptive dead time (AR) 6-87 Alternating voltage (power supply) 10-3 Ambient temperatures 10-9 AR = automatic reclosure 6-79 Automatic reclosure 1-10, 5-4, 6-79, 10-21 Auxiliary contacts of the CB 6-60, 6-83, 6-108, 6Check Binary inputs and outputs 8-32 Communication topology 8-35 Current transformer connections 8-45 Differential protection communication 8-26 Hardware 8-10 Optical fibres 8-26 Ordering number 3-3 Power plant connections 8-27 System (SCADA) interface 8-30 Time synchronization 8-30 Voltage transformer connections 8-43 Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 6-60, 6-83, 6-108,
110, 6-118, 6-119, 6-133, 6-144, 6-153

Availability of transmission (differential protection)
6-160, 7-11, 10-27
6-110, 6-118, 6-119, 6-133, 6-144, 6-153

Circuit breaker failure protection 1-10, 6-108, 10-22 Circuit breaker position 6-143 Circuit breaker status 6-17 Circuit breaker switch-in recognition 6-142 Circuit breaker test 6-9, 6-152, 7-40, 8-53 Climatic tests 10-9 Close command transmission 6-88 Command acknowledgement 6-173 Command processing 6-168 Command sequence 6-169 Command types 6-168 Commissioning mode 7-37 Commissioning tools 6-155 Common phase initiation (breaker failure) 6-111 Communication Differential protection 6-42 SCADA 1-6, 4-3 Communication converter A-4 Communication interfaces 10-4 Communication topology (differential protection) 6-
B
Back-up overcurrent protection 6-64 Battery 9-5, 10-27, A-5 Binary inputs 1-3, 10-3 Binary inputs as sources 5-22 Binary outputs 1-3, 10-4 Binary outputs as destination 5-24 Binary outputs for switching devices 5-24 Block data transmission 7-35, 8-30 Breaker failure protection 1-10, 6-108, 10-22 Broken-wire monitoring 6-132 Buffer battery 9-5, 10-27, A-5
C
CFC 4-24, 5-31, A-5 CFC as destination 5-27 CFC as source 5-24 Changeover of setting groups 7-32, 8-6 Charge comparison 6-30
42, 8-35
Configuration Commands 5-7 Indication buffer as destination 5-27 Information 5-7 Measured values 5-7 Operator interface 5-41 Performing configuration 5-22 Scope of functions 5-2 Serial interfaces 5-40 Serial port on PC 5-40 Service interface 5-41 Configuration sheet (CFC) 5-33 Confirmation of setting values 6-3, 6-6
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Index-lxix
Index
Connecting function modules (CFC) 5-34 Connection examples A-20 Consistency check (CFC) 5-35 Construction 10-10 Contact chatter suppression 5-19, 5-29 Control 7-45 Device functions 7-28 During Operation 7-1 Messages 7-55 Switchgear 7-44 Control and numeric keys 1-4 Control commands 5-8 Copying setting groups 6-13 Copyright ii Corrective action 9-10 Cubicle mounting 2-2, 8-4 Current balance supervision 6-131 Current comparison 6-23 Current connections 6-8, 8-6, A-20 Current flow monitoring (breaker failure) 6-109 Current grading 6-61, 6-70 Current transformers Characteristics 6-9 Connection examples A-20 Errors 6-9, 6-26 Polarity setting 6-7 Rated value setting 6-7 Requirements 10-2
Display equipment position 7-45 Double point indication 5-16
E
Electrical interfaces 2-16, 2-23 Electrical tests 10-7 EMC tests 10-7, 10-8 Emergency overcurrent protection 6-64 End fault protection 6-117, 6-121, 10-22 Evaluation of measured values 6-29 Event log 7-5 Evolving faults (AR) 6-86 Exiting setting mode 6-4, 6-6 External auto-reclosure device 6-88 External local trip 1-9, 10-13
F
Fast charge comparison 6-30 Fault detection entire device 6-146 Fault messages 7-7 Fault recording 4-4, 6-161, 7-25, 10-27 Fault tracing 9-8 Flush mounting 2-2, 8-2 Forced three-pole trip 6-97 Four-line display 4-5 Front elements 1-4 Function control 6-142 Function key as source 5-23 Function modules (CFC) 5-32 Fuse 9-11
D
Data failure (differential protection) 6-46 Data fault (differential protection) 6-46 Date and time 5-44, 7-28 Dead line check (AR) 6-86 Dead time (AR) 6-79 Default display 7-14 Definite-time overcurrent protection 6-64 Deleting groups 5-22 Deleting information 5-22 Destination (of information) 5-15 Differential protection 1-9, 6-23, 10-11 Differential protection topology 6-42, 10-15 Differential protection values 6-159 DIGSI REMOTE 4 A-5 DIGSI 4 A-5 Dimensions 10-28 Direct local trip 6-54, 10-13 Direct transfer trip 6-56 Direct voltage (power supply) 10-2 Disassembling the device 8-11, 9-10 Display contrast 3-6
G
General diagrams A-6 General interrogation 7-10 General pickup 6-146 General protection data 6-15 GPSsynchronization 1-8, 6-27, 6-46, 6-47, 6-48 Graphical analysis program SIGRA A-5 Group alarms 6-137
H
Hardware monitoring 6-129 High-speed SOTF protection 1-10, 6-60, 10-21 Humidity 10-9
Index-lxx
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Index
I
IBS-tool 6-155, 7-19, 8-40 Indication buffer as destination 5-27 Information 5-14 Information properties 5-15 Initialize device 9-8 Input indication 5-7 Inrush restraint 6-28 Insulation tests 10-7 Interface cable A-5 Interface modules 9-7, A-4 Interlocking 6-170, 7-51 Internal single point indication 5-16 Interrogation of circuit-breaker ready (AR) 6-82 Intertrip 6-38, 10-13 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 6-64
Monitoring functions 1-11 Mounting brackets 8-4, A-5 Multiple auto-reclosure 6-85
N
No trip no flag 6-152 Numerical values 6-3, 6-5
O
Operating interface 1-4, 10-4 Operating messages 7-5 Operating software DIGSI A-5 Operational accuracy limit factor 6-10 Optical interfaces 2-14, 2-20 ST-connectors 2-14 Ordering code A-2 Ordering information A-2 Ordering number 3-4, A-2 Oscillographic fault records 4-4, 6-161, 7-25 Output indication 5-7, 5-15 Overcurrent protection 1-9, 6-64, 10-16 Overload protection 1-10, 6-125, 10-23 Own information 5-20
J
Jumpers on printed circuit boards 8-14
L
LCD 1-4 LED 1-4 LED as destination 5-26 Light-emitting diodes 7-2 Local trip 6-54, 10-13 Lock-out 6-149 Log out device 7-37
P
Panel flush mounting 2-2, 8-2 Panel surface mounting 2-17, 8-5 Passwords 4-33 Phase segregated initiation (breaker failure) 6-112 Pickup Differential protection 6-32 Entire device 6-146 Time overcurrent protection 6-69 Pickup characteristic (differential protection) 6-30 Plug-in connectors A-5 Plug-in terminals 2-10 Polarity of current transformers 6-7 Pole discrepancy supervision 6-118, 6-122, 10-22 Power supply 1-4, 10-2 Power supply fuse 9-11 Power system data 1 6-7 Power system data 2 6-15 Power transformer with voltage regulation 6-11 Power transformer within the protected zone 6-11,
M
Maintenance 9-5 Manual overwriting 7-48 Measured value synchronization (differential protection) 6-25 Measured value window as destination 5-27 Measured values 7-14, 10-26 Differential protection 7-15, 7-22 Graphs 7-19 Local 7-15, 7-19 Remote 6-160, 7-16, 7-20 Measured voltages 1-3 Measurement during operation 6-158 Mechanical tests 10-8 Messages 7-2 Metered value window as destination 5-27 Monitor operation 9-8
6-16, 6-28, 6-160

Preset configurations A-24 Processing of commands 6-168
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Index-lxxi
Index
Processing of messages 6-157 Protection data interface 1-4, 6-42, 10-15
R
Rack mounting 2-2, 8-4 Rated quantities of current transformers 6-7 Rated value settings Current transformers 6-7 Frequency 6-9 Power transformers 6-16 Protected lines 6-15 Voltage transformers 6-7 Read-out Measured values 7-14 Messages 7-2 Switching statistics 7-11 Reassembling the device 8-23, 9-12 Reboot of processor system 9-3 Reclaim time (of AR) 6-82 Reclosure interlocking 6-149 Reducing the configuration matrix 5-12 Remote closing 6-88 Remote measured values 6-160, 7-16, 7-20 Remote tripping 1-9, 6-38, 6-56, 6-117, 10-13 Repairs 9-10 Replacing Buffer battery 9-5 Interface modules 9-7 Power supply fuse 9-11 Reset of processor system 9-3 Resetting and setting switching statistics 7-13 Restoration (of metering values) 5-28 Restoring factory settings 6-14 Restraint Differential protection 6-26 Inrush 6-28 Retrieval Device configurations 5-27 Device data 9-9 Interface settings 5-42 Ordering number 3-4 User defined set-points 7-22 Return (of the device) 9-14 Routine checks 9-3 Run-time properties (CFC) 5-31
SCADA interface 1-4, 10-5 Scope of functions 5-2 Self-restraint 6-26, 6-27 Serial interfaces 1-4, 5-40 Service conditions 10-10 Service interface 1-4, 10-4 Set status 7-49 Setting groups Changeover 7-32, 8-6 Copying 6-13 Definition 6-13 Setting user defined set-points 7-22 Setting values Confirmation 6-3 Numerical 6-3, 6-5 Text 6-3, 6-5 Shock and vibration 10-8 Short circuit links A-4 Signal idle state 5-42 SIGRA 4 A-5 Singe point indication 5-16 Single and three-pole auto-reclosure 6-85 Single-pole auto-reclosure 6-84 Single-pole tripping 6-147 Single-pole tripping after two-phase fault 6-148 Single-stage breaker failure protection 6-120 Software monitoring 6-131 Source (of information) 5-14 Spontaneous messages 7-7, 7-11 Stabilization cf. Restraint 6-26 Standard interlocking 6-171 Start of auto-reclosure 6-80 Statistics 6-152, 6-160, 7-11, 10-27 Storage 3-12 Stub protection 6-67, 10-17 Surface mounting 2-17, 8-5 Switch-in recognition 6-142 Switching authority 7-53 Switching interlock 6-170 Switching mode 7-54 Switching statistics 7-11 Switch-on-to-fault protection 1-10, 6-60 System (SCADA) interface 7-4 System interface 1-4, 10-5
T
Tagging 7-52 Terminal block covering caps A-4 Termination RS 485 8-25 Test mode 7-37 Test operation 7-35, 8-30
S
Saving and erasing messages 7-9 Saving fault records 7-27
Index-lxxii
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Index
Text values 6-3, 6-5 Thermal differential equation 6-125 Thermal overload protection 1-10, 6-125, 10-23 Thermal time constant 6-125 Three-pole auto-reclosure 6-84 Three-pole coupling 6-18 Three-pole intertrip 6-97 Three-pole tripping 6-147 TICKS (CFC) 5-35 Time overcurrent protection 1-9, 6-64, 10-16 Time synchronization 1-4, 5-44, 8-25, 10-6 Timing master 5-44 Transferring metering values 5-28 Transmission of binary information 6-56, 10-14 Transmission of measured values (differential protection) 6-24 Triggering oscillographic recordings 8-54 Trip characteristic Differential protection 6-30 Inverse time overcurrent protection 10-18 Trip circuit supervision 6-133, 8-7 Trip command duration 6-9, 6-149 Trip log 7-7 Tripping logic Differential protection 6-32 Entire device 6-147 Time overcurrent protection 6-69 Two-stage breaker failure protection 6-119 Types of commands 6-168
U
User defined Functions (CFC) 1-10, 5-31 Information = Own information 5-20 Limit values 5-19 Measured values 5-19 Pulse metered values 7-24 Set-points 7-22
V
Vibration and shock 10-8 Viewing Fault records 7-25 Voltage balance supervision 6-132 Voltage connections 6-8, 8-6, A-22 Voltage regulation (power transformer) 6-11 Voltage transformer m.c.b. A-4 Voltage transformers 5-5 Connection examples A-22 Rated value setting 6-7 Voltages 1-3
W
Watchdog 6-131 Weak infeed 1-9
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Index-lxxiii
Index
Index-lxxiv
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Corrections To Siemens AG Dept. PTD PA D DM D13623 Berlin Germany Dear reader, printing errors can never be entirely eliminated: therefore, should you come across any when reading this manual, kindly enter them in this form together with any comments or suggestions for improvement that you may have. Corrections/Suggestions Address: Company/Dept.: From Name:
Phone no.:
Fax no.:
7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322
Subject to technical alteration
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design. Order-no.: C53000G1176C1322 Available from: LZF Frth-Bislohe Printed in Germany/Imprim en Allemagne AG 0302 0.2 FO 554 En
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

7SD52 V41R2 76 KM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7SD52 V41R2 76 KM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface Table of Contents Introduction Hardware and Connections

SIPROTEC Differential Protection 7SD52

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000G1176C1322

Applicability of this Manual

This product has been designed according to ANSI C37.90.* standards.

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Instructions and Warnings

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

1234 FUNCTION On Off

Input signal of an analogue quantity

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Iph> 2611 T Iph>> T 0

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................ v

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Return ................................................................................................................................ 9-14

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

A.6 A.7 A.8

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Output Relays userprogrammable

UL1 UL2 UL3 U4

LEDs on the front panel, userprogrammable

Display on the Front Panel

to PC radio clock PC/ modem to SCADA remote end remote end

Operator control panel

Time Synchronization Serial Service Interface

Binary inputs, programmable

Serial System Interface Protection Data Interface 1

Hardware structure of the numerical device 7SD52

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

1.1 Overall Operation

Binary Inputs and Outputs

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Protection Data Interface

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

1.4 Scope of Functions

External Direct and Remote Tripping

Transmission of Information (optional)

Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (optional)

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

Hardware and Connections

7SD52 Manual C53000G1176C1322

2 Hardware and Connections